Home

NT-series Support Tool for Windows Ver.4.7 OPERATION MANUAL

1. These manuals contain full descriptions of PT functions operations and restrictions For information on the functions and operations of the PC Operation manual for each PC When you need information about the operations functions etc of the PC refer to the operation manual for the PC advanced function unit or communication unit being used xi Description of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C xii There are two types of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the models with the suffix VL T and the models without the suffix In this manual they are written as NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C collec tively when it is not necessary to classify them However they are written sepa rately like NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C without V1 when it is necessary to classify them System program version will be indicated like NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with System Ver 3 1 if required The system programs of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 System Ver 3 1 are supplied with NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 1 It is pos sible to upgrade NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C models without VL 1 by installing this new system In this case however the functions indicated below can not be used even though other functions can be used in the same way as the models with V2 32 dot
2. NT31 NT31C NT31 V1 gt NT31C V1 NT31 V1 NT31C V1 m NT631 NT631C NT631 V1 INT631C V1 NT631 V1 NT631C V1 System Program Ver 2 0 System Program Ver 2 1 E V2 NT3 i NT631 V2 NT631C V2 System Program Ver 3 1 NT21 4 _NT31 V2 System Program Ver 3 1 It is possible to convert the screen data for the lower system program version to that for the higher system program version freely regardless of the PT models e g from V1 to V2 or from V2 to V2 System Ver3 1 However conversion towards the opposite direction is not possible ex PT mod els with V1 PT models without V1 or higher system program version lower system program version When the PT models with the large screen size are converted to those with the smaller screen size ex NT631 NT31 the elements exceeding the screen size after conversion are deleted Note that when the screen data is converted user group and grid information will be lost 462 Data Conversion Appendix A Reference The data conversions shown above indicate the conversion of entire screen data files If an element registered to the symbol manager is registered for a screen of another PT model the data is converted In this case conversion is performed in element units For data conversion in element unit
3. e Touch switch Print Screen A hard copy of the screen will be printed when the switch area is pressed Screen 7 12 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Numeral display The data in a Numeral table will be displayed Numeral Screen table Reference 1234 Disp ay 1234 Numeral display String display The string display object displays the data in a string entry Strin Screen nd Reference ABC 419 ABC Display String display Graph display The graph display object displays the data in a numeral table entry Numeral Screen table 100 Reference 410 60 0 Display Bar graph display Data Input numeral input and string input These input objects write data into a table Numeral Input field Numeral Table String Input field String Table Numeral Screen table ____ Input field 50 H IA p 50 Writing Numeral data input Data Input Thumbwheel switch The Thumbwheel Switch object stores the numeric values to a numeral table entry through transaction of Thumbwheel Switch Numeral Screen table
4. Input using extended input control code input function PT Numeral memory table Input field 1 50 gt No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 Screen Extended External numeric keys input 1 By turning ON an external switch that is connected to an external input the numeral or the control code set for the extended input function can be input to the numeral setting input field 2 Press the touch switch to which the Jj key code is allocated to write the data set at the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry For the setting of an extended input refer to 7 5 Extended I O Input Table Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input Numeral Selection using the drawing toolbar 1 Related elements and settings Touch switch control code input Objects Touch Switch gt Control code input function 172 Data Input Section 6 4 Touch switch copy setting Objects Touch Switch gt Copy setting Extended I O input table control code input Tools Table Control code function Terminology Cursor focus moving touch switch Background 1000000 00 em mo m mo momo momo omo omo Sign digit ens Input digits of maximum limit
5. 8 64 4 2 Operating the Application Manager 0 0 e 65 SECTION 5 Screen TyDeS iussa vue ty ewes ya dex vex 77 5 1 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations 78 532 Standard Screen o hak oe dena kA eS Mes ORR d ee ia Se ees 88 5 3 Continuous Overlapping Screens 89 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 0 0 0 ee cece e 92 5 5 Extended Screen 4 2 RE os SA ARE GRRE OR SSW Se ES oan AD ES 97 5 6 Occurrence History Screen 0 2 eee ee eee eee 98 5 7 Frequency History Screen nn E S cece 99 5 8 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen 99 3 9 Password Screen d 4 Lee RR DR CP as Pea PETS Se ees 100 3 10 Menu anes RYE AH Ae ew ie ed 101 3 11 Punt Format Screen c eit cet DES REIN bt DES PRAG uU DEI 101 5 12 Programming Console Screen 101 5 13 Device Monitor Screen seiss ese aa a eR er Rae eg Rp PER Re E 102 5 14 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment 102 SECTION 6 Element Operating Procedures 103 671 Common Operation eret wae ee es Se Sede eee eee Ee ER 105 6 2 Fixed Display COO ee SE Oe es 136 6 3 Alarm corset gc OR t
6. To output the status of a touch switch to an exter nal device 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Notify Bit Create a touch switch and notify the PC PLC of the status of the touch switch 2 Tools Table Extended I O Output Set the same PC PLO bit as the one set in 1 above for an extended I O output table entry PT PC PLC Ladder Y Extended table Extended Ne output Touch switch notify bit function Operations To change grids Screen Grid To copy a created graphic 1 Specify the graphic to be copied 2 Edit Copy 3 Edit Paste If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by Import Component from the File menu copy amp paste operation above is possible between the Support Tools 423 Quick Reference Operations 424 To copy the screen data Section 10 1 Operation Using the application manager select the file of the screen to be copied Edit Copy Edit Paste Specify the copy destination screen number Refer to Display the copy source screen Edit Select All Edit Copy Open the copy destination screen Edit Paste If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by Import Component from the File menu copy amp p
7. in the menu View Draw Object Undo OvMz Cut Ctrlex Copy c ii Paste 157 Align gt Delete Del Select All Cra Select Object_ Moving an overlapped element to the front or back If multiple elements are overlapped it is possible to move a selected element to the front or back of other elements This command is valid between same kinds of elements only Therefore it is not possible to change the laying order of touch switch and lamp for example 113 Common Operation Section 6 1 Undoing the operation Redoing the operation However it is effective between different shapes of fixed display since they are treated as one kind 1 Select an element Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Bring to Front or Send to Back This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the object and select Bring to Front or Send to Back in the menu Choose Bring to Front to move the selected element to the foreground and Send to Back to move it to the background Send To Back Properties Alt Enter Use as Default The Undo function will undo or cancel the last most recent action that was per formed Ten times of Undo can be performed It is invoked by Menu bar Edit Undo Draw bar Cl
8. Image library data Alarm history record data WARNING HIGH TEMP 98 04 10 16 02 WARNING HIGH PRESS 98 05 12 18 25 1 When a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history property goes ON the alarm history element reads out the alarm message from the character string memory table entry string table and records the 165 Alarm Section 6 3 Note Operation procedure message with the date time of the occurrence The recorded information is displayed when the alarm history element is displayed 2 If the operator touches the displayed alarm message the specified image li brary data is displayed The bit memory table entries to be checked are determined according to the set tings made at the individual bit memory table entries Selection using the menu bar Objects Alarm History Selection using the drawing toolbar 83 Related elements and settings Terminology Property setting 166 Bit memory table Tools Table Bit Memory Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Background Image library data Page scroll touch switch Background Line scroll touch switch General Position Indicates the display position of the alarm history The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the alarm history Size Indicates the size of the alarm history Message Length Specify the number of charact
9. Aligning objects to the top I Align Bottom Aligning objects to the bottom I Aligning objects to the left I Align Right Aligning objects to the right I Centerin a Row Aligning objects to vertically center Centerin a Column Aligning objects to horizontally center Delete o sieben Deleting an object Select All Specifying objects collectively I Edit Object Specifying editing an object Select Object Selecting an object 21 Menu Chart Section 1 5 View cet Switching tiling display for object to be tiled I Show Tag PC PLC Address Changing over the display to one with word numbers t Table Changing over the display to one with table entry numbers Image and Library Code Changing over the display to one with code numbers Show Local 1 keyboard Displaying not displaying local window 1 keyboard screen A Arae er a ry vs Displaying not displaying local window 2 Retreshise ssec d rae paras oh E rh DLE Redrawing the current screen Toolbars Standard Displaying not displaying standard tool bar Displaying not displaying drawing
10. Stores alarm messages Alarm lis Section 1 Refer to 0 1 To display alarm related information details and corrective action by touching an alarm mes sage Tools Table String Create the alarm message Tools Image Editor or Library Editor Register the alarm related information details and cor rective action Tools Table Bit Memory Allocate the PC PLC bit a character string memory table entry string table storing an alarm message and image library code to the bit memory table entry Objects Alarm List Create the alarm list and specify the bit memory table entry in the alarm area set a check mark for imagelli brary display in the alarm list properties PT PC PLC Screen Screen Temp Al PLEASE CALL No 0120 To store the ON OFF sta tus of a PC PLC bit asa history and check the his tory on the screen Tools Table Bit Memory Click the function button and choose alarm function Allocate the PC PLC bit to the bit memory table entry Then set a check mark in the History check box in the function setting After that select the message and the image library code to be displayed from the character string memory table string table and the image library table Objects Alarm History Create the alarm history PT
11. 1 A value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into a percentage val ue in the range from 0 to 100 or from 100 to 100 and displayed in the form of a bar graph Selection using the menu bar Objects Graph Bar Graph Selection using the drawing toolbar Graphs Section 6 9 Terminology Property setting General Position Size Frame Display Sign Direction Color Indicates the display position of a bar graph The reference point is at the upper left corner of the bar graph Indicates the size of a bar graph Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a bar graph Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 Specify the display direction of a bar graph Right 2 Left Up Down 1 Only Right can be set for NT11S NT11 Frame Specify the color of a bar graph frame if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of bar graph displayed for a positive value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of bar graph displayed for a negative value Can only be set for PTs with color display Valid only when Display Sign is selected White black blue red magenta green cyan
12. N Elt Enter Centralize Label Ctri L e Centralization of lamp touch switch label can be also performed by alignment function Center in a Column in Edit Object mode However the result may differ since the alignment function is performed towards the whole lamp touch switch area If Center in a Row is performed for a label in Edit Object mode the label is centralized vertically If Center in a Column is performed for a label in Edit Object mode the label is centralized horizontally By selecting multiple lamps touch switches you can center labels collectively 6 1 10 Setting Properties 118 For each element properties are set to characterize the individual elements Ba sically following two types of properties are set General General settings such as display color and character size Settings only for elements that have a specific function Settings related to data conversion such as PC PLC address and memory table address In addition to the properties shown above some elements have the following properties Light Function only for lamps and touch switches Common Operation Section 6 1 Setting of bits lamp bits for control that are used when changing display Label only for lamps and touch switches Setting of label that is displayed on lamps or touch switches e Interlock only for touch switches numeral input string input
13. Smoothing Foreground Background Em Help Cancel Note The text data display in the recipe frame will be such that any character that ex ceeds the specified column width will not be shown This affects the following fields recipe name record name and parameter name For example given a recipe entry named Long Recipe the recipe frame will show Long when the Record Name Width is set as 4 i The parameter data values display will depend on the Param Column Width setting If it is set as 2 and the parameter data is 200 then will be displayed for each digit The value will be displayed as 200 only when the column width is set greater than 2 The width of each cell in the recipe frame will be set such that the width is a multi ple of the touch switch grid size and just enough to accommodate the cell data display An example recipe frame will have the frame lines exactly over the touch switch grid The width of a 2 character wide cell will be exactly 1 touch switch grid wide Position Displays the position of the top left corner of the screen element Size Displays the size of the screen element Show Parameter Displays parameter when checked Show Serial No Displays serial number when checked 261 Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 262 No of Parameters Sets the number of parameters to display on the Screen Display Line Qty Sets the numbe
14. Create the cursor moving touch switches automatically 4 Input objective field 419 Quick Reference Touch Switches 420 To switch the objective in put field among multiple numeral setting input fields arranged in a screen using the arrow symbol and J keys Operation 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create a numeral setting input field 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Input Key Control Create the and J touch switches PT PT Screen Screen T n 1234 5678 Hu Input objective field Section 10 1 Refer to To copy between numeral memory table entries or character string memory table entries string table with one touch switch Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Create a touch switch for which the function to copy char acter strings or numeric values between character string memory table entries string table or numeral memory table entries Character string displa PT g alsplay Character string memory table String table ABC Ds oe ABC x 7 Touch switch copy function To set a constant fixed numeral including initial ization and clear using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch Fun
15. Application Information PT Model NT31C PLC Vendor Omron File Size 30740 Cancel If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the NT Transfer Utility In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on 3 in the error message dialog box While the data is being sent to the PT the progress of data transmission is indicated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on mese After data transmission is completed click on in the message box The NT Transfer Utility receives uploads the data stored in a PT and saves it in mmi file format Operation Procedure 1 Select Upload from the File menu The dialog box to specify the PT model is displayed see below This dialog box can be called also by pressing the Ctrl key Shift key U key Upload Application x Ces Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data can be transmitted to the NT Transfer Utility Click on after selecting the PT model Uploading of data is started If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the NT Transfer Utility In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on 3 in the error message dialog box If the type of PT connected and the PT model setting at the NT Transfer Util ity is different error message is displayed While the data is sent from the PT the progress of data
16. 1234 13 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Data Input Recipe The recipe object reads writes numeric values that were set using NTST from to the PC PLC when the write read touch switch is pressed Screen PC PLC 10 Recipe Alarm When a bit in a bit memory table is ON OFF the object displays the data in a string table entry and stores it in the alarm history When the displayed data of the string table is touched the object displays image library data switches the screen to the specified screen Ej Bit memory table Alarm list display Temp Alarm String table Temp Alarm Touch display Image Library table Library data Alarm history display Temp Alarm 96 11 06 16 02 Pres Alarm 97 01 06 18 25 Reference If an Indirect Reference is used with image library data data to be displayed 1 3 3 Tables 14 can be changed according to the change in the contents of numeral table The NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with System Ver 2 1 and above only Tables are areas secured in the PT to store data such as numeral data and char acter string data They are used to share data
17. A N A o N N N N N me a E m N Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix M MS DOS CP437 Windows 1508859 1 MS DOS CP437 Windows 1508859 1 B B 225 223 241 177 gt 226 063 242 063 227 063 243 063 228 063 244 063 229 063 245 063 230 181 246 24 231 063 247 063 232 063 176 233 063 149 8 235 063 063 236 063 063 237 248 238 063 239 063 240 063 561 Symbols Help Menu 74 Show Window Keyboard 85 Numbers 32 dot font 123 A About NT series Support Tool 75 Add Node 137 Alarm History 165 alarm history 437 Alarm list 159 Applicable PT 25 Application in file units 433 436 Application Manager 64 Arc 138 Arrange Icons 74 Associate With 117 Attribute 123 Available Data Communication Methods 428 B Background function 247 Backlight 79 Bar Graph 224 base screen 92 Batch selection of multiple elements 107 Bring to Front 114 Broken line Graph 228 235 Buzzer 79 C Cable 428 Cascade 74 Channel setting 127 Character String Input 179 Character String Input Touch Switch 215 Index child screen 90 91 Circle 140 Clip 333 Closing a Creation Screen 65 Color Palette Symbol 258 Colour 80 Comment 79 Comms Setting 71 Comms Setting 430 communication method 26 Communicatio
18. Color OFF Label Max No of characters Label Font Type Label Scale Label Smoothing Label At tribute Label Color ON Label Color OFF Label Color Back ground Label Off Description 519 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT11S NT600S NT620S tems NT11 ver 5 Ver4 Nee NT631C Label On x e Description Multiline 3 Label e Static La bel Type e Numeral String Dis play Label Type 1 Fix to transparent 2 Fix to black 3 Available only in V2 and later models With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above smoothing is not performed since 32 dot font is used 520 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Insert Mark e e e Insert Image ON State Code OFF State Code Indirect Reference Table Entry e Display Type e Decimal Decimal Hexadeci only mal Format Integer Decimal Zero Sup pression Display Sign e Font Type standard only e Scale 2x1 1x1 Smoothing x Attribute e Color Fore ground Color Back ground String Indirect D
19. PLC Bit Address Specify the PC PLC bit that you want to link with the Function Key Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC address or bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 305 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 7 9 Mathematical Table Mathematical table is only available for the NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above The table may contain 0 to 255 entries and each entry can be assigned a mathemati cal formula The result of each calculation can be stored in either a Numeral Table entry or a PLC address 7 9 1 Operation Procedure The mathematical table setting dialog box is displayed by following either of the operations described below Select Tools menu bar Mathematical Table Double click on Mathematical Table from application manager window 7 9 2 Supported Objects The following objects are affected or have an effect on the Mathematical Table Numeral Display Numeral Input Thumb wheel switch Bar Graph Analogue me ter Broken Line Graph Trend Graph 7 9 3 Supported PLC Addresses The supported addresses for the operand and result based on the PLC vendor type are as follows Omron wa Range 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal WR EO to EA 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal 00000 to 32767 decimal Memory Link Wod fewe OOOO O O CIO 00000 to 32767 decimal Mi
20. Set Screen Munera Ino Numeral Input 1 Used to set the data at two words DM0010 and DM0011 in the PC PLC When you touch the numeral display area numeric keys are displayed pop up window allowing you to input the data Numeral Input 2 Used to set the data at two words DM0012 and DM0013 in the PC PLC When you touch the numeral display area numeric keys are displayed pop up window allowing you to input the data Thumbwheel Used to set the data at DM0014 in the PC PLC String Display Auto Man Step Reset When you touch any of the Auto Man Step and Reset buttons the fol lowing character string is displayed in the String Display filed Auto button Automatic Man button Manual Step button Step Reset button Reset Start This is a momentary type button When you touch this button L000100 in the PC PLC goes ON If L000200 in the PC PLC goes ON the button lights Stop This is a momentary type button When you touch this button L000101 in the PC PLC goes ON If L000201 in the PC PLC goes ON the button lights Menu This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Menu Screen screen No 1 e Monitor This a screen switching button 353 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 When you touch this button the screen switches to the Monitor Screen screen No 2 Alarm This is a scr
21. play is displayed as a hexadecimal number Multiple sets of the element information described above can be displayed at the same time If they are set for a single element the information is displayed ac cording to the priority shown below PC PLC address gt Table entry number gt Image and library data code Setting for the display of element information is possible for all the editing Screens The display method for element information is set in the manner shown below 1 Select View in the menu bar then choose Show Tag The menu shows the items that can be set The items for which display is presently set are identified by a tick 2 Select any of PLC Address Table No and Image and Library Code to change whether element information should be displayed or not Each time a menu item is selected the tick mark is set or canceled alter nately When a tick mark is displayed the specified element information is displayed Inverting and flashing the objects Some of the objects have Inverse Flash and Inverse Flash attributes Inverse status is always reflected on the screen Flash display can be checked by specifying the Simulate Flash command It is possible to view Inverse Flash state also 83 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Simulate Flash is applied to each screen individually To activate this setting follow the procedure below 1 S
22. xix gt x x xleeoo vo9090 0 Recipe Table x 1 This option is available only for V2 models and above 2 This option is available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 models and above Data Transmission Download Upload NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Items Ver 5 Ver 4 Applica tion Screen X x Direct Download Access Upload Informa tion System Memory Table Screen Get Histo History ry Log Alarm History Date and Time 514 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E Image Data Library Data and Marks NT11S tems NT11 NT600S Ver 5 S NT620C NT625C Ver 4 NT620 Ver 4 NT31C NT631C Total No 224 224 4095 Code FE20 to FEFF FE20 to FEFF 0001 to OFFF Comp Mode 8 Colors Comment Total No 896 896 12288 Library Code FA20 to FAFF FB20 to FBFF FC20 to FCFF FD20 to FDFF FA20 to FAFF FB20 to FBFF FC20 to FCFF FD20 to FDFF 1000 to 3FFF Comment Total No 224 224 224 Code Memory Tables NT11S NT11 FF20 to FFFF NT600S Ver 5 FF20 to FFFF NT620C NT625C Ver 4 NT620S Ver 4
23. Correct the screen data or the program in the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Refer to 6 8 6 Copy Setting Touch Switch Corrections related to lamp touch switch label In the conversion of data between a V2 model and a non V2 model conventional model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the new functions of the lamp touch switch label added to V2 models e Difference 476 V2 models Multiple lines of label On Off Static label Numeral String Display label can be set Conventional models non V2 models Only fixed display label one line can be set Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion from conventional models to V2 models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional With a V2 model 1 Create multiple label model a fixed dis multiple label lines lines using Label proper play object is used can be set no need ty 6 5 1 Standard with a label to dis to add a fixed dis Lamps or 6 8 Touch play multiple label play object Switches and delete lines fixed display objects With a conventional With V2 models nu Select Numeral Dis model A numeral meral string display play or String Display string display object labels can be set as the Label Type in La is created on a bel Property for the lamp touch switch lamp t
24. Modifying the percentage value display position La 2 m l 1 To change the size of a displayed percentage value double click on the val The properties of a percentage value display are displayed Analogue Meter Display gt General Position x 360 ve 140 Font Type Soale ixi Equal Smoothing Sut 2 Colour Foreground Baokground Position Indicates the display position of the percentage value The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage value Font Type Specify the font of the value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Scale Specify the scale of the value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x 2 High 2 x 1 Wide 2 2 3 3 4 4 8 8 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for the value to be displayed Attribute The display attribute can not be set fixed as standard display Color Foreground Specify the color of the percentage value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the percentage value display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow When displaying a specific value reference value in an analogue meter the percentage value are calculated based on the values for 100 0 10096 233 Graphs Section 6
25. NT600S NT600S ST 12107 1 NT600S ST 1210 NT600S ST 21101 V1 NT600S ST 2110 NT620S NT620S ST 2110 NT620S ST 2120 NT620C NT620C S T1410 E NT625C NT625C S T152 SUM eo Usable Hardware Combinations Section 1 6 Communication Method Host NT Link Memory Link 1 1 1 N C200H Link NT21 ST121 NT31 ST121 NT31 ST121 NT31 ST121 NT31C ST141 NT31C ST141 V1 NT31C ST141 V2 NT631 ST211 NT631 ST211 EV1 NT631 ST211 EV2 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST141 EV1 NT631C ST141 EV2 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST151 EV1 NT631C ST151 EV2 RO Ree Q QC Ore exc Ero C OD Qe SX x x C Xx LP LE OO Usable in the default state Exclusive system program should be installed Exclusive communication I F unit is needed C200H I F unit NT LB122 Not usable Note Communication methods are indicated in the table above using the following ab breviations C200H C200H I F 27 SECTION 2 Setting Up the Support Tool When you are going to use the
26. New Window Opening another window on the same screen I Cascade Displaying cascaded windows E RU rer ore Displaying tiled windows I Arrange Icons Arranging icons I Symbol Manager Starting symbol manager Opened Window Selecting window 24 Usable Hardware Combinations Section 1 6 Help 34 Gontenls lie agen nit Gana ee Displaying table of contents of online help Search for Helpon Displaying help by search operation _ Whats Displaying help by a click I PLC Address Help Displaying PLC Address help of the specified PLC vendor About NT series Support Tool Product information 1 6 Usable Hardware Combinations The combinations of hardware that can be used are shown below The table shows the basic combinations Depending on the PT display method and system configuration they may not be usable 1 6 1 Applicable PT NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 7 can create screen data for the fol lowing PT models PT Model Model NT11S NT11S SF121 NT11 NT11 SF121 NT20S ST121 NT20S ST121 NT20S ST122 NT20S ST161 NT30 NT30 ST131 NT30C NT30C ST141 NT600S NT600S ST121 NT600S ST121 NT600S ST211 NT600S ST211 NT620S NT620S ST211 NT620S ST212 NT620C NT620C ST141 NT625C NT625C ST152 NT21 NT21 ST121 NT31 NT31 ST121
27. Tools Table Extended I O input Set the screen switching function for an extended I O input table entry PT Screen No 1 Screen No 2 w Quick Reference Extended Input Out put NT30 NT30C only To notify the PC PLC of the ON OFF status of an external switch Operation Tools Table Extended I O input Set the Notify Bit Function for an extended I O input table entry d PT PC PLC gt E Extended I O table gt E Extended input 04 Section 1 Refer to 0 1 To input a numeric value using an external switch numeric keys etc 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create a numeral setting input field 2 Tools Table Extended I O input Set the control code input function for an extended I O input table entry PT Extended inpu control code input function 8 gt 123 5 2 Numeral setting input field of numeral setting element To turn ON OFF the lamp connected to a PT ac cording to the status of a PC PLO bit Tools Table Extended I O Output Set a PC PLC bit for an extended I O output table entry PT Extended table de Extended I O output PC PLC
28. If the file name is not set the name setting dialog appears If the file name has been already determined the data will be overwritten The screen data file closes without saving the screen data Cancel The file close operation is canceled 3 3 5 Importing Reading the DOS Version Screen Data Application File The Support Tool has a function for reading screen data files created using the previous DOS version Support Tool Note that although the DOS version screen data files can be read files cannot be saved in DOS format 56 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 The procedure for reading a DOS version screen data file is File main window menu Import File Import Lookin E Ntv2 Fienme Files of type 195 m Cancel For Files of type select any of the following items according to the model of Support Tool used to create the screen data you are going to read M1S Screen data for NT11S NT11 M2S Screen data for NT20S M6S Screen data for NT600S G6S Screen data for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Click the Button after selecting the folder and specifying the file name The application manager of the read screen data will be displayed Reference For details of the PT models and types the Support Tool can create screen data for refer to 1 6 Usable Hardware Combinations 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Dat
29. date 2 The results of an error check on the setting contents are printed or displayed The contents to be printed or displayed are the same as in the error display dialog box Error List 1 1 Stenderd Screen Screen iz erpty 2 App3 E Control Ares not speci fied 12 1 10 Mathematical Report 98 12 25 9 55 1 mmy rot be possible The setting of mathematical table is printed or displayed Mathematical Table Report Mathematical Tabls onw Mathematical Table Ho Iesrriptiomn Hidd 0001 Hog 000002 000002 5 100006 AND D dggd 7 22 050007 HOR N S 8 55 11 100007 NH l 3 56 0005 A ll 00000 AND 1000007 22 Nook nag uL Anong N k D 448 12 30 5535 05 PH Printing Reports Section 12 2 12 1 11 Recipe Report The setting of Recipe table is printed or displayed Recipe Table Report Recipe Table No Name Comment No of Records No of Params Bytes Record Occupied Bytes Storage Type Start Address 0 Pizza 2 3 3 6 System 1 3 3 3 3 System Recipe Table Entry 1 Record Table No Hame Lock 1 Hawaiian 2 Cr ispy 0 Parameter Table No Name Address Words Dec Hex Sign No of Int No of Dec 0 alt 1 0 0 5 0 1 Cheese 1 0 0 0 2 Flour 1 0 0 5 0 12 2 Printing Reports This section describes the procedure fo
30. 6 6 Numeral Display The contents of a numeral memory table entry are displayed Numeral displays can be used with all models Numeral Screen memory table Display field No 1 50 No 2 No 3 No 4 No 5 1 The contents of the specified numeral memory table entry are displayed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Numeral Display Selection using the drawing toolbar n Terminology Background Display digits of maximum limit Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the numeral display field The reference point is at the upper left corner of the display field Font Type Specify the font of the numeric value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Scale Specify the scale of the numeric value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Only 1 x 1 Equal and 2x 1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for numeric values to be displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S Attribute Specify the display attribute attributes displayed depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the numeral color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green
31. Grid button 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements The operations for copying cutting and pasting elements using the clip board and also the operation for delete an element are described below Copying and pasting elements The procedure for copying an arranged element to the clip board then pasting it at another position in the screen is shown below The attributes set for the copy source element are also copied The pasted element is displayed at the upper left section of the screen The element copied to the clip board can be used for pasting as many times as desired until another element is copied or cut Pasting a copied element to anoth er screen is also possible 111 Common Operation Section 6 1 1 Select an element 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Copy This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Copy in the menu 3 Select Edit menu bar then select Paste This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select Paste in the menu Copied element is pasted at the upper left section of the screen Cut Cut ECEN Copy m Align Align i Delete Delete Brine To Front gt Brine To Front s d d Send To Back Send To Back Selec
32. Lees at Replace With PLO Addere Bee 000030 se 7 1 3 Batch Address Change Operation The set PC PLC addresses can be changed into the required addresses in a batch Since the change source can be specified as a range processing such as changing the address range DM1000 to DM01499 to the address range DM1800 to DM2299 is possible at one time Shifting in bit units is also possible Note that the batch address change operation is allowed only for displayed table entries Independent with the location of the cursor this address change will be per formed to the whole table Description of batch address change dialog box Find Channel Common 1 0 Area zl Start Range p End Range lo p Change To Channel Change Comment Find Channel Word Specify the word type of the batch change source Find Start Range Specify the start address of the source range for the batch address change Find End Range Specify the end address of the source range for batch address change The address to be set for End Range must always be larger than or equal to the address set for Start Range 270 Common Operation Section 7 1 How addresses are changed Operation procedure Change to Channel Word Specify the word type and start address after the change Addresses are changed within the number of specified points from the start ad dress number of
33. Monitor Alarm Set Screen Screen Screen button button button Monitor Screen Screen No 2 y 4 Set Screen Screen No 3 Set button Monitor button Alarm Monitor Menu Alarm Set button button button button button Alarm Screen Screen No 4 Create the Monitor Screen as overlapping screens comprising screen No 10 and screen No 11 Parent screen screen No 2 Child screen screen No 10 Child screen screen No 11 Monitor Screen Monitor Screen 350 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 9 1 2 Screen Transfer among Example Screens Menu Screen Monitor Screen How the displayed screen switches according to the button operation is shown below Monitor Screen Monitor Screen button Switches the screen to the Monitor Screen screen No 2 Set Screen button Switches the screen to the Set Screen screen No 3 Alarm Screen button Switches the screen to the Alarm Screen screen No 4 D bu Lamp Numeral D Image Lamp E Numeral Display 1 Displays the value of DM0000 in the PC PLC Numeral Display 2 Displays the value of 32 bit data the sum of DM0001 and DM0002 in the PC PLC Trend graph Displays the value of DM0003 and DMO0004 in the PC PLC in the form of a trend graph Set the 10096 0 and 100 values as shown below value for 10096 value for 0 value for 1009
34. Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the numeral setting input field The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the input field Font type Specify the font for the numerals to be input Standard Half Height Double Width Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Size Specify the size of numerals to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Not supported for NT20S Only 1 x1 Equal and 2x1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for numerals Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S Attribute Specify the display attributes attributes to be displayed depend on PT models Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the numeral color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the numeral display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table where input data is stored Display Type Only Decimal can be set for NT11S NT11 173 Data Input Section 6 4 Decimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal Hexadecimal Specify this item to display the input numeric v
35. Range Value Table Entry Display 96 10096 Table Entry Display 96 096 Table Entry Display 96 10096 Table Entry Display 96 Setting the 96 display 8 After specifying the bar graph select Edit menu bar Edit Object 9 Double click on 0 and set the properties as shown below Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing _ Attribute Color Foreground Background Adjusting the size and position of bar graph frame and display 376 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 10 Specify 0 at the upper left of the trend graph and drag it to the display position 11 Specify the bar graph frame and adjust the size and position of bar graph frame Creating bar graph 2 12 Specify all of label bar graph frame and display of Bar Graph 1 and copy and paste them onto the data creation screen 13 Move the pasted bar graph 1 element which was pasted at the upper left area in the data creation screen to the position of Bar Graph 2 14 Double click the label Bar Graph 1 which has been moved to the bar graph 2 position and modify the properties as shown below Bar Graph 2 15 Double click on the frame of bar graph 2 and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Value Table Entry Display 100 Table Entry Display 0 Table Entry Displa
36. To display the PT s sys tem menu using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch Input Key Control Create a touch switch for which the menu display is set PT PT Screen System Ok Menu Touch switch control code input function 421 Quick Reference Touch Switches To input a different string from the label Section 10 1 Operation Objects Touch Switch Input Key String Create a touch switch for which a different string from the label is set as the Input key string Character string input field Screen NT31C ST141B V2 T input NT31C Black Touch switch string input Only for NT21 NT31 631 Refer to To centralize the touch switch label Specify the touch switch to be centralized and select Draw Centralize Label To disable the touch switch input according to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit 1 Objects Touch Switch Create a touch switch for which interlock is set 2 Turn OFF the PC PLC bit to which the interlock is allocated to disable the input PT Constant Screen 123 i gg Bit Disable the input PC PLC Numeral setting input field Touch switch copy function Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Extended Input Out put NT30 NT30C only 422 To switch the displayed screen using an external switch
37. Trend Graph 1 frame screen overlapping screens max 8 frames Data logging function not used 50 lines screen data Data logging function used 8 lines screen data Lamp 256 entries screen overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Touch Switch 256 entries screen overlapping screens 1 max 1 024 entries Numeric Key Type Numeral Input 256 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is possible only on one child screen Thumb wheel SW Type NT21 26 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is pos sible only on one child screen NT31 NT31C 64 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is possible only on one child screen NT631 NT631C 256 entries screen overlapping screens Registra tion is possible only on one child screen Data Input String 256 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is possible only on one child Screen Alarm List 4 groups screen max 32 groups in overlapping screens Alarm history One group each for occurrence order and frequency Alarm History order in standard child screen Recipe 1 2 3 4 1 frame screen overlapping screens max 8 frames Limits on numbers of elements on a window keyboard screen is same as on a standard screen Limit check is not performed for overlapping screens at the Support Tool Analogue meter can be used only with the NT21 and
38. 18 Set the properties as shown below Description Switch Screen Position EET Font Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing _ Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black 19 Adjust the position of the Switch Screen character string on the data cre ation screen by dragging it 379 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 20 Specify the Switch Screen character string then select Draw menu bar Bring to Front For details of Moving an overlapped element to the front or back refer to 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements The Switch Screen character string is brought to the front of the frame Reference The positional relationship in the display of the same kind of elements such as among fixed display elements can be controlled by selecting Draw Bring to Front or Send to Back 9 3 8 Creating the Monitor Screen Parent Screen Register screens No 10 and NO 11 as child screens of screen No 2 Screen No 2 is regarded as a parent screen of overlapping screens Refer to 5 3 2 Overlap ping Screens Monitor Screen 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 In the screen type designation dialog box select the Parent Screen and click 3 In the setting dialog box of a parent screen set the displayed items as shown below Parent Screen Screen No 2 Type Overlapping 4 Specify 10 in the stand
39. Character string memory table Bit memory string table table Alarm 1 24 Alarm 2 Alarm Alarm 1 Alarm his 413 Quick Reference PC PLC Word Status Display 414 To display numeral data Operation Objects Numeral Display Create a numeral display element Section 10 1 Refer to Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Numeral Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above To display a bar graph Objects Graph Bar Graph Create a bar graph To display an analogue meter Objects gt Graph Analogue Meter Create an analogue meter To display a trend graph Objects Graph Trend Graph Create a trend graph To display a broken line graph Objects Graph Broken line Graph Create a broken line graph To display character string data Objects String Display Create a character string display element 6 7 Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which String Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above 6 5 6 8 Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Writing To turn PC PLC bits ON Objects Touch Swi
40. Code 0001 Change Image 30 NS 160 Width 16 Height 16 Change Library Foreground Background Transparent ON State M Code 0001 Change Image x 30 NS 150 Width 16 Height 16 ca Change Library Foreground X Background Transparent To display the image data or the library data only when the PC PLC bit is ON or OFF cancel the check mark in the check box of the bit status for which the image library data is not to be displayed To select the image library data to be displayed click on Change imsee Change Library and select the desired image library data from the list Code Comp Mode Size B Colo24 X 24 Circle Imp red min nofrm B Colo 40 X 40 Circle Imp OFF S B Colo 40 X 40 Circle Imp red S nof B Colo 32 X 3 Circle Imp OFF min frm 8 Colo32 X X Circle Imp yllw min frm B Co X AE Circle Imp OFF S frm Circle Imp yllw S frm Comments No B Colo24 X 24 Circle Click on the line of the desired data to display the line in reverse video and click the Button Clicking the 8 Button enables the direct display of the specified code f the data is not registered to the specified code the mark shown below is dis played on the screen Z e For the procedure for creating the image data refer to 8 1 Image Editor e For the procedure for creating the library data refer to 8 2 Library Editor 199 Numeral Display Section 6 6
41. Confirm input and focus remains at this field M Stop buzzer Cancel A system keypad is created in the manner shown below With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a system keypad cannot be created 1 Select Screen menu bar then select Properties This operation is also possible by selecting Properties after displaying the pop up edit menu which is displayed by right clicking the mouse or by double clicking the mouse with the mouse cursor placed at a position other than an element 2 Set a check mark for the system keypad in the screen properties 00000 000 Numeral input element System keypad Note A system keypad is automatically displayed when a numeral setting element or a character string setting element is created in the same CY pepe e s e pce Screen The allowable maximum number of input digits is determined by the setting for the Format and Display Sign properties Even if multiple input fields are arranged in a screen input is possible only for one numeral setting input field Therefore it is necessary to create a touch Switch cursor moving touch switch or arrow symbol touch switches that can be used to select the desired numeral setting input field If the Create Cursor Move Touch Switch check box is ON when creating the input element a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created overlapping a numeral setting in
42. Entry Text Box Numeral Table String Table Cursor Position Entry Text Box Light Function Address PC PLC Ad dress Comments Lamp Attribute On Type Light Label 1 Press Edit to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button Setting the label of Auto button 7 Auto refer to the following 1 4 Press edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Description Auto Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing D Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Click on 50 returns to touch switch property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of Auto button 5 Specify the Auto button and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 389 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 6 Adjust the size and position of Start button frame 7 Adjust the position of the label Auto by dragging it Creating the Man button 8 Copy the Auto button and paste it onto the data creation screen 9 Move the Auto button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the Man button position 10 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged
43. Mark Dist un er hp et medo d sms en dotes ac ics a sete buds 446 12 126 Screen cose eI ee eee emus 446 12 1 7 Screen Tast sec beet e erede E ete alme s 447 12 18 Table Report SMe RS RDAD y ERR 448 12 1 9 Validation II Ie 448 12 1 10 Mathematical Report 0 00 ce III 448 12 721 Recipe Report crepe SOA URSA EAD SEXY RR IG 449 12 2 Printing Reports suce ver AERE Edu v tee ee ee 449 12 2 1 Printer Setting i20 usb ER RR MERE e Egan 449 12 2 2 OutputtoaPrinter leleeeeeeeeee II eee 450 12 2 3 Output toa File RTF seeseeeeeeee RII 455 12 3 Displaying the Print Image Preview 456 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image 0 eee 457 441 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 Report Types The Support Tool outputs the following types of report Cross Reference Direct Connection Information History Report Image Library Report Mark List Screen Image Screen list Table Report Validation Report Output of these reports can be selected from the following three types use Print Preview for outputting to the display Printer Screen image setting data etc are output to a printer Rich Text Format file Various setting data etc are output to a file in RTF Display print preview Screen image settin
44. NT30 NT30C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C Buzzer Enable Specify whether or not the buzzer function is used To use the buzzer function click the check box to enter the check mark To set the buzzer function to be unused click the check box to clear the check mark To sound the buzzer only at the occurrence of an alarm specify On Error at the drop down list box If Always is selected for the buzzer function the buzzer sounds at following events Occurrence of an error at PT Reception of a command from the host Screen switching Setting of the buzzer function is valid for the following PT models NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C buzzer function settings are made by system menu operation at the PT and setting from the Support Tool is not allowed Buzzer Key Input Click the check box of Key Input to enter the check mark if you want to sound the buzzer in response to the input from a touch switch or the extended I O unit Clear the check mark if the key input sound is not to be used Printer for PT A printer can be connected to PT device for printing screen data if required You have to specify the type of printer being used by the application for the following PT models 49 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 50 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Printer Select one of the Supporte
45. Select New in the Translation Menu of the Application window 501 Translation Support Utility Translation Setting 502 Appendix D The New Translation Dialog box will appear and the user can edit the Language Character Set and Output File Name New Translation x Language E eran Character Set Cancel Output File Name c Program Files Omron app_German mmi Browse Latin ISO 8859 1 CP437 Help Language Displays all the available Languages You may input a language that is not in the list Character Set The Code Page will be disabled if the specified language type is the same as the pre defined language type However if you have input your own language in the edit box the character set combo box will be enabled and the default will be Latin Output File Name Modify the path or name of the output file of the translated language This option is used to display translation settings such as language character set database file source file output file name of the source file and the target file You can also use this setting to change the output file name of the target lan guage Select Settings in the Translation Menu of the Application window The Source Translation Setting Dialog box will be displayed Translation Settings x Language ro Character Set C ancel Latin SO 8859 1 0P437 Help Source File Files Om
46. Set the numeral table entry number to be referenced in the table entry number field It is possible to display a numeral table entry so that you can select the desired Fixed Display Section 6 2 table entry number from it To display a numeral table entry follow the procedure below 1 Click on direct button in the property setting dialog box to display the numeral table selection dialog box at the right side of the table entry number after checking the In Copy Settings Change Address Edit gt Set c3 col Goto Entry Close Reference 2 If the number of the desired numeral table entry is not found in the list scroll the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click on Gsto Entry to open the entry input dialog box Be fW __ Input the number of the desired numeral table entry and click on pom 3 Select the desired numeral table entry to be referenced The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box How to create the image data is described in 8 1 Image Editor 6 2 10 Mark Mark data is displayed Mark data can be used for all models With NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S mark data can be inserted only in string Since the Support Tool does not support mark data of 32 x 32 dots a
47. Simulate Flash mentioned above can be used at the same time To specify whether or not to inverse the screen color or to print screen grid dotted line for Screen Image printing without changing the screen property In Screen Image Attribute of Screen Image printing set Inverse Print Hide Screen Grid or Show Dotted Line Frame items as required To display time Objects Numeral Display Specify numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 253 time data to display the time To set the time to be displayed 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Set the time to be written to a numeral memory table entry 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Copy the memory table contents where the time is set to numeral memory table entries No 254 and No 255 time setting To display the display history of PT The display history is displayed by calling the following screen numbers NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C No 1997 No 1998 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C No 9001 No 9002 The history is displayed in either the order of occurrence or order of frequency To sound a buzzer at the occurrence of an error Tools PT Configuration Set On Error for the buzzer setting 425 Quick Reference To upload download the screen data without modifying the contents Operation Use the NT Transfer Utility sup
48. String Display not supported Label will be set to Default Correction related to the lamp label ON state If a lamp s label is converted between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to difference of label color set ting Difference New models ON state and OFF state can be set independently Background color is transparent only Conventional models Only foreground color can be set OFF ON Flash has same color Background color can be set as de sired 477 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model Background Any Foreground Any With a new model Background Trans parent OFF State Same as Foreground ON State Black This will lead to an invis ible label when the lamp is ON Select the lamp and choose Edit Edit Object and double click at the label Then change the label ON state color to different color Correction related to the maximum and minimum limit check function for numeral input In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeral that can be input Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error messag
49. This setting is valid when None or Notify Bit is set for Function The Cancel Backlight OFF function is automatically provided for the screen switching function and the control code input function Function Specify the input terminal function e None e Switch Screen e Notify Bit Input Key Control When Switch Screen is specified Cancel Help Screen No 1 Screen No Specify the screen No of the screen to which the screen should be switched when the input terminal goes ON 293 Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 When Notify Bit is specified Cancel Backlight Off Function Notify Bit 4 Help J Notify Bit Address Channel sadi cre Jed E Table Notify Bit Address Specify the PC PLC bit where the event of the input terminal going ON is noti fied Comments Specify a comment for a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters When Input Key Control is specified Extended I O Input Setting FF Cancel Backlight Cancel Help Control Key Select the control code to be input when the input terminal goes ON from the list Inputs numeral 0 in a data input field Inputs numeral 1 in a data input field Inputs numeral 2 in a data input field Inputs numeral 3 in a data input field Inputs numeral 4 in a data input field Inputs numeral 5 in a data input field Inputs numeral 6 in a data input field Inputs numeral 7 in a
50. and cew refer to 7 1 Common Operation Note that Referense Cannot be used if bit memory table entry is displayed by the operation using an element property 7 4 2 Related Elements Alarm list element Object Alarm List Alarm history element Object Alarm History 287 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 7 4 3 Description of Bit Memory Table Fields Table x Numeral String Comments Bit Memory No Function Description Address O Commer Function Edit gt Set Goto Entry Close Reference Search Help As the reference of bit memory table setting please refer to 6 3 Alarm When converting the bit memory table from NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C to NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C the function setting is not the same with before converting To adjust the setting of this bit memory table please refer to Data Conversion Bit memory conversion in Appendix A Items set to use the screen switching function To use the screen switching function follow the procedure below 1 Input PLC address directly on a PLC address field on a bit memory table entry or click on Set and input PLC address on a PLC address dia log Refer to Word setting for an element on page 127 Input comment if required 2 Click on cz 3 Select Switch Screen from function combo box Setting items for screen switching function are displa
51. Click the Button after selecting the language to be exported A file save dialog box similar to the file open dialog box will prompt you to enter a filename Once a valid filename is specified the export operation begins The cursor will change to a wait cursor for the duration of this operation When the operation is finished an export completion message box will be displayed Import Use Import to import string data from an MS Excel worksheet xls Select Import in the Translation Menu of the Application window The Open File dialog box will be displayed Enter the name of the file to the im ported The Import Translation Dialog box will be displayed Import x Current Text Source Translation Status Excel Text Import Text 9d TT Language Displays all the available target languages present in the Translation Table and that have corresponding valid target language data in Excel All items are se lected as the default but are disabled once the import operation starts 504 Translation Support Utility Appendix D Status Displays the status of each target language that is being imported Current Text Source Displays the source text present in the Translation Table Current Text Translation Displays the translated text for the target language existing in the Translation Table Excel Text Displays the translated text for the target language that can be imported from Micro
52. Creating the Stop button 8 Copy the Start button and paste it on the data creation screen 9 Move the Start button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the Stop button position 10 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Settings Address PC PLC Address L0000101 Comments Stop Switch Light Function Address PC PLC Address L0000201 Comments Stop lamp Label Label 1 Press Edit to set the label Creating the character string display field String Display String Display Stop String Display Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the String Display character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left cor ner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description String Display Position Standard 1 x 2 High Smoothing a Attribute Standard White Black Font Type Scale Color Foreground Background 4 Adjust the position of the String Display on the data creation screen by dragging it 387 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the character string display field b Select Objects menu bar String Display 6 Click the m
53. Fixed Display Text 12 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor positioned at the Data 1 display position 13 Set Data 1 in the character string setting Fixed Display Text dialog box 14 Adjust the Data 1 display position 15 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Polyline Refer to 6 2 7 Polyline 16 Drag the mouse cursor in the range from the start point to the end point where a line is to be displayed to the left of Data 1 Set the line property as shown below General Une Sii 17 Specify the drawn line and adjust the length and the position of the line 18 Create the example display of Data 2 in the same manner Set the line property as shown below General Line Style Dot dash 370 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 9 3 7 Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 2 Here create screen No 11 as child screen 2 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 At the new standard screen dialog box set 11 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 11 Attributes Screen No 11 History in Title Monitor Screen 2 Comment Monitor Screen 2 Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacin
54. Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix M Keycode Conversion Rules When you are using the European keyboard please read the following keycode conversion rules Also PT Hardware NT21 and NT31 V1 NT31C V1 NT631 V1 NT631C V1 and above are supporting both Keycodes ISO8859 1 and CP437 This section will describe the rule for Keycode conversion between ISO8859 1 amp Latin US CP437 and vice versa Above mentioned will be explained in following order 1 aana a C3 22 YS 4 When the conversion will be performed Basic Policy of the Conversion How to Convert Conversion Rule from 1508859 1 to CP437 Conversion Rule from CP437 to ISO8859 1 When the conversion will be performed The conversion will take place during the following cases 1 By changing to a different keycode from an existing application From Tools PT Configuration This is only for the NT21 and the NT31 V1 31C V1 631 V1 631C V1 and above 2 Drag Drop of Symbols with different keycode 3 Key input Old amp new models from 1508859 1 437 Basic Policy Basic Policy If the Character is not found in the Target keycode 063 is chosen How to convert Only for the NT21 and the NT31 631 series with V1 and above The way to convert the Keycode will be as follows 1 Go Tools PT Configuration gt 2 Change the Font Type 3 Press OK Button Comm ant
55. Orientation Set the direction of printing paper Portrait Specify this item if the data is to be printed parallel to the short er dimension of the paper Landscape Specify this item if the data is to be printed parallel to the longer dimension of the paper Properties Used to set the printer properties Since the setting differs according to the printer refer to the manual of the printer driver Reference If the print setup print or print preview has been executed under condition that no printer driver has been installed there may be times Support Tool does not move correctly 12 2 2 Output to a Printer To output the report to the printer follow the procedure shown below 1 Select File menu bar Print The Reports dialog box is displayed page 451 2 Set Printer for Destination 3 To specify the printing position of the paper click on Set Margins button The Set Margins dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click The Reports dialog box is displayed again 4 To set the header footer click on the Header Footer button The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click ex The Reports dialog box is displayed again b After completing the setting click on in the Reports dialog box The Print dialog box is displayed page 455 Set the print range and the number of copies 450
56. Reference If the cursor move touch switch has been created independently later than a cer tain element this touch switch has to be associated with this element in order to specify the data input field when the touch switch has been pressed on PT For NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C it is possible to associate the control code input touch switches page and line scroll touch switches with the alarm list and history It is also possible to disassociate the touch switch with the elements f the Auto Arrange check box is ticked the Setting property of cursor move touch switch the cursor move touch switch will always be moved together with the attached data input object So it is not possible to move or resize the cursor move touch switch itself independently To move or resize it first of all cancel the Auto Arrange check box then move or resize it For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the touch switch of trend graph and alarm list history is built into each element It is only possible to change the location of the touch switch Size cannot be changed 1 Select the touch switch that you want to associate Select only one ele ment The touch switches that can be associated to an element should be page or line scroll touch switch 2 Select Associate With from the Draw menu Dialog box that prompts the user to select the elements to be associated will be displayed 3 Choose the data input
57. T Numeral Input Settings String Input I Thumbwheel Switch Recipe System Memory Extended Input Table Extended I O Output Table Comment Table F key input Notify Table Mathematical Table Recipe Table Symbol Data Direct Access Screen N Screen 2 Temp Alarm 10 00 Alarm display Screen 1 Graph display ABCD Fixed ee display UE String Display 41516 Data input numeral input Lamp SV 1 2 3 display Menu RV SP 0 C Touch switch Fixed Numeral display text display What Is Support Tol Section 1 1 Main Differences of V4 1 Model number Specifications NT ZJCAT1 EV4 For IBM PC AT or compatible media CD ROM Following changes are made for NT series Support Tool for Windows to improve operational efficiency and to support new functions added for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 System Ver 3 1 Refer to Appendix G New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C new system program support System program for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C has been upgraded to Ver 3 1 so the following functions are now supported New system program is supplied with Support Tool Ver 4 1 e CS1 memory area support e Recipes In
58. ceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 1024 by XXX Create the numeral display fields within the limit Error Messages Appendix J Error Message Corrective Action The total number of Numeral Table refer ences exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Reduce the number of reference elements The total number of String Table refer ences exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the elements within the maximum limit The total number of touch switches ex ceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the touch switches within the limit The total number of Trend graph frame exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 8 by XXX Create the trend graphs within the limit The total number of Trend Graph line with Data Logging is ON exceeds the ap plication limit of 8 by YYY Create the trend graphs within the limit The total number of vertices in Broken Line Graphs exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the broken line graphs within the limit This screen does not support XXX It is discarded Correct the system initialization screen so that the same screen as before the con version is created using fixed display ele ments excluding image library data Touch Switch function type is not sup ported It is discarded Correct the position of the control touch Switch as needed Touch switch does not ha
59. ground Charac ter Color Back ground Thumb wheel Color Frame 1 Small amp Medium only 2 Medium only 8 Available only in V2 and later models 523 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Data Thumb Input wheel Col Thumb or Fore wheel ground 1 Switch Thumb wheel Col or Back ground 2 Interlock Polyline Rectangle Polygon Circle Arc Sector Color Foreground Maximum Character Font Type Scale Smoothing Attribute Color Foreground Color Back ground Insert Mark Insert Image Pattern Color Foreground Color Back ground Color Border 1 Foreground color for switch 2 Background color for switch 3 This option will be available for corresponding V2 and later models in NT30 620 compatible mode 4 Available only in V2 and later models 5 This option is available in NT20S compatible mode 524 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 It NT600S NT620S ems Ver 5 Ver 4 Mark Code x x x e e Fixed Display Scale e e Attribute x x x e e e Smooth ing Color Fore ground
60. ment call out the I O comment table entry from the property dialog box of the element To set an I O comment for multiple PC PLC addresses select the Tools menu then select Table To edit an address or a comment display the setting dialog box by clicking on Set or edit directly on a table entry For the operation procedure for Reference s and ts referto 7 1 Common Operation Note that _ Reteence cannot be used if it is displayed by the operation using an element property 297 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 7 7 2 Description of I O Comment Table Fields Displaying specified word and bit I O comment Editing and adding I O comment Numeral String VO Comments Bit Memory PLC Bit Address VO Comment Ref VO Comments FE Lem He Displaying I O comment for specified word and bit The items displayed on an I O comment table are shown below Address Displays the PC PLC word or bit address that corresponds to the comment Comments Displays the comment for the PC PLC word or bit Reference Displays if the word is already used or not Yes Already used in an element or a table No Not used If the indication is Yes you can check where the word in question is used by click ing on Reference For details of the Referense button refer to 7 1 1 Reference Operation For details of the amp s button refer to 7 1 2 S
61. menu Edit Object or right click Edit Object and specify the touch switch Setting for the image library data display field 16 Specify the alarm list and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 17 Specify the image data display field displayed at the central left part of the alarm list and adjust the size and the position Resize the size to 200 x 200 dots Creating the Menu button Monitor button and Set button Menu Copying and pasting the buttons from screen No 3 1 Copy the Switch Screen character string frame rectangle Menu but ton Monitor button and Alarm button collectively and paste them onto Screen No 4 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string frame rectan gle and buttons Modifying to the Set button 3 Double click the Alarm button and change the properties as shown be low Settings Screen No 3 Label Label Set 1 Press Edit to set the label 396 9 3 11 Creating the Alarm List Library Data Section 9 3 Creating the Sample Data Create the library data that is displayed at the occurrence of an alarm Create the library data for FA20 to FA25 For the library data creation procedure refer to 8 2 Library Editor FA20 FA21 Set line 1 Set line 2 FA22 Check torque Screw FA23 FA24 Detection near Check pipe and entry Confirm valve safety before re starting the l
62. put field By simply pressing this input field the cursor is moved Data input field ro m 4 Cursor moving touch switch Numeric keys Data Input Section 6 4 If a touch switch on input field No 2 is pressed the No 2 input field becomes the objective field for data input The data input using the numeric keys is stored in input field No 2 A cursor moving touch switch is created using the dialog box that is displayed when creating a numeral input element The properties for the cursor moving touch switch can be set in the same manner as for a standard touch switch How the properties for a touch switch are set is shown below For details of Settings refer to 6 8 Touch Switches General Settings Light Function Size Width r Position x 8 Y 141 99 Height 39 Label Settings Frame Shape Standar E Show ON State Colour Frame ES Transparent OFF General Settings tient Function Function Use Windows Keyboard Screen r Screen No locali Keyboard 4 y 43 Window Position Bottom Left X o X 5 Replace Local Window IV Auto Arrange This Touch Switch is not attached to any data input object If a check mark is set for Use Window Keyboard Screen in the cursor moving touch switch setting properties it is possible to display the specified window k
63. Alarm messages are displayed in the order of occur rence frequency Order of Occurrence Alarm messages are displayed in the order of occur rence from the oldest record or from the newest re cord The order in which the alarm messages are displayed depends on the system memory setting Info Type If the setting is so made to display the date time of alarm occurrence the dis play format of the date time is specified for this item The setting for this item is invalid if the date time is not displayed with an alarm message Y M D h m 14 digits M D h m 11 digits h m 5 digits Using a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch you can scroll messages in units of a line or a page within the alarm list display area With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C to display a line scroll touch switch and or a page scroll touch switch set a check mark in the check box for the line scroll touch switch and or a page scroll touch switch in the Prop erty setting dialog box With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are a part of an alarm list element Therefore they cannot be modified as a touch switch They can be moved only when the alarm list is modified To move a line scroll touch switch or a page scroll touch switch click the desired touch switch while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key Edit Object from the Edit menu or pop up menu and In
64. Bit memory table Extended I O output table Numeral table String table F Key input notify table Operation using the mouse 1 1 Specify the table data icon Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Click right button of the mouse on the selected table data icon then select Copy 3 Click right button of the mouse on the desired table in the table data icon dis play area of another Support Tool then select Paste 4 In the confirmation dialog box click the Button If a check box for Overwrite PLC Address appeared in the dialog box make the setting as required Operation using the mouse 2 68 1 Specify the table data icon Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Operation using the menu 2 3 Drag the selected table data icon to the table data icon display area of anoth er Support Tool In the confirmation dialog box click the Button If a check box for Overwrite PLC Address appeared in the dialog box make the setting as required Specify the table data icon Multiple tables can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key Select Copy from Edit in the menu bar Then select Paste from Edit in the menu bar of another Support Tool In the confirmation di
65. Color Back ground Image Display Fixed Display Indirect Refer ence Color Fore ground Color Back ground Library Display Fixed Display Indirect Refer ence Touch Function Switch Notify Bit Function Switch Screen Function Input Key Control Function Input Key Window Keyboard Function Input Key String Function Copy Setting 1 For NT20S NT600S smoothing is always ON 2 Can be used only NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with system Ver 2 1 and above 525 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Items Ver 5 Ver 4 Touch Function Switch Cursor e Move Function Screen Print Function Window Move PC PLC Bit Ad dress Shape Standard Shape Shadow Shape 3 Dimen sion Shape Rectan gle Shape Circle Shape Polygon Shape Sector Frame Color Frame Show ON State Lamp At tribute Color ON Color OFF Max No of Char acters Label Font Type Label Scale Label Smooth ing 1 Can be used only for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above 526 Tables of Functions of PT
66. If you want to change the folder select the desired folder from the Existing Folders or directly input the folder name If a folder that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the specified folder is automatically made s Support Tool Setup Select Program Folder Please select a program folder Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below You may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Program Folders YOMRON NTST4 7E Existing Folders OMRON as Online Services Silicon Motion Control Programs StartUp xi InstallShield lt Back Cancel After specifying the folder click the 2 Installation of the specified programs is implemented files are copied During program installation the progress of the processing is indicated as a percentage After step 10 a dialog to select restart non restart will come out for Win dows 95 98 NT and ME NT series Support Tool Setup InstallShield Wizard Complete The InstallShield Wizard has successfully installed NTST4 7E Before you can use the program you must restart your computer No will restart my computer later Remove any disks from their drives and then click Finish to complete setup Restarting your machine is recommended because important information is registered after the restart If you select to restart later the registration wil
67. In the following explanation the NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C are referred to as conventional models and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C including models with V1 V1 System Ver 2 1 and V2 System Ver 3 1 are referred to as new models Direct Access Types Direct access type can be set at PLC Vendor of PT Type PT Configuration Changing PLC vendor of existing screen data changes direct access type The direct access types that can be handled by the Support Tool Ver 3 01 are as follows OMRON This is a direct access for OMRON PLCs Memory Link This is a simulative direct access with which host and PT execute sending or receiving of command via RS 232C 422A communication Mitsubishi A This is a direct access for Mitsubishi A series PLC Mitsubishi FX This is a direct access for Mitsubishi FX series PLC Memory Link Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi FX can be set only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above Reference The direct access version that be handled by the Support Tool is NT20S NT600S Ver 5 Conventional models other than NT20S NT600S Ver 4 New models No direct access versions Depending on the direct access types exclusive system program may be needed for the PT hardware For details of the system programs and system installer refer to Appendix B System Installer Operation To create screen data to b
68. NT20 30 620 compatible mode NT31 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode and NT631 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode 1 After specifying the Value field move the cursor to the position where the image data is to be inserted 2 Click the Insert Image Button The Image Table dialog box is displayed Specify the image data in the list of image data Click the Button The code of the specified image data is inserted into the Value field The image data itself is not displayed here Numeral Se VO Comments Bat Memory Numeral Sting Vo Comments Memory Insert Image button OK button m Screen Screen abedefghi jk abodeligfghi jk T Image data list You can first insert this image to a string and then register the image data afterward Use the image editor to create image data Reference By clicking the new Button an image code with no data can be added to the 285 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 7 3 6 Inserting Library Data into a Character String To insert library data into an initial value follow the steps described below Note that insertion of library data into a character string is possible only with the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT20 30 620 compatible mode NT31 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode and NT631 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode 1 After specifying the Value field move the cur
69. NT620C NT625C 1 to 1899 2000 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 1 to 3999 Screen No In a standard screen all elements can be used However the usable elements depend on the PT models Standard screens are also used for creating child screens of continuous overlap ping screens 5 3 Continuous Overlapping Screens Reference Continuous overlapping screens are multiple screens that are switched consec utively or overlapped for display Screens that are switched consecutively are called continuous screens and screens that overlap multiple screens are called overlapping screens Screen numbers that can be used for continuous overlapping screens are same as those for standard screens Note that continuous screens cannot be used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C To obtain the same effect as con tinuous screens with these PT models use touch switches that are assigned the switch screen function The application manager displays a parent screen as a folder as shown below and child screens are displayed when the folder is opened For NT11S NT11 parent screen setting is not possible E Screen 1718992000 Standard Fas lm 5 Gas J 1900 1979 Windows Keyboard 1980 1996 Extended C3 1997 1998 History Log 1999 Hast Connect C3 Table 89 Continuous Overlapping Screens Section 5 3 5 3 1 Continuous Screens 90 Two to eight screens can be registered for one continuou
70. Printing Reports Section 12 2 6 After completing the setting click on in the Print dialog box Printing starts M Edit View Draw Objects Screen New Save Cubs Prriec Simus Dels A punter User intervention 0 documents wahing Tipa LaserJet d Whee 59 00804 Comment Part to file Pret range Copies Number cf copies Pace BM ER ies C Reports dialog box Report Type Oros Destination Printer m Cancel Header Footer M Header Set Margins Footer Help In this dialog box the contents of printing and printing header footer are set Report Type Select the type of report to be printed Destination Specify the destination of report output Printer report is output to the printer Rich Text Format report is output to a file Header Specify this item to attach the header The contents of header can be specified by pressing Footer Specify this item to attach the footer The contents of footer can be specified by pressing Specification of Screen Image If you specify Screen Image for Report Type a dialog for setting and select ing the range and print items is displayed Screen Image Attribute hoide Inverse Print I Hide Screen Grid Penis Show Dotted Line Frame
71. Right Line Scroll Touch Switch Up Left Down Right Cancel Apply Help Read Write Touch Switch Read Show Read touch switch Write Show Write touch switch Page Scroll Touch Switch Up Show Page Scroll Up touch switch 2 Down Show Page Scroll Down touch switch Left Show Page Scroll Left touch switch 44 Right Show Page Scroll Right touch switch Line Scroll Touch Switch Up Show Line Scroll Up touch switch Down Show Line Scroll Down touch switch v Left Show Line Scroll Left touch switch 4 Right Show Line Scroll Righttouch switch Lad Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock 264 SECTION 7 Memory Table Setting Memory tables are areas in a PT for storing numeric value data and character string data These areas are used for communicat ing with PC PLC Tal Common Operation ure WU EMPIRE ee a UTE 266 7 1 1 Reference Operation sleseeeeeeee Ie 266 T 1 2 Search Operation occ ne eL be REGALE RERUM ER es ace os 267 7 1 3 Batch Address Change Operation 270 7 1 4 i cde ded Ra e ee RR Ros 272 7 1 5 Increment Setting Operation 274 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number 275 7 2 Numeral Memory Table iier oae eee eee 275 7 2 1 Operation Procedure s cs
72. String Refer to 6 4 2 Character String Input 221 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance e When a cursor moving touch switch is pressed input is enabled at the speci fied or associated input field Settings shown below can be made only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Local 2 Window Position Replace Local Window f a cursor moving touch switch is created automatically at the creation of a nu meral character string input element the touch switch is created overlapping the input field e t is possible to specify a window keyboard for a cursor moving touch switch This specification enables display of the specified window keyboard by sim ply pressing the cursor moving touch switch Numeral character string input field Numeral character string input field Touch switches assigned with cursor movement and window open functions When the touch switch at the top is pressed Specified window opens Reference A cursor moving touch switch can be created automatically when creating a numeral input element or a character string input element f Auto Arrange is selected it is not possible to move a touch switch indepen dently To move a touch switch independently deselect this attribute e If a cursor moving touch switch is created later independently the touch switch can be associated with a specific input field Specify the touch switch and
73. Switch to the previous screen based on the record of screen history Alarm Switch Screen NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Usage of Alarm Setting for Bit Memory Table Function Setting Switch Screen Screen No No function For reg istering only allocated bits and securing them None To display alarm only Alarm To display alarm and switch to a specified screen in response to the pressing of alarm message As desired To switch to a speci fied screen at the same time the bit goes ON Switch screen As desired When converting the bit memory table from the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C to the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C the function setting is not the same with before converting To adjust the setting of this bit memory table please refer to Data Conversion Bit memory conversion in Appendix A Alarm Section 6 3 6 3 2 Alarm History The Settings of an alarm list element are used to specify the range of bit memory table entries that are subject to the check The check objective range is determined by setting the start bit memory table entry number and the number of bit memory table entries The maximum allow able number of bit memory table entries varies according to the PT model and the setting of the number of bit memory table entries The range of bit memory table entry numbers is displayed in parentheses in the dialog
74. Touch Switch func tion type is not sup ported It is dis carded W The associated touch switches of the alarm has been discarded and com ponent touch switches have been created No error message will be generated Adjust the position of control touch switches if necessary Refer to 6 3 Alarm Adjust the position of control touch switches if necessary Refer to 6 3 Alarm With a conventional model an alarm list history is registered for a screen with out control touch switches With a new model control touch switches in the ini tial state are auto matically created W The associated touch switches of the alarm has been discarded and com ponent touch switches have been created If control touch switches are not necessary de lete them by setting in the alarm list history properties Refer to 6 3 Alarm With a new model touch switches are automatically created by register ing alarm list history to the symbol man ager Correction of touch switch position and size With a conventional model all control touch switches are deleted IW The component Touch Switches of the Alarm List will be discarded Create the control touch Switches using the touch Switch control code input function and associate them with the alarm list history Refer to 6 8 5 Control Code Input Touch Switches Touch switch size differs between NT20S NT600S NT620
75. Touch Switches 2 oss eer RAE WERE USE HUS ea WE eet 207 6 8 1 Input Notify Touch Switch lleleleeeeee eee 214 6 8 2 Switch Screen Touch Switch 0 0 eee eee 215 6 8 3 Character String Input Touch Switch 215 6 8 4 Pop up Window Keyboard Function Touch Switch 216 6 8 5 Control Code Input Touch Switches 217 6 8 6 Setting Touch Switch 0 eee eee 220 6 8 7 Cursor Moving Touch Switch 00 0 cee ce eee 221 6 8 8 Window Moving Touch Switch 0 0 eee ee ee 223 6 8 9 Print Screen Touch Switch 1 2 0 0 ee cece eee 223 103 104 6 9 Graphs 6 10 6 11 629 1 Bat Graph s noce ee de da ere 6 0 2 Analogue Meter 1 ko ead e ERG MEE REPRE MEER E MERE S Egan 6 9 3 Broken line Graph coeso retad terad e 6 9 4 opp gym ES DS eec E Ede Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation 6 10 1 Screen Configuration of Symbol Manager 6 10 2 Basic Symbol Manager Operation 6 10 3 Operating the Symbol 6 10 4 Pasting a Symbol to Screen 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol Recipe Screen Element 6 11 1 Recipe Sc
76. Zoom In Zoom Out Close Specify this item to output the data to the printer Specify this item to display the next page Specify this item to display the previous page Specify this item to display two pages on the screen Specify this item to enlarge the displayed image After moving the Q cursor to the desired position click the mouse and the specified area is enlarged Cancels the enlarged display mode Closes the print preview screen 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image It is possible to output only the data creation screen in the bit map format The output data can be used in other applications to be displayed or printed The operation procedure for outputting the screen image is shown below 1 Display the screen to be output at the front 2 Select Screen menu bar Copy to Image The file name setting dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the folder and file name and click on ss Save As 21x Tools Connect W Swen New CtritW J NT series Support Tool Delete Ctrl E Save as type Image documents bmp Cancel Open as read only 457 Outputting the Screen Image Section 12 4 Reference The screen image of the editing screen is saved in the bit map file without change If you want to save an inverted image to a file select File Print and set Screen Image for Report Type and Rich Text Format for Destination set a check mark
77. alternate short and long lines alternate two short and long lines Attribute Standard Flash Flash can be set only for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow For line type the following four choices are provided Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash The line type is specified using the line style property When creating a polyline draw a continuous line first then add vertices in the edit operation to change the drawn continuous line into the desired broken line Vertices can be set at up to 254 positions To add a vertex follow the steps shown below 1 Draw a continuous line m 2 After locating the cursor at a position where a vertex is to be added right click the mouse and select Add Node in the pop up menu Cut uu Copy Paste Delete Bring To Front Send To Back Nod Edi Select Object Properties Use As Default 137 Fixed Display Section 6 2 6 2 2 Arc Operation procedure Terminology 3 Drag the vertex to the desired position Cursor position Cut Copy Y Delete H Bring To Front Send To Back a s Remove Node En Object executed Properties Use As Default To remove a vertex locate the cursor on the vertex to be removed a
78. be displayed for you to generate MMI files for the particular languages After you exit the Translation Support Utility the screen will return to the Windows Screen 511 Appendix E Tables of Functions of PT Models The functions that can be set by the Support Tool are summarized below for each PT model Some functions can be set at the PT side even if they cannot be set by the Support Tool PLC Vendor PT Configuration PT Type NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 OMRON e e e Mitsubishi x x x x A Mitsubishi Fx AH Memory Link A GE A Siemens A 8 NT11S NT600S NT620S ems NT11 Ver 5 Ver4 Modicon x t Can be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above 2 Can be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 3 Can be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 4 Can be set only with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and V2 System Setting PT Configuration NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Initial Screen Enable Buzzer Key Input Resume Function Backlight OFF 128 Number of Table 512 Entries Numeral 1000 Table 2000 Number 128 of Table 256 Entries String 1000 Table 2000 x xIx xix x e xx
79. cyan yellow 200 Numeral Display Section 6 6 When this property page is called from Label of Standard Lamp or Touch Switch when Label Type is Numeral Display Foreground ON OFF color can be speci fied ON Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the numeral display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Reference Indirect Reference If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number for indirect reference specify this item Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 Table Entry Specify the address of the numeral memory table entry to be referred to If Indirect Reference is not selected the contents of this numeral memory table entry are displayed and if Indirect Reference is selected the contents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are displayed Display Type Only Decimal can be set for NT11S NT11 Decimal Specify
80. displayed for the added line A maximum of 50 lines can be created To delete a line select the line to be deleted with the Settings and click on Delete lne The specified line is deleted The following four types of line are provided for displaying trend graphs Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash Set the line type with the Style property The intervals between points of a trend graph in the time axis is specified by Drawing Width The width is set as a number of dots The time intervals in which the drawing value of a trend graph is read is speci fied by Sampling Cycle Set the interval in units of 0 1 seconds for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and 0 5 seconds for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The latest drawing value of a trend graph can be displayed as a percentage value In the default setting a percentage value is displayed Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set with the Display line property Check mark set A percentage value is displayed Check mark not set A percentage value is not displayed If the setting is for a percentage value to be displayed the size and display position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the manner shown below For detail of the element edit function refer to page 110 1 Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag percentage value to change the display position
81. e o x x x x Number of Table 256 Entries Bit Memory 1000 Table e x x e x x x x x 513 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Printer Printer for PT Mode History Alarm Setting Screen Numeral Display 1 Setting is not possible from the Support Tool Set these items at the PT 2 For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C set the screen saver function at the PT The Backlight OFF function is only for turning off the screen or the backlight If the screen saver function is used it is possible to display a string at a desired position in predetermined intervals in addition to turning off the screen backlight Report NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Items Ver 5 Ver 4 Cross Reference Direct Connection In formation History Report Image Library Report Mark List Screen Image Screen List Table Report Validation Report x eee gt gt Mathematical Report
82. file cannot be opened 4 Export Import successful unsuccessful as appropriate Translation Support Utility Appendix D 5 When closing the source MMI file or exiting the Translation Support Utility if you have made some translation changes that have not been committed to MMI files corresponding to target languages the Translation Support Utility will prompt you to generate the corresponding MMI for the target languages if any Refer to the message below Translation Support U tility X 2 Generate MMI for various Languages No Cancel 6 If the current source MMI file is newer than the one registered in the MDB database or it has contents that are different from the MDB database file then it prompts you whether to update the database with the information of the current file or not Refer to the message below Translation Support Utility xc Application has changes do you want to update the database wo 7 File save error when saving translated target MMI files Refer to the follow ing image for a sample Translation Support Utility x The following files could not be saved Languages output Filename 1 German C VApp1 ohi German mmi French CA pp1 ohi French mmi Help System Function Translation Scope and Policy 1 Only the following kinds of label translation are supported subject to avail ability in the target PT model of the source application
83. green cyan yellow For some elements Transparent may be specified to display a transparent background Note that Transparent can be specified only for the elements shown below e Background of fixed display text Either foreground or background has to be other color 119 Common Operation Section 6 1 e Background of label of lamps and touch switches OFF state color of lamps and touch switches Background of element tiling patterns Setting the color for text and numerals For text and numerals color setting is possible both for characters and back ground Foreground Specify the color of text and numerals Background Specify the color for the background of text and numerals If Transparent is specified elements arranged behind text is visible CDE a Background color Ys Foreground color Setting the color for graphics For a graphic the foreground color can be set Foreground Specify the color of lines in a graphic and the color of the graphic itself when the attribute is set to Inverse FE Foreground color Reference Color setting is possible only for color type PT However with NT30 the NT21 and NT31 setting of white and black and trans parent is possible Setting the tiling color When tiling a graphic color designation is possible for the foreground back ground and border Foreground Specify the tiling color Background Specify the background color of til
84. menu bar Edit Object 6 Adjust the size and position of 0 key frame 7 Drag 0 to adjust the display position Reference The explanation above described the procedure for creating numeric keys using the touch switch control code input function The Support Tool however pro vides numeric keys as symbol data and you do not have to create numeric keys by using the pre registered numeric keys in the menu bar select Window gt Symbol Manager and drag the numeric keys appropriate for your PT model from the symbol file Supplmnt sbl The selected numeric keys can be regis tered on the screen For details refer to 6 10 Hegistering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Creating other keys 8 Copy the 0 key paste it onto the screen and move the pasted 0 key to the position of the key to be created 1 to J Once the 0 is copied to the clipboard it remains on the clipboard until the next cut or copy operation 9 Set the properties as shown below for the individual keys UU SEC CETUR CU me poe H Ho H abel ue e 1637 1587 SER WL SK a Ems j Label Label 4 8 H CLR B lt FFFA gt Control Key E Label Label 2 lt FFFF gt 1 Press edit button to set the label 2 Press Ese button to set the label It is also possible to select a mark by pressing inset mak button
85. or such other period expressed in writing by Seller Seller disclaims all other warranties express or implied b Limitations SELLER MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION EXPRESS OR IMPLIED ABOUT NON INFRINGEMENT MERCHANTABIL ITY OR FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE GOODS BUYER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT IT ALONE HAS DETERMINED THAT THE GOODS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR INTENDED USE Seller further disclaims all warranties and responsibility of any type for claims or expenses based on infringement by the Goods or other wise of any intellectual property right c Buyer Remedy Seller s sole obliga tion hereunder shall be to replace in the form originally shipped with Buyer responsible for labor charges for removal or replacement thereof the non complying Good or at Seller s election to repay or credit Buyer an amount equal to the purchase price of the Good provided that in no event shall Seller be responsible for warranty repair indemnity or any other claims or expenses regarding the Goods unless Seller s analysis confirms that the Goods were properly handled stored installed and maintained and not subject to contami nation abuse misuse or inappropriate modification Return of any goods by Buyer must be approved in writing by Seller before shipment Seller shall not be liable for the suitability or unsuitability or the results from the use of Goods in combination with any electrical or electronic components circuits
86. screen Notify Bit Cursor Move and Print Screen functions are not available NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 Switch Screen e Input Key Control Input Key Window Keyboard Input Key String Copy setting NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above Notify Bit Switch Screen Input Key Control Input Key Window Keyboard Input Key String Copy setting Window Move Print Screen Changing the size and the position of pop up display frame The procedure for changing the size and the position of a pop up display frame is shown below 1 Click the mouse on a dotted line of the pop up display frame Green W handles appear around the pop up display frame Arrows in the handle indicates the direction to be resized 2 The frame size can be changed by dragging a handle When the mouse cursor is positioned on a handle the shape of the mouse cursor changes as shown below according to the handle position When the mouse cursor is dragged in this state the pop up display frame size chan ges in the direction the arrow symbol of the mouse cursor indicates Right left handle Up down handle Apex handle 1 it b a 94 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 3 To move the pop up frame drag any position in the dotted lines other than handles When the mouse cursor is positioned on dotted lines other than at handles the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below The pop up
87. string table using touch switches and a bar code reader Touch switches must be allocated character strings or a key code control code input and character string input function or the copy function beforehand 179 Data Input Section 6 4 Input using touch switches character string input function control code input function Character string memory table String table Input field 4 No 1 key NO ABC F ABC No 2 Dia Writing No 3 DEF GHI No 4 NM 4 A No 5 Touch switches Screen 1 Set the character strings to be input using the character string input function to touch switches 2 Press a touch switch to set the label that is set for the touch switch into the character string input field 3 Press the touch switch for which the J key code is allocated by the control code input function to write the character string set at the input field to the specified character string memory table entry string table Input using touch switches copy function control code input function Character string memory Screen table String table Input field 4 key No 1 ABC gt ABC No 2 SET No 3 Copying the ABC No 4 set data No 5 1 Copy the preset data character string memory table entry string table to the input field using the copy function allocated to a t
88. the corresponding mes sage is displayed Read the message and click At the PT press the touch switch that acknowledges the end of system pro gram installation The PT re starts by the installed system program Appendix C NT Transfer Utility With the Support Tool on CD ROM the NT Transfer Utility which can transmit screen data to a PT easily on site is supplied It can download the screen data file in mmi format to a PT and can save the screen data uploaded from a PT to a file in mmi format Screen data file in mmi format is less than 1 44 Mbytes So it is useful when you save the file in a floppy disk to transfer the data to and from a PT on site Reference NT Transfer Utility is a software that is exclusively used for downloading uploading the screen data without modifying the contents NT Transfer Utility can handle only the file in mmi format It is not possible to read or write the file in onw format which is a standard format of the Support Tool Therefore please be sure to save the screen data in mmi format when you use the NT Transfer Utility For details of the restriction of the file types and mmi format refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File NT Transfer utility downloads uploads the screen data in the application unit It is not possible to perform individual transmission such as the transmission in the screen unit Equipment necessary for using the NT Transfer Utility The f
89. the property dialog to copy the I O comment set to the PLC address of the lamp bit as a label The property setting dialog for both Static and On Off Static labels is shown be low For Static the label can be set by changing description of Off Label group box of Standard Lamp Label dialog box On Label group box will be disabled For On Off Static the Off Label and the On Label can be set by changing descrip tion of corresponding text boxes Standard Lamp lt Label gt x Off Label Description Off Label On Label Description On Label Set Lines Line Spacing 2 4 Font Type st andard Smoothing Scale fist Equal Attribute Standard M Colour OFF 3 BEEEN Background Transparent Cancel Apply Help Off Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is OFF On Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is ON Line Spacing Determines the space between two lines in both the Off De scription and the On Description Insert New Line Inserts a new line character in the description to bring the fol lowing characters to the next line On the Label Description edit box the new line character will be shown as lt n gt 194 Lamps Section 6 5 Guidance Reference Set Lines Displays the On Off Description Settings dialog box This dialog is for
90. yel low Settings Only 100 can be set for NT11S NT11 Value Table Entry Display 96 10096 Table Entry Value Specify the table entry number of a numeral memory table entry to be displayed Specify whether or not a percentage value is displayed on the Screen Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 100 value 225 Graphs Section 6 9 Guidance 226 096 Table Entry Specify this item if a 096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 0 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 096 value 10096 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a constant set the val ue to be taken for 100 value Note that specification for 10096 is valid only when Display Sign is selected Setting of 0 and 100 is not possible with NT20S and NT600S The following types of bar graph element are provided 0 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Left Direction Up Direction Down 100 to 100 display Direction Right El Dir
91. 1 2 9 3 1 9 3 2 9 3 3 9 3 4 9 3 5 9 3 6 9 3 7 9 3 8 9 3 9 9 3 10 9 3 11 9 3 12 9 3 13 9 3 14 Screen Configuration Screen Transfer among Example Screens 9 2 Operation Flow 9 3 Creating the Sample Data Starting up the Support Tool llsesleleeeeeee e File New Setting the PT Configuration Setting Memory Tables Creating the Menu Screen oori crna tresn i ecen e eee eee Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 1 Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 2 Creating the Monitor Screen Parent Screen Creating the Set Screen Creating the Alarm Screen 0 0 0 eee cece eee Creating the Alarm List Library Data Creating the Pop up Display Numeric Keys Saving the Created Data Downloading to the PT 350 350 351 355 358 358 358 358 359 361 365 371 380 380 392 397 398 402 402 349 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 9 1 Example Screen Configuration The configuration and screen transfer of the example screens you are going to create are described below 9 1 1 Screen Configuration Menu Screen Screen No 1 Menu Screen PT power ON
92. 100 Table Entry 100 Value 096 Table Entry 0 Val ue 100 Table Entry 10096 Value Line Style Line Color Direction Display Sign Frame Color Frame Color Range Color Range 529 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Table Entry 100 Table Entry 100 Value 0 Table Entry 0 Val ue 100 Table Entry 100 Value Direction Display Sign Frame Color Frame Color Range Color Range Display 96 Display 96 Font Type Display 96 Scale Display 96 Smooth ing Display 96 Col or Fore ground Display 96 Col or Back ground 530 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S ems NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Frame X x x x Color x x x x Frame Display Sign Direction Meter Shape Meter Direction Meter Type Meter Width Rate Scale Distance Scale Length No of Di vision Scale Color Color Fore ground Colo
93. 1009 value are set as indicated below refer ence values are displayed in the trend graph as shown below 100 C Table Entry o 11 C Value 3000 NEM rii C Table Entry 5 n E Value 0 C Table Entry 5 Value 2000 yam Value referred to 3000 10096 v Value referred to 1500 5096 Value referred to 0 0 Value referred to 1000 50 ES Value referred to 2000 1009 6 246 Graphs Section 6 9 If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address 100 PCT Numeral memory VUE table 0 1 Table Entry 3 2 3000 Value ps 3 0 4 2000 100 e 5 Table Entry fs C Value Fo The data logging function and background function can be used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Data logging function The data logging function records the values used for display at a PT Usually the data collected in sampling for display in a trend graph are not re corded internally If you use the data logging function the data are logged and can be displayed by tracing them back The data logging function can be executed
94. 134 Section 6 1 Common Operation Operation procedure Property setting Conversion responding object will be enabled disabled according to the interlock bit when the PLC Address set on the Interlock address is ON the touch switch thumb wheel numeral input string input will work if the address is OFF the touch switch thumbwheel numeral input string input will not respond to the touches The interlock functionality is supported for the PT models NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above The temporary input object does not support interlock function Select the Interlock tab on the property sheet of the screen object that supports Interlock Touch Switch x General Settings Light Function Label Interlock Address J Cancel Apply Help This property page will be the same for all other supported objects Only the tion will be changed according to the object Interlock Check Box To ON OFF interlock By default it is OFF PLC Bit Address To specify the bit address associated with Interlock Interlock is ON if this bit is set OFF otherwise IO Comment Comment for the address specified For conversions due to cut copy paste drag drop of screen elements with inter lock settings e g Touch Switch Thumbwheel Numeral Input and String Input 135 Fixed Display Section 6 2 from the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above to previous PT models interlock settings will be discard
95. 221 500 280 Switch Screen No 3 Yes Light White Transparent White Whit Standard White Transparent Set Screen 3 Dimenson 181 221 500 280 265 235 181 801 500 360 Switch Screen No 4 3 Dimension 181 301 500 360 Yes Light White Transparent While White 250 315 Standard White Transparent Alarm Screen Standard 2 2 Ves Standard 2x2 Standard 2x2 HJ 12 1 7 Screen List Monitor Screen Fixed Display Rectangle Square Start Pos End FrGnd Colour BkGnd 10 10 204 59 White Fixed Display Text Mark Position Font Scale Transparent Smoothing Attribute Colour Attribute Standard __ Colour BkGnd Colour Description 20 15 Standard 2 2 Yes Touch Switch Display Standard White Transparent Menu Screen Start Pos End Pos Function Frame Disp SPos Disp EPos Attr Pos Lamp Bit On State Attribute Frame Col Off Col On Col Flash Col Label Pos Font Scale _ Smoothing Attribute Label Fg Col Label Bg Col Label On Col Label 181 141 500 200 Switch Screen No 2 3 Dimension 181 141 500 200 No Light White Transparent White White 230 155 Standard 2x2 Yes Standard White Transparent Monitor Screen 181 221 500 280 Switch Screen No 3 Yes Light White Transparent White White 265 235 Standard 2x2 Yes Standard White Transparent Set Screen 181 301 500 360 Switch Screen No 4 S Dimension 181 301 500 360 Yes Light Standard White White Tra
96. 507 Translation Support Utility Translation Management 508 Appendix D e Static label of Touch Switch and Standard Lamp where Touch Switch is standalone screen object and not any component such as touch switch in Alarm Trend Graph in NT21 NT31 631 models On Off static label of Touch Switch and Standard Lamp where Touch Switch is a standalone screen object and not any component such as touch switch in Alarm Trend Graph in NT21 NT31 631 models Fixed Display Text Input Key String label String Table Initial value Screen History Title Names of Recipe Table Entries their records name only and parameters name only Static label of Touch Switches internal to Recipe Screen Element 2 Multiple language translation is supported by Translation Support Utility 3 Automatic generation of translated MMI file Default target filename with country language name as qualifier is used to store the translated MMI file 4 Contents not translated are displayed as blank and changes will not be tracked 5 The length limit of label is constrained by the target PT Model 6 Code that corresponds to an image mark library entry will be displayed in its original form ASCII representation i e it will not be tagged by the NTST opening token and closing token 7 Touch Switch and Standard Lamp with dynamic labels only or those with no label at all will not be extracted for translation 8 Th
97. 9 When the following values are specified 100 096 10096 in an analogue meter with semi circle shape Analogue b lt Table Er il Tabla Enty z C Th Ev 3 Fa uha f Veb 1008 Value referred to 3000 Value referred to 1500 Value referred to 0 Value referred to 1000 i s 1 00 Value referred to 2000 a If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address Analogue Meter 1074 bx Tux f Tabb Ening 5 Table Erir zl Tale Ey E C Vals memi C Lo 234 Graphs Section 6 9 6 9 3 Broken line Graph The present values of several consecutive numeral memory table entries are displayed in the form of a broken line graph Broken line graph Numeral memory table 1 The values of consecutive memory table entries are converted into percent age values in the range from 0 to 100 or from 100 to 100 and dis played in the form of a broken line graph Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects gt Graph Broken line Graph Selection using the drawing toolbar i Terminology Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of a broken lin
98. 90 turn operations are possible for the graphic in the range specifying frame Image Editor Section 8 1 To modify the graphic select Edit menu bar Rotate or Flip then specify the desired modification method ES view Tools Connect Window Help Undo Ctri Z Redo Cut Paste Ctr Delete Del Copy To Paste From Clip Rotate or Flip Rotate Left Rotate Right Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical n Flip Horizontal Flip Vertical Rotate Left Rotate Right Cutting copying deleting graphics You can cut copy paste and delete the created graphic Cut copy and delete operations are valid for the graphic in the range specifying frame To call the desired operation select Edit in the menu bar then specify Cut Copy Paste or Delete or right click the mouse then specify Cut Copy or Paste Edit wWiew Tools Conne Undo Cuts the graphic in the range specifying Redo Cte lE Y frame and stores it in the clip board Copy Copies the graphic in the range specifying Poste Cr V frame onto the clip board Delete Del Es Pastes the graphic in the clip board to the specified position Deletes the graphic in the range specifying Clip frame Rotate or Flip gt Copy To Paste From Properties Reference Image data that is cut or copied on one image editor window can be pasted onto the other image e
99. A Clock Data Area will be defined consisting of 4 words starting at the specified address Comments Set a comment for the address used to define the Clock Data Area Up to 16 character can be input PLC Address Dialog Box This dialog box is set in the same way as the one for the PT configuration dialog box 3 3 2 Reading the Existing Screen Data Application File To read the screen data that is saved in a file select File gt Open from the main window menu 53 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Reference The dialog box for the applicable folder file name and files of type exist appears to specify them Open BEI Lookin C3 Screen J e es BDOsLINEC M NTR onw jt 620download onw iae B20ITC LINE onw Filename 600sLINEC MONTR onw Files of type JINTST Application onw Cancel After specifying the folder file name and file type click on the Open button The application manager of the read out screen data is displayed With NT series Support Tool for Windows following screen data files can be han dled onw mmi For details refer to File Types in page 55 Recent used files will be shown at the bottom of File menu Recent four files can be opened from this command NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 7 can read the screen data that is created using an earlier version of NT series Support Tool t is not poss
100. Alarm button v Create parent screen screen No 10 11 as child screens Uu Operation Flow Section 9 2 Creating the Set Screen Create new screen screen No 3 v Set properties for screen No 3 v Create screen title Create numeral input field of Numeral Input 1 v Create numeral input field of Numeral Input 2 v Create TRhumbwheel he eld Create Start and Stop buttons v Create String Display display field v Create Auto button is c Create Man button ied Create Step button IE Create Reset button v Create Menu button v Create Monitor button v Create Alarm button v 357 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the Alarm Screen Create new screen screen No 4 v Set properties for screen No 4 v Create screen title v Create alarm list v Create Menu button v Create Set button v Create Monitor button v Create alarm library data v Create numeric keys for pop up window display v Save the created data v Download the created data 9 3 Creating the Sample Data This section describes the operational procedure and data creation procedure step by step according to the o
101. By pressing cursor keys 1 on keyboard the contents of the code can be checked in the preview window one by one 3 Select the code of the library data to be displayed The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box Indirect Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced With indirect reference the contents for the specified numeral table entry are treated as a library code and the corresponding library data is displayed This is useful when you want to change the library data to be displayed according to the statuses Set the storage type of numeral table entry to be referenced by indirect reference to Binary and specify the value library code to be stored in hexadeci mal since the library code is in hexadecimal Numeral Table Library Display 1048 1049 remp COE 1049 104A 104B Set the numeral table entry number to be referenced in the table entry number field It is possible to display a numeral table entry so that you can select the desired c 157 Fixed Display Section 6 2 table entry number from it To display a numeral table entry follow the procedure below 1 Click on __ at the right side of the table entry number after checking the In direct button in the property setting dialog box to display the numeral table selection dialog box 2 D00012 2000014 20000216 200018 2000020 2 D00022 2 D00024 2
102. Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the character string display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the character string memory table entry string table where input data is to be stored Length Specify the number of characters to be input Focus Frame Specify whether or not the frame which indicates the data input objective is displayed Focus Attribute Specify how the input data is displayed before it is confirmed Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash 1 Setting is not possible when a string input is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock Guidance When a character string input element is specified the dialog box is displayed to set whether the cursor moving touch switch is automatically created or not Note Itis possible to create a touch switch to which a cursor moving key is allocated later String Input Greate Cursor Move Touch Switch Cancel Help Create Cursor Move Touch Switch Specify whether or not a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created Each time a string input object is newly created a string table entry number where input data is stored is automatically set a
103. Difference Control touch switches are annexed to alarm lists his tories correction is possible only with regard to the position of the touch switches When converted to the NT21 NT31 631 V2 or later models NT20 30 620 compatible mode ON associated touch switches will keep other properties as itis only thing is that it cannot be edited separately New models Conventional models Control touch switches can be handled as indepen dent touch switches to be associated with alarm lists histories Their position size label etc can be edited as desired When converted to the NT21 NT31 631 V2 models 20 30 620 mode on associated touch switches will keep other properties as it is only thing is that it can not be edited separately Switches 474 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model an alarm list history is registered for a screen and touch switches are associated with it With a new model the associated touch switches are deleted and the control touch switches in the ini tial state are auto matically created When converted to the NT21 NT31 631 V2 or lat er models NT20 30 620 com patible mode on associated touch switches will be converted to control touch switches oth er properties re maining the same E
104. Each time the Tab key is pressed elements are selected one by one according to the display order If no elements are selected the element of the highest display order will be in selected status when the Tab key is pressed When the Shift Tab keys are pressed together the selection order will be re versed Selecting an element from among overlapped elements 106 Reference When elements are overlapped complicatedly use the element selection func tion below When you click on the overlapped elements the element with the smallest area enclosing the point of selection will be selected However if you want to select an element A that is enclosed by other element like in the figure below it is not pos sible to select element A if the element enclosing it is already selected In this case click any position on the screen where no element is registered to cancel the selected status and then select element A I Element A a H Common Operation Section 6 1 For a complicated screen element select operation will be easier if a filter func tion refer to 5 1 4 Filter Function is used to limit the display objects 1 Select the element at the foremost position 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Select Object This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and choose Select Object in the menu The list of element
105. Example Modifying the percentage value display position 244 Graphs Section 6 9 Reference 3 To change the size of a displayed percentage value double click on the val ue The properties of the percentage value display are displayed Trend Graph lt Display gt x General Position x 150 NND Font Type Standar Scale 1 1 Equa I Smoothing iru emm EE M Forearound p Background Cancel ply Help Position Indicates the display position of the percentage value The reference point is at the upper left corner of the percentage value Font Type Specify the font of a value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Scale Specify the scale of a value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2 2 3 3 4x4 8x8 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for a value to be displayed Attribute The display attribute cannot be set fixed as standard display Color Foreground Specify the color of the percentage value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the percentage value display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow A percentage value and other elements cannot be overlapped on a trend graph With a trend graph a percentag
106. Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen 99 Image 197 Image data 7 Image Display 150 Image Library Report 445 564 Input Notify Touch Switch 214 K L Keyboard Screens 92 Lamp 192 Library data 7 Library Display 155 Load Keyboard Screen 79 80 Local window 95 Mark Editor 342 Mark List 446 Marks 7 MEMLINK 129 Menu Chart 21 Meter Shape 229 Mitsubishi A 129 Mitsubishi Fx 130 Modify Parent 92 Modifying an Element 110 More windows 74 Moving an overlapped element to the front or back 113 N New 65 New Window 73 No of Division 230 Numeral Display 200 Numeral Input 171 O Objects which can be used 8 Occurrence History Screen 98 OMRON 128 Opening a Data Creation Screen 65 Opening Closing and moving a window 96 Output to a File RTF 455 Output to a Printer 450 Outputting the Screen Image 457 Overlapping Screens 91 Index P parent screen 90 91 Paste 112 PC PLC address 127 Polygon 142 Polyline 136 pop up window function 92 Pop up Window Keyboard Touch Switch 216 Print 450 Print Preview 456 Print Screen Touch Switch 223 Print Setup 449 Printing information on errors occurring during data conver sion 453 Properties 67 78 119 PT Configuration 67 R Receiving Uploading Data 434 Receiving Uploading the History Record 437 Rectangle 139 Refresh 84 Re
107. Installer Sample Collection If you select a Sample Collection data such as Parts Collection Image Library Sample Collection ISO symbol data and Sample Screen Data are installed NT Transfer Utility should be installed separately Please refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Utility NT Translation Support Utility should be installed separately Refer to Appen dix D Translation Support Utility Data can be added afterward by executing the installation program again In this case when an item that is already installed is specified it will not be over written Also the data will not be uninstalled even if its check mark was set to OFF when the data is already installed To delete data that has already been installed delete all data by uninstalling it and then perform installation again 2 2 1 Basic Installation Operation lt Back Cancel Browse 2 2 2 Procedure Reference The buttons that are displayed during the course of installation are shown below Clicking on this button confirms the settings in the displayed window and displays the next window Clicking on this button cancels the settings in the displayed window and displays the previous window Clicking on this button causes the window to close The status set in the window is canceled This button stops Support Tool installation if it is clicked at the program install win dow In this case a message is displayed requesting confirmation
108. Make a right click on the icon of the table data to be edited then select Modify 1 Select Tools in the menu bar then choose Table Image Editor Library Editor or Mark Editor 2 If Table is chosen select the tab of the table to be edited 4 2 9 Copying an Entire Table Caution Reference An entire table can be copied between the screen data files of the same PT mod el by starting up two Support Tools Copying of tables screens and objects between two screen data files involves addition or overwriting of PLC address Please check the movement sufficiently before shifting to actual operation To start up second Support Tool select Import Component from File menu For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool e f the whole table is copied all the contents in the specified table are copied collectively For method to copy the individual data in a table refer to Section 7 Memory Table Setting or Section 8 Editing Graphic Data A check box for Overwrite PLC Address appears when copying the whole table indicated below If this check box is checked PLC address setting is over written If not checked settings such as initial value will be overwritten but the PLC address setting remains the same Note that I O comments are not copied even if the PLC address is overwritten If you need the same I O comment copy the I O comment
109. Model Specify the type of PT to be connected When you are using the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C refer to the table below to select the correct model according to the system program being installed PT Model System Program Ver 1 01 Ver 2 0 Ver 2 1 Ver 3 1 NT31 NTS1 NT31 V1 NT31 V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31 V2 System Ver 3 1 NT31C NT31C NT831C V1 NT31C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31C V2 System Ver 3 1 NT631 NT631 NT631 V1 NT631 V1 System Ver 2 1 NT631 V2 System Ver 3 1 NT631C NT631C NT631C V1 NT631C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT631C V2 System Ver 3 1 Reference To check the system program version installed in a PT display the following Screens Version display at the upper right position of PT system menu PT system menu Expansion mode Version display The following PT Models are also available NT31 V2 e NT31C V2 NT631 V2 46 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 MT631C V2 NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode For NT21 and NT31 631 V2 Models the NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode check box will be enabled By setting this option the Control Area will take 4 memory address instead of 5 and Notify Area will take 3 memory address instead of 2 This allows straight conversion for NT30 620 PT models to NT31 631 or NT20S models to NT21 without the need to modify the PLC program PLC Vendor Specify the usable direct access t
110. Modify the properties as shown below meeting the individual lamps Lamp 3 Lamp 4 Lamp 5 Light Functions Address PC PLC Bit Address L0000002 L0000003 L0000004 I O Comment Lamp 3 Lamp 4 Lamp 5 Pale Lamp 31 Press Edit to set the label If the O comment is already set for the PLC address of light function clicking ON Vo Comments button copies the label Creating the image library lamp image data 4 Lamp 41 Create two kinds of image data for the image library lamp Create the image data for codes FE20 and FE21 FE20 FE21 1 Lamp 51 373 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 1 Select Tools menu bar Image Editor 2 Click on new 3 Set the properties as shown below and click on Code Size 64 48 Mode 8 Colors Compression 4 Click on Open to create the image data For the image data creation procedure refer to 8 1 Image Editor 5 Close the image editor 6 Call the image editor again and create the image data for code FE21 Reference It is possible to copy image data FE20 onto FE21 on the image table so that it can be reused Follow the procedure below a Click on we and register the code FE21 Properties other than code need not be changed b Specify FE20 and select Copy by pressing edit button c Specify FE21 and select Paste by pre
111. NT31 631 series sys tem programs System programs of conventional models such as NT30 620 series are also included in a CD ROM Recipe Not supported This is available only for NT31 631 V2 System Ver 3 1 Brightness and Con trast Adjustment Screen Not supported This is available only for NT31 631 V2 System Ver 3 1 Multi Edit Mode Not supported Available only for recipe object Appendix H New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 6 Some User Interface functionality was added to Ver 4 6 to improve operation efficiency NT21 Model support Not supported NT21 is supported Pick I O comment from CX Server database Only CSV file import is available When defining PLC address for each object the I O name in CX Server point data is picked up as the PT I O comment When editing the I O comment table multiple I O names in CX Server point data are imported as PT I O comments Property Dialog for Grouped Object Grouped object attributes cannot be edited unless ungrouped Grouped object attributes can be edited to select each property for grouped object Preview in Symbol manager Each symbol cannot be previewed on the Symbol Manager Symbol Manager shows preview and object tree view Symbols created before V4 6 can be read on V4 6 screen edit to add preview data then can be previewed after copying then back to the Symbol Manager Copying Image Library M
112. NT31 ST121 NT31 ST121 NT31C NT31C ST141 NT31C ST141 NT20S NT631 NT631 ST211 NT631 ST211L NT631 ST211 2 NT631C NT631C ST141 NT631C ST141 NT631C ST141 V2 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST151 NT631C ST151 V2 1 NT20S and NT600S have direct access Ver 4 and Ver 5 NT series Support Tool for Windows supports only Ver 5 25 Usable Hardware Combinations Section 1 6 1 6 2 Communication Method for Each PT Model 26 Usable communication method differs depending on the PT types Also some PT can use communication method that is not supported in their ini tial state by installing the exclusive system programs For details refer to Ap pendix B System Installer Operation Communication Method Host Link NT Link 1 1 1 N C200H Mitsu bishi A Mitsu bishi FX NT11S SF121 O 1 1 only x x NT11 SF 1210 1 O 1 1 only x x NT20S ST 1210 V1 eo O NT20S ST 1210 O NT20S ST 122 V1 eo x x NT20S ST 161LJ EV3 eo NT30 NT30 ST13 10 NT30C NT30C ST 1410 E
113. No 1 LY Screen No 2 409 Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Screen To switch the displayed 1 Objects Touch Switch gt Function Input Key display screen using an arrow Control symbol key Create the 7 and J touch switches or Screen gt Properties System Keypad Tick Display the 7 and J keys of the system keypad 2 Screen 2 New Parent Screen Continuous Specify the screen to be switched to when or key is pressed Note With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C it is not possible to create continuous screens There fore set the screen switching function for the touch switches created in step 1 PT Screen No 1 gt a Jo Screen No 2 To switch the displayed Tools Table Extended I O input screen using an external A Set the extended I O input table screen switching function switch PT Screen No 1 m Screen No 2 To display a pop up 1 Objects Touch Switch gt Input Key Window Key screen help menu etc board using a touch switch Create a touch switch for which the window display function is set 2 Screen New Create the window keyboard screen to be displayed
114. Note For a keyboard the data registered to the symbol manager can be used Creation is also possible using Touch Switch Function Input Key Control Screen Screen Keyboard 2 Screen 410 Quick Reference Screen display To display multiple screens in one screen Section 10 1 Operation Screen 2 New Parent Set the child screens then specify the parent screen on which to overlap them Note With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT6310O if a parent screen is created it is automatically set for overlapping screens since continuous screens are not supported Screen No 10 PT ABC Screen No 1 gt ABCDEF Screen No 11 DEF Refer to To move a window using a touch switch Only for NT21 and for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and above 1 Screen gt New Create a window keyboard screen 2 Objects Touch Switch Register Window Move touch switch on a screen created in 1 Window Screen Center point of the window keyboard screen goes to the position touched next Screen To open close control a window from the host Only for NT21 and for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and above 1 Tools PT Configuration Control Notify Area Allocate Windo
115. O input table dialog box is displayed Description Goto Entry Close Help 3 Select the extended I O input row where setting is to be done and click on Set 87 Standard Screen Section 5 2 An extended I O input setting dialog box is displayed Extended I O Input Setting Cancel Help Function Screen No 4 Set Switch Screen for Function and the screen number of the screen to be displayed for Screen No 5 1 6 Saving the Screen Image The Support Tool provides a function to save the displayed screen image in a bit map file as it is The grid display status and Show Tag can be also saved The following describes the procedure for saving the screen image 1 Select the screen that is going to be saved in a file so that it can be edited 2 Select Screen in the menu bar then select Copy to Image A dialog box is displayed to set a file name 3 Set the folder and file name then click on sse The screen image is saved to the specified file 5 2 Standard Screen A standard screen is the base screen for the display at a PT Screen numbers of standard screens differ depending on the PT model The table below shows the screen numbers that can be used for a standard screen 88 Continuous Overlapping Screens Section 5 3 PT Model Screen Nos NT11S NT11 1 to 250 NT20S 1 to 250 256 to 500 NT600S 1 to 1000 NT30 NT30C NT620S
116. ON state is shown with the dotted line frame Screen Specify the screen to be printed All Select this item to print all screens Range Select this item if you want to print only specified screens Specify the screen numbers using a comma as a delimiter By joining two page number with a hyphen you can specify the range 5 12 for example indicates the range from Screen No 5 to screen No 12 Include Specify the items to be printed It is possible to select all items Screen Image Specify this to print the screen image Screen Information Specify this to print the detailed screen setting information Lamp Touch Switch Number Specify this when there is a lamp and or touch switch on the screen and you want to print the allo cated bit number of a lamp and or touch switch Usually in the case of a touch switch the allocated bit number specified when setting a lamp is 452 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Reference printed If the notify bit function is set however the notify bit number is printed Memory Table Entry Number Specify this when there is a character string dis play numeral display bar graph and or input setting element on the screen and if you want to print the element with the set memory table entry number Image Library Number Specify this when there is image data display and or library data display on the screen and you want to print the displayed data with t
117. Ontario MIB 5V8 416 286 6465 OMRON ON LINE Global http www omron com USA http www omron com oei Canada http www omron ca UNITED STATES To locate a Regional Sales Office local Distributor or to obtain product information call 847 843 7900 CANADA REGIONAL SALES OFFICES Ontario Toronto 416 286 6465 Kitchener 519 896 1144 Kingston 613 376 3968 Quebec Montreal 514 636 6676 British Columbia Vancouver 604 522 8855 Alberta Edmonton 403 440 0818 Calgary 403 257 3095 Sao Paulo 55 1 1 5564 6488 Cono Sur 54 1 14 787 1129 Florida 954 227 2121 Ciudad Juarez 656 623 7083 Mexico 555 534 1195 Monterrey N L 818 377 4281 V061 E1 03 6 04 10 2004 OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC Specifications subject to change without notice Printed in the U S A
118. PLC f the setting is 2 words the 8 digit BCD or binary data is shared by the PT and PC PLC When the setting is 2 the 1st to 4th digit data is allocated to the lower digit word in the PC PLC and the 5th to 8th digit data is allocated to the higher digit word PT models other than the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C If the setting has been made to display a sign one digit bit 4 in the most signifi cant digit position is regarded as representing a sign if F 1111 in binary is set the numeric value is regarded as negative and if any other code is set the numer ic value is regarded as positive Therefore if the numeric value is displayed with a sign the maximum number of significant digits of a negative value is 3 if 1 word is set and 7 if 2 words is set Example When 1 word is set the value 123 is treated as F123 in hexadecimal in a numeral memory table entry 279 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 Similarly when 2 words are set the value 1234567 is treated as F1234567 in hexadecimal in a numeral memory table entry PT models NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Regardless of the number of allocated words 2 words are always secured for a numeral memory table entry and a numeric value is stored as signed binary data If the setting for Storage Type is decimal F appearing at the most signifi cant digit position is treated as a negative sign In this case therefore the num ber of signi
119. PT Model PLO Vendor NT631C V1 NT631 V1 3 2 3 Functions of Message Boxes Message boxes display details of errors that occur during Support Tool operation and messages that request your confirmation of attempted operations When a message box shows up operation can be continued or cancelled by pressing the corresponding button in the message box NT series Support Tool Y PT Model PLC Vendor Font Type has changed Convert this application 3 3 Operation of Screen Data Application File The procedure for operating the screen data file where the PT screen data is stored is described below The PT Configuration which determines the basic PT operation is also discussed 44 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File To create new screen data select New in the File Menu of the main window view Connect Open Import Print Setup Recent File Exit PT configuration dialog box appears so that users can set information of the ap plication environment and type of PT device PT Configuration x PT Type System Control Notity Area PT Model T NT30 620 Compatible Mode PLC Vendor DMRON Eont Type CP437 E Comments Cancel Help Click the Button after completing the setting at the PT configuration dialog box For details of the setting at the PT configur
120. PT model Example For NT30 NT30C No Date Time Cnt Message No NT30 NT30C Screen No NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates a screen number Date NT30 NT30C Time NT30 NT30C YY MM DD HH MM NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the date and time the screen was displayed Cnt NT30 NT30C Frequency NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the number of times the screen has been displayed Message Indicates the Title of the screen attribute 5 8 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen The host connect screen is displayed for the start of PT operation until commu nication with the PC PLC is established This screen can be created freely using only fixed display In case host connect screen is not registered a default screen indicating that PT is trying to connect to the host will be automatically displayed at the time PT pow er is switched on or when the mode is changed to the RUN mode 99 Password Screen Section 5 9 The screen number of the host connect screen is shown below PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT620S NT620C NT625C 1999 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9000 Reference For the NT21 NT31 NT31C TN631 and NT631C it is called a System Initializ ing Screen 5 9 Password Screen A Password screen is treated as one of the 250 Standard screen in NT11S NT11 It is used to protect another screen by password When a passw
121. Screen Information Screen all Lamp Touch Switch Number Range Memory Table Number Enter screen numbers and or Image Library Number Screen ranges separated by commas For example 135 12 451 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Screen Image Attribute Inverse Print Specify this item when you want to inverse black and white for printing When this item is selected the screen image will be monochrome even when color printer is used With the color type PT the screen image will be turned to gray and the screen will be inverse for printing Hide Screen Grid Specify this item when you do not want to in clude screen grid for printing With the default status check mark is set If it is unchecked the grid is printed according to the grid setting of each screen s property Show Dotted Line Frame Specify this item when you want to include the dotted line frame for the following objects e Dotted line frame indicating the position of string input and string display e Dotted line frame indicating the touch sensing area of touch switch Dotted line frame indicating the display position of image library data of an image lamp The status of an image lamp to be printed depends on the Simulate ON OFF set ting of the View menu With lamp ON sta tus display position of image library data for OFF state is shown with the dotted line frame and with lamp OFF status display position of image library data for
122. Select Image Editor or Library Editor from the Tools menu and copy Edit Copy the code to be imported on the image library table c Open the image library table of the screen data file of copy destination and paste the image library data that has been copied This time if the copy destination code number is different from the copy source code number display will not be correct when the object is pasted Register the same code number as copy source by clicking the New But ton 6 Drag amp drop the object that you want to import from the screen data file of Parts Collection to the screen data file of copy destination Copy Paste in the Edit menu can be used also 62 SECTION 4 Application Manager This section shows how the application manager is used when checking the created data copying screen data setting a memory table operating a window 4 1 What Is the Application Manager 0 0 eee cee eee 64 4 2 Operating the Application Manager 0 0 cece ee ee eee 65 4 2 1 Opening a Data Creation Screen 65 4 2 2 Closing a Creation Screen yeon renin am i e eee eens 65 4 2 3 Creating New Screen 0 65 422 4 CopyingaSCreen s o meo bane Ud Sama ea ares ae 66 4 2 5 Deleting a Screen coop E a erre 67 4 2 6 Displaying and Setting the PT 67 4 2 7 Displaying and
123. Selectable shapes vary according to the PT model Standard Shadow 3 Dimension Rectangle Ic D H i LI Li Hie zi MEER Tu e all Circle Polygon Sector Although Standard and Rectangle have the same shape how the touch switch frame is defined differs between them With Standard the touch switch frame itself provides the display graphic With Rectangle however a rectangle shape can be specified independently of the touch switch frame and the touch switch frame can be separated from the rectangle shape If rectangle circle polygon or sector is selected only the shape of a graphic can be modified in the procedure shown below The touch switch frame touch sensing area remains unchanged even if the shape is modified Use the element edit function to modify the touch switch shape For details refer to page 110 1 Click on a line of a graphic while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a green mark to modify the graphic 3 To add a green mark addition of a node in a polygon position the mouse cursor on the line in a graphic and execute a vertex addition operation right click the mouse Add Node To delete a green mark deletion of a node position the mouse cursor on the green W mark to be deleted and execute a vertex deletion operation right click the mouse Remove Node 4 Drag the added green W mark to modify the shape of the graphic Exam
124. Support Tool Be sure to set image library data display area so that image library data fits inside it For an alarm history element the property settings bit memory table entry and character string memory table entry string table are related to each other as shown below History data H0001512 97 02 12 10 51 Displayed at ON Character string Alarm list Bit memory table memory table String table ue Character string memory lt 9 table entry String table o 10 ABC Image library data FE20 1 DEF PC PLC address 0001512 12 GHI 13 JKL ABC 02 12 N PM Image data QU Specified PC PLC bit Number of bits Set for No of Bits Referenced table entry No Set for Start Bit Table Entry An alarm history element is used in combination with the bit memory table entry How they function is shown below Setting at bit memory table entry Setting at Set dialog box PLC Address Setting at Function dialog box History Screen No Switch Screen Screen No 169 Alarm Section 6 3 String Table Entry Image Library Code Use of image library data Image library code Color Property settings for alarm history element History Info Order Type Order of Frequency e Order of Occurrence All bit memory table entries f
125. Tools PT Configuration and specify the PT model conver sion destination Execute data conversion Data of DOS version e Specify the file using File Import Execute data conversion 2 If an error occurs the message Application conversion has resulted some messages in Error Log is displayed Click on oe 3 Select View Error Log to display the error log 4 Select File Print and set the properties as shown below e Report Type Validation Report e Destination Printer or Rich Text Format Screen Print Current Error Log Window For details of data conversion refer to Appendix A Data Conversion Setting margins Specify the margins to define the print area Q Top ful Bottom Left K gt Right The units for dimensions can be selected between cm and inch Setting footer and header Specify contents of header and footer to be printed The header footer print position can be set as Left Center or Right Left Center Right Header J eee mE Footer lle E Left Center Right Page numbers date time and file name can be printed automatically To select the item to be printed as a header or a footer move the cursor to the 454 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Print dialog box print location and click on the corresponding button Page No Date E Time Filename Printer Set t
126. Type Decimal Format Integer 8 Decimal 0 Limit Maximum 99999999 Minimum 0 Zero Suppression Display Sign Focus Frame Focus Attribute Standard 1 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations Setting the cursor moving touch switch 9 Double click on the touch switch area dotted line frame created at the numeral input field position and set the properties as shown below If selection of the touch switch is not easy choose Select Object from the Edit menu and select the touch switch from the list Position Size Frame Shape Standard Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Cursor Move Use Window Keyboard Screen d Screen No 1900 Auto Arrange 1 Light Address PC PLC Address Function Comments Lamp Attribute Label 1 Uncheck the check mark for Auto Arrange Otherwise it is not pos sible to change the position of each numeral input and touch switch 2 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations 383 Creating the Sample Data S
127. Write Notify Address PLC Bit Address I Set V d somments Window Keyboard Screen Screen No r Screen Position Bottom Left Local 1 Keyboard fi a xe 0 0 C Local 2 m Screen Attributes 7 v Replace Local Window Cancel Apply Recipe Entry Sets the recipe entry to refer to The button invokes the recipe table when it is clicked Edit Param Call up the Parameter Setting Table Write Notify Address PLC Address Inputs the write flag PLC address If this is a valid address the write notify bit in the memory map is set Set Sets the write flag PLC address via an ad dress composition dialog Comments Inputs comments for the write flag PLC ad dress The button will invoke the I O comment table Show Window Keyboard Screen Allow the use of window keyboard screen Screen No Local 1 or Local 2 Sets the keyboard screen to use with this recipe object Either Local 1 or Local 2 alone can be enabled Screen Position X amp Position Y Sets the position for the keyboard screen Screen Attributes Replace Local Window Determine whether to replace the local window 263 Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Touch Switch General Settings Touch Switches Interlock Read Write Touch Switch Read White Page Scroll Touch Switch Up Left Down
128. a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 7 7 O Comment Table The I O comment table is an area provided in a PT to manage the comment data of all words and bits in a PC PLC that are set by the Support Tool It displays comments on PC PLC words and bits specified by numeral memory table entries character string memory table entries string table bit memory 296 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 table entries extended I O input table entries extended l O output table entries and elements in the form of list The displayed comments can be edited VO Comment Ref Close Reference Search Help Reference If is displayed for PLC Bit Address when its Ref is Yes object without PLC address exist Clicking _ Reference to know which objects is created without PLC ad dress 7 7 1 Operation Procedure Reference Setting An I O comment table entry is displayed by following the operation described be low When allocating PC PLC address by the setting of lamps and touch switches Click on _ in the I O comment field of the properties displayed for each ele ment Specify the edit field Click on s Example Address PLC Bit Address 0010015 Set Comments as Click Tools menu bar Table I O Comments tab Specify the edit field gt Set When only editing an I O comment of a PC PLC address allocated to an ele
129. a constant in a memory table entry to an input field Character string PT Pi Numeral Character string memory memory table table String table input field Numera input 1234 CONSTANT dd 1 4 1234 PT By setting the setting data to a memory table entry or a touch switch beforehand the data is copied to the input field at the cursor location as desired Since the data is copied to the input field it can be modified after copying 6 8 7 Cursor Moving Touch Switch Function Moving cursor Settings Related elements and setting Use Window Keyboard Screen Screen No Window position Replace Local Window Auto Arrange Numeral input element Specify whether or not the window keyboard screen is displayed when the cursor is moved Specify the screen type Local 1 Local 2 and the screen number of the window keyboard screen to be displayed when moving a cursor Specify the bottom left co ordinate of window to be dis played Specify the behavior of windows when another window of the same type Local 1 Local 2 is already displayed when opening a window Specify if a touch switch is to move with or indepen dently of an input field when the input fields shifts Object Data Input Numeral Refer to 6 4 7 Numeral Input Character string input element Object Data Input
130. a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on FF in the error message dialog box While the data is sent from the PT the progress of data transmission is indi cated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on caa Receiving Uploading the History Record Section 11 5 11 5 Receiving Uploading the History Record Reference Operation procedure It is possible to receive upload the display history record data and the alarm his tory record data recorded in a PT at the Support Tool to save them in a file The type of history record data that can be received is indicated in the table be low Screen Display Alarm History History Record Data Record Data PT Model NT11S NT11 NT20S x NT30 NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C O The received history record data is saved in a desired folder by assigning a file name The extension of the file name is fixed as LOG Since the file is described in a special format the contents cannot be read using Windows general application tools The history record data file LOG can be output to a printer saved in an RTF file or output to the screen using the Print function or the Print Preview function of the Support Tool To analyze the history record data using other software convert the file into an RTF file so tha
131. again e Adjusting the size and position of the touch switch 5 Specify the Menu button and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 6 Adjust the size and position of Menu button frame 7 Adjust the position of label Menu by dragging it 378 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the Set button 8 Copy the Menu button and paste it on the screen 9 Move the Menu button pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the Set button position 10 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Settings Screen No 3 Label Label Set 1 Press Edit to set the label 11 Create the Alarm button in the same manner Modify Alarm button properties as shown below Settings Screen No 4 Label Label Alarm 1 1 Press Edit to set the label Creating the frame 12 Select Objects main menu Fixed Display Rectangle 13 Drag the mouse so that the rectangular frame encloses the three buttons 13 14 Use the properties as they are 15 Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Setting the Switch Screen character string 16 Select Objects main menu Fixed Display Text 17 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the Switch Screen character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner
132. alarm list by dragging it After that click on any position in the screen other than the alarm list to cancel the alarm list selected state edit state Changing the frame of the line scroll down touch switch 10 Specify the switch at the bottom in the touch switches at the right side of the alarm list and adjust its size and position move it to the lowest line in the alarm list 11 Double click the line scroll down touch switch and set the properties as shown below 394 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Position Size Frame Standard p White White Transparent Shape Show ON State Color Function Input Key Control Settings Control Key Address Light Function PC PLC Ad dress Comments Lamp Attribute General Label Light lt 9 gt 1 1 Here the label is not changed If you need to change it press edit button After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the touch switches used to control the alarm list are a part of the list and their properties such as the label and the size cannot be changed Only the position can be adjusted 12 Press edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Foreground Color 13 A
133. already displayed no operation is executed No check mark If another window of the same type Local1 Local 2 is already displayed closes the window and then opens the specified win dow 6 8 5 Control Code Input Touch Switches Function Input key Control Settings Control Key Specify the key code that is input when the touch switch is pressed Select from 39 kinds of codes Some codes cannot be specified depending on the PT model Related elements and setting Numeral input element Object Data Input Numeral Refer to 6 4 7 Numeral Input Character string input element Object Data Input String Refer to 6 4 2 Character String Input 217 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance Control code input touch switches control data input processing cursor move ments etc The contents of control are selected from the codes shown below Control code input touch switches are used in combination with numeral input elements character string input elements continuous screens alarm list ele ments and alarm history elements 1 Combination with numeral input elements character string input ele ments and continuous screens If control code input touch switches are arranged with a numeral input ele ment or a character string input element on the same screen including the window keyboard and the base screen these touch switches can be used to input data into the input fi
134. and characters that indicate area type are as follows Common I O Area E amp EW Banks es Ew Banks H A L T 1 2 4 5 HI ad 231 HE EN 2 1 Lies HI NE E ze NEUE poate Memon AME i 20 Common Operation Section 6 1 EM Bank 9 EM Bank A EM Bank B EM Bank C EM Bank D Count Up Flag T K U Time Up Flag W Ow wa oO 9 EM Bank D EM Bank E EM Bank F are not available since these are reserved words Only available for the NT21 and the NT31 631 V2 and above models O Specification possible x Specification not possible With NT11S NT11 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Input a word address as a 5 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor MEMLINK Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows Noe Memo tnkarea O Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor Mitsubishi_A Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows Input Relay Output Relay Latch Relay 8 129 C
135. and move it as desired e f the size of the image library data is smaller than the display area the image library data is displayed taking the lower left corner of the display area as the reference 1 Image library data display area Image library data Reference With NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C if image library data is larger than the image library data display area the area exceeding the display area will not be Alarm Section 6 3 displayed on PT while the whole data is displayed on the Support Tool Be sure to set image library data display area so that image library data fits inside it For an alarm list element the property settings bit memory table and charac ter string memory table string table are related to each other as shown below Alarm list erum Bit memory table Character string memory lt String table table entry String table 10 ABC Image library data FE20 wi DEF PC PLC address 0001000 JKL Image data Specified PC PLO bit Number of bits Set for No of Bits Referenced Table Entry No Set for Start Bit Table Entry An alarm list element is used in combination with bit memory table entries How they function is shown below Setting at bit memory table Setting at Set dialog box PLC Address Setting at F
136. are tiled Used to move the entire drawn graphic Drag the edit area and the graphic drawing position moves 344 Mark Editor Section 8 3 I Used to turn the entire drawn graphic through 90 Left clicking on the edit area turns the graphic clockwise and right clicking turns the graphic counterclockwise Left click Right click Referring to graphics The mark editor allows you to refer to or reuse the existing graphics or sample characters to draw desired new marks Click on Reference button and the reference graphic display area is displayed Mark Editor gla Sele alc gt 4 Reference maus Reference graphic display area Oy N a o m e n button again To close the reference graphic display area click on Referring to the existing mark data To display the existing mark data as reference for creating a new mark click on S above the reference graphic display area The mark data list dialog box is displayed 345 Mark Editor Section 8 3 Select the data you want to use as the reference in the mark data list dialog box and click on 0020 or double click the mouse on the desired reference data Table Application X Code FFFE aya AERE RIS Cancel Clear Help Referring to characters The mark editor allows you to use the existing characters as the reference for creating charact
137. be carried out by following this help information When you are unsure of the operating procedure while using the Support Tool or you need to check detailed settings refer to this manual The explanations in this manual center on the Support Tool itself It does not include detailed explanations on the operation of the PT Therefore refer to the following manuals also This manual also explains the operation of NT Transfer Utility which is exclusively used for downloading and uploading the screen data The NT series Support Tool for Windows 95 98 can be used with the latest direct access versions of the following PT models Details are given in this manual NT11S NT11 NT20S NT21 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT600S 6205 NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C For information on PT functions operations and restrictions NT11 Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V084 E1 1 NT11S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V029 E1 NT20S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V020 E1 1 NT600S Programmable Terminal Operation Manual V022 E1 NT30 NT30C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual VO34 E1 1 NT620S NT620C Programmable Terminal Operation Manual VO33 E1 1 NT21 Programmable Terminal Setup Manual V068 E1 1 NT31 31C Programmable Terminal Setup Manual V062 E1 1 NT631 631C Programmable Terminal Setup Manual V063 E1 NT21 31 631 Programmable Terminal Reference Manual V069 E1 1
138. be edited All translation data for each of the source applications with their respective translation will be stored in a Microsoft Access relational database which has to be retained for later retrieval of translated data for modification etc You can update the database with the latest application information When updating the database Translation Support Utility checks for changes made at the source file Items will be added removed or updated depending on the current file As a result there may be new text requiring translation or already translated text that is obsolete in the database Upon opening a source application MMI file for translation the user will be prompted to inform the utility about the language character set pertaining to the application that is going to be opened for translation At any given time only one application can be opened Standard file operations are available for the user to close files save files and exit the utility which will prompt you to save if any changes have been made The following are the file types involved in translation management for this utility MMI files Memory Map Image file corresponding to NTST data mdb files Microsoft Access database storing translation data for source and target e xls files for Export Import functionality Export 1 All language column headers excluding the source will be displayed for selection of export and the user will be able
139. be switched ON and OFF by clicking the lt lt Breview_ Preview gt gt button Deleting the image data To delete an image data follow the procedure below Deleted image data will not be stored to the clipboard and its code itself will be also deleted When two or more codes are selected they will be deleted collectively 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Select the code of the image data to be deleted When two or more codes are selected they can be deleted collectively 3 Perform one of the following operations Ee button Delete e Right click the selected code Delete Delete button Selected code will be deleted after you click the firmation dialog box Button in the con Cutting copying the image data To cut or copy an image data follow the procedure below The cut copied image data will be stored to the clipboard and can be pasted to the other codes 323 Image Editor Section 8 1 In case of cut cut code will be deleted from the image table In case of copy copied code remains in the image table Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the image table of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the image table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Impo
140. box Set the start memory table entry number and the number of memory table entries so that the displayed range is not exceeded While an alarm list element is displayed the status of the bit memory table entries in the specified range is always checked and the element displays the message or image library data that is set for the bit memory table entry when a bit memory table entry is turned ON Allocation of a PC PLC bit to a bit memory table entry is specified at the bit memory table Specified character string memory table entry string table and image library data code are also specified at the bit memory table Bit memory table PC PLC The alarm range i e the start address No in the bit memory table entry and the size is specified by the alarm list element If a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the history property goes ON the date time and the number of going ON events are recorded in an alarm history An alarm history element displays the recorded bit table entry num bers in the order of occurrence or frequency when the element is displayed An alarm history element can also display the contents alarm message of the character string memory table entry string table and the image library data that are allocated to the bit memory table entry Screen Bit memory table Character string memory table string table Alarm WARNING HIGH TEMP T history
141. by pressing the abort touch switch if it is selected in Settings The print screen function cannot be used with the NT20S NT21 and NT600S With conventional models where the same memory area is shared by the print screen function and the input key window keyboard function it is not possible to print a hard copy while a window keyboard is displayed 223 Graphs Section 6 9 6 9 Graphs 6 9 1 Bar Graph Operation procedure 224 Graphs can be used to display the contents of a numeral memory table entry The Support Tool provides four types of graph as indicated below Bar Graph A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of a bar graph Analogue Meter A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of quarter semi circle and circle graph Broken line Graph Present values of several consecutive numeral memory table entries are displayed in the form of a broken line graph Trend Graph Numeral memory table entry contents that change with time are displayed in the form of a trend graph The graph moves as time passes The data logging function which logs the past data and the background function which continues logging the data while a trend graph is not displayed are available A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of a bar graph Numeral memory table
142. changes as shown below Then drag the element as desired e 110 Common Operation Section 6 1 If multiple data creation screens are displayed an element can be moved over to another data creation screen by dragging it Moving an element by keyboard operation The screen element can be moved by pressing cursor key 1 lt on key board after selection The size of movement depends on the setting of the Snap to Grid as follows When Snap to Grid is OFF Cursor key move by 1 dot Shift key Cursor key move by 16 dots When Snap to Grid is ON Cursor key move by 1 dot Shift key Cursor key move by set grid size However if the selected elements include touch switch elements always move by the size of the touch switch grid regardless of whether Shift key is pressed or not To move a part of an element such as the Display for a bar graph or Label for a lamp touch switch click on the objective part while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key or after selecting Edit Object then perform move operation In case of NT11S NT11 there is a special requirement i e The selected objects will move by one system grid size 8 16 in all cases The snap to grid option value is not considered Reference The Snap to Grid setting can be made by the procedures below Screen menu Property Grid button Screen menu Grid Double clicking on a screen Grid Right clicking on a screen Property
143. circle can be changed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Circle Selection using the drawing toolbar e Terminology Center point Property setting General Position Center point Indicates the position of the center of a circle Size Indicates the radius of a circle Attribute Specify the display attribute Setting is not possible with NT20S and NT600S Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance Acircle element can be modified in the manner shown below A circle can be modified by dragging a green mark handle 141 Fixed Display Section 6 2 6 2 5 Polygon Operation procedure Terminology Note that a circle cannot be deformed to an oval For modification in the For modification in the upper left direction upper right direction Am dd E pai Y For modification in the For modification in the lower left direction lower right direction To tile a circle paste a tiling element into it Circle Tiling element For details of tiling elements refer to 6 2 8 Tiling A polygon is drawn Polygons cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 1 After a polygon is drawn it is modified to give the desired shape Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Di
144. code of the library data to be deleted When two or more codes are selected they can be deleted collectively 3 Perform one of the following operations edit button Delete e Right click on the selected code Delete Delete button Selected code will be deleted after you click the firmation dialog box Button in the con Cutting copying the library data To cut or copy a library data follow the procedure below The cut copied library data will be stored to the clipboard and can be pasted to the other codes In case of cut cut code will be deleted from the library table In case of copy copied code remains in the library table 335 Library Editor Section 8 2 336 Reference Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the library table of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the library table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Com ponents from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Select the code of the library data to be cut or copied Select only one code When two or more codes are selected cut copy op eration can not be performed 3 Click the edit Button or right click on th
145. comment s Search 50 imaes Lirary oode E Search 8 Conme H Find What ose Find What Close 0001 Replace All Line Replace All Css ud Replace Replace With TEE ERI Process Help Help Search By Specify the objective data for the search or replacement operation PC PLC address Data set for addresses of table entries Initial value contents Data set for the initial values of a numeral memory table entry or character string memory table entry string table Image library code Image library codes set for a bit memory table entry comment comment in I O comment table Find What Set the data to be searched for or replaced Replace With Set the new data to replace the data set for Find What Clicking this button starts search processing When the specified data is found the cursor in the table automatically moves to the found table entry number Search for the next appearance by clicking on this button again Replace Clicking this button starts replace processing The data specified for Find What is searched for and replaced with the data set for Replace With Common Operation Section 7 1 When the specified data is found the cursor in the table automatically moves to the found table entry number Search for the next appearance by clicking on this button again Replace All Clicking this button starts replace processing The data specified for Find What is searched for and replaced
146. cond stop Only for NT20S and NT600S Buzzer type setting is possible only when the buzzer attribute is selected Load Local 1 Keyboard other than NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S Select whether or not a local window 1 Keyboard pops up on the screen when standard screen is opened If the attribute is checked a window keyboard pops up when the screen is dis played Window keyboard does not pop up if the attribute is not selected If the 79 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 attribute is not set when the standard screen is created it can be selected later to display Specify the screen number of window keyboard screen to be displayed as a pop up window keyboard Window Keyboard will be displayed at the position specified when window key board screen was created With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 window is called a keyboard window since it is used to place keypad touch switch for inputting numeral string With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above it is simply called a window since all kinds of objects other than thumb wheel can be registered on it For details of window keyboard screen refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens Load Local 2 NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and above Select whether or not a local window 2 pops up on the screen when standard Screen is
147. configuration dialog box is shown below For details refer to Dialog Box Setting in the PT Configuration on page 45 Operation using the mouse 1 Click right button of the mouse on the screen data application file icon then select Setup Operation using the menu 1 Select PT Configuration from Tools in the menu bar 4 2 7 Displaying and Setting Screen Properties The procedure for displaying the property setting dialog box is shown below For details refer to 5 1 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Op erations Operation using the mouse 1 Click right button of the mouse on the screen data file icon then select Properties Operation using the menu 1 Select the screen icon 2 Select Properties from Screen in the menu bar Reference The following operations can also display the screen property setting dialog box Click right button of the mouse on the editing screen where no objects are reg istered then select Properties Double click on the editing screen where no objects are registered 4 2 8 Editing a Table The procedure for displaying the table setting dialog box is shown below 67 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 For details refer to Section 7 Memory Table Setting or Section 8 Editing Graphic Data Operation using the mouse 1 Double click the icon of the table data to be edited Operation using the mouse 2 Operation using the menu
148. data as it exists in Excel format by clicking the Import All button By doing this translation data for all languages is processed and imported During this process when all translation data for a particular language is processed im ported that language is removed from the Language list box and the status box displays Done for that language This process is repeated for all languages in the Language list box 505 Translation Support Utility Find Replace Error Warning Messages 506 Appendix D Import translation data one by one by viewing the data in the Excel Text edit box in the Import dialog above to be imported and if necessary edit the data in the Import Text edit box in the Import Dialog above and then click the Import but ton This way you can inspect and also edit the translation data that is being im ported for that language During this process of importing translation data items one by one you can skip any of the translation data items by clicking the Next button the item will be ignored for import and processing will proceed to the next record Conversely you can navigate back to any of the previous records that you may have missed inadvertently by clicking the Previous Button so that you can inspect and import that particular record When the last record of a language is processed the language will be removed from the Language list box and the next language will become ready for import In a
149. data input field Inputs numeral 8 in a data input field Inputs numeral 9 in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal A in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal B in a data input field BHERBHASES ERE Inputs hexadecimal C in a data input field 294 Extended I O Output Table Section 7 6 SES m i E mi E Inputs hexadecimal D in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal E in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal F in a data input field Deletes numeric value character string in a data input field Confirms inputs in a data input field cursor remains in this field Toggles plus and minus sign in a data input field Inputs a decimal point in a data input field Moves the input cursor to the data input field at the upper left area Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately above the present data input field Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately below the present data input field Move the cursor to the left data input field Move the cursor to the right data input field Moves the cursor to the previous data input field in the order Changes the continuous screens to the previous screen Moves the cursor to the next data input field in the order Changes the continuous screens to the next screen Stops Buzzer Displays the System menu After setting the items for the selected function switch screen notify bit control code input click ex J The
150. deleted collectively Close Closes the library table dialog 334 Library Editor Section 8 2 Help Displays Help about the library table dialog box Specifying a code To specify a code for operations click on the objective line library code To specify the continuous codes collectively click on the first code to be se lected and then the last code to be selected while pressing the Shift key If you click on a code while pressing the Ctrl key the code will be selected or deselected alternately each time it is clicked Size 1000 120 X 190 250 X 150 Com 145 X 88 m 50 x 50 Shift Click 180 X 150 Size ie 120 X 190 no Ctrl Click Preview Function Support Tool provides a preview function that can display the contents of the se lected code When two or more codes are selected the preview of the code selected last will be displayed in preview window The preview window can be switched ON and OFF using the Breview gt gt Preview Buttons Deleting the library data To delete a library data follow the procedure below Deleted library data will not be stored to the clipboard and its code itself will be also deleted When two or more codes are selected they will be deleted collectively 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Select the
151. display frame moves when the mouse cursor is dragged in this state I er E 4 After the size and the position of the pop up display frame are determined click on an arbitrary point in the screen other than the pop up display frame The size and the position of the pop up display frame are set and the han dles are cleared To change the size and the position of the pop up display frame repeat the procedure shown above from step 1 Reference The size and position of the pop up display frame can be specified as follows NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Specify by 1 dot unit NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Specify by 20 dot 5 4 2 Improved Input Key window Keyboard Function This section describes input key window keyboard function that was improved for the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Types of windows Following two types of windows are available Global window This window can be kept displaying all the time regardless of the screen dis played on PT Global window stays at the same position even when the displayed screen is switched Global window will be closed automatically when the screen other than user screen was displayed and will be re displayed when the screen was switched back to user screen Only one global window can be displayed at a time It can be opened closed or moved only by the operation of Window Control Area from the host For details of Window Control Area
152. e BL Ir Documents Settings a Translation Support Utility Gal Uninstall NT Transfer Utility Eind G Uninstal NTST Help Uninstall Translation Support Utiity 3 Windows98 Download System Help Drive Look in IBM PRE 7 yes Program Files Go PT Model 3 Omon urat E XNTST Com Port cout System File s Size System Program Name Modfied 4 NtAGPOC 31c 727KB MITSUBISHI Direct Access 313 2001 04 09 3 1 NT aqf c 31c 812KB OMRON Direct Access 313 2001 04 05 3 1 Mod 31c 803KB Schneider Modbus Protocol 312 2001 02 13 3 1 805KB GE Fanuc SNP X 1 1 312 2001 02 15 3 1 807KB DF1 Full Duplex Protocol 312 2001 02 15 31 b Existing the system installer You can exit the system installer by using any of the following operations e Select Download System Exit Click on the x button in the upper right section of the main window Double click on the system installer icon in the upper left section of the main window Click on the system installer icon in the upper left section of the main window then select Close in the control menu box Press the F4 key while holding down the Alt key When you exit the system installer the Windows screen is displayed 486 System Installer Operation Appendix B Functions of the Main Window The functions provided by the main window of the system installe
153. elements future editing such as copying pasting and moving will be facilitated if they are grouped Grouped elements can be returned to individual elements by ungrouping them In the grouped state it is not permissible to change the element size and property settings To change the size or set properties ungroup the elements Reference When saving screen data using mmi format grid setting information and group ing information will not be stored Refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File Grouping 1 Specify the elements to be grouped 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Group This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select Group o Screen Tools Selector REA Pai l s Bring to Front xd p Send To Back 2 Ungrouping 1 Select an element in the grouped elements Select only one grouped ele ment 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Ungroup 116 Common Operation Section 6 1 This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse and select Ungroup o Screen Tools Selector N Bring to Front CtrtF a 2 e j Send To Back Ctrl B 6 1 8 Associating Elements with the Touch Switch Association Disassociation
154. entry and gets selected Delete Delete the selected entry Same as Edit Delete Set Recipe Shows the setting of the selected entry in a recipe setting dialog Set Record Show the records of the selected entry in a record setting table Edit Permits delete cut copy and paste operations on a selected recipe An edit pop up menu with these 4 options will appear Delete Cut Copy Paste is disabled when no entry exists Paste is available when the clipboard contains recipe data Goto Entry Selects an entry by specifying the entry number through a Go to dialog The be havior is the same as numeral table Go to dialog Total Displays the byte size of all entries Equals sum of all Occupied Bytes Available Displays the table s maximum byte size less the used byte size This is the total recipe size minus total occupied size 312 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Recipe Setting Dialog Number 1 Name Pizza Insert Mark Comment Recipe for Pizza auf No of Records 3 5 No of Parameters 3 Storage Type System H Address PLC Address L00020 Set 140 Comments di Cancel This Recipe Setting dialog allows you to specify the settings for an entry in the recipe table Description of Recipe Setting Dialog Controls Number Displays the recipe number in the recipe table When creating a new entry the lowest available number is suggested The maximum
155. extended I O input is turned ON Select Table from Tools in the menu bar Then click the tab of Extended I O Input to set the Switch screen Setting for the individual screens It is possible to set the screen to be displayed in response to turning ON of the extended I O input for each screen For this setting select Extended I O from Screen in the menu bar For example this setting allows the display screen to change sequentially from screen No 1 to screen No 2 then to screen No 3 in response to turning ON of the extended I O input If the extended I O input 0 goes ON while screen No 1 displayed the screen switches to screen No 2 then if the extended I O input 0 goes ON while screen No 2 displayed the screen switches to screen No 3 To allow screens to be changed in this way set Switch Screen No 2 for Ex tended I O at screen No 1 and Switch Screen No 3 for Extended I O at screen No 2 Here only the setting for screen switching at the individual screens is described Operations of the Extended I O Input table and the common setting to all screens are described 7 5 Extended I O Input Table The procedure for setting the screen to be displayed on turning ON of the ex tended I O input at each screen is shown below 1 Select the screen for which Extended I O is to be set to place the screen in edit enabled state 2 Select Screen in the menu bar then select Extended I O An extended I
156. fe 0716 Call for key operator assistanc 0717 Call for maintenance 0718 Add sheet paper material 0719 Add roll paper material 0720 Add dry toner 0721 Add ink W 0722 Add liquid toner i T Preview File configuration The symbol manager is controlled in a data file that is separate from the screen data file The symbol data file configuration is shown below NTST4 7 Symbol SPPLMNT SBL File storing the keyboard and keypad data Color PL SBL File storing tiling objects SYMFILE1 SBL SYMFILE2 SBL Group of files storing newly registered symbols A file is created for each symbol SYMFILES SBL Reference For the Support Tool keyboard data for each PT model color palette and ISO elements are provided as symbol data 251 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 6 10 2 Basic Symbol Manager Operation Starting up the symbol manager Basic operation 252 1 Reference Window menu bar Symbol Manager Help Symbol Manager New Windows File Edit View Help Cascade ColourPalette Tile H E Supplement Symbols Arrange loons p 1 App5 21 Standard Screen The symbol manager window is always displayed at the top of the windows dis played on the screen If this disturbs your operation minimize the window by either clicking on the button at the upper right area in the window or select ing the minimize
157. fim Colo24 X24 Circle Imp red min Colo 48 X 48 Circle Imp yllw S frm IBColo40 X48 SW up red MOX48 SW down red 48X40 SW right blue Code Comp Mode Size Comments 0001 No 8 Colo24 X24 Circle Imp OFF min 0005 No Colo32 X32 Circle Imp OFF min frm 0006 No Colo24 X24 Circle Imp red min nofrm 8 40 40 Circle Imp OFF 0008 No 68 Colo48 X48 Circle Imp yllw S frm 0021 No 8 Colo40X48 SW up red 002204 B Colo40X48 SW down red 0023 No 6 Colo48X40 SW right blue Delete Ctr Cut CtbX New Delete Close New Delete Close Quitting the image table You can quit the image table in any of the two ways described below e Clicking the cise Button of the image table dialog e Clicking the Button at the upper right corner of the image table dialog 8 1 2 Creating Image Data Using Image Editor Registering new image data 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Click the New Button The New Image Entry dialog box is displayed 3 Set the code size colors compression comment of the image data to be newly created then click the Button EZ ce Window Help Table CT Image Editor Library Editor Mark Editor Code Comp Mode Size Comments Import YO Comments Change Address Validate Fl2 PT Configuration New Im
158. if required Click on z Select Alarm or Alarm Switch Screen from function combo box Setting items for Alarm function are displayed S to display function dialog 4 Make the settings for the alarm function See below Settings to make at Set dialog PLC Address Specify the bit in a PC PLC whose status is reflected by the bit memory table entry Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters Settings to make at Function dialog Function Select Alarm Switch Screen for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C and select Alarm for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Switch Screen The meaning of the Switch Screen setting differs between the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C To use the alarm function the check box must not have a check mark set in it If it does the screen switching function is selected NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C To display the specified screen by the operation of an alarm list history ele ment set a check mark in the check box Clear the check mark in the check box in order not to display the specified screen Screen No The message area displayed in the alarm list history element is a touch switch and pressing the touch switch that is in the selected state displays the specified Screen 289 Bit Memory
159. if a 100 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 100 value 0 Table Entry Specify this item is a 0 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral table Value Specify this item if a 0 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 0 value 10096 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral table 230 Graphs Section 6 9 Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set by a constant set the value to be taken for a 100 value Note that specification for 10096 is valid only when Display Sign is selected Guidance Analogue meters are displayed as follows depending on the settings of Shape Direction and Display sign Assumptions Direction Clockwise Display 3096 Sh Display Direction Direction Direction Direction Up T Down l Left Right 2 O O O Semi Circle O O Circle Which of 0 to 10096 and 100 to 10096 analogue meters is displayed should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general attributes Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 100 display N FF N FF N FF A present value is displayed as follows according to the types Needle Fill 608 60 Y 231 Graphs Section 6 9 Meter shape is displayed as follo
160. in the label property 10 For the key and the CLR key modify the label size to 1 x 2 For other keys the label size should not be modified 400 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 11 Select all the touch switches above 12 Select Centralize Label from the Draw menu The position of all the labels for the selected touch switch is centralized both vertically and horizontally Creating a temporary input field 1 Select Objects menu bar Data Input gt Numeral 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data input field is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of numeral in put field 3 At the cursor moving touch switch use selection dialog box set the dis played items as shown below Create Cursor Move Touch Switch Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C this dialog box is not dis played and accordingly the cursor moving touch switch cannot be set at the temporary input field For a temporary input field the setting of Create Cursor Move Touch Switch is not so significant Even with NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C it is not necessary to set this property 4 Set the properties as shown below Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing Attribute Standard Color Foreground Black Background White Table Entry 10 Display
161. input When the input terminal goes ON the screen is switched to the set screen If O is set the display returns to the previous screen Notify bit PT Extended I O input table uS o PC PLC 0000002 xternal input The extended I O input table notifies the PC PLC of the status ON OFF of the input terminals 291 Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 Control code input PT Extended I O input table Control code ata L 1234 External input Canceling backlight OFF When the input terminal goes ON it has the same effect as pressing of the control key PT Extended I O input table Backlight Orr tuneton OFF Backlight ON External inpu When the input terminal goes ON the backlight which has been turned OFF by the Cancel Backlight Off function set by a memory switch is turned ON to redis play the screen A backlight OFF function releasing attribute is automatically pro vided for the screen switching function and the control code input function N WARNING Do not use the input function of a PT extended I O input for applications that could cause fatal injury and or serious damage or as an emergency switch function 7 5 1 Oper
162. is moved by touch panel operation when the switch area is pressed Window Window in a moving status Screen Screen Screen LEM Touch switch Input key Control When the switch area is pressed the processing assigned to the specified con trol code is executed Screen 1 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Touch switch Input Key String When the switch area is pressed the characters of the label set for the switch are displayed in the string input field and stored in the string table String input field Screen Screen ABC PE ABC Touch switch Copy Setting When the switch area is pressed data is copied The following types of copying can be designated Data in Numeral table Numeral table Data in Numeral table Numeral Input field Data in String table String table Data in String table String Input field Constant Numeral table Constant gt Numeral Input field Screen BEN LM jm Touch switch Cursor Move The cursor moves from Numeral Input to Numeral Input fields when the switch area is pressed Screen Screen ES E 25 Ol 5978 5678
163. is not stored in the clipboard the data deleted by the clear function cannot be restored by the paste function 1 Click on the table entry number of the data to be cleared 2 Click on edit or right click the table entry number 3 Select Clear Operation procedure Cut The cut function cuts the data at the specified address of a table and stores it in the clip board The data deleted by the cut function can be used for pasting 1 Click on the table entry number of the data to be cut 2 Click on sso right click the table entry number 3 Select Cut Operation procedure Copy The copy function copies the data at the specified address of a table to the clip board The data copied by the copy function can be used for pasting 1 Click on the table entry number of the data to be copied 2 Click on Edit gt or right click the table entry number 3 Select Copy Operation procedure Paste The paste function pastes the data stored in the clip board by the cut or copy op eration to the specified table entry 1 Click on the table entry number of the table where the data is to be pasted 2 Click on g gt or right click the table entry number 3 Select Paste 273 Common Operation Section 7 1 Operation procedure Copy To Next The copy to next function copies the data at the specified address of a memory table to the next address after adding the specified amount to the existing da
164. item from the control menu box displayed by the clicking on the button at the upper left area in the window The symbol manager memorizes the folder that was open when you quit the symbol manager last time and opens the same folder automatically when you next start the symbol manager The symbol registration state in the folder is however the state when the folder was saved last Menu bar File New Creates a new file folder Open Displays a file folder that is not displayed in the screen Close Closes the file folder presently displayed in the screen The file is not deleted although it disappears from the screen Save Saves the specified folder by overwriting the present file Save As Saves the specified folder by changing the file name Folder name remains unchanged Save All Saves all folders to the individual files Exit Lets you exit the symbol manager Edit Cut Moves the specified symbol data to the clip board The data is deleted from the symbol manager Copy Copies the specified symbol data to the clip board The data remains in the symbol manager Paste Pastes the symbol data stored in the clip board by cut or paste to the active screen Delete Deletes the specified symbol data from the symbol manag er The data is not stored in the clip board Choose Icon Changes the icon design of the symbol data Change Label Changes a folder or symbol name View Status Bar Specifies whether or not
165. label in a touch switch Green Red Reference The following operation is also possible 1 Confirm that no element or element other than objective one is selected 2 While holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key click on the objective part of the element that consists of multiple elements 3 The element automatically enters into Edit Object mode so that the element selected at 2 can be edited Multiple Edit Mode for Recipe Touch Switch Activating Edit Modes To edit the component of a recipe element frame and touch switches 1 Select the Recipe element 2 Select Edit Object from the Edit menu or right click the mouse button and select Edit Object from the pop up menu This is the first level edit mode The recipe touch switches now behave like normal touch switches The touch Switches can be resized and moved When an internal touch switch is being se lected Edit Mode will be available again for you to manipulate the components of the internal touch switch by means of activating second level edit mode That is the Edit Object menu item both in pop up menu and main menu will not be checked and by selecting it the touch switch can be switched to edit mode You may also switch to edit mode using the Ins key In short using the Edit Object menu item or the Ins key will allow you to toggle between edit mode and selection mode or second edit level and first edit lev
166. monitor screens Contrast tuning screens 5 1 1 Setting the Screen Attributes 78 All screens have screen attributes used for setting the screen display specifica tions The information to be set as attributes specific to the individual screens includes screen number screen comment recording in display history backlight and buzzer control To display the attributes follow any of the operations indicated below Screen menu bar Properties Right click on a screen data icon in the application manager Properties e Right click at an arbitrary position on the screen Properties Double click at an arbitrary position on the screen Standard Screen Attributes Screen No I History Grid Title Comment Backlight Type Light Flash Byzzer tinuot Load Local 1 Keyboard v Load Local 2 ri T Colour Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Screen No History other than NT20S Title other than NT20S Comment Backlight Type Specify a screen number The screen number of an existing screen may be changed Specify whether or not the event of screen display is to be recorded in the display history record Screen history Log The display history function records the date time and frequency of screen display for screens for which the History at tribute check box is ticked The recorded display history can be checke
167. object Use as Default Registering the status of the selected object as the default for the object Centralize Label Centralizing label of lamp touch switch 22 Menu Chart Section 1 5 Objects T Fixed LL ane foe eae tre eed Specifying text Display Cirle e ante rv ceps EN Specifying a circle AIC iea A REA Specifying an arc P SOCIO A E Specifying a sector L Polyline i cece pee E Rex v Specifying a polyline Polygon e aia ey Specifying a polygon Specifying a rectangle THING nb ve teat eae woke SE Specifying tiling Image Display Specifying image data display I Library Display Specifying library data display Mal Kir us sace ert vex Specifying a mark Touch Switch 0 eens Specifying a touch switch Lamp Standard Specifying a standard lamp mage s mnes Specifying an image library lamp Datalnput Specifying a numeral setting input field i SUING EE Specifying a character string input field Thumbwheel Switch Specifying a thumbwheel switch Recipe nc cra rb nes Specifying a recipe screen element r Numeral Display Specifying a numeral display String Displays Specifyi
168. of a decimal point in the numeral to be displayed Numeric data is written to a numeral memory table entry without a decimal point and input data is stored as an integer Numeral 2341 is written to a numeral memory table entry e In the sign digit or is displayed To set a positive value specify a blank For a negative value specify N CAUTION When the numeral values entered are confirmed upper lower limits are checked Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 1 If you use a thumbwheel switch to input numeric data the set data is written to a numeral memory table entry at each pressing of the or key This means that the values during data setting are also written to the memory table 2 With a thumbwheel type numeric setting input field if n n m m upper limit 1n n lower limit Om m n and m are arbitrary values at each digit carry over and shift to the lower digit are not possible at the highest digit posi tion Data Input Section 6 4 Example When 1200 is set for the Maximum and 201 is set for the Minimum if the initial value is a 3 digit value the setting value can be changed only in the range of 201 to 999 and if the initial value is a 4 digit value the setting value can be changed only in the range of 1000 to 1200 This is because the limit check function detects an error if the most significant digit value is changed
169. of memory tables The screen no xxx was a history occur rence frequency Screen that is not supported in this model It is dis carded Since the number of entries that can be used in the memory tables depend on the PT model conversion is executed in the manner shown below 469 Data Conversion Appendix A Difference NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 512 1000 or 2000 NT620S NT620C NT625C NT11S NT11 NT600S Numeral memory table 512 or 1000 Character string memory table String 256 1000 or 2000 256 or 1000 table Bit memory table 256 Extended I O input table Extended I O output table 256 or 1000 F key input notify table Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Action A memory table number that is out side the allowable range for the memory table is The memory table number is reset to 0 Object Name re fers to invalid nu meral table entry The referenced table entry is reset Correct the memory table number to the one that is in the valid range If the memory table number is specified in a used for display or input to entry O program correct it also Refer to Dialog Box Settings in the PT Con figuration on page 45 Correction related to contents of numeral memor
170. of the copy source screen data matches to the setting of the copy destination screen data Selected PT model can be checked on the status bar It is not possible to edit the same screen data file by two Support Tools If you try to read out the file that is already opened by the other Support Tool error mes sage will be displayed The second Support Tool can read out the screen data file regardless of the file types onw mmi When the second Support Tool is started the windows of both Support Tools are automatically resized into normal windows that overlap each other to facili tate the copy operation between the files It is not possible to open one more Support Tool when two Support Tools are already started Import Component will not be displayed in the File menu when no screen data is opened with the Support Tool Conversion of PLC address is executed when the PLC vendor direct access is different between the copy source destination screen data Conversion of key code is executed when the key code font type is different between the copy source destination screen data In case of the numeral string table and bit memory table if the table size of copy destination is smaller than the size of copy source excessive entries will be discarded To achieve higher performance close the second Support Tool after you com pleted import operation Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 t may tak
171. one code When two or more codes are selected paste opera tion can not be performed 3 Click the edit Button or right click on the selected code 4 Select Paste Paste can not be selected if the library data to be pasted is not stored in the Library Editor Section 8 2 clipboard After clicking the f Button in confirmation dialog box li brary data will be pasted to th Delete Ctri L Quitting the library table You can quit the library table in any of the two ways described below e Clicking the cese Button of the library table dialog e Clicking the Button at the upper right corner of the library table dialog 8 2 2 Creating Library Data Using Library Editor Registering new library data 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Click the x Button The New Library Entry dialog box is displayed 3 Set the code size colors compression comment of the library data to be newly created then click the Button EXE Connect Window Library Table Table mage Editor Code Size Comments Mark Editor Import I O Comments Validate 12 PT Configuration Comments Code Find Next Search Direction C Up Down Comments Carel Hep Delete Close Setting for New Library Entry dialog box Code Specify t
172. or Alarm that you want to associate Then click 1 Select the touch switch you want to disassociate Select only one element 2 Select Disassociate from the Draw menu Touch switch disassociation will be performed 6 1 9 Centralizing the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch With the Support Tool the label of lamp touch switch can be centralized within the element both vertical and horizontal directions This function is useful for 117 Section 6 1 Common Operation Reference example when the label is edited after the creation of lamp touch switch Touch switch has two kinds of areas one is the displayed figure and the other is the touch sensing area Centralize Label is performed toward the touch sensing area 1 Select the lamp touch switch you want to centralize Multiple selection is also possible However Centralize Label cannot be performed if no lamps or touch switches are included in the selected ele ments Centralize Label can be performed also when elements other than lamp or touch switch are included in the selected elements Nothing is performed for elements other than lamp or touch switch 2 Select Centralize Label from the Draw menu or click on 3 button or press Ctrl key L Objects Screen Tools Selector Group CtritG t Uneroup Girit x 1 cP E Bring to Front Ctrl F 5 t u Send To Back Ctrl B N Labels uum
173. please refer to the operation manual of PT Local window This window will be closed when the screen displayed on PT is switched By setting local window for attribute of each screen specified window can be opened at the same time the screen is opened Up to two local windows can be opened at the same time Local window 1 Local window 2 Local window can be opened closed or moved by following operations Setting screen attribute Opens when the screen is displayed 95 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 Touch switch operation By Input key window keyboard touch switch and win dow move touch switch Operation of Window Control Area from the host Types of windows can be specified when opening the window It is possible to open same window as a Global window or as a Local window However multiple display of the same window is not possible Opening Closing and moving a window Window can be controlled by the following operations Opening windows by setting screen attribute When creating screen using Support Tool up to two windows can be selected to be displayed when opening the screen By this method window is displayed at the position that was specified when win dow screen was created This type of window will be local window For details of the setting refer to 5 7 7 Setting the Screen Attributes Screen 5 Screen 23 Window Opening Closing and moving a
174. points from Start Range to End Range Change Comment Specify whether or not the same I O comment appended to an address before the change is appended to the address after the change To append the same I O comment click on the check box to display a check mark in it Batch address change processing starts when you click on this button In the operation for changing addresses in bit units processing is executed as suming that bit 15 of a word is immediately followed by bit 0 of the next word Addresses are changed as shown below according to the set search range and the address after the change Example Bit memory table Address and Bit set Address and Bit set for End Range for Start Range ClOarea 1 ClO area Bit 15 0 15 10 0 a a TT EET Bit 15 0 15 0 ee eee EE etr E HR area Word 11 HR area Word 10 t Change To Address start address after the change Before change After change 0000010 H0001000 0000012 H0001002 0000100 H0001006 0000110 H0001100 0000115 E H0001105 1 Click on Change Address T Select the type of word before the change in the Channel box Specify the range of the change by setting addresses at the Start Range and End Range boxes 4 Specify the word and the address after the change
175. recipe number is 200 Name Specifies the name of the recipe entry A character string of up to 12 characters can be accepted Insert Mark Insert a mark object in recipe name Comment Specifies a comment for recipe entry A character string of up to 24 characters can be accepted No of Records Inputs the number of records required for this recipe entry If this entry is being created default value is 2 Allocate up to a maximum of 200 digits 313 Recipe Table Section 7 10 No of Parameters Inputs the number of parameters required for this recipe entry If this entry is be ing created default value is 2 Allocate up to a maximum of 200 digits Storage Type Sets the numeral data type for parameter values in each record of this recipe entry PLC Address Inputs the starting PLC address for this recipe entry Bit addresses cannot be specified Set Sets the starting PLC address via an address composition dialog Comments Inputs comments for the starting PLC address By default the current comment is shown A character string of up to 16 characters can accept 7 10 3 Record Setting Table Start amp ddress 100020 Hawaiian 3 ve getarian No Record Lock Cheese Water Sa 12 7 3 J lt Edit gt O 6 4 3 GoTo Entry Asert Math Import Export Reset Width Close Search Help Thi
176. reserved for future extension of PT functions Screens should not be registered to the screen numbers of these reserve screens Occurrence history screen An occurrence history screen displays the numbers of screens displayed by Switch screen operations in the order of occurrence Frequency history screen A frequency history screen displays the numbers of screens displayed by Switch screen operations in the order of frequency Password screen This screen exists for the secure protection of a designated screen so that us ers can switch the screen only when the accurate password is input Menu screen Menu screen serves as a control screen to switch to a designated screen through the operation of numeric key Print Format screen If this screen is assigned printing can be done by simple operation Programming Console Screen This screen can be used to execute Programming Console functions with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C User editing of this screen is not possible Refer to 5 12 Programming Console Screen for details Device Monitor Screen This screen can be used to execute device monitoring functions with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 User editing of this screen is not pos sible Refer to 5 13 Device Monitor Screen for details 19 Basic Operation Flow Section 1 4 1 4 Basic Operation Flow The procedure for creating a screen using the Support Tool is shown below CAUTION C
177. result Result Type This is to specify type of the result Choices for result types are 1 Numeral Table Entry 2 PLC Address Dialog boxes are same as that of corresponding Edit Operand dialog boxes Re fer to 7 9 6 Description of Edit Operand Fields Dialog Box for Ul and fields 7 9 8 Description of Move To Fields This dialog box will be used to move a mathematical table entry to any of the ex isting entry Entry NN Cancel Entry Help Specifies the table entry number of the table where current entry will be moved The cursor moves to the specified table entry number Entries following this will be moved downwards to adjust for the moved entry 310 Recipe Table Section 7 10 7 10 Recipe Table Each application has one recipe table A recipe table see Section 7 10 2 con sists of a number of entries Each entry consists of a collection of records and each record consists of a number of parameters or attributes Parameters desig nate consecutive memory areas from a starting address defined for each recipe entry Each standard screen is limited to one recipe screen element A recipe screen element see Section 6 11 1 is a compound screen element consisting of an alarm like grid structure and some touch switches It is like a collection of numer al inputs featuring access and display of data from the recipe table Recipe Table is only available in the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 System V
178. screen Zoom Zooms the screen to 100 view Normal 20096 400 or 800 If the grid is set it will also be zoomed to the respective size It will help you to operate small elements Zoom can be performed as follows 1 Select Zoom from View menu On this menu current zoom percentage is displayed using check mark Displaying window keyboard Show Window Keyboard Local window Keyboard set for attribute of currently displayed screen can be displayed overlapping on the screen to check the actual status to be displayed on PT Local window 2 is available only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above Show Window Keyboard command can be performed as follows 1 Open a property sheet of the screen and set a check mark for the window type to be displayed and specify the screen number 2 Select Show Window Keyboard from the View menu and specify the win dow keyboard type to be displayed Local 1 Keyboard or Local 2 Check mark will be set on menu next to the name of the displayed window type Each time you select window the check mark switches to the objective one and according to it window keyboard display will be changed 5 1 4 Filter Function Support Tool has a filter function that can show only the specified object on the Screen It is possible to edit select objects while this function is executed So it will be use ful when you correct or edit complicated screen In ad
179. screen 50 lines screen data file Lamp NT20S NT600S 255 entries screen Other models 256 entries screen 128 entries screen Touch Switch NT20S NT600S 128 entries screen Other models 256 entries screen 72 entries screen Data Input Numeral Data Input String 50 entries screen overlapping screens Registration is possible only on one child Screen Alarm List Alarm History NT20S NT600S Not supported Other models 4 groups screen max 32 groups in overlapping screens 533 Limits on Numbers of Elements New Models 534 Item Appendix F Limit Fixed Display 65 535 entries screen overlapping screens max 524 280 entries Numeral Display 256 entries screen overlapping screens 1 max 1 024 entries String Display 256 entries screen overlapping screens 1 max 1 024 entries Image Data 256 entries screen including library data overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Library Data 256 entries screen including image data overlapping screens max 1 024 entries Mark Display fixed dis play 65 535 entries screen overlapping screens max 52 480 entries Bar Graph 50 entries screen overlapping screens 1 max 400 entries Analogue Meter 2 50 entries screen overlapping screens max 400 entries Broken line Graph 1 frame screen overlapping screens max 8 frames 256 lines frame
180. screen can be used in the same manner as a standard screen it should not be used unless absolutely necessary since it is used by the expansion function 97 Occurrence History Screen Section 5 6 If data is registered as a standard screen the registered data is given priority The screen numbers used for an extended screen are indicated below PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1980 to 1996 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C None 5 6 Occurrence History Screen An occurrence history screen displays the screen numbers recorded by the dis play history Screen History function in the order of displayed date and time This function records the date time of display and the number of times the screen was displayed for the screens for which the History attribute is ticked in the screen property The occurrence history screen provided with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C has a blank area at the right side in the screen so that scroll and screen switching touch switches can be created Other area of the screen must not be changed The screen number of the occurrence history screen is indicated below PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1997 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9001 Cannot edit Only display is possible The screen to be displayed differs according to the PT model E
181. screens 468 Correction related to number of window keyboard screens to be opened 467 Correction related to overlapping screens 467 Correction related to sampling cycles of trend graphs 481 Correction related to the 100 value 0 value and 100 value of a graph 481 Correction related to the lamp label ON state 477 Correction related to the maximum and minimum limit check function for numeral input 478 Correction related to the number of memory tables 469 Correction related to the system initial screen Host Connect screen 468 Correction related to the system keypad 474 Correction related to the touch switch for which the copy function is set 476 coursor position 40 Cursor Position 40 data conversion 463 Data creation screen 39 device monitor 482 dialog box 43 Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration 45 Direct access PLC vendor 461 direct connection type 47 Edit Operation 272 Enable 49 Error Messages 543 544 545 Exit 39 Extended I O Input Tables 291 File types 55 floating palette 42 History Setting 48 I O Comment Tables 296 Comments 53 Import 463 Import I O Comments 301 Importing I O Comment from Ladder Program 299 Initial 278 Initial Screen 48 Inserting Image Data 285 Inserting Library Data 286 Inserting Mark Data 284 Installing the System Program 488 566 interlock function 479 Key Input 49 Limits on display 5
182. se lect Draw menu bar Associate With To disassociate the touch switch from an input field select Draw menu bar Disassociate Cursor movement among data input fields is also possible using control code input touch switches for which arrow symbol key codes are set 222 Touch Switches Section 6 8 6 8 8 Window Moving Touch Switch Function Moving window Settings Function setti Guidance ng only When a window move touch switch on a window is pressed window can be moved by touch panel operation at PT This touch switch function is available only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Procedure for moving a window is as follows 1 Press a window move touch switch on a window to be moved 2 Press the touch panel at a destination position of a window center position of window comes and a window moves to that position Window Window ih a moving status Screen Screen Screen T 7 1 2 3 6 8 9 Print Screen Touch Switch Function Print screen Settings Printing of Display Screen Start Specify when starting printing of screen hard copy Abort Specify when aborting printing Guidance A print screen touch switch is used to print the image hard copy of the pres ently displayed screen Printing of a hard copy can be aborted
183. setting screen properties Editing tables Saving the created data to a file Sending downloading the created data to a PT Icons used by the application manager 64 9 App 1 Name of application folder When a file name has been specified the file name specified by App 1 is used Double clicking of this icon opens a set of sub data box by screen type 13 screen Screen data box Double clicking of this icon displays the screen data boxes classified by group table Table data box Double clicking of this icon shows memory tables classified by icon 9 1 1899 2000 Standard Screen data boxes classified by screen type 1 1899 2000 Indicates a screen number Standard Indicates screen type Double clicking of this icon displays the screen icons in a group The screen number and screen type displayed here differ from PT models Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Ba 1 Screen icon 1 Indicates a screen number Double clicking of this icon opens a data creation screen ff numeral memory table Table data icon Numeral memory table Indicates a table type Double clicking of this icon opens a memory table dialog box setting The type of table to be displayed differs depending on the PT model When you click on displayed to the left of a 4 icon icons existing under the clicked icon are displayed Clicking on hides these icons 4 2 Operating the Application Manager The procedure for opera
184. specified contents are displayed in the extended I O input table entry 7 6 Extended I O Output Table An extended I O output table controls the output terminal of an extended I O unit according the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit Extended I O units can be used only with NT30 and NT30C PT 0001002 4 1 Extended I O output table PC PLC address PC PLC External output 295 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 7 6 1 Operation Procedure An extended l O output table entry is displayed by following the operation de scribed below e Select Tools menu bar Table Extended I O Output tab Setting With an extended I O output table entry the objective of an operation is specified by clicking on the line Setting is performed by using the setting dialog box that is displayed by clicking on E For the operation procedure for Change Address Edit gt and Goto Entry refer to 7 1 Common Operation 7 6 2 Description of Extended I O Output Table Fields Numeral l String I O Comments l Extended I O Input Extended I O Output Bit Memory PLC Address vO Comment Change Address Edit Set Goto Entry No Extended I O unit output terminal number PLC Address Specify the PC PLC bit that controls the output terminal of an extended I O unit Comment Specify a comment for
185. strings A3 be used only with models V2 System Ver 3 1 and above General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Input Touch Switch Objects Numeral Input String Input Thumbwheel Switch Library Image Display Type 7 Object Library Display Mark Can be used A 1 Can be used only with models with V1 and above A Only use is insertion into character strings General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 1 3 2 Correspondence to PC PLC Data The following table shows objects that are capable of transmitting data with PC PLC to execute processing such as updating the screen display Object Input Output Standard Lamp PC PLC bit address PT Numeral table 1 PT String table 1 Image Library Lamp PC PLC Bit address Touch Switch PC PLC bit address for lamp PC PLC bit address for in terlock 1 PT Numeral table 1 PT String table 1 Notify Bit bit address Switch Screen Input key Window Keyboard Window Move Can be used only on Win dow Screen Copy Setting Numeral String table Input key Control Input key String Cursor Move Print Screen Thumbwheel Switch PC PLC bit address for in terlock 1 PT Numeral table Numeral Display PT Numeral table String Display PT String table Bar Graph Analogue Meter Broken l
186. switch used to clear Clear display the graph display is used Note that the log data is not cleared by this switch Line Value Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table entry whose contents are displayed in a trend graph Display 96 Specify whether or not a percentage value is displayed on the screen Line Color Specify the graph line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Style Specify the line type Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 100 value 0 Table Entry Specify this item if a 0 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 0 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 0 value 10096 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 10096 value 242 Graphs Section 6 9 Note that specification for 10096 is valid only when Display Sign
187. table entry string table is returned to the initial value If the PT has the memory table initialization function this function can also be used to return the content of a character string memory table entry string table to the initial value Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 By clicking the Insert Mark Insert Image or Insert Library Button you can insert mark data image data or library data into a character string With the NT21 and NT31 631 without NT20 30 620 compatible mode insert insert Library _ are not enabled Initial Specify whether or not the contents of the character string memory table entry string table are written to the allocated words in the host when the PT is switched on or reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN The term initialize means the processing to initialize the content of words in the host with the content in a character string memory table entry string table The setting for Initial is not valid if a character string memory table entry string table is not allocated to a host word To make Initial valid click on the check box to display a cross mark in the box If the box is clicked on while it is in the valid state Initial is made invalid Reference The content of character string memory table entries string table at the start of PT operation is as shown below according to whether or not a character
188. that installa tion is to be stopped Clicking on this button displays the actual folder configuration in tree form You can select the folder in this display to install the Support Tool 1 Start up Windows 2 Setthe Support Tool CD ROM in the CD ROM drive The setup program au tomatically starts Follow step 6 onward If the setup program does not start automatically execute the setup program according to the steps shown be low You can execute the setup program by double clicking Setup exe in the Support Tool system disk by displaying Windows Explorer In this case steps 3 4 and 5 below can be skipped 31 Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 3 Click on the Start button of Windows and select Run US Programs L Documents Settings Find amp Help 1 Bun ap Shut Down MStar 4 Input d FD_Version Disk1 Setup exe in the input field in the displayed window Note that drive designation must agree with the name of the drive where you set the CD ROM If you set the CD ROM in drive E input e FD Version Disk1 Setup exe Run 21x resource and Windows will open it for you Open D FD_Version Disk1 Setup exe 31 Type the name of a program folder document or Internet Cancel Browse 5 Click on The installation is started 6 When the setup screen of the Support Tool is displayed click the Button The sc
189. the file where the symbol data was originally stored with the symbol data in the specified folder Saves the symbol data of the specified folder to the file of the specified file name Cts Overwrites the individual original files with the symbol data that was open Reference Before executing Save or Save As click the object folder Copying deleting the registered symbol Registered symbols can be moved or copied to another folder or deleted To move copy or delete a registered symbol select Edit in the menu bar then select the required function Cut Copy Paste Delete Moves the specified symbol to the clip board Help The specified symbol is deleted from the source folder Copies the specified symbol to the clip board The specified symbol remains in the source folder Pastes the symbol stored in the clip board by the cut or copy function to the currently selected folder Deletes the specified symbol The symbol is not stored in the clip board Cut Ctriex Copy Ctrl C Paste Delete Del Choose Icon Change Label Move or copy of a symbol is also possible by dragging the symbol using the mouse e If a symbol is dragged to another folder the symbol is moved If a symbol is dragged to another folder while the Ctrl key is held the symbol is copied In these operations the mark is displayed at the mouse cursor 6 10 4 Pasting a Symbol to Screen To p
190. the main window Double click on the NT Transfer Utility icon at the upper left area of the main window Click on the NT Transfer Utility icon at the upper left area of the main window and select Close from the displayed control menu box Press F4 key while holding down the Alt key The screen returns to the Windows screen after the NT Transfer Utility is closed Communication Setting at the NT Transfer Utility Set the baud rate and communication port at the NT Transfer Utility personal computer 1 Select Configure menu bar gt Comms Setting The communication setting dialog box is displayed COM Port ea ej 1 Verify Cancel Help 2 Set the data for the displayed item The meanings of the items are described below 493 NT Transfer Utility Appendix C Item Description COM Port Specify the RS 232C port to be used Specify either COM1 or COM2 Baud Rate Set the data communication rate If High is set high speed data communication is pos sible Not available for NT11S NT11 It is recommended to specify Standard to ensure er ror free communication if a communication error oc curs due to an inadequate communication environ ment Data communication at the Standard setting will take about twice the time required in the High setting 3 After completing the setting for all items click on Sending Downloading the Data The screen data fi
191. the status bar which displays menu item functions etc is displayed un Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 der the window In the menu if there is a check mark to the left of Status Bar the status bar is displayed Help Contents Displays the help information Search for Help on Enables you to display help information on the input word About Symbol Manager Displays information such as the ver sion of the symbol manager Screen Operation Supp lement y mbols Double click on the folder or symbol name and the folder opens to display the list of registered symbol data Double clicking on the folder or symbol name while the list of the registered symbol data is displayed causes the folder to close so that only the folder name is displayed indicates that symbol data is registered for the folder is displayed when the folder is open Clicking on this has the same effect as double clicking on the folder name Reference Folders are displayed in the alphabetical order of the folder names In a folder the list of symbol data displays the symbol data in the alphabetical order of the symbol names 6 10 3 Operating the Symbol Manager Opening a folder file Reference Open a folder in which symbol data is registered By opening the symbol collections supplied with the Support Tool or the files saved by the symbo
192. this item to display the input numeric value in decimal Hexadecimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in hexade cimal Format Integer Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input data Decimal Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the input data Zero Suppression Specify whether or not leading zeros are suppressed to dis play the input data Display Sign Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value mu Displays the list of numeral memory table entries Guidance With a numeral display element the memory table designation method can be selected as direct designation or indirect designation 201 Numeral Display Section 6 6 Example Specifying numeral memory table address 2 Direct designation Indirect designation Numeral Numeral memory table memory table 1 Display 1 Display 2 5 5 2 5 123 3 3 4 4 do f 5 5 128 v The contents of the specified memory table entry are treated as the table address reference value and the contents of the referenced memory table entry are displayed The contents of the specified memory table entry are displayed Indirect designation is possible only in the following cases Do not apply for other cases e When C200H I F unit is used When the NT21 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 or N
193. to be displayed Objects Fixed Display Image Display or Li brary Display Display the graphic using indirect reference Write the image library code 1 in hexadecimal value to the numeral table entry set the storage type to Binary referenced at 2 according to the status Quick Reference Displaying graphics To use the same graphic in multiple application data Operation 1 Window Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and register the created data at the symbol manager 2 Open other screen data 3 Window gt Symbol Manager Read the registered data Section 10 1 Refer to File Import Component Start up the second Support Tool Perform copy amp paste operation of graphic between the screen data files Between the files of the same PT model setting only 407 Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Displaying To display text that will not 1 Objects Fixed Display Text character change Create a text strings texts To switch the character 1 Objects Lamp or Touch Switch string according to the status of a PC PLC bit Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static is set as the label type Turn the PC PLC bit to which the lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen If ON 4 DEF It OFF Lamp or
194. to import I O comment will be dis played Click the Button to clear the message In this case the contents of the I O comment table in Support Tool remain unchanged If this message box is displayed check the following points Is the data format of the I O comment file to be imported tab delimited text file correct see the following page If an import is aborted in the middle of the import operation comments in the Support Tool will remain unchanged Text file format to be imported by the Support Tool The Support Tool can read the tab delimited text file which was created by the user as an I O comment file Here the rule for the text file format is described I O Comment Table Section 7 7 Format One line must be constructed as follows Name TAB PLC address TAB comment Enter Example START 0 01 START ON STOP 0 02 STOP OFF N DataV1082 DM1082 N DataA1083 DM1083 Speed2 For details of the format rule see the description below and the Example of im port Name The Support Tool imports only the PLC address and the I O comments to the I O comment table Therefore the address name can be omitted In this case however be sure to insert TAB code before PLC address Example TAB 0 01 TAB S TART ON Enter PLC address Each word type should be expressed as shown below To specify a bit number input bit number after a decimal point SETS None HR area HR or H HR120 H12
195. to select one or more languages for export from among them 509 Translation Support Utility Appendix D The ID for screen objects containing the label and the source text will be mandatory export fields and therefore will be exported automatically For multi line text new lines will remain unchanged and also image library and mark codes will remain in binary when exported Non translated text will be exported as blank Column widths will take the default for Microsoft Excel after export The ex ported format in Excel will resemble that of the Translation Table Import 1 2 You are allowed to export translated string data for one or more languages of your selection and also will be able to view and change each data item under a language before it is imported The following will be displayed for selection and navigation by the user Listing and selection of source column headers in Excel to be imported Display of corresponding target column headers into which the column data from Excel will be imported Read only Listing of source text for selected items in selected language and corresponding translation text existing in Translation Support Utility tables read from the database Display of text that is being exported corresponding to selection made above with facility for editing Navigational buttons for moving up and down each data item for the se lected language Import All facility will also be provid
196. tool bar Displaying not displaying utility bar Alignment Displaying not displaying alignment bar Status Bal cesse bles er galas eae dy ern rw edd a Displaying not displaying status bar Full Screen zx poner ERO XI ree dave ed Changing over entire screen display Zoom FS 10096 ier per Changing display enlargement scale 100 L 20096 esee er Re rn Changing display enlargement scale 200 L 40096 cern Rer E ER Changing display enlargement scale 400 80096 cette aes Changing display enlargement scale 800 Error Log oer one ie ances aah aan anes Displaying the error log I Simulate Displaying flash status of an object L Simulate ON OFF Displaying lamp ON OFF status Draw Selector Selecting object Grouping objects Ungroup Ungrouping objects Bringto Front Bringing object to the front I SendtoBack Sending object to the back Associate with Associating touch switch with object I Disassociate Canceling association of touch switch with object I SetOrder Specifying moving order among numeral character string input fields I Properties Setting attributes of selected
197. transmission is indi cated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on mese 495 NT Transfer Utility Appendix C 5 After data transmission is completed click on in the message box 6 The dialog to confirm the screen data is displayed see below Upload File Information x File Information PT Mode NT31 V1 PLC Vendor Omron File Size 34164 7 Click on and the file name setting window is displayed Save in a Data e File name Screen data Save as type Memory Map Image File rnmi Cancel Open as read only Specify the folder and file name where data is to be stored and click on sae The warning message about the mmi format is displayed Click on and the screen data is saved to the specified file in mmi format If you specify the existing file the overwrite confirmation message is dis played For details of the file name setting dialog refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File Reference The screen data file received from a PT can be edited using the Support Tool 496 Appendix D Translation Support Utility The Translation Support Utility is utility software that runs on Windows 95 98 Me 2000 Xp and Windows NT Ver 4 The Translation Support Utility was developed to help in translating a language to another supported language Currently translation for label contents in NTST can only be performed manually by opening and editing individual vis
198. val ues at the set intervals in the range from 0 to 100 or from 100 to 100 and displayed in the form of a trend graph Selection using the menu bar Objects Graph Trend Graph Selection using the drawing toolbar Display and control touch switches Only NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 240 Graphs Section 6 9 Property setting Data logging Background General Position Indicates the display position of the trend graph The reference point is at the upper left corner of the trend graph Size Indicates the size of the trend graph Display Type Specify the trend graph display type Standard Pen Reco pen recording Drawing Width Specify the amount of graph shift when the display is updated Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for the trend graph Display Sign Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is displayed Direction Specify the direction of trend graph movement Right 2 Left Up Down 1 Sampling Cycle Specify the graph updating time interval NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 0 1 second unit NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 0 5 second unit Color Frame Specify the color of the trend graph frame if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of trend graph displayed for a positive value Can only be set f
199. when the area type and address are input individually If the PC PLC address is directly input in the Control Notify Area page it is not necessary to call this dialog box Example PLC Vendor OMRON Channel None Pick Ox Server Point Cancel Help Channel Word Specify the type of PC PLC area that is used as a PT Status Control Area a PT Status Notify Area or a Window Control Area by selecting an item from the drop down list box Address Specify the first word address in the PC PLC area that is to be used as the PT Status Control Area PT Status Notify Area and Window Control Area Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Comments Set a comment concerning the area set as the PT Status Control Area a PT Status Notify Area or a Window Control Area As a comment a character string of up to 16 characters can be set Clock Address When the PT is set to the NT21 the addresses must be set to read the clock from the PLC host This setting is not necessary for other models of PT If the PT is set to the NT21 on the tools page of the PT configuration dialog box the clock address dialog box shown below appears Always set an address when using the clock function data displays screen display history or alarm history Clock Address Address PLO Address VO Gomments PLC Address Set the area and the address of the first word from which to read the clock data
200. with o NT21 NT31 with V2 Not needed 1 When converting the screen data from NT30 620 series to NT31 631 se ries we recommend converting to NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 using NT30 620 compatible mode This requires less modification of screen data and is easy to perform In this case check if the system pro gram installed in the PT is Ver3L For details of how to install the system program refer to Appendix B System Installer Operation 2 conversion check if NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode Configura tion PT Type is selected In the default status the check mark will be ON when trying to convert screen data from the NT20S NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C to the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 Correcting colors Conversion from monochrome display models to color display models Colors black and white remain as they are after the conversion If you want to color the converted data change or color the data as needed Conversion from color display models to monochrome display models Colors are converted into black or white as shown below Colors for objects other than Image Black blue red magenta Black Green cyan yellow white White Colors for Image Black Black Blue red magenta green cyan yellow white White Change the colors as needed Correcting the PLC addresses On data conversion between direct acce
201. with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above Either of numeral input numeric key type or string input can be registered on a window keyboard screen Thumbwheel type numeral input can not be registered on a window key board screen Limits on Numbers of Elements Appendix F Limits on display For elements limits are also applied to display in addition to the limits on the numbers shown above Limits on reading the data For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the allowable number of data entries that can be read at the same time is set and read elements exceed ing this limit are not displayed If the same data is read from different elements reading of the data is counted separately Refer to the appendix in the NT21 31 631 Reference Manual for the allowable maximum number of data entries that can be read 535 Appendix G New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 Here differences between the Support Tool Ver 3 3 and Ver 4 1 and the new functions added to Ver 4 1 are shown in the table Various functions are added to Ver 4 1 to improve operational efficiency NT31 631 V2 Models support Not supported The following PT Models are sup ported NT31 V2 NT31C V2 NT631 V2 NT631C V2 Section Different On off de scription for standard lamp touch switch Not supported The following functions are sup ported On description and Off description of standard lamp touch switch can be d
202. with the data set for Replace With All appearances are replaced with the specified data at one time Operation procedure search 1 Specify the table address the start position of the search range 2 Click on seen 3 Select the objective of the search in the Search By box 4 Specify the search objective data in the Find What box B Click on Numeral strine VO Comments Bit Memory LC Addres l O System 11000000 m Syste 2 D00001 0 LT System 21000093 Initial Storage Type Words 1000004 1000005 1000006 91000010 E 2 D00012 Seach By madres SC 1000014 jind Wht Close PLO Address Numeral Sting VO Comments Bit Memory Replace Ali Replace With I PLC Address gm 21000010 r e 2 D00012 1000014 52 4 1l a 77 eS 9 1 Specify the table address the start position of the replace range 2 Click on Search 3 Select the objective of replace in the Search By box 4 Specify the data to be replaced in the Find What box 5 Specify the data to replace the old data in the Replace With box 269 Common Operation Section 7 1 6 Click on Replace Or Replace All Nomersi Siring VO Comments Bit Memory Initial Storage Typa Words PLC Addres VO Saach De came Eid Next Find What Close PLC
203. without NT20 30 620 compatible mode image data cannot be used in a string Reference With a standard lamp only the lamp color and the label color change To change the contents of a label create image library lamps and display different image library data according to the status of the lamp Example ON gt OFF Image library lamp With the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above you can also change the contents of a label by specifying ON OFF Static as label type With the NT21 and NT31 631 without NT20 30 620 compatible mode image data cannot be inserted into a label 6 5 2 Image library Lamps Different image library data are displayed according to the status of a PC PLC bit Bit status Display when Display when the bitis OFF the bitis ON 1 The image data or the library data is switched to be displayed according to the status of the allocated PC PLC bit Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Lamp Image 197 Lamps Section 6 5 Selection using the drawing toolbar E Terminology Image library data Property setting General OFF State Code Specify whether or not image library data is displayed in the lamp OFF state and the code of the image library data to be displayed ON State Code Specify whether or not image library data is displayed in the lamp ON state and the code of the image library data to be displ
204. 0 12 H0 12 AR area Foo or A mo mewo Ww p po E _ Boe ia EM bank specification EC_20 0 Bank specification hexade cimal 1 digit CS1 series does not have an LR area If an LR area bit L00000 to L00199 is set to screen data it will be automatically converted to CIO 01000 to CIO 01199 inside the PT 303 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 comment If an I O comment longer than 16 characters is set the remaining characters are discarded Example of import EE Import OKNE wem 0 c mea e ABC INE momen IN que memaem INS mee eee o bwose e emacmmewe 000 awamaen ME A Blank space TAB TAB code Enter Enter code EOF End of file Reference It may take time to import comments when there are many I O comments 304 e There are the PLC address I O Comment and Reference in an I O comments table Addresses with no comment and no reference will not be downloaded to PT See below Can be downloaded x Cannot be downloaded Lines in an I O comment table with only the PLC address input for future use etc will not be downloaded to PT and as a result whe
205. 0 cece eee eee 92 5 4 2 Improved Input Key window Keyboard Function 95 959 Extended Screen fice ERE ee sae ages Ie EINEN CBE Hea 97 5 6 Occurrence History Screen 0 2 ec ehe 98 5 7 Frequency History Sereen iiis uias Sige Se D OR IR Ra See au 99 5 8 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen 99 5 9 Password SCreenoc i i e Web Oe a e Eb e nex pe XR 100 23 10 Men Screen e meunhrkeheebeb6erb Petes Sad SIR BL RAN 101 S211 Print Format Sereen eee eo ee ee eee 101 5 12 Programming Console Screen 0 0 eee teens 101 5 13 Device Monitor Screen 1 0 ee eee mms 102 5 14 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment 0 0 2 cee eee eee 102 77 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 5 1 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations The Support Tool provides various types of screen The screens that can be created using the Support Tool are shown below The screens that can be used differ depending on the PT model Standard screens Continuous overlapping screens Window Keyboard screens Extended screens Occurrence history screens Frequency history screens Host connect screens system initializing screens The screen attributes and grid can be set for each screen individually Password screens Menu screens Print format screens Device
206. 063 063 063 063 039 2 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix M Windows ISO8859 1 MS DOS CP437 v9 iod 190 ro 4 191 168 a 4 v e imum 198 146 189 128 E 203 069 i I 204 073 1 205 073 i 206 073 i 207 9 D 208 068 N N 209 165 O 211 079 0 212 079 213 079 N A N N ee 1 3 N E Ea 557 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix M em omm 236 141 237 161 238 140 239 139 240 100 241 164 242 149 243 162 245 111 246 148 247 246 248 237 249 151 250 163 251 150 252 129 7 ly P t Not Used y Destination Windows 1508859 1 MS DOS CP437 8 214 153 215 120 217 083 9 O 216 079 S 7 88 218 083 219 083 220 154 221 089 222 084 223 225 97 226 224 133 3 131 227 097 2 225 160 230 145 231 135 232 138 233 130 228 13 558 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix M 5 Conversion Rule from CP437 to 1508859 1 This conversion will be performed at the time when you try to change the PT Type to the NT21 and NT31 V1 31C V1 631 V1 631C V1 and above with Font Type ISO8859 1 souce NI an 128 199 153 214 129 252 154 220 130 233 155 162 131 2
207. 0download onw 6201TC LINE onw Flename 631C KK LINEG onw Save as type NTST Application onw Cancel After inputting the folder and file name click the Button the screen data is saved to the specified file If the file name of an existing file is specified a message requesting confirma tion that the file is to be overwritten is displayed File types When saving files in file name setting dialog either of following two file types can be selected NTST screen data onw format onw format This is a standard file format for Support Tool Use this format to save screen data normally Memory map image file mmi format mmi format This is a file format to which screen data is compressed after deleting informa tion used only for Support Tool Data to be lost are grid setting and grouping information Use this format for purposes such as transferring screen data using FD It is advisable to save the same data with onw format also since part of in formation are lost with this format as mentioned above Once you saved data specified file types will not be changed until you exit the Support Tool or perform saving reading the onw file Data will be saved in the format same as before when you select Save to save it If you want to change the file type select Save As e t is not possible to save data in DOS format Once you read the data that was created using DOS version Support Tool by NT ser
208. 1 2 2 NT631C 5 1 2 The NT21 can read clock data from the PLC PT has the clock function For displaying and setting the date time at a PT use the System Menu Select Connect menu bar Date and Time The date and time dialog box is displayed Current Date amp Time Date 19 Mar 1998 Thursday Time 152647 Set Date Yea Ea Set Month 3 Day 19 6S Day of Weeki Thursday sj Help Time Hour Minute Second ps 4 Ps 3 Current Date amp Time Displays the date and time at the time the dialog box is displayed Date This area is used for sending receiving date data to from a PT To set the date at a PT set Year Month Day and Day of Week here and execute sending downloading Click the Set button to download it to the PT To read the date data of a PT execute receiving uploading and the result is displayed here Click the Get button to upload it from the PT At first the same contents as displayed at Current Date amp Time are dis played Time This area is used for sending receiving the time to from a PT To set the time at a PT set Hour Minute and Second here and execute sending downloading Setting and Reading the Date and Time Section 11 6 Click the Set button to download it to the PT To read the time data of a PT execute receiving uploading and the result is displayed here Click the Get button to upload it from the
209. 1 and NT31C Max 40 characters NT631 and NT631C to which a system program ver sion lower than Ver 2 1 is installed With these models above the number of characters to be displayed will be less 160 Alarm Section 6 3 than these values according to the display method and if the history informa tion is displayed Max 40 characters NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 System Ver 2 1 and NT631C System Ver 2 1 With these models above up to 40 characters can be displayed regardless of the display method etc Display Line Qty Specify the number of messages to be displayed 7 lines NT21 Max 12 lines NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C Max 16 lines NT620S Max 24 lines NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C Scale Specify the character size of the message to be displayed 1 x 1 Equal 1 x 2 High 2 x 1 Wide 2 x 2 3 x 3 4 x 4 8x8 Smoothing Specify if smoothing processing is executed for the message to be displayed Line Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages line by line Only for NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Page Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages page by page Only for NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Frame Specify the color used for the frame of an alarm list Background ON Specify the background color of the selected message display field OFF Specify the background color of the message display fields that are not select
210. 1 Functions Provided in the Main Window 39 3 2 2 Major Functions of Dialog Boxes 43 3 2 3 Functions of Message Boxes 44 3 3 Operation of Screen Data Application File 44 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application 45 3 3 2 Reading the Existing Screen Data Application File 53 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File 54 3 3 4 Closing the Screen Data Application 56 3 3 5 Importing Reading the DOS Version Screen Data Application File 56 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 57 3 3 7 Using Method of Parts Collection 60 37 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool Section 3 1 3 1 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool The procedure for starting up the Support Tool installed in your personal comput er and exiting it is shown below 3 1 1 Start up Procedure To start up the Support Tool select Programs Omron gt NTST4 7E NT Series Support Tool beginning with the Windows start button Programs Startup gt A 5 NT Transfer Utility Favorites bm NT series Support Tool D NT series System Instal
211. 134 6 1 12 Interlock 2e Eee RD ex ete AR HR 134 6 2 Fixed Display t bic dete ERE SEU eai We ed t 136 622217 tib Ute pa etim 136 0 2 2 ATO Lus dono o bv drea d Es pae Eua E 138 6 2 3 e Rectangle sou Rer e ue X RR tee RU eR 139 02 4 Circle ib tob sre dor Ed eet rex dE E imr ant 140 6 2 5 PON SON 26 oe t SERM SERIE b Mee PH S 142 6 2 0 SOCIOL odo bv do dnd de ean RE WE 144 6 2 POR ien Ub en zen Beh noe durus epi aeter 145 6 2 8 Tihng v ep bera UE UU due Ed Et 147 6 2 9 Image Object Data seseeleeeeee 150 6 2 10 Mark c end bv o ad Ee eh 153 6 2 11 Library Object Data 8 55 155 6 9 Alar eclesie resur Aum enter te tortie tu Eb E E pe rt 159 6 3 1 Alarm ISt 5v IER SERIE Lb CM UP Hee US 159 6 3 2 Alarm History ics ops det E ee es AO 165 6 4 Data Input bester EE e Uere ec aaa 171 6 421 Numeral Input EUbeizreres bed WE EE 171 6 4 2 Character String Input lllesleeeeeeeeeeee Ie 179 6 4 5 ThumbwheelSwitch ee 187 6 5 Vbamps ose EB eee terns hee DER up ee e e oe Np de E e ee 192 6 5 1 _ Standard Lamps 1 e IR ER ree ae NEC DERE 192 6 5 2 Image library Lamps 197 6 6 NumeralDisplay 52 22 2 Re RR SEU ee As Gb ee eb ee 200 6 7 Character String Display sesseeeeeeeee eens 204 6 8
212. 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 HAN HN HN AHRAHRAAHAAHRAHRAARAAAHAA Screen History of Frequence Screen No Count Comments 1 10 HISTORY TITLE 2 10 HISTORY TITLE 2 12 1 4 Image Library Report A list of the image data and the library data is printed or displayed Image Library List 4 rtf 98 04 30 22 01 P 445 Type Code Compression Color Mode Size Comments Image 1 Yes 8 Colors 64x48 Image 2 Yes 8 Colors 64x48 Library 1000 200x200 Library 1001 200x200 Library 1002 200x200 Library 1003 200x200 Library 1004 200 200 Library 1005 200x200 445 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 5 Mark List A list of mark data is printed or displayed Mark List 98 04 30 22 01 P 446 FF2 FF3 FF4 FF5 FF6 FF FF8 FF9 FFA FFB FFC FFD FFE FFF HSUP4 4 2 27AYtiecnJ C39 C9 C9 C9 C9 c9 0000 fd 1 Reference In the case that the font size for Display Properties of Control Panel is set to large font it may be printed while part of mark list is being chipped off When it occurs please select Start Settings Control Panel then open the Display Proper ties and set the font size in Setting to small font and perform the mark list printing displaying 12 1 6 Screen Image The screen image and the setting contents of a screen ar
213. 2 349 350 355 358 405 406 427 428 430 431 434 437 438 TABLE OF CONTENTS Appendices zcCpmwW Oomnouugow Data Conversions sisar we CERO fe EE RUSSE He EUREN RE tn dei eos System Installer Operation I NT Transfer Utility ose Cre end COEUR RU RR ase Translation Support Utility ooe seese t heeh III Tables of Functions of PT Models e Limits on Numbers of Elements 0 0 e New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 0 2 0 0 0 2 eee eae New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 6 0 0 eee eee New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 7 0 0 ee eee eae Error Messages veste ze DERE MENU ARN PEN NEN PER PES mE P ard Shortcut Keys iiu nocte Re HU ER p bg Rc Connecting Cable Specifications 0 ee ene Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule 0 0 0 0 eee eee MOON a Tr TT oo eens te eben eee Revision ix Organization of the Manual and How to Use It The related manuals are listed below The final digit of the manual number is the revision code For operating the Support Tool NT series Support Tool for Windows Operation Manual V061 E1 2 Eun un Bea This manual Details on the operating procedure settings etc of the Support Tool can be displayed on the screen in the form of online help information Normal operation can
214. 20S Ver 4 903072 NT631C None x Contin uous Buzzer Beep Long Short History System Keypad Back light Color xi x xje x x x x x x Color Back ground x x Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E Elements NT620C NT600S NT620S Ver 5 Ver 4 NT625C NT631C Ver 4 Items Alarm List Start Bit e e Table Entry Alarm List No of Bits Referenced Alarm History order of frequency order of occurrence Alarm History History Info Alarm History Info Type Message Display Line Qty Message Length Message Smoothing Message Scale Display ImageLib Color Frame Color Back ground ON Color Back ground OFF Image amp Library Color Foreground 518 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 i NT11S NT600S NT620S ems NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Image amp Library Color Back ground Line Scroll Touch Switch Page Scroll Touch Switch Shape Rectangle Shape Circle Shape Polygon Shape Sector Frame Color Frame Lamp At tribute Color ON
215. 23 Numeral display Touch switch copy function 415 Quick Reference Writing Data to the PC PLC 416 To write a numeric value To write a constant to a numeral setting input field Operation 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create a numeral setting input field 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set and copy a constant to a numeral memory table entry us ing this touch switch Copy To Cursor Position PT Constant Numeral Screen 123 memory table Numeral setting input field Touch switch copy function Section 10 1 Refer to To write a numeric value To input a numeric value using thumbwheel switch Objects Data Input Thumbwheel Switch Create a thumbwheel switch PT Screen Numeral memory table gt 123 To write a character string To input a character string 1 Objects Data Input String Create a character string input field 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Input Key Con trol or Objects Touch Switch Function Input Key String Create a touch switch for which the control code in
216. 252 System installer 30 System Keypad 80 System Memory 433 436 I Table 14 68 87 433 Table Report 448 Text 145 The relationships between elements and memory tables 134 Thumbwheel Switch 188 Thumbwheel switch 171 Tile 74 Tiling 147 Title 79 Touch Switch 209 Trend Graph 240 Type 229 Types of Screens 17 Types of windows 95 U Z Ungroup 116 Uninstall 36 unInstallShield 36 Upload PT NT series Support Tool 436 Validate 70 Validation Report 448 What s This 75 Width Rate 229 Window 72 Window Moving Touch Switch 223 Window Keyboard Screens 92 Zero Suppression 126 Zoom 85 567 Revision History A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual Cat No V061 E1 03 Revision code The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision Page numbers refer to the previous version Revision code July 2000 Revised content Original production October 2001 Revisions to add information on the NT21 and clarify terminology January 2004 Revisions to add information on the upgraded version Ver 4 7 of the NT Support Tool for the NT11 569 OMRON OMRON ELECTRONICS LLC 1 Commerce Drive Schaumburg IL 60173 847 843 7900 For US technical support or other inquiries 800 556 6766 OMRON CANADA INC 885 Milner Avenue Toronto
217. 26 156 163 132 228 157 165 133 224 158 063 7 134 229 159 063 3 u A 136 234 161 237 137 235 138 232 7 139 239 164 241 163 250 140 238 165 209 166 170 141 236 167 186 l 142 196 143 197 144 201 145 230 146 198 147 244 148 246 149 242 162 243 168 191 169 063 170 172 75 171 189 172 188 i i 173 161 174 171 135 231 160 225 A 559 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix M MS DOS CP437 176 177 178 p a a N d a 180 181 182 4l 183 T N 184 ze fa NX AB E EN a N TS 196 197 F 1 199 560 Windows ISO8859 1 P 187 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 e Co MS DOS CP437 Windows 1508859 1 E 063 mu 063 063 063 063 063 063 207 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 063 t 063 063 063 063 063 e A m I N N N e X I 208 N 3
218. 3 2 User Interface 3 2 1 Functions Provided in the Main Window The configuration of the Support Tool operation screen name of each parts and the available functions are described below Title bar Control Menu Menu bar Seis cie de Des late af 2151 12 miele ey Standard toolbar Pi E gt oleje al Fo mx enlm s en Draw bar Application manager screen Data creation screen Status bar fois mar 1 stat T Sape To P EIE Application manager screen Directories of screens and tables are displayed as a tree list which allows open ing copying and other operations Data creation screen On this screen the screen to be displayed by the PT is created Control menu box The control menu box displayed at the upper left corner of the operation screen and windows allows you to select how a window is displayed 39 User Interface Section 3 2 Title bar Status bar For Help press F1 Status Help message or information of object Menu bar 40 The titles of windows are displayed here on each window respectively The status bar displays a simple explanation about the selected function se lected object cursor position object position the model type of the objective PT PLC Vendor the maximum memory size and the remaining application size KR 220 8D 20 80 Selected PT mod
219. 35 Limits on Numbers of Elements 533 534 535 Limits on reading the data 535 limits on the use of elements 533 List box 44 Main Window 39 Mathematical table 306 MEMLINK 47 Menu bar 40 message box 44 Mitsubishi A 47 Mitsubishi FX 47 mmi format 55 New 45 New Models 534 Notify bit 291 NT series Support Tool 38 Number of Table Entries 49 Numeral Memory Tables 275 Numeral Storage Type 50 object position 40 OMRON 47 onw format 55 Open 53 Option button 43 PC PLC Address dialog box 52 PLC Vender 40 Printer for PT 49 PT Control Area 51 PT Notify Area 51 PT Type page 46 Reference Operation 266 Remaning memory 40 replacement 267 Resume Function 48 Save 54 Save As 54 Screen switching 291 Screen switching function 287 Search Operation 267 Selected PT model 40 Siemens 47 Start up Procedure 38 Status bar 40 Storage Type 278 System Installer Operation 485 486 487 System page 48 system program 485 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Number 275 Table of Functions 489 490 491 513 514 515 Text box 44 the import method of I O comment 299 Title bar 40 Tools 463 Total memory 40 Value 277 Vendor 47 Words 279 Switch Screen Touch Switch 215 Switching Screen by Extended I O Input 87 Switching Screens by Extended I O Input at Each Screen 87 Index Symbol Manager
220. 4 3 Thumbwheel Switch Thumbwheel switches are provided as means to input numeric data and keys are provided at each input digit to allow you to input numeric data at individ ual digits Thumbwheel switch cannot be used with NT11S NT11 Numeral memory table Touch the or key at each digit of thumbwheel switches to set numeric data The numeric data set using the thumbwheel switch is written to a numeral memory table entry 187 Data Input Section 6 4 Note If thumbwheel switches are used to input numeric data the input data is directly written to a numeral memory table entry without being set in a data input field Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input gt Thumbwheel Switch Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Frame Foreground Character Color Foreground Frame Background Character Color Background A Input digits of maximum limit Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the thumbwheel switch The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the thumbwheel switch Size Specify the size of the thumbwheel switch Small Medium Large Attribute Specify the display attribute attributes displayed depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash End Plate Specify whether or not end plates are displayed at the ends of the thumbwheel swi
221. 6 DMO0003 800 0 800 DM0004 0 1200 Lamp1 to Lamp 5 Displays the ON OFF state of L000000 to L000004 in the PC PLC 351 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 When L000000 is ON OFF Lamp 1 goes ON OFF When L000001 is ON OFF Lamp 2 goes ON OFF When L000002 is ON OFF Lamp 3 goes ON OFF When L000008 is ON OFF Lamp 4 goes ON OFF When L000004 is ON OFF Lamp 5 goes ON OFF mage Lamp Displays the ON OFF state of L000005 in the PC PLC Display when L000005 is ON Display when L000005 is OFF Bar Graph 1 Displays the value of DM0005 in the PC PLC in the form of a bar graph Set the 10096 0 and 100 values as shown below value for 10096 value for 0 value for 10096 DM0005 500 0 500 Bar Graph 2 Displays the value of 006 in the PC PLC in the form of a bar graph Set the 10096 0 and 100 values as shown below value for 10096 value for 0 value for 10096 DMO0006 300 0 300 This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Menu Screen screen No 1 Set This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Set Screen screen No 3 e Alarm This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Alarm Screen screen No 4 352 Example Screen Configuration Section 9 1 Set Screen
222. 631 and NT631 it is not possible to change the size and label The child screen XXX containing Numer al String Input element s does not have the same key attribute as the overlapping Screen In the screen properties set the same Keypad attribute both for the parent and child screens 545 Error Messages Appendix J Error Message Corrective Action 546 The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY If the converted code differs from the code of the image element that is to be dis played correct the code The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY If the converted code differs from the code of the library data that is to be displayed correct the code The component Touch Switches of the Alarm List will be discarded Create the control touch switches using the control code input function as required and associate them with the alarm list his tory The screen no XXX of type YYY is not supported as a child so the parent child association is discarded With a new model it is not permissible to specify a window keyboard screen as a child screen of overlapping screens Copy the contents of the window keyboard screen to a standard screen and specify this screen as the child screen of the over lapping screens The screen no XXX was a Continuous Parent Screen which is not supported in this model It is d
223. Appendix C NT Transfer Utility NT Translation Support Utility This utility will help in translating the language to another supported language For details refer to Appendix D Translation Support Utility The following data is copied to the folder if it is selected when installation Parts Collection Lamps and touch switches combined with image library data are registered in the Parts Collection This is a screen data file in MMI format For details refer to 3 3 7 Using Method of Parts Collection Sample Screen Data This data is provided just as sample screen data It is not created for the pur pose of actual operation on PT after downloading it to PT Symbol manager ISO symbol data For details refer to 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Op eration The system installer is an application software that sends the system program from a personal computer to PT to update the system program Updating the system program allows communication using a new method or upgrades the PT software However since the system program is specific to each PT mod el the system program that matches the PT model must be downloaded Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 2 2 Installing the Support Tool Reference To install the Support Tool execute the install program provided in your software package The following data is selectable for installation e Support Tool Ver 4 7 System
224. C NT631 NT631C screen data the screen data should be converted to the data for system program Ver 3 1 beforehand Applicable PT Models Note Reference The system installer is used to install the system program in the following PT mod els NT11S NT11 NT21 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C For the individual PC PLC models always install the system program of the specific PT model It is not permissible to install the system program of another PT model The Support Tool is provided with the system programs of the following PT models NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 system program Ver 3 1 NT11S NT11 NT21 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C The system program must be installed with the system installer when installing the Support Tool at your personal computer For details of installation at the personal computer refer to Section 2 Setting Up the Support Tool These system programs can be transmitted to a PT using the system installer supplied with the Support Tool Ver 4 1 Starting and Exiting the System Installer The system installer is started by pressing the Windows start button then selecting Programs Omron Ntst4 1 NT series System Installer as shown below 485 System Installer Operation Appendix B Example Windows 95 Programs gt Startup E NT Tender Ui Favorites NT series Support Tool NT n Installer amp te tH amp
225. C PLC address range between a conventional and a new model Difference New models Word addresses can be handled up to five digits Conventional models Word addresses can be handled up to four digits Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a new model With a conventional word addresses are model word within four digits addresses remain as they were With a new model The word address is Invalid PC PLC Reset the word address the word address is reset address It is reset to a number of four or five digits to default less digits If this PC PLC address is re ferred to from the pro gram it is necessary to correct the program ac cordingly Refer to 6 1 10 Setting Proper ties Correction related to continuous screens When the data of a conventional model is converted into data for a new model an error may occur due to differences in the handling of continuous screens be tween conventional models and new models Difference New models Continuous screens cannot be used Conventional models Continuous screens can be used 466 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Status before Conversion Corrective Action Error Message Use a touch switch to Switch screens If the program is created
226. Cancel Reference Operating the mark editor Using the mark editor you can create a mark by tiling dots arranged in a matrix To tile a dot position the cursor on it and left click the mouse To cancel tiling right click the mouse on a tiled dot Created graphics can be copied or pasted using the standard toolbar and lines rectangles and circles can be easily created using the drawing toolbar Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the mark editor of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the mark editor of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Com ponents from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Standard toolbar TII A A y Redo operation canceled by undo is executed again previous operation is canceled Paste data that has been copied or cut is pasted Copy graphic in the specified range is copied Cut graphic in the specified range is cut Register mark data is registered Open mark data list dialog box is opened Drawing toolbar Toolbar Used to move the graphic defined by the range specifying frame By positioning the cursor on graphic defined by the range specifying 343 Mark Editor Section 8 3 frame after positioning the cursor on it and dragging t
227. Cat No V061 E1 03 NT series Support Tool for windows Ver 4 7 OPERATION MANUAL OMRON Certain Terms and Conditions of Sale o 10 11 Offer Acceptance These terms and conditions these Terms are deemed part of all catalogs manuals or other documents whether electronic or in writ ing relating to the sale of goods or services collectively the Goods by Omron Electronics LLC and its subsidiary companies Seller Seller hereby objects to any terms or conditions proposed in Buyer s purchase order or other documents which are inconsistent with or in addition to these Terms Please contact your Omron representative to confirm any additional terms for sales from your Omron company Prices All prices stated are current subject to change without notice by Seller Buyer agrees to pay the price in effect at time of shipment Discounts Cash discounts if any will apply only on the net amount of invoices sent to Buyer after deducting transportation charges taxes and duties and will be allowed only if i the invoice is paid according to Seller s payment terms and ii Buyer has no past due amounts owing to Seller Orders Seller will accept no order less than 200 net billing Governmental Approvals Buyer shall be responsible for and shall bear all costs involved in obtaining any government approvals required for the impor tation or sale of the Goods Taxes All taxes duties and other governmental charges other
228. Conversion Rule from 1S08859 1 to CP437 Mapping tables for the conversion This conversion will be performed when you try to make the former model screen data such as NT11S NT11 NT20S N30 30C NT600S NT620S 620C NT31 NT631 series System program ver 1 0 by using European Key board 555 Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule Appendix M 07 556 Windows ISO8859 1 MS DOS CP437 Space 128 Space 129 Space 130 Space 131 Space 132 Space 133 Space 134 Space 135 Space 136 Space 137 Space 138 Space 139 Space 140 Space 141 Space 142 Space 143 Space 144 Space 145 Also this conversion will take place if you are selecting CP437 in NT31 631 series with V1 and above Note If you have Hardware NT31 631 below V1 and version up the system program of NT31 631 series to V2 system program which is version 3 treat it as NT31 631 series hardware with V2 om ome Windows 1SO8859 1 MS DOS CP437 Space 1 146 039 Space r1 147 034 Space r1 148 034 Space 149 249 Space 150 045 Space 151 196 152 126 Space 153 063 Space s 154 115 Space gt 155 062 Space 156 063 Space 157 063 Space 158 063 Space Y 159 089 Space Space 160 032 161 173 162 155 163 156 063 063 044 159 034 063 063 063 094 063 083 060 063
229. Copy From Numeral Table String Table Code Entry Text Box Creating the Step button and the Reset button 11 Create the Step button and the Reset button in the same manner as the Man button For the Step button and the Reset button change the properties as shown below Step but Reset ton button Copy From Numeral Table String Table i Code Entry Text Box 13 Reset Creating the button group title bar 12 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Polyline 13 While pressing the shift key drag the polyline from start point to the se cond vertex and then from the second vertex to the third vertex Repeat this procedure to create the desired form Release the Shift key just before reaching at the last point 390 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Reference To draw continuous polyline press shift key when drag operation is finished Dragging this end point creates continuous polyline 14 Use the properties as they are Creating the Select character string 15 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text 16 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the Se lect character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text In the character string setting Fixed Display text dialog box set Select 17 Set the properties as shown below Des
230. D00026 2 If the number of the desired numeral table entry is not found in the list scroll the list using the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click on See Entry to open the entry input dialog box OO Cancel Help Input the number of the desired numeral table entry and click on mu 3 Select the desired numeral table entry to be referenced The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box For the procedure for creating library data refer to 8 2 Library Editor 158 Alarm Section 6 3 6 3 Alarm 6 3 1 Alarm List Note Alarms are elements that check the status of a bit memory table entry and change the contents of the display according to the detected status Alarm ele ments consist of alarm lists and alarm histories Alarm list When a bit memory table entry in the specified range goes ON the alarm list displays the corresponding message or image library data Since the bit memory table entries to be checked are set for the individual alarm lists it is possible to check different ranges of bit memory table entries with different alarm table entries Bit memory table entries in the specified range are checked only while an alarm list is displayed and the message and image library data are dis played in accordance with the bit memory table entry that is ON Alarm history When a bit memory table entry for which a check mark is set for the histor
231. F key PC Input PLC Notify Address Table Com ments Mathe matical Total No Table Recipe Table No 4 This option is available only for V2 or later models 5 This option is available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 or later models 516 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E Screens NT11S Items NT11 NT600S Ver 5 NT620C NT625C Ver 4 NT620S Ver 4 NT631C Screen Size 160 x Dots 64 640 400 640 640 x x 400 480 Max No of Screen 250 1000 2000 1 to Standard Screen 250 1 to 1899 2000 1 to 1000 1 to 1899 2000 1 to 3999 Parent Screen 1 to 1899 2000 1 to 1899 2000 1 to 3999 Window Keyboard Screen 1900 to 1979 1900 to 1979 1 to 3999 Extended Screen 1980 to 1996 1980 to 1996 x Occurrence Histo ry Screen 1997 1997 9001 Not editable Frequency History Screen 1998 1998 9002 Not editable Host Connect Screen 1999 1999 9000 Password Screen Menu Screen Print Format Screen x Device Monitor Screen 9021 9023 Brightness and Contrast Adjust ment Screen 1 Available only for V2 models 2 Available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 or later models Screen Properties NT11S Items NT11 NT600S Ver 5 NT620C NT625C Ver 4 NT6
232. FF20 to FFFF NT631C No 128 512 1000 512 512 1000 512 1000 2000 Value e Initial e Table Words Numeral po PLC e Address Com ment No 256 1000 1 256 1000 1 256 1000 2000 2 Value 3 e 40 e 40 e 40 Initial Words PC PLC Address Com ment 1 String Table entry no from 256 to 999 are the entries that only the initial value can be stored and can not be changed 2 String Table entry no from 500 to 1999 are the entries that only the initial value can be stored and can not be changed 8 Image library data can be inserted in the following models NT30 C NT620 C NT625C NT21 NT20S compatible mode NT31 C V2 or later models NT30 620 compatible mode and NT631 C V2 or later models NT30 620 compatible mode 515 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 No x x x 256 1000 History x x x e String Table Entry e Color Image Library Code Switch Screen Screen No PC PLC Address Com ment No Cancel Table Backlight Extended off VO Input Function Descrip tion No Table PC Extended PLC Out Address put Com ment Total No Address Com ments Total No
233. Gs J Opened symbol data file is displayed in the symbol manager Ex Opening ISO Symbol file ISO7000 0001 0099 SBL Look in T3 Ntst32 hd ek ail 507000 0300 0399 SBL ja 1507000 0400 0499 SBL im BL 507000 1100 BL jm Spplmntsbi BL Save Save As Save All Exit File name Files of type iii Symbol Manager 1507000 0001 0099 File Edit View Help H ColcurPalette J 607000 0001 0099 Read Only C Supplement Symbols Close the unnecessary folder symbol data file to remove it from the symbol manager 1 Select the folder that should be closed in the symbol manager The folder name is displayed in reverse video 2 Select File in the menu bar then select Close If the file has not been saved the message asking you whether to save it or not is displayed 3 If you click the played Button the window to specify the file name is dis Specify the file name and save it If you click the Button in the file name specifying window the symbol folder closes without being saved If you Click the No Button the symbol folder closes without being saved Registered symbol will be discarded For details on saving refer to Saving a folder file on page 256 Create a new folder to register the symbol data by the procedure shown below By collecting symbols related with each other in the same folder the screen data creation operation can
234. High Smoothing al Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 4 Adjust the position of the Thumbwheel on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the thumbwheel switch 5 Select Objects menu bar Data Input Thumbwheel Switch Refer to 6 4 3 Thumbwheel Switch 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the thumbwheel switch is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of thumbwheel 7 Setthe properties as shown below Position Size Medium Attribute Standard End Plate Thumbwheel Color Frame White Foreground White Background Black Character Color Foreground White Background Black Table Entry 12 Display Type Decimal Format Integer 4 Decimal 0 Limit Maximum 999 Minimum F0009999 Display sign For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations 8 Adjust the position of the thumbwheel switch on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the Start button and the Stop button 385 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the Start button frame 1 Select O
235. If the size is reduced part of the created graphic may be cut Changing the size to the range specifying frame size The size of the image data can be changed to fit the size of the specified range specifying frame Select Edit in the menu bar then select Clip IDE wiew Tools Conn Undo 1 2 Reda Cote y Cut Ctr ox Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctr bei Delete Del Copy To Paste From Clip Rotate or Flip gt Properties Quitting the image editor You can quit the image editor in any of the three ways described below Clicking the x Button at the upper right corner of the image editor Selecting Close from the control menu box of the image editor Double clicking the control menu box of the image editor Control menu box 10001 Image Object Restore Move Size Minimize Maximize Close Ctrl F4 Next 333 Library Editor Section 8 2 8 2 Library Editor Graphics of any required shape can be created by combining fixed elements The created graphic can be registered as one element library data and any number of elements can be displayed at any positions in any screen using the library display function Created library data can be used for image library lamp display alarm list display alarm history display Reference Library editor has the following features You can draw any graphics by combining fixed elements It is possible to impor
236. Library data A drawing created as a fixed display is registered as library data so that it can be used multiple positions and screens The library editor is used to create library data Image data Image data are objects used to display bit map data on the screen An image editor or bit map editor running on Windows available on the market is used to create image data Marks Marks are used to display special characters and symbols These objects can be handled as characters The mark editor is used to create marks Registering created objects symbol manager The efficiency of use of created objects can be increased by reusing them in oth er screen data or by registering objects that will be used frequently The symbol manager is provided to register created objects General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Objects that can be used The table below shows that objects can be used with particular PT models O Display Arc Object Circle Sector Polyline Polygon Rectangle Text Tiling Standard Lamp Image Library Lamp Numeral Display String Display Bar Graph Broken line Graph Analogue Me ter p Trend Graph Alarm List Alarm History 6 Can be used A 1 Can be used only with models with V1 and above 2 Only use is insertion into character
237. Main Differences of V4 6 NT21 New System Program Support Starting with NTST EV4 6 the NTST supports creating screen data for the NT21 NT31 V2 System Ver 3 1 data and NT21 data can be converted for mutual compatibility NT20 data can be converted to NT21 data NTST EVA 6 can transfer screen data to the NT21 in high speed mode Refer to NT21 81 631 Reference Manual for details Pick I O Comments from a CX Server Database name in CX Server data be used as PT I O comment When a PLC address is defined in the dialog an I O comment can be picked up from CX Server PLC point data in a cdm file The Pick CX Server point button is enabled only when CX Server is installed When the I O comment table is edited multiple comment data can be picked up from CX Server PLC point data in the cdm file The Import button is enabled only when CX Server is installed Each I O name will be imported as a PT I O comment within 16 characters Property Dialog for Grouped Objects Preview in Symbol Manager Grouped object attributes can be edited by double clicking or right clicking to display the properties for grouped objects The properties show the tree the ob jects included in the group Choose each object in the tree to edit the structure Registered symbols can be previewed on the symbol manager Previous sym bols can be previewed after they are copied onto the NTST EV4 6 screen and copied back to symbol manager to crea
238. Models Items NT600S Ver 5 NT620S Ver 4 NT620C NT625C Ver 4 Appendix E NT631C Touch Label Switch Attribute Label Color ON Label Color OFF Label Color Back ground Label Insert Mark Label Insert Image Interlock Multiline Label Static La bel Type Numeral String Display Label Type Standard Pen Reco Drawing Width Sampling Cycle Table Entry 100 Table Entry 100 Value 0 Table Entry 0 Val ue 100 Table Entry 10096 Value 8 Available only in V2 and later models 527 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 It NT600S NT620S ems Ver 5 Ver 4 Line Style Line Color Direction Display Sign Frame Color Frame Color Range Color Range Display 926 Display 96 Font Type Display 96 Scale Display 96 Smooth ing Display Col or Fore ground Display Col or Back ground 528 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Items Ver 5 Ver 4 Broken Start line Table e e Graph Entry No of Points
239. NT31C NT631 and NT631C individual transmission of system memory is restricted as follows The following data stored in the Support Tool can not be overwritten Number of numeral table entries Number of string table entries Number of bit memory table entries Screen history setting Alarm history setting Numeral storage type The following data can be overwritten Initial screen number Screen data comment 2 It is not possible to perform individual transmission of the mathematical table The mathematical table will be transmitted only when application transmission is performed Reference When the Support Tool receives data from a PT the data being edited at the Support Tool is lost Therefore make sure that the edit data is saved in a file before executing data receiving from the PT to the Support Tool With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C individual uploading of tables is possible However it may take time to upload the bit memory table In this case perform batch transmission of the application in file units 435 Receiving Uploading Data Section 11 4 With the Support Tool on CD ROM NT Transfer Utility which is exclusively used for downloading uploading the screen data is supplied For details refer to Appendix C Operation procedure 1 3 436 Select Connect menu bar Upload PT NT series Support Tool The menu is displayed allowing you t
240. NT631 and NT631C support image data it cannot be inserted into a character string The procedure for inserting mark data image data into a character string is shown below 1 In the character string input field move the cursor to the mark image data insertion position 2 Select Insert Mark Or Insert Image in the dialog box The mark selection dialog box or image selection dialog box is displayed Select the mark data image data to be inserted and click on 908080 Mark data FF20 to FFFFH FF20 to EFBFH for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S Only for the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode FE20 to FEFFH Example Mark data Table Application v a Vit ties 3 The code of the specified data is displayed at the data insertion position in the character string input field 4 Click on to close the character string attribute The set mark data image data or library data is displayed in the character string displayed on the screen The closed area of the graphic inside the border will be filled with some pattern and color 147 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Tiling cannot be used for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 1 The area inside the border is tiled according to the specified color and pat tern Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Tiling Selection u
241. PT At first the same contents as displayed at Current Date amp Time are dis played Set Used to download the date and time data set at Date and Time to a PT to set them Get Used to upload the date and time data in a PT and display them at Date and Time To set the date and time at a PT set the data at Date and Time and click on Set To read the date and time of a PT click on et Data transmission starts when sa or amp is clicked Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that communications between the Support Tool and the PT are enabled If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on f in the error message dialog box In the case of receiving uploading the date and time data that have been read from the PT are displayed at Date and Time 439 SECTION 12 Making Reports The Support Tool provides a function for displaying various kinds of data such as screen data and memory table use status in the form of a list and printing them 1231 iReport Types iio C CREER REGII CE AC ERU ER OS 442 1251 1 Cross References eue EU ERES 443 12 1 2 Direct Connection Information 444 12 173 History Report stack eee I Re b bona eet were RUNI 445 12 1 4 Image Library Report lssseeeleeee III 445 12 155
242. Parent Standard Child Screen No 9 3 Type Continuous v Show Page Number 55 Move Downy C Overlapping Remove a Set the number of the parent screen for Screen No in Parent If the number of screen data has been already created it cannot be regis tered as a parent screen b Select Continuous If necessary tick Show Page Number d Specify child screens Select screens that are specified as child screens by selecting them from the Standard field then click on ms The selected screen moves to the Child field If a wrong number is moved click on m the screen returns from the Child field to the Standard field Continuous Overlapping Screens Section 5 3 Two to eight screens can be registered as child screens e Modify the screen switching order Child screens are displayed in the order they are set in the Child field The setting order of the child screens can be modified using MoveUp and f Click on after the completion of child screen setting When creating continuous screens with NT20S and NT600S it is recom mended to create Switch Screen touch switch 5 3 2 Overlapping Screens Overlapping screens allow two to eight screens to be displayed as one screen For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C one to eight screens can be set The base screen of an overlapping screen is called the parent screen and multiple screens that are the constitu
243. Refer to 8 1 2 Creating Image Data Us ing Image Editor 8 3 2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor These operating procedures are same as normal operations of copy cut paste and drag amp drop on one Support Tool Copying Pasting an Object That Contains Image Library Data Even if a screen or an object that contains image library data is pasted onto a different screen data file image library data itself is not copied if NT series Sup port Tool version number is lower than 4 6 If you want to copy paste an object that contains image library data between screen data files you need to copy the image library data referenced by the ob ject beforehand Ex Copying pasting a fixed display image that references image code 0001 while the contents of the code are different between the screen data files As shown above image data to be displayed will vary even if both objects are referencing the same code when the contents of the referenced image code are different between the screen data files When no data is registered to the refer enced code is displayed 3 3 7 Using Method of Parts Collection With the Support Tool on CD ROM Parts Collection is supplied In this section using method of Parts Collection is described 60 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Parts Collection Lamps and touch switches will be graphical and expressive parts when they are combined with image library data or image la
244. S and other PT mod els Therefore when the data of NT20S NT600S NT620S is converted to the data for other PT models touch switch position and size may change Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action Touch switch posi tion and size may change Correct the touch switch position and size as needed Refer to 6 8 Touch Switches Correction related to a touch switch for which a pop up window keyboard function is set If a touch switch assigned the pop up window keyboard function is converted be tween a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of screen numbers of the touch Switch window keyboard screen Difference New models Conventional models Screen numbers of window keyboard screen 1 to 3999 1900 to 1979 Screen numbers of window keyboard screen 475 Data Conversion Appendix A Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Error Message Corrective Action With a new model the touch switch for which a pop up win dow keyboard func tion is set is regis tered to the symbol manager With a conventional model the window keyboard screen number is corrected to 1900 Input Key Window Keyboard screen number is not wit
245. Sample Data Section 9 3 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the nu meral display field is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of numeral display 7 Setthe properties as shown below Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing al Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Reference Indirect Reference Table Entry Display Type Format Integer Decimal Zero Suppression Display Sign 8 Adjust the position of the numeral display field by dragging it 0j Surrounding the numeral display field with a frame 9 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Rectangle 10 On the data creation screen drag the rectangle so that it encloses the nu meral display field 11 Use the properties as they are 12 Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Creating the numeral display field Numeral Display 2 Copying and pasting the numeral display field Numeral Display 1 1 Copy the Numeral Display 1 character string numeral display field and its frame rectangle 2 Paste the copied contents and move them to the desired position for dis playing Numeral Display 2 Display 2 Modifying to Numeral Display 2 3 Double click the Numeral Display 1 character string and modify the prop erties as
246. Setting Screen Properties 67 4 2 8 Editing a Gos ep Se BASE eR ERR EU RA e ERU 67 4 2 9 Copying an Entire Table ps cudes 0 0 0 ee e 68 4 2 10 Saving the Screen Data Application to File 69 4 2 11 Error Check Validation 69 4 2 12 Sending Downloading the Data toa PT 71 4 2 13 eee eee dee 72 4 2 14 Help Menu seeseeeeeee ehh H9 mh 74 63 What Is the Application Manager Section 4 1 4 1 What Is the Application Manager A screen data application file holds a variety of data The application manager is a data management tool used for managing the various types of screen data Since the application manager displays the data in tree style you can check the created data or read the necessary data easily 1 42 App CI 9000 Host Connect J Table The number and type of screens and tables displayed in the application manag er vary according to the setting made for PT Model of PT Type in the PT config uration Bit map shown above is in case of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The application manager provides following operations Opening a data creation screen Creation of new application Copying a screen Deleting a screen Displaying and setting PT configuration Displaying and
247. Spacing 10 C Touch Switch Grid IV Display Grid IV Snap to Grid Grid Size Custom Set the grid spacing in the horizontal and vertical directions to create the grid of the desired spacing respectively Horizontal Spacing Specify the grid spacing in the horizontal direction as a number of dots Vertical Spacing Specify the grid spacing in the vertical direction as a number of dots Grid Size Touch Switch Grid If this attribute is selected grid spacing equivalent to the size of a touch switch is set The actual size differs depending on the PT model Display Grid Specify whether or not the grid is displayed To display the grid tick the check box of this attribute If you want not to display the grid cancel the tick in the check box Snap to Grid Specify if the specified position of an element being drawn is automatically ad justed so that it coincides with a grid position To adjust the element position tick the check box of this attribute If adjustment is not necessary cancel the tick in the check box Reference When saving screen data using mmi format grid setting information and grouping information will not be stored Refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File e t is possible to select whether to print screen grid or not when printing screen image Refer to 12 2 2 Output to a Printer If grid is to be printed the grid setting of each screen will be included in the screen imag
248. String Display object and String Input object are used For details of table setting refer to 7 8 Character String Memory Table String Table The Bit Memory table stores status of a PC PLC memory bit This table is set when using the alarm list history function It is also used when switching the screen by the operation at the PC PLC For details of table setting refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table The Extended I O Input table sets the usage of input terminals of an extended I O unit e g BZA Unit 15 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Extended I O Output table Comment Table F Key Input Notify table Mathematical table Recipe Table 16 For the individual input terminals a function is set or a PC PLC bit to be refer enced is allocated For details of table setting refer to 7 5 Extended I O Input Table The Extended I O Output table is used to allocate the PC PLC bits that control the output terminals of an extended I O unit The output terminals of the extended I O unit are controlled according to the statuses ON OFF of PC PLC bits For details of table setting refer to 7 5 Extended I O Output Table The I O Comment Table is an area provided in a PT to manage the comment data of all words and bits in the PC PLC that are set by the Support Tool It displays comments on PC PLC words and bits specified by the numeral memory table character string memory table string t
249. Support Tool for the first time the Support Tool software must be installed at your personal computer The Support Tool is an application software that runs on Windows 95 98 or NT of Microsoft Corporation The procedure described in the following pages assumes that your personal computer already has Windows installed 2 1 2 2 Before Installing the Software sna e Installing the Support 1 88 Basic Installation 8 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 2 3 Procedure Uninstall 30 31 31 31 36 29 Before Installing the Software Section 2 1 2 1 Before Installing the Software The Support Tool comes with the following program data Reference Type Specifications NT ZJCAT1 EV4 For IBM PC AT compatibles media CD ROM Support Tool Supplement Symbols keyboard keypad collection Color Palette Symbol Tilling collection for color type PT System installer for replacing the PT system program System programs for NT31 NT31C with V2 Ver 3 1 System programs for NT631 NT631C with V2 Ver 3 1 System programs for NT21 System program for NT11S System program for NT11 V1 System programs for NT30 620 Series The following software should be installed separately NT Transfer Utility This utility uploads downloads screen data file from to PT using MMI format For details refer to
250. T620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C 283 Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 Note One word corresponds to 2 characters A character string is allocated to the PC PLC words in units of 2 characters be ginning with the leftmost character from lower digit words to higher digit words The data type is 1 byte or 2 byte If the number of characters in a character string memory table entry string table is larger than the number of words used the number of characters equal to the number of specified words is sent to the PC PLC beginning with the start of the character string Character string memory table Words allocated in PC PLC String table If setting is 2 words ABCDEFG gt AB CD EFG is not sent If setting is 4 words The character string is sent in units of 2 HIJKLMN HI characters beginning with the leftmost character in the character string and yp JK allocated to words from lower word to higher word LM 00 hexadecimal is entered in blank p N areas PLC Address Specify the PC PLC address start address of the area where character string memory table entries string table are allocated Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC word A comment can comprise up to 16 characters Ref Displays whether the table entry with the specified number is already used or not
251. T631C is used When an NT20S or NT600S that uses the direct connection ver 5 is used With conventional models up to 50 indirect designation settings can be made per screen including both numeral display and character string display For numeral display elements it is possible to select whether numeric values are displayed in decimal signed unsigned or hexadecimal Numeral memory table Display in decimal 23456 23456 Display in hexadecimal 5BAO Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C numerals are always stored as signed binary data When allocating numeral memory table entries to PC PLC words it is possible to select whether the data is recognized in BCD or recognized in hexadecimal using the Storage Type property According to the combination of the storage type and display method nu meric values are stored and displayed in the manner shown below PC PLC words Display 2 word allocation Numeral Recognition in BCD memory table Display in decimal 3456 23456 39 00005BA0 _ 0002 Display in hexadecimal Recognition in hexadecimal 5BAO 5BAO 0000 With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C the only difference in decimal hexadecimal display of a numeric value is whether or not F at the most 202 Numeral Display Section 6 6 C
252. Table Section 7 4 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Specify the screen No of the screen to which the screen should switch by the operation of the alarm list history Specify 0 if you do not switch the screen NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specify the screen No of the screen to be displayed if a check mark is set for Switch Screen The setting for this item is not valid unless a check mark is set for Switch Screen String Table Entry Specify the character string memory table entry string table number where the character string that is displayed as a message is stored when the bit memory table entry goes ON or the bit memory table entry registered for the alarm history is displayed Image Library Code If you want to display image data or library data when a message is selected set a check mark in the check box and specify the image library code after clicking on Change Image or Change Library Color Foreground Specify the color in which the message display field is displayed when a mes sage is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Code setting in the image library code field When setting a code in the image library code field the desired code can be selected from the list as an alternative to direct input of a specified code using a keyboard Setting the image data To set an image code in the image libra
253. The Help button or F1 key is also used to display the table of contents for help information Displaying help information by searching for a keyword 74 Help information on a specific topic can be displayed by inputting the related key word Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Operation 1 Select Help in the menu bar then select Search for Help on The topic search dialog box is displayed 2 Input a keyword When the keyword is input the corresponding help item is highlighted 3 If you find the specified help item click the Button The help information relating to the specified item is displayed Displaying help information by clicking on a screen The Support Tool provides the What s This item that allows you to get help when an item for which you need help is displayed Using this feature you can display the help information in a simple operation without tracking the table of contents or inputting a keyword Operation 1 Select Help in the menu bar then select What s This A question mark is appended to the mouse cursor Clicking the Button in the standard tool bar also displays a question mark at the mouse cursor 2 Click on the item place for which you need help The corresponding help information is displayed Checking the input method of PLC address PLC address dialog box is displayed when an address is allocated to an object If PLC Address Help is selected in the H
254. The message shown below is displayed on transmitting Application version mismatched communication aborted A4 Message warning you about 32 dot font and font type ISO 8859 is displayed on transmitting If this combination is selected 32 dot font and font type 150 8859 are displayed on a PT but they are not available on the Support Tool Ao Message warning you about 32 dot font and font type ISO 8859 is displayed on transmitting If this combination is selected 32 dot font and font type 429 Communication Setting at the Support Tool Section 11 2 150 8859 are displayed on the Support Tool but they are not available on a PT 16x16 font and CP437 font type are used on the PT Note If the vendor manufacturer of the PLC you are using and the PLC ven dor setting of the created screen data is different transmission is not pos sible The following message is displayed Memory access mismatched communication aborted 11 1 3 Data Communication Procedure The procedure for transmitting data between a PT and the Support Tool is indi cated below Setting for communications at Support Tool Set the RS 232C port and baud rate at the Support Tool personal computer l Set PC PLC to Transmit mode Place the PT in the Transmit mode to allow communications of the data be tween the PT and the personal computer For details of this procedure at PT refer to the User s Manual of your PT Selecting the data to be sent received From t
255. Tiling 6 2 6 Sector A sector is drawn Sectors cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 1 A sector is drawn The size of a sector can be changed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Sector Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology Gres sa 7 Property setting General Position Center point Indicates the position of the center of a sector Start point Indicates the position of the start point of a sector End point Indicates the position of the end point of a sector A sector is drawn anti clockwise from the start point to the end point Size Indicates the radius of a sector 144 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance A sector is defined by the center point the start point and the end point The line type is specified using line style attribute Center point Indicates the position of the center of a sector End point Indicates the position of the end point of a sector The end point can be dragged to a desired position to change the position of the end point Start point Indicates the position of the start point of a sector When the start point is dragged the start point position
256. Type Decimal Format Integer 8 Decimal 0 Limit 1 Maximum 99999999 Minimum 0 Zero Suppression Display Sign Focus Frame Focus Attribute Standard 1 The setting is not needed for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 5 Specify the numeral input field and adjust the position 401 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the pop up display range frame Set the range for pop up display 1 Move the range specifying frame displayed at the upper left section in the screen to the numeric key area and adjust its size so that the keys and tem porary input field are enclosed For details of changing the size and the position of pop up display frame refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 9 3 13 Saving the Created Data 1 Select File menu bar Save As Refer to 4 2 10 Saving the Screen Data Application to a File 2 Specify the file name of the file where the created data is saved example SAMPLE ONW and click x 9 3 14 Downloading to the PT Setting the PT status control area and PT status notify area 1 Select Tools menu bar PT Configuration 2 Click the Control Notify Area tab and set the properties as shown below For details of Control Notify area refer to 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File PT Control Area PC PLC Address D00100 Comments Control Area PT Notify A
257. Yes Already used as an element No Not used If the indication is Yes you can check where the table entry in question is used by clicking on Note that this operation is not possible when setting a character string memory table entry string table from the property dialog box of an element For details of Reese refer to 7 1 1 Reference Operation 7 3 4 Inserting Mark Data into a Character String 284 To insert mark data into an initial value follow the steps described below 1 After specifying the Value field move the cursor to the position where the mark data is to be inserted 2 Click on Insert Mark The Show Mark dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the mark data in the list of mark data 4 Click on e J Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 The code of the specified mark data is inserted to the Value field The mark itself is not displayed here Numeral String VO Comments Bit Memory Value Initial Wor bcde tFF20 Fehi 5k 1 Lo 2 Lo 3 Lo Insert Mark button OK button Screen Screen abedefghijk abcde 7 3 5 Inserting Image Data into a Character String To insert image data into an initial value follow the steps described below Note that insertion of image data into a character string is possible only with the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21
258. a File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Select Import Component from the File menu and you can start up the second Support Tool and open a different screen data file By reading out the different screen data files with the two Support Tools data copying pasting can be per formed easily between the files 57 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 58 Reference When you select Import Component a dialog box to specify the file to be read is displayed For details of this dialog refer to 3 3 2 Reading the Existing Screen Data Application File Open Look in a Sample Collection c f NT30 NT30C NT amp 20C NT amp 25C NT820S collections 3 NT31 NT31C collections NT631 NT631C collections SAMPLE E onw File name sam PLE E onw Files of type NTST Application hd Cancel After specifying the folder file name and file type click the Button The second Support Tool starts up and the application manager of the read out screen data is displayed e It is not possible to start up the second Support Tool from the Start button of Windows Error message will be displayed Be sure to select Import Compo nent from the File menu in the main window of the first Support Tool Copy paste operation can not be performed between the two files if the PT model of the two files is different In this case perform data conversion before hand so that the PT model setting
259. a input field INumeral Input 1 Input 1 381 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data display field title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Numeral Input 1 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing D Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent 4 Adjust the position of Numeral Input 1 on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the data input field 5 Select Objects menu bar Data Input Numeral Refer 6 4 1 Numeral Input 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the data input field is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner 7 Atthe cursor moving touch switch use selection dialog box set the dis played items as shown below Create Cursor Move Touch Switch Setting the numeral input field 8 Set the properties as shown below 382 Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing d Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Table Entry 10 Display
260. a of the Support Tool consists of multiple screens that are linked with each other Screens are managed by screen numbers The range of usable screen numbers varies according to the type of the PT connected to the Support Tool General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 The screen display is switched by pressing a touch switch or giving an instruction from the PC PLC PT Model Range of Screen Numbers NT11S NT11 1 to 250 NT20S 1 to 250 256 to 500 NT600S 1 to 1000 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1 to 1899 1900 to 1979 1980 to 1999 2000 NT21 1 to 3999 9000 9001 9002 9020 NT31 NT31C 1 to 3999 9000 9001 9002 9020 to 9023 NT631 NT631C 9030 On a screen a variety of objects can be arranged as desired The following objects are used to create a screen Display objects Display objects are drawn on a screen and do not have an input function Display objects are classified into two kinds Objects that are always displayed in the same status and those that change according to the status of the PT or the PC PLC Input objects Input objects are objects that allow input by operation at the PT Touch switches and input fields for numerals and strings are examples of input objects Objects having code numbers These objects are created using an exclusive editor They are registered with a code number so that they can be used in different posi tions and different screens
261. a point is drawn in the size specified by point type selection and in the color speci fied as foreground color INI Used to draw a line By dragging the mouse cursor from the start point to the end point of the line to be drawn the desired line is drawn in the width specified by line width selection and in the specified foreground color mi Used to draw a rectangle By dragging the mouse cursor a rectangle is drawn having opposing corners at the start and the end point of dragging having the line of the specified width line width selection and in the specified foreground col or The inside of the rectangle is tiled with the colors specified as fore ground color and background color in the specified pattern ei Used to draw a circle or an oval By dragging one corner or one side of a rectangle that circumscribes the circle or oval to be drawn the desired circle or oval is drawn with a line of the specified width line width selection and in the specified foreground color The inside of the circle or oval is tiled with the colors specified as foreground color and background color in the specified pattern Al Used to draw a character Click the mouse at the position where a character is to be drawn and the character cursor is displayed Input characters the input characters are displayed in the color specified as foreground color with the background displayed in the specified background color Select this tool when tiling th
262. a that was cut co pied by one Support Tool to a table of another Support Tool For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Clear Ctrl L Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Cr gt Copy To Next Ctrl Clear Clears the data in the selected memory table entry Cut Cuts the data in the selected memory table entry and stores it in the clipboard The cut data can be pasted to another memory table entry Copy Copies the data in the selected memory table entry to the clipboard The copied data can be pasted to another memory table entry Paste Pastes the data stored in the clipboard by the cut or copy function to the memory table entry at the cursor position 272 Common Operation Section 7 1 Copy to Next Executes the copy to next operation How this function is executed differs according to the table type as shown below Increment Item Initial Value PC PLC Address Numeral memory table Addition processing Addition processing Table Type Character string memory table String table Cannot be specified Addition processing Bit memory table Cannot be specified Addition processing Extended I O input table Cannot be specified Extended I O output table Cannot be specified Operation procedure Clear The clear function clears the data at the specified address of a table Since the data
263. able bit memory table extended l O input table extended I O output table and elements in list form The displayed comments can be edited For details refer to 7 7 Comment Table The F Key Input Notify table assigns to a function key in a PT device Host bits are allocated to the function keys By switching the function key ON and OFF the corresponding bit is turned ON and OFF For details of table setting refer to 7 8 F Key Input Notify Table Mathematical functions can be formed through this table and associated to any numeral table entry PLC address location For details refer to 7 9 Mathemati cal Table The Recipe Table will set the parameters of designated memory areas of the address For details refer to 7 10 Recipe Table General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 1 3 4 Types of Screens A PT displays two types of screens user screens that are created by arranging objects as desired and system screens for which a specific function is preset The types of screens displayed on a PT and screen numbers assigned to the each screen are shown below NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C 1 to 1 to 1899 2000 3999 1 to 1899 2000 Continuous 1 to screens 1899 1900 to 1979 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C NT11S Screen Types NT11 Standard screens 1 to 3999 Overlapping screens Window Key board screens Host connect 1999 screens System ini
264. ackground color of the message display fields that are not selected Image amp Library Display of Image Lib Specify if the image library data is displayed Color Specification of color is valid only when the image data of 2 color mode is dis played by a color type PT Foreground Specify the display color of image data Background Specify the background color of the image data display area Reference With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C a dialog box is displayed to set if line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used With NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C whether or not the line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used is determined by the setting for the use of control touch switches in the alarm list history properties Settings History Info Specify whether or not an alarm message is displayed with date time of occur rence or frequency of occurrence If a check mark is set for this item the date time of alarm occurrence is displayed with an alarm message for display in order of occurrence or the frequency of occurrence is displayed with an alarm 167 Alarm Section 6 3 Guidance 168 message for display in the frequency of occurrence The display format of the date time of occurrence is set for Info Type If the date time or frequency of occurrence is displayed the number of alarm message display characters is reduced accordingly Order Type Order of Frequency
265. ackground function gt Switchin Em o UM pec Trend graph screen Trend graph screen Other screen starts drawing a newly Previous data are re displayed by pressing page return The trend graph is drawn newly when the screen is switched back to the trend graph display screen However it is possible to redisplay the past data drawn in the trend graph previously by pressing a touch switch that has the function to dis play the past data In this case however the data are not logged while a trend graph is not displayed With logging and background functions Switching De screen Trend graph screen Other screen Trend graph screen Data is always logged Past data are re displayed continuously by pressing page return Although the trend graph starts displaying new data when the screen is Switched back to the trend graph display screen it is possible to display the data of the period during which the trend graph was not displayed by pressing a touch switch that has the function to display the past data The trend graph element can control data sampling display and other related operations using the special touch switches shown below These touch switches execute their function only once when they are pressed Stop touch switch Stops data sampling Updating of a trend graph display is also stopped at the same time While sampling is halted the touch switch is lit If data sampling is
266. aded This is called Validation The following three validation functions are provided Validation performed on real time 69 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 The Support Tool provides real time validation while users are creating data This function mainly checks the elements one by one Moreover maximum number of elements and memory size will be also watched Validation performed from the Tools menu Validate It is also possible to perform the Validation using Tools Validate from the menu bar By the check Support Tool will detect the contradiction in the screen applica tion data including association between touch switches and the elements and So on This check will be also performed at the beginning of the download process to prohibit the wrong data to be downloaded Validation during the data conversion and importing DOS data file Validation will be also performed when converting the screen data application from a current model to another model and when importing the DOS data file Data conversion will be also performed when the registered symbol data from the Symbol Manager that was created by a certain PT model has been dragged and dropped to the another PT model screen So at this time valida tion will be also performed Reference Validation will be also performed when saving the screen data in mmi format Executing the Validation Reference Validating the current f
267. age Entry Code Size Search Direction Width 200 C Up Height 152 Bown Mode BCobws IV Compression Comments Cancel Delete Close Setting for New Image Entry dialog box Code Specify the code to which the new image data is regis tered 325 Image Editor Section 8 1 326 Colors Search Direction Width Height Compression Comments Find Next When the dialog box is opened the smallest unused code is set Specify whether the image data is created in 2 Colors monochrome or 8 Colors color Unregistered code can be searched using the __Eind Next Button In the Search Direction specify Up to the smaller code or Down to the larger code to designate the direc tion to which search operation is executed Specify the width of the image data as a number of dots Specify the height of the image data as a number of dots The image data size can be set in the range from 8 x 8 dots minimum to the screen size of the PT to be used maxi mum The image data width and height must be specified in units of 8 dots Specify the data format for storing the created image data Check mark set Image data is compressed for storage Check mark not set Image data is stored without being compressed Specify the comment for the image data to be created Searches the unused code Specify the search direction in the Search Direc
268. agged I E After changing the size and the position of the library data specifying frame click on the screen at a position other than on the frame The size and the position of the library data specifying frame is determined and the handles are cleared To change the size and the position of the library data specifying frame re peat the procedure above from step 1 To set a grid on the library editor screen select Screen menu bar and Grid The necessary settings for displaying grids are same as those for a standard screen For details refer to 5 1 2 Grid Setting EE Tools Connect v Cte Vertical Spacing 10 C Touch Switch Grid IV Display Grid IV Snap to Grid You can quit the library editor in any of the three ways described below Clicking the x Button at the upper right area of the library editor Selecting Close from the control menu box of the library editor Library Editor Section 8 2 Double clicking the control menu box of the library editor Control menu box Bf 1000 Library Object Move Size Minimize Maximize Close Ctl FA Next 6 341 Mark Editor Section 8 3 8 3 Mark Editor Special symbols and marks can be created by tiling selected dots in a 16 x 16 dot area For NT11S NT11 itis 8x 16 dot The created mark data can be inserted into mark data displays and character string displays Reference Th
269. ain Translation Table displays the ID Source Text and Language in col umns for the particular MMI file Sorting preference for display of extracted string contents are as follows Screen number and then the object type sorted alphabetically for that particular screen when there are no header rows identifying the object type Select the cell in the target language into which the source text is to be trans lated You can move around the cells in the translation columns using the arrow keys or the tab key Serll V TS W Y Label Close Scor Label open Sork M Tx Set Temperature Short Form in the ID Column The ID of screen objects are displayed in short form Below are the short forms with their meanings Scr Screen Txt Fixed Display Text TSW Touch Switch 498 Translation Support Utility Appendix D Lmp Lamp Rec Record in Recipe Entry Param Parameter in Recipe Entry Translation Editor Window You can view the Translation Editor Window in the lower part of the Application Window This is where the translated text can be input When the source text in the source language column in the translation table is selected both panes will be disabled Source text of the 56 This is sample Source Test lected label or string Input translated label or string OK CopySic Next Previous 5 n 1 1 n Counter Displays remaining number of characters that can be entered for the selected cell f
270. alog box click the Button If a check box for Overwrite PLC Address appeared in the dialog box make the setting as required 4 2 10 Saving the Screen Data Application to a File The procedure for saving the screen data to a file is shown below Operation using the mouse Operation using the menu For details refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File Please save frequently Support Tool will not save automatically 1 Click right button of the mouse on the screen data file icon then select Save or Save As If you select Save for a file other than a new file the saving operation starts immediately without prompting dialog box Specify the folder and file name of the destination and click the But ton If you specify an existing file a message requesting your confirmation is dis played if it is overwritten Select File in the menu bar then choose Save or Save As If you select Save for a file other than a new file the saving operation starts immediately without prompting dialog box Specify the folder and file name of the destination and click the But ton If you specify an existing file a message requesting your confirmation is dis played if overwriting should be done 4 2 11 Error Check Validation The Support Tool has a function to check the data such as limitations of screen elements and PC PLC address assignments in order to prevent illegal data from being downlo
271. already displayed it is closed and then the specified window key 216 Touch Switches Section 6 8 board is opened If the specified window keyboard is already dis played no operation is executed Close Closes the presently displayed window keyboard No operation is executed if no window keyboard is displayed Toggle Closes the presently displayed window keyboard and opens the speci fied window keyboard If the specified window keyboard is already opened the window keyboard closes NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above How the window is displayed is determined by the settings for Action Type and Replace Local Window Action Type Open Displays the specified window If another window of the same type Lo cal 1 Local 2 is already displayed follows the setting for Replace Lo cal Window If the specified window is already displayed in specified type no operation is executed Close Closes the presently displayed window with specified type Local 1 Local 2 and number No operation is executed if specified window is not displayed in specified type Toggle Closes the window with specified type Local 1 Local 2 and number if it is presently displayed and opens the specified window if it is not opened If another window of the same type is already displayed fol lows the setting for Replace Local Window Replace Local Window Check mark If another window of the same type Local 1 Local 2 is
272. also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Paste in the menu Cut element is pasted at the upper left section of the screen Copy Paste Align Align am CT Delete Delete it T 2 1 5 Evine To Front Bring To Front gt L Send To Back Send To Back 2 2 Select Object Select Object Properties Properties Use As Default Use As Default Reference If multiple data creation screens are displayed an element can be moved over to another data creation screen by dragging it If Ctrl key is being pressed while dragging an element will be copied instead of being moved f two Support Tools are started up copy cut paste are drag amp drop operations can be performed between Support Tools For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Deleting an element The procedure for deleting an arranged element is described below Since the delete operation does not store the element in the clip board the de leted element cannot be restored by the paste function 1 Select an element Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Delete This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Delete
273. alue in hexade cimal Format 2 Integer Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input data Decimal Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the input data Limit Setting is not possible for NT11S NT 11 Maximum Specify the upper limit of the input data Minimum Specify the lower limit of the input data 3 Zero Suppression Specify whether or not leading zeros are suppressed to display the input data Display Sign 1 Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value Focus Frame Specify whether or not the frame that indicates the data in put objective is displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S Focus Attribute Specify how the input data is displayed before it is con firmed Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash 1 Setting is not possible when a numeral input is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 2 When a numeral input is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C only No of digits sign digit integer digit decimal point decimal digit can be specified since the digits such as deci mal digits are determined by the numeral input field on a base screen 3 An input method for a negative value in decimal differs between the following types of PT With NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C Input F to indicate a negative value in the most sig
274. and sector radius are changed When tiling a sector paste a tiling element in it Tiling element Sector For details of tiling element refer to 6 2 8 Tiling 6 2 7 Text Text is drawn Text can be used with all models ABCDE 1 Text is drawn Font size color etc can be changed Note Mark data can be inserted into a character string With the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode set image data can also be inserted Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Text Selection using the drawing toolbar Al 145 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Terminology ABCDE Foreground color Property setting General Description Position Font type Scale Smoothing Attribute Color Foreground Background Insert Mark Insert Image Guidance The maximu Set the text to be displayed Indicates the position where the text is displayed Specify the font Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Standard Half Height Specify the character size Only 1 x 1 Equal and 2x 1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 1x1 Equal 1x2 High 2x1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Not for NT20S Specify whether smoothing processing is executed for characters larger than 2 x 2 scale Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S For NT20S NT600S smo
275. ar View menu bar Toolbars Alignment Bar Each time you select the item display no display selection changes alternately The check mark if displayed indicates that the selection of the corresponding item is to be displayed If Auto hide invoked by selecting Start button Windows Settings gt Taskbar Taskbar Options is checked status bar may not be displayed cor rectly when the window of the Support Tool is maximized In this case clear the checkmark for Always on top at Taskbar Options The standard toolbar draw bar utility bar and alignment bar can be moved as a floating palette to a convenient place for your operation 7 7 SSE 11 wj zpym ej e Eae sire x es en e r eii FEES D e PIN Object information on the status bar The information for the selected object that will be displayed on the status bar is indicated in the following table No information will be displayed when multiple objects are selected Information to be displayed may be cut depending on the resolution of the screen or the selected object Information to be displayed Fixed Display Object Name Attribute Fixed Display Mark Mark Object 1 Fixed Display Image Image Object Reference Type Code Comment Size Compression Fixed Display Library Library Object Reference Type Code Comment Imag
276. ard screen box and click on es 5 Specify 11 in the standard screen box and click on ms 6 Click on 9 9 3 9 Creating the Set Screen Create screen No 3 new screen as the Set Screen Set Screen Neral 380 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 At the new standard screen dialog box set 3 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 3 Attributes Screen No 3 History a Title Set Screen Comment Set Screen Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid w Snap to Grid 4 Creating the screen title Set Screen Copying the screen title from screen No 1 Menu Screen 1 Copy the Menu Screen character string and its frame rectangle on screen No 1 and paste them onto screen No 3 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the desired position Modifying to Set Screen 3 Double click the Menu Screen character string and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 4 Adjust the size of the frame rectangle Creating the dat
277. arefully check the operation of all screen data and host programs before using them If incorrect the system may operate unpredictably Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 20 Menu Chart Section 1 5 1 5 Menu Chart The pull down menu commands provided by the Support Tool and the function of each menu item are shown below File NOW Fea een ees Creating new screen data I Obpeti 22er Ree Reading created screen data Close ue ek Ending creation of screen data Saves Saving screen data being created to a file r Registering screen data being created under new file name r Import Component Importing data from different screen data file I Import Reading the data created by DOS version Support Tool gt Phiten e Printing screen data Print Preview Displaying print format of screen data Print Setup Setting the printer r Recent File s Recently used files EXI Le vede ee eere weno Exiting the Support Tool Edit Undo eerte Canceling the last operation Redo Returning the screen status to the status before Undo GUTS a nce ree Gh tates Cutting an object to the clip board COPY l5 atin oes Copying an object to the clip board Paste Pasting an object from the clip board Align Align Top
278. ark with contents Only code of image Library Mark in the object is copied when the object is copied from other application with Import Components Command Contents must be copied separately Contents of Image Library Mark in the object is copied when the object is copied form other application with Import Components command Separate copying of contents is also available 539 Appendix I New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 7 Some User Interface functionality was added to Ver 4 7 to improve operation efficiency NT11 V1 Model support Not supported NT11 V1 is supported Supported OS Windows 95 98 and NT Windows 95 98 Me NT 2000 and Xp Screen size at start of 100 fixed For NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT21 Screen editing magnification of 100 200 or 400 is automatically selected to match the resolution of the personal computer being used 541 Appendix J Error Messages The error message that may be displayed while using the Support Tool and the action to take in response to them are shown below The indications W and E given at the beginning of an error message classify the level of errors as indicated below W Minor error permits transmission and execution of screen data E Major error disables transmission of screen data Error Message display or other element s cannot overlap with the Trend Graph Corrective Action A 96 display or other element is over
279. ary editor to close it Creating the library data of code FA21 to FA25 9 Create the library data of code FA21 to code FA25 in the same manner If character string occupies more than one line create the character string line by line Reference It is possible to copy library data FA20 to other code so that it can be reused Fol low the procedure below a Specify FA20 and select Copy by pressing edit button b Specify the code to be pasted and select Paste by pressing edit button 9 3 12 Creating the Pop up Display Numeric Keys Create the numeric keys displayed in the pop up window at screen No 1900 Reference With NT30 30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C screen numbers of the screen where a window keyboard screen can be created are restricted to 1900 to 1979 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C however a window key board screen can be created for any screen number as with a standard screen 1 to 3999 Creating the window keyboard screen For details of window keyboard screen refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Window Keyboard Screen 3 At the new standard screen dialog box set 1900 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 1900 Attributes Screen No History Title Co
280. ash Set the line type with the Style property The relationships between the points vertices in a broken line graph and numeral memory table contents are shown below When display direction is right A Numeral memory table 30 Start table entry number 70 50 88 28 4 Number of points 67 The intervals between numeral memory table entries in a broken line graph can be set as even or uneven as desired with the Interval Type line property If you select even the numeral memory table entries are displayed in equal intervals oes Even intervals If you select uneven the intervals between numeral memory table entries can be set as desired Click On interval Settings and the interval setting dialog box is displayed Interval Position Set number of dots 238 Graphs Section 6 9 Intervals can be set in the manner shown below Note that intervals are set as numbers of dots 1 Specify the point for which the interval is to be set The field of the specified point is displayed in reverse video 2 Change the width between points the number of dots 3 Click on Set 4 After setting the interval for all point positions click on When displaying a broken line graph the display
281. aste operation above is possible between the Support Tools To copy image library data 1 Selected the code to be copied on the image library table entry 2 Edit Copy 3 Select the code to be pasted 4 Edit Paste If screen data of the same PT model setting is opened by Import Component from the File menu copy amp paste operation above is possible between the Support Tools To group several graphics into one graphic 1 Select all graphics to be grouped 2 Draw Group Note Use the following commands to ungroup the grouped graphics Draw gt Ungroup To specify the graphic that is behind another ele ment graphic Click the different position so that the graphic at the back side is selected Note The element with the smallest area enclosing the point of selection will be selected Select the graphic at the front side Draw Send to Back Specify the graphic brought to the front side Select the graphic at the front side Edit Select Object Select the graphic to be specified in the list Keep pressing the Tab key or Shift key Tab key until the objective graphic is selected Specify the objective type of element on a filter and select the graphic by the method above To display only the se lected type of element to facilitate the screen edit ing of complicated screen Specify the type of element to be displayed using a filter o
282. aste a registered symbol to the data creation screen of the Support Tool se lect the symbol and drag it to the desired position on the data creation screen then release the mouse The symbol is copied to the data creation screen E Symbol Manager SymFile1 S File Edit View Help CI ColourPalette lt 4 GROUP I Datal 1 l LL Supplement Symbols Drag the symbol to the data creation screen and release the mouse The symbol copied to a data creation screen can be used in the same manner as other elements 257 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 Reference Symbols created by different PT models can be pasted to a data creation Pasting an ISO symbol screen In this pasting operation the symbol data is automatically converted and if an error occurred in data conversion an error message is displayed For details refer to Appendix A Data Conversion e Concerning image library data only the code is registered at the symbol man ager Therefore if the image library data is pasted to another screen data file the image library data of that code in the file to which the data was pasted is displayed If the ISO symbols supplied by the CD ROM version Support Tool are used with NT20S or NT600S those symbols that consist of elements that are not supported may not be displayed correctly Image library collection supplied by t
283. at is specified as a child screen by selecting it from the Standard field then click on mss The selected screen moves to the Child field If a wrong number is moved click on m the screen returns from the Child field to the Standard field Two to eight screens can be registered as child screens For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C one to eight screen can be registered as child screen Modify the screen switching order Child screens are overlapped in the order they are set in the Child field The setting order of the child screens can be modified using and Move Down Click on after the completion of child screen setting 5 3 3 Editing a Parent Screen Modification The type continuous overlapping and configuration of a created parent screen can be modified Reference The procedure for modifying a parent screen is indicated below 1 2 Specify the parent screen that you want to modify from the application man ager or display the pop up menu by right clicking the mouse on the parent Screen Select Screen in the menu bar then choose Modify Parent or select Modify in the pop up menu The parent screen modify dialog box is displayed The procedure for modifying the setting is the same as setting for new parent screen information Refer to 5 3 1 Continuous Screens or 5 3 2 Overlap ping Screens If a parent screen is copied on the application manager c
284. ata Application File Section 3 3 PLC and for window control area controlling a window NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 and V2 only PT Type System Control Notify Area PT Control Area PLC Address set PT Notify Area PLC Address Window Control Area PLO Address PT Control Area PC PLC Address Set the type of words at the PC PLC and the first address word number of the area used as the PT Status Control Area The PT Status Control Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies the following number of words NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C For V1 models and V2 models without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 5 words For V2 models with NT30 620 Compatible mode 4 words NT21 Without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 5 words With NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 4 words Other models 4 words Comments Set a comment concerning this area As a comment up to 16 character can be set PT Notify Area PC PLC Address Set the type of words at the PC PLC and the first address word number of the area used as the PT Status Notify Area The PT Status Notify Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies the following number of words NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C For V1 models and V2 models without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 2 words For V2 models with NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 3 words NT21 Without NT20 30 620 Compatible mode 2 words With NT20 30 620 C
285. ata transmission starts when is clicked 3 Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data sent from the Support Tool can be received If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on FF in the error message dialog box 4 While the data is being sent to the PT the progress of data transmission is indicated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on Cancel Reference If data transmission is aborted it is necessary to initialize the image data memory in the Maintenance mode System Menu Execute the same processing if data transmission is interrupted due to trouble When sending all the screen data Application initialization is not necessary since initialization is automatically executed 433 Receiving Uploading Data Section 11 4 screen data When transferring the data in units of screens if there are changes in a memory table and or direct access transfer such data along with the Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 11 4 Receiving Uploading Data To receive upload data stored in a PT at the Support Tool as the screen data being edited follow the steps shown below The type of data that can be received is indicated in the table below Data Type Description Application in file units All data is sent in batch Screen Data
286. ates the equipment necessary for using the Support Tool Hardware Recommended CPU Pentium 100 MHz or faster CPU Personal Computer Use an IBM personal computer or 10096 compatible Recommended Memory 32 Mbytes minimum Free area in hard disk At least 47 Mbytes for installing Support Tool System Program System In staller To install other data such as Sample Collection for Support Tool on CD ROM another 38 MB is required CD ROM drive At least one drive is required if the Support Tool is provided on CD ROM Display VGA compatible display When creating screen data for a PT that has a color display a color display is required When the resolution setting of desktop area is low lower than 640 x 480 part of the window of Support Tool may stick out of the screen In this case change the resolution setting of desktop area to the higher one with the control panel property of Windows Mouse Serial mouse or bus mouse Operating system Microsoft Windows 95 Windows 98 Windows NT Windows NT is only available with NT series Support Tool Ver 3 3 onward Windows Me Windows 2000 and Windows Xp Windows Me 2000 Xp is only available with NT series Support Tool Ver 4 7 onward Device necessary for Transmitting screen data RS 232C cable For cable specifications refer to Appendix J Connecting Cable Specifications 1 3 General Configuration of the Support Tool 1 3 1 Outline of Screen Data The screen dat
287. ation Procedure Setting 292 An extended l O input table entry is displayed by following the operation de scribed below Select Tools menu bar gt S Extended I O Input tab Clicking on table entry No gt amp Settings for the extended I O input table fields can be mage by using the setting dialog box that is displayed by clicking on For the operation procedure for change Address so and Gowen refer to 7 1 Common Operation Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 7 5 2 Description of Extended I O Input Table Fields Numeral String VO Comments Extended I O Input Extended I O Output Bit Memory Chel Function Description E e No lo None HEIEIEIEEIESES Goto Entry a cbe gue 3 Help No Extended I O unit input terminal number Cnel Presence absence of the backlight OFF cancelling attribute Make this setting at Set dialog Function Function set for the input terminal Notify bit Switch Screen Input Key Control Make this setting at Set dialog Description Contents set at Function are shown Make this setting at Set dialog Cancel Backlight Off Specify whether or not the backlight OFF state is to be canceled To set the Cancel Backlight Off function click on the check box to set a check mark in it If you do not want to set the Cancel Backlight Off function clear the check mark in the check box
288. ation dialog box refer to Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration below If the PT is set to the NT21 the clock address dialog box will appear next Refer to page 53 The application manager and the data creation screen 1 Standard Screen are displayed PT screen data is created by arranging objects on this data creation screen The application manager is the tool to manage the screen data created by a user For operation procedure refer to Section 4 Application Manager Dialog Box Settings in the PT Configuration Before creating screen data it is necessary to set the PT configuration and the Control and Notify Areas that are shared with the PC PLC The operation steps shown below display the PT configuration dialog box 45 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 e Menu Bar File New creating new application Menu Bar Tools PT Configuration for modifying The PT configuration dialog box has a variety of setting items provided in three pages PT Type page System page Control Notify Area page PT Type page The PT Type page is displayed when you click on the PT Type tab The PT Type page is used to set the hardware configuration of the PT to be connected PT Type System Control Notify Area PT Model z I NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode PLG Vendor OMRON z Eont Type 1508859 1 Comments set PT
289. ay Sector To tile a graphic Objects Fixed Display Tiling 1 Window Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and register the created data from color palette symbol To display bit map data Tools Image Editor Create the image data Objects Fixed Display Image Display Display the created data To display a special sym bol character Tools Mark Editor Create the mark data Objects Fixed Display Mark Display the created data To display the same graphic in different posi tions and or different Screens Tools Library Editor Create the library data Objects Fixed Display Library Display Display the created data To switch the graphic dis play according to the PC PLC bit status Tools Library Editor or Tools Image Editor Create the graphic to be displayed Objects Lamp Image Display the created data To move a graphic ac cording to shift of the PC PLC bit status Tools Library Editor or Tools Image Editor Create the graphic to be displayed Objects Lamp Image Arrange the image on the locus of the graphic and dis play the same graphic according to bit shift of the PC PLC bits To switch the graphic dis play according to the sta tus Tools Library Editor or Tools Image Editor Create the graphic
290. ay 96 Color Cyan Style Solid C Table Entry Value 4 800 Table Entry Value Table Entry Value to add line 2 Set the line 2 properties as shown below Table Entry 3 Display d Color White Style Dot dash C Table Entry Value 4 1200 Table Entry Value 600 Table Entry Value 4 0 369 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Click on 5 0 returns to setting property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of the frame and display 7 Specify the trend graph and select Edit menu bar Select Object 8 In the list specify 096 Line 1 display 96 at the upper right of the trend graph and drag it to the 96 display position for Data 1 Reference Even if elements are overlapped you can select the desired element easily using the Select Object function For elements such as a trend graph that consist of several elements use the Edit Object function to make element selection easi er 9 Specify 100 Line 2 display 96 at the upper right of the trend graph and drag it to the 96 display position for Data 2 10 Specify the trend graph frame and adjust the size and the position Displaying an example Create the example of display using fixed display text and straight lines 11 Select Objects menu bar gt
291. ay screen For NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C this screen can also be used as a standard screen if it is not used as a keyboard screen For NT21 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a keyboard screen cannot be displayed independently With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above all objects other than thumbwheel SW can be registered With other models only fixed display and touch switch used to input numeral string and temporary input field can be registered This type of window is called a Keyboard Screen With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C and NT631C with V1 and above up to 3 window keyboard screens can be opened at the same time With other models only 1 window keyboard can be opened For details refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens Host connect screen System initializing screen This screen is displayed at the start of PT operation until the connection to a PC PLC is completed If a Host Connect screen is not registered the default screen that shows the host connection message is automatically displayed when the PT power is switched on or when the PT mode transfers to the run mode Display OFF screen no display screen This screen is used when nothing is to be displayed on the screen Since this Screen is reserved by the system as a Display OFF screen it cannot be edited Extended screen Screens
292. ayed Change Image Specify the image data to be displayed when the lamp is ON OFF Change Library Specify the library data to be displayed when the lamp is ON OFF Color Only for NT31C and NT631C Setting is not possible for other color types of PT Foreground the display color of an image element Specification of color is valid only when the color mode is 2 colors Setting is not possible for a monochrome type PT Background Set the display color of the background in the image element display area Specification of color is valid only when the color mode is 2 colors Setting is not possible for a monochrome type PT Light Functions Address PC PLC Bit Address Specify the bit at the PC PLC that drives an image library lamp ON OFF Comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that drives an image library lamp ON OFF Edit Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number Emi Displays an I O comment table entry Reference To check lamp ON status on the editing screen select Simulate ON OFF from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool 198 Lamps Section 6 5 Guidance e For image library lamp element the image library data that is displayed when the PC PLC bit is ON and the image library data that is displayed when the PC PLC bit is OFF are specified independently General Light Function OFF State
293. be facilitated since searching for symbol data is simple Select File in the menu bar then select New Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 A new folder is named as No description Edit View He Changing folder name To change the folder name to one that is easy to understand follow the opera tion shown below 1 Select the folder name that should be changed The folder name is dis played in reverse video 2 Select Edit in the menu bar then select Change Label The label name change dialog box is displayed 3 Set the desired folder name and click the Button Ves Cut CtrieX Copy Ctrl C File Edit View Help Paste gt Label No description FQ ColourPalatte LL GROUP1 Delete Del Cancel Supplement Symbols Choose Icon Change Label Registering the symbol data A graphic consisting of several elements is registered as a single element symbol After registering the symbol data be sure to perform the file save operation To register the symbol data select the elements to be registered collectively and drag them to the symbol manager folder where they are to be registered ili Symbol Manager SymFilel SBL File Edi View Help __ ColourPalette 43 GROUPI lt 9 05 Supplement Symbols H ColourPalette 49 GROUP LJ Supplement Symbols Drag the symbol to the desired then re
294. bel Type as follows Static Label On Off Static When View Simulate ON OFF setting is ON displays ON label when OFF displays OFF label Numeral Display Same for Numeral Display information String Display Same for String Display information 3 N Numeral Table S String Table B Bit Memory Table 3 2 2 Major Functions of Dialog Boxes A dialog box is a window that is displayed in a fixed size The purpose of a dialog box is to set data that is required to execute the functions of the Support Tool The following types of dialog boxes are used and the procedure for setting the data differs according to the type of dialog box Option button This represents a selection item with O displayed to the left of the item name Only one of the displayed items can be chosen The item is identified by a black circle Numeral Storage Type BCD Binary Check box This represents a selection item with J displayed to the left of item name Items can be selected by giving a check mark in this box Resume Function 43 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Text box This text box is an input field to set characters Comments List box A list box displays a list of data the data to be set is selected from the list Standard Combo box A list of selection items appears in the dropdown list box format The data to be set is selected from the list
295. bjects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the Start button frame by dragging the mouse at the button dis play position 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Label 7 Start refer to the following 1 Frame Shape Shadow Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Notify Bit Address PC PLC Address L0000100 Comments Start Switch Action Type Momentary Light Function Address PC PLC Address L0000200 Comments Start lamp General Light Lamp Attrib ute 1 Press Edit to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button 4 Press edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Start Position Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing _ Attribute Standard Color White Black Description Font Type Foreground Background Click on 50 returns to touch switch property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of Start button 5 Specify the Start button and select Edit menu bar Edit Object 6 Adjust the size and position of Start button frame 386 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 7 Adjust the position of the label Start by dragging it
296. ble or the function called by Tools gt Change Address De 131 Common Operation Section 6 1 132 pending on how the address change operation is called the objective addresses differ in the operation using the edit dialog box of the memory table addresses in the table being edited are objective while all addresses in the entire screen data are objective of the operation if the operation is performed using the Tools menu The explanation below is given for the batch address change operation where the entire screen data is the objective of the operation For the procedure to per form the operation using the edit dialog box of the memory table refer to 7 7 3 Batch Address Change Operation Description of batch address change dialog box Find Channel Common I O Area m Cancel Address Bit Start Range NE Hep Address End Range Change To Channel i Address Bit Change Comment Find Channel Word Specify the channel type of the batch change source Find Start Range Specify the start address of the source range for the batch address change Find End Range Specify the end address of the source range for batch address change The address to be set for End Range must always be larger than or equal to the address set for Start Range Change to Channel Word Specify the word type and start address after the change Addres
297. ble range it is re placed as shown below for a 10096 value the existing value is corrected to 100 for a 0 value it is corrected to 0 and for a 10096 value it is corrected to 100 W Object Name value is out of limit Default values re stored for 10095 0 and 10096 Correction related to the label component of standard lamp and touch switch Correct the screen data or the program at the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Refer to 6 9 Graph In the conversion of the data between a NT31 631 V2 or later model and a NT31 631 V1 or earlier model conversion is executed in the manner shown be low due to differences in the label data of standard lamp and touch switch Difference V2 or later models On label and Off label can be different Other models On label and Off label should be same Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a V2 or later model a standard lamp touch switch label type is set to Static and On Off label descriptions are different With a V2 or earlier model standard lamp touch switch label type is set to Static and On label description will be set to that of Off la bel IW Label Type On Off Static is not sup ported Label will set to Off descrip tion None With a V2 or later model set Standard Lamp T
298. box the Set Margins dialog box and the Header and Footer dialog box refer to 12 2 2 Output to a Printer 12 3 Displaying the Print Image Preview 456 Before printing a report it is possible to visually check the print image on the Screen The procedure for displaying the print image is basically the same as that for out putting the report to a printer Operation procedure to display the print preview is shown below 1 Select File menu bar Print Preview The Reports dialog box is displayed 2 To specify the print position of the paper click on Set Margins The Set Margins dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click The Reports dialog box is displayed again 3 To set the header footer click on the Header Footer The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click The Reports dialog box is displayed again Outputting the Screen Image Section 12 4 4 After completing the setting click on in the Reports dialog box EE View Draw Objects Screen New For details Reports dialog box the Set Margins dialog box and the Header and Footer dialog box refer to 12 2 2 Output to a Printer The operation procedure at the preview screen is shown below Print Next Page Prev Page Two Page Zoom In Zoom Out Close 33 Page Prev Page Iwo Page
299. by specifying the entry number through a Go to dialog Insert Mark Inserts a mark object in a parameter name Import The Parameter values in the records of a recipe can be edited through a CSV Comma Separated Values file Each line consists of the fields of a record with a comma separating two fields The first line of a CSV file is the header The first field is the recipe name If it con tains ASCII characters from 0x00 to Ox1F will be converted to spaces after im port The second field is Master Record Flag which is equivalent to the Lock check box in the Record Setting dialog Subsequent fields are the names of all the parameters in the record The second line onwards contain the parameter value of the records in the rec ipe The first field is the record name The second field is a value indicating whether the Lock check box should be checked or unchecked 0 means un checked and 1 means checked Any other values are considered invalid Subse quent fields are the actual values of the parameters in that record During export of parameters in the Record Setting Table the decimal points of the parameters will not be exported Example Parameter 1 is set to 3 integer digits and 2 decimal digits and the parameter value is 123 45 After exporting to CSV format the value will become 12345 Hexadecimal values will be converted to the decimal equivalent after export If you try to import a CSV file that has a value with a decimal poi
300. carded Screen switching nu meral string input at PT side can be enabled dis abled using the PT con trol bit in PT control area also Modify the pro gram according to the setting Correction related the number of digits for numeral display In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeric values that can be displayed Difference New models A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be displayed Conventional models A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be displayed 479 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a new model a numeral display element for which a numeric value ex ceeding 8 digits is displayed is regis tered to the symbol manager Correction related to analogue meter With a conventional model a numeral display element of greater than 8 digits is discarded Numeral Display Total number of in teger and decimal exceeds limit It is discarded Create a new numeral display element Correct the screen data or the program at the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Refer to 6 6 Numeral Display In the conversion of the data between new models with V1 and above and other PT models conve
301. cation or use of the Good At Buyer s request Seller will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying ratings and limitations of use which apply to the Good This information by itself is not sufficient for a complete determination of the suitability of the Good in combination with the end product machine system or other application or use The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given This is not intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of this Good nor is it intended to imply that the uses listed may be suitable for this Good i Outdoor use uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference or conditions or uses not described in this document ii Energy control systems combustion systems railroad systems aviation Systems medical equipment amusement machines vehicles safety equipment and installations subject to separate industry or government regulations iii Systems machines and equipment that could present a risk to life or property Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to this Good NEVER USE THE PRODUCT FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO ADDRESS THE RISKS AND THAT THE SELLER S PRODUCT IS PROPERLY RATED AND INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM 2 3 Pr
302. ce nrs etx Ress baw oe ob hain betes PUES URBES E 8 3 Mark Edito We NOES Rae eee ps ates SECTION 9 Example Screens 32e ew mer mex e 9 1 Example Screen Configuration 5 9 2 Operation Flow 5p ER ee ee ut Aa EU e RC CR A ee does 9 3 Creating the Sample Dat x eR ERR REP SR SECTION 10 Quick 10 1 Quick 2 lvl RR RR RR UV eee aed SECTION 11 Data Communications with a PT 11 1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure 11 2 Communication Setting at the Support Tool 8 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data 11 4 Receiving Uploading Data 0 0 III 11 5 Receiving Uploading the History Record 11 6 Setting and Reading the Date and Time SECTION 12 Making Reports ber Vei dene 122 Report Types iste eI EIER RUNE ER Ea ee ee 12 2 Printing Repotts s eis eek pede ee RUD HEURES SE RUE NIS SES EDU RU 12 3 Displaying the Print Image Preview 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image 85 204 207 224 250 259 265 266 275 281 286 291 295 296 305 306 311 321 322 334 34
303. cedure below to use color palette symbol 1 Open new screen to place color palette on it 2 Drag required tiling pattern symbol from palette symbol and drop it on the screen created in 1 3 Select Ungroup from the Draw menu to cancel the grouped status default status after confirming that the dragged symbol is in selected status 4 Clear the check mark for Full Tiling from the View menu to select the tiling object easily after you decided which one to use then drag it to the objective screen while depressing Ctrl key or perform copy amp paste To check the til ing status select Full Tiling from the View menu However in this status the position of tiling object will not be clear Cancel the Full Tiling status when required 5 Border color of tiling objects in color palette symbol is set to White Change the border color of tiling object by displaying property sheet if required Note that the transparent background color is not registered for color palette symbol Change the property afterwards when you want to apply transparent background 6 11 Recipe Screen Element 6 11 1 Recipe Screen Element Recipe screen element provides you with an interface to apply a set of data val ues from the recipe table to the PLC It can only be placed on a standard screen and it can be displayed in the parent screen The screen element property dialog box has 4 pages general touch Switch setting and interlock Operati
304. ch an option Numeral settings Example Screens The example screens that appear in this manual are mainly those of NT31C V1 Note that the contents of the screens of other models may differ somewhat from the examples Visual Aids The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of in formation Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product 1 2 3 1 Indicates lists of one sort or another such as procedures checklists etc OMRON 2000 All rights reserved No part of this publication may be reproduced stored in a retrieval system or transmitted in any form or by any means mechanical electronic photocopying recording or otherwise without the prior written per mission of OMRON No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein Moreover because OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high quality products the information contained in this manual is sub ject to change without notice Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual Nevertheless OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication Trademarks Microsoft MS DOS 6 Windows and Windows NT are either registered trademarks or Trademarks of Micro soft Cor
305. content is not stored in a numeral table The previously stored content remains in the numeral table When data is written to an allocated word the signed binary data in the numeral memory table entry is converted into BCD before writing If a negative value is written F is entered at the most significant digit posi tion In this case the number of storable digits is reduced by one If the number of digits in the content of a numeral memory table entry is greater than the number of digits of the allocated word in the PC PLC only the numeric value is written from the least significant digit value Binary The content of an allocated word is regarded as binary data When reading the content of the allocated word the read content is stored in a numeral memory table entry without change When writing a numeric value to the allocated word the content of the numeral memory table entry is written as it is If the number of digits in the content of a numeral memory table entry is greater than the number of digits of the allocated word in the PC PLC only the numeric value is written from the least significant digit value System Conforms to the setting for Numeral Display Type of System in the PC PLC Configuration Words Specify the number of words to be allocated to a numeral memory table entry The possible specifications are 1 and 2 f the setting is 1 word the 4 digit BCD or binary data is shared by the PT and PC
306. conversion is executed as shown below due to differences in screen numbers and elements that can be registered between conventional and new models Difference Screen No 9000 Only fixed display elements excluding image data and library data can be registered New models Conventional models Screen No 1999 All kinds of element can be registered Some elements that need communications with a host may not be displayed correctly 468 Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Data Conversion Appendix A Corrective Action With a conventional model elements that cannot be reg istered on a new model are regis tered With a new model the screen No is modified to 9000 Elements that can not be registered for a new model are re moved This screen does not support XXX It is discarded Correct the screen so that the same screen as before the conversion is created using fixed dis play elements excluding image library data Re fer to 5 8 Host Connect Screen System Initializ ing Screen Correction related to extended screens When an extended screen is converted an error message may be displayed due to differences in the handling of an extended screen between conventional and new models Difference New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and correcti
307. converted from a PT model to another PT model that has small er screen than the source PT model it is necessary to modify the screen data in accordance with the screen size If data is converted between a conventional model and a new model the data must be corrected in accordance with the conversion destination be cause there are many differences between a conventional model and a new model Refer to page 464 5 Modify the program If the screen data is corrected the program at the host may have to be modi fied Modify the program by referring to Correcting the Screen Data Conver sion page 464 Correcting the Screen Data Conversion This section describes how the screen data should be corrected after it has been converted If the screen data cannot be converted correctly an error message is displayed on conversion of the data when changing a PT model or PLC Vendor or register ing a symbol from the symbol manager If an error message is displayed it will be necessary to correct the screen data or the program Correcting the NT11 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C screen data after conversion If the screen data is converted to the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C the following modification of the screen data and program is needed according to the source destination PT model NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C If image library is inserted into a lamp touch switch label or a character NT620S NT620C NT631 NT631C with string
308. created with SYSMAC CPT When the I O comment table at Support Tool has an existing I O comment or when both word I O comment and its bit I O comment exist in ladder program to be imported e g 0005CH DDD 000512 EEE priority will be as foll smaller number takes higher priority 1 Existing I O comment in Support Tool in comment table 2 I O comment of bit in ladder program to be imported 3 comment of word in ladder program to be imported Example Existing I O comments in Support Tool in comment table Word Bit Comment 000603 BBB 0007 comments ladder program to be imported Ems FF 0006 F L comments in Support Tool in I O comment table after importing PLC Bit Address VO Comment 0000500 Yes 0000512 No 0000800 FFF No 0000603 BBB Yes 0000613 GGG No 0000700 CCC Yes 0000708 HHH No 10000800 111 a Existing I O comment in Support Tool in comment table OWS I O Comment Table Section 7 7 Handling of I O comments of Timer Counter Timer Counter do not have their own number They share common Timer Count er number However with an I O comment table at Support Tool it is possible to input Timer and Counter separately So when the Timer Counter number is imported I O comment table stores the same comment both for timer and counter of the same number In case comment table at Support Tool has a
309. creation of the example screens is shown below PT model NT620C 625C mage memory 512 Kbytes Memory table capacity Numeral memory table 512 entries Character string memory table String table 256 entries 9 2 Operation Flow Create the example screens by following the steps shown below Start up the Support Tool v File New v Set PT configuration v Set memory tables v Creating the Menu Screen Create new screen screen No 1 v Set properties for screen No 1 v Create screen title v Create Monitor Screen button v Create Set Screen button v Create Alarm Screen button v 355 Operation Flow Section 9 2 356 Creating Monitor Screen Create new screen screen No 10 v Set properties for screen No 10 v Create screen title v Create numeral display field of Numeral Display 1 v Create numeral display field of Numeral Display 2 v Create Trend graph ad Create new screen screen No 11 v Set properties for screen No 11 v Create Lamp 1 to Lamp 5 v Create image data for image lamp v Create Image Lamp v Create Bar Graph 1 v Create Bar Graph 2 v Create Menu button v Create Set button ed Create
310. creen No 2 Screen 1 PC PLC Specified PC PLC bit Allocated bit ON address 00010 Screen 2 Displayed in Character string Alarm list response to Bit memory table Specifying item memory table jek eas Character string lt to be called String table memory table ABC ABC String table No 10 DEF GHI PC PLC address 0001000 JKL 10 Specifying item Image library code FE20 to be called NY N Image data Displayed FE20 in response to touching a message Specified PC PLC bit Stored in alarm history P ABC 96 04 10 The range of bit memory table entries used for checking bit status is set by the alarm list 7 4 1 Operation Procedure Setting The bit memory table setting dialog box is displayed by following either of the op erations described below At the properties of the alarm list element click on the table entry number field Select Tools menu bar Table then click Bit Memory tab For bit memory table entries the objective of the operation is specified by clicking on a line The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard or by selection using a drop down list For the operation procedure for Reference Search Change Address Edit gt
311. creen is displayed to allow you to select the programs to be installed 33 Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 9 Click on the check box displayed to the left of the program to be selected to enter a check mark NT series Support Tool Setup Select Components Choose the components Setup will install Select the components you want to install clear the components you do not want to install Description Main program files of System Installer 31183 Nicias ine Sample Collection 38054 K version 4 70 wNl series Support Tool ver 4 7 Space Required ok Space Available 7527216 K InstallShield lt Back Next gt Cancel When the system installer is installed the system programs for NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 Ver 3 1 NT30 620 series and NT11S NT11 is also installed You can select the vendor type of system programs installed in the select sub components window To display the select sub components window set the cursor on System Installer and press the Change Button Click the Button The screen for specifying the destination for registering the start menu is displayed 10 In the start menu of Windows specify the folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is created In the initial state the following folder is selected Start Program Omron NTST4 7E 34 Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 11
312. cription Select Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing i Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black 18 Adjust the position of the Select character string on the data creation screen by dragging it 19 Specify the Select character string then select Draw menu bar gt Bring to Front The Select character string is brought to the front of the title bar Creating the Menu button Monitor button and Alarm button Copying and pasting the buttons from screen No 11 1 Copy the Switch Screen character string frame rectangle Menu but ton Set button and Alarm button collectively and paste them to screen No 3 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string frame rectan gle and buttons Modifying to the Monitor button 3 Double click the Set button and change the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Settings Screen No 2 Label Label Monitor 1 391 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 1 Press Edit to set the label 4 Resize the Monitor button larger than others 9 3 10 Creating the Alarm Screen Create screen No 4 new screen as the Alarm Screen 1 Select Screen menu bar gt New 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 At the new standard screen dialog box set 4 for th
313. ct them with a cable e Cable The recommended communication cable supplied by OMRON has a 25 pin RS 232C connector at the end for connection to a personal computer To con nect to a PC AT compatible personal computer that has a 9 pin female con nector use a 25 pin to 9 pin conversion adapter available on the market Recommended cable is in the Appendix J Connection Connect the RS 232C connector at the personal computer to the Support Tool connection port at the PT For the location of the connection port in the PT refer to the Appendix of the User s Manual of the PT With some models of PT it is necessary to disconnect from the host before connecting the Support Tool An example of connection is shown below assuming NT31 NT31C 11 1 2 Available Data Communication Methods by PT Models Data communication is possible by the two methods indicated below Batch transmission of all screen data Data transmission in screen and data units individual transmission Whether or not individual data transmission is possible depends on the PT model as shown below PT Model Batch Transmission Individual Transmission NT11S NT11 NT20S NT21 NT600S NT30 NT30C NT620S 428 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure Section 11 1 PT Model Batch Transmission Individual Transmission NT620C NT625C NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C O Possible x Not
314. cted the contents of this char acter string memory table entry string table are dis played If Indirect Reference is selected the con tents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the referenced character string memory table entry string table are displayed Length Specify the number of characters to be displayed ge Displays the list of numeral memory table entries or character string memory table entries String Table In indirect designation the list of numeral memory table entries is displayed and in direct designation the list of character string memory table entries String Table is dis played Guidance With a character string display element the memory table designation meth od can be selected as direct designation or indirect designation 205 Character String Display Section 6 7 Example Specifying memory table address 2 Direct designation Indirect designation Character string Numeral Character string memory table memory table memory table String table String table 1 Display 1 1 Display 2 TOOL _ p TOOL 2 5 2 TOOL 3 3 3 4 4 4 5 5 gt 5 TOOL 4 The contents of the specified The contents of the specified numeral memory table entry are displayed memory table entry are treated as the 206 Reference table entry address reference val
315. ction Copy Setting Set a constant for Code No of Copy From and a numeral memory table entry or a numeral setting input field for Copy to PT Numeral memory table gt Constant i 123 Touch switch copy function To set a constant or a content of a numeral memory table entry for a numeral setting input field 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Create a numeral setting input field 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Set a numeral memory table entry or a constant for Copy From and a numeral setting input field for Copy To PT Screen Numeral setting input field Constant 123 Touch switch copy function Quick Reference Touch Switches To print a hard copy of the screen Operation 1 Tools PT Configuration Set the printer to be connected 2 Objects Touch Switch Function Print Screen Create a touch switch for which the print screen func tion is set PT Q aF switch print screen function Section 1 Refer to 0 1 To stop the buzzer sound using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch Input Key Control Create a touch switch for which the stop buzzer code of the PT is set PT Ze Stopping buzzer 4 E ai Touch switch control code input function
316. d Displayed when the input field is touched It is possible to create a temporary input field at the same time as numeric keys are arranged in the window keyboard A temporary input field is created using a character string input element When a character string input element is arranged in the window keyboard the element is automatically set as a temporary input field Only one string input element temporary input field can be created for one window keyboard Setting processing differs as shown below depending on whether or not a tem porary input field is used When a temporary input field is used 2 Storing by pressing key Character string memory table String table ABCDEF Temporary input field 1 The input character string is displayed in the temporary input field 2 Press the J key and the character string in the temporary input field is set in the character string input field and stored in the character string memory table string table at the same time When a temporary input field is not used 2 Storing by pressing PON Character string memory table String table 186 Data Input Section 6 4 1 2 The input character string is directly set in the cha
317. d NT600S Attribute Specify the display attribute attributes displayed depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the character color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow When this property page is called from Label of Standard Lamp or Touch Switch Foreground ON OFF color can be specified for Label of type String Display 204 Character String Display Section 6 7 ON Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the color of the background in the character string dis play area Can only be set for PTs with color display Transpar ent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Reference Indirect Reference If the numeric value in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number and used for indirect table reference specify this item Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 Table Entry Specify the number of the character string memory table entry string table to be referred to If Indirect Reference is not sele
318. d differs according to the allocated control codes Copy setting touch switch Memory 1 When a touch switch is pressed the data in the memory table table entry or a constant is copied to another memory table entry or 50 input field Copy Source COPY pna erum Numeral memory table Numeral memory table Character string Character string memory table String memory table String table table Constant Input field specified by cursor Window move touch switch 1 When a touch switch window move touch switch is pressed Dasa the window be moved by touch panel operation at When you press the destination center of the window will come here window will be moved to that position TM Note Window move touch switch can be created only window keyboard screen MOVE 5 4 Cursor moving touch switch 1 When a touch switch cursor moving touch switch in an input field is pressed the cursor moves to that input field aaa ee eg Input cursor pi moves Note The cursor moving touch switch should be specified when Data input field 2 T creating a numeral or character string input element The l moves cursor moving touch switch can be added later TTTTTTTTLUTTTTTA 208 Touch S
319. d if the data has an error Sending Downloading specified screen 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple files can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Support Tool PT Screen Specify if child screens of continuous overlapping screens are also to be sent then click the Button If the screen data is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A message is displayed if the data has an error Sending Downloading specified Tables 1 2 Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Support Tool PT gt Table The dialog box used for specifying the table to be sent is displayed for PTs that allow table data to be sent in table units With PTs that do not allow table data to be sent table by table sending of the data starts immediately Specify the table to be sent then click the Button Reference Downloading in table units may not be possible with some PT types 4 2 13 Window Menu 72 Sending the Direct Access Information and system memory 1 Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Support Tool gt PT Direct Access Information or System Memory If the setting is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A mes sage is displayed if the data has an error The following Support Too
320. d of display on the screen will be slowed a little Comments Specify the comment for the image data to be created Screen Configuration of Image Editor The screen configuration of the image editor is described below Tool box Image Object Timi DEAN 4 Tool selection m e a 9 al 9 E BE 4 Color selection EIEILIL Pattern selection EA m m Point type selection Edit area Line width selection Set Font 4 Font selection Operating the image editor Using the image editor you can create a graphic in the desired shape in the edit area as combinations of lines points rectangles and circles after selecting the 327 Image Editor Section 8 1 tool and drawing conditions color tiling pattern point type line width and font Tool selection Used to specify the range to copy cut move shrink or expand the created graphic The range is specified by dragging the mouse cursor To cancel the range specifying frame select the tools other than ki Range specifying frame Used to move the graphic that is defined by the range specifying frame The range specifying frame can be dragged or a pop up menu can be displayed by right clicking the mouse Used to draw a point Click the mouse at the position where a point is to be drawn
321. d on the occurrence history screen and the frequency history screen The event of screen display is recorded in the display history if the check box of the history attribute is ticked if it is not ticked the event is not recorded Specify the title of screens that are displayed in the display history Setting of the title is possible only when the history attribute is selected Set the comment for a screen For the comment characters of up to 24 charac ters can be set Set if the backlight is to light continuously or flash when the screen is turned ON Light When the screen is turned ON the backlight lights Flash When the screen is turned ON the backlight flashes This attributes cannot be set for NTG00S NT620S NT620C NT625C Backlight Color only for NT30 Specify the backlight color white or red Buzzer other than NT11S NT11 Specify whether or not the buzzer should sound when a screen is displayed and also the type of buzzer sound If this attribute is selected the buzzer sounds when a screen is displayed The buzzer type can be selected from the following Continuous buzzer sounds continuously Short The buzzer sounds in cycles of 0 5 second beep and 0 5 se cond stop Setting is not possible for NT20S and NT600S Long The buzzer sounds in cycles of 1 second beep and 1 second stop Setting is not possible for NT20S and NT600S Beep The buzzer sounds in cycles of 0 5 second beep and 0 5 se
322. d printers from the printer drop down list box Although this setting is possible for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C it is not valid from Support Tool Please set from the Maintenance Mode of PT Mode Color Specify Color for color printing Designation of Color is valid for the following PT models NT30C NT620C NT625C Tone Specify Tone for monochrome printing If a color type PT is used with Tone set for Mode color data is expressed using a gray scale printed in monochrome These setting are available for the following PT models NT30 NT30C NT620S Printer only NT620C NT625C For NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C this setting has to be selected from PT Numeral Storage Type BCD or Binary can be selected for the storage type of the Numeral memory table This setting is available only when the time the Storage Type in the Numeral memory table has System setting When BCD or Binary is set for Numeral memory table Storage Type this setting in the PT Configuration will be ignored and follows the storage type in the Numeral Table This setting is available for the following PT Model NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Control Notify Area page The Control Notify Area page is displayed when you click on the Control Notify Area tab The Control Notify Area page is prepared to set the PT Control area control ling PT from PC PLC and for PT Notify Area notifying PT information to a PC Operation of Screen D
323. d table entry is used Whether the displayed number is a screen number or a table entry number can be determined from the displayed number as shown below For screen numbers only a number is displayed 266 Common Operation Section 7 1 For table entry numbers a number is preceded by a code that represents the table type The codes representing table types are summarized below Table type Numeral memory table Character string memory table String table Bit memory table Extended l O input table Extended I O output table Mathematical table 1 Reference operation is slightly different for mathematical table When a math ematical table entry is created with numeral table entry as either operand or re sult a reference is created to the corresponding entry in numeral table When operand result is PLC address a reference is created to the corresponding ad dress entry in I O comment table Comments Displays screen comments corresponding to a screen number No of References Displays the number of appearances of the screen or the table entry Operation 1 Click on the table entry number of the reference memory table entry 2 Click on _ meses List of referenced screen table entry number is dis played 3 In the reference dialog box specify the objective screen table entry number and click on As an alternative to the operation above you may double click on the objec
324. d to the touch switch as follows Example Align Bottom Align Right Base line for Align Bottom Base line for Align Right Reference Alignment function can be used also in the Edit Object mode By using this function in this mode position of the lamp touch switch label or image library 115 Common Operation Section 6 1 for image library lamp ON OFF status can be aligned easily within the element If alignment function was used in Edit Object mode only the selected element will be moved Alignment is performed towards the whole area of the element Touch switches may not be aligned to the center properly when Center in a Column or Center in a Row is performed because of the defined touch switch grid size They will be aligned to the nearest center f alignment function is performed when the filter function is activated the filter function will be cancelled 1 Select multiple elements to be aligned Or select one element that consists of multiple elements and specify the ob jective part after entering the Edit Object mode 2 Specify any of the aligning method after selecting Align from the Edit menu Or right click the mouse and specify the aligning method after selecting Align from the pop up menu Short cut key can also be used Refer to page 114 6 1 7 Grouping Elements It is possible to group multiple elements into one element When creating a graphic by combining several
325. data has an error Sending Downloading specified screen 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple files can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Make a right click on the selected screen icon then choose Download 3 Specify if child screens of continuous overlapping screens are also to be sent then click the Button If the screen data is free of errors transmitting of the data starts immediately A message will be displayed if the data has an error 71 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Sending Downloading specified Table 1 2 Right click the mouse on the table data box icon then select Download The dialog box used for specifying the table to be sent downloaded is dis played for PTs that allow table data to be sent in table individually With PTs that do not allow table data to be sent table by table sending of the data starts immediately Specify the table to be sent downloaded then click the Button Reference It is not possible to send download the direct access information or system memory individually Please use the menu operation Operation using the menu Sending Downloading the whole data file 1 Select Connect in the menu bar then choose Download NT series Sup port Tool PT Application If the screen data is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A message is displaye
326. ddition the status box displays Done for the completed language and the Start button which had until now displayed Stop caption changes back to Start You may start importing the next language by clicking the Start Button again You can search for specific text and replace it or you can search for and replace all forms of a word for example replace lamp with standard lamp Select Find Replace in the Edit Menu of the Application window A Find Replace Dialog box will appear on the screen Find Replace Ea Language German 1 Find Replace Replace Replace All m Direction Close Up Down E Help Language Display the currently selected language column Situations where error warnings may be displayed are given below The list is by no means exhaustive as more may be added Also there may be differences with the exact messages that are shown 1 Fonts with the following character sets are not available on your local ma chine Not all languages can be shown with the required character set 2 Only with the NT30 620 series when saving once the translation is com pleted a warning message will be displayed to prompt you to open the trans lated MMI file in NTST and validate the application to ensure proper behav ior This is due to the paging memory constraints for those PT Models 3 Database file cannot be found No access rights for database file Database
327. de Tile or Arrange Icons The windows are arranged according to the selected item Under the Window menu up to nine windows that are open are displayed in a list If the number of windows is ten or more the More windows item is displayed The window selection dialog box opens when this item is selected Users can activate the particular screen to edit from Window in the main menu or selecting from window selection dialog box of More windows This feature brings simple operation to edit data of veiled screen The Help menu includes the following items Contents Search for Help on e What s This PLC Address Help About NT series Support Tool Displaying help information using the table of contents The help information of the Support Tool is constructed so that the functions can be tracked according to the menu configuration To display help on a specific function display the table of contents of the help information and find help on the relevant function Operation 1 Select Help in the menu bar then select Contents The table of contents of help is displayed 2 Select an item to display the corresponding help contents In the information displayed in the help screen items that have a link to de tailed help information are underlined click on such an item to access the detailed information The necessary information will be reached by tracking the items in this way Reference
328. decimal Numeric value is displayed in hexadecimal The display will differ according to the specified notation even if the same content is displayed 23456 SBA Decimal Hexadecimal Format Specify the number of digits in the integer part and decimal fraction part Integer Specify the number of digits entered in the integer part Decimal Specify the number of digits entered in the decimal fraction part 123 45 Integer part Decimal part Zero Suppression Specify whether leading zeros should be suppressed Ticked Leading zeros are suppressed Not ticked Leading zeros are not suppressed QUB12345 12345 Without zero suppression With zero suppression Display Sign Specify if a sign is displayed 126 Common Operation Section 6 1 Reference Word setting for an element When a negative numeric value is displayed with this item selected a negative sign is displayed preceding a numeral Since this sign is included in the num ber of digits in the integer part the maximum digit number is reduced by 1 When this item is not selected a negative numeric value is displayed as an absolute value Ticked Numeric values are displayed without a sign Not ticked Numeric values are displayed with a sign 001 2945 O0123545 Without a sign With a sign How a numeric value is displayed according to the setting for Integer Decimal Zero Suppression and Display Sign is shown below Data Sto
329. depending on the PT model The example screen shown above is for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Value Specify the initial value to be set when the power is switched ON the PT is reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN The range of values that can be input in this field is shown below PT Model Input Type Input Range Other than NT21 NT31 BCD F9999999 to 99999999 NT31C NT631 and NT631 Hexadecimal 00000000 to FFFFFFFF NT21 NT31 NT31C Decimal 2147483648 to 2147483647 NT631 and NT631 Hexadecimal 00000000 to FFFFFFFF 277 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 Reference 278 1 Fin the most significant digit position 8th digit indicates a negative value 2 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a hexadecimal num ber can be input by entering at the beginning of a numeric value The input hexadecimal value is converted to decimal for display For PT models other than the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the input 8 digit hexadecimal value is simply stored as it is there are no distinctions between BCD and hexadecimal for these models If the input numeric value is displayed in BCD format F in the most significant digit position 8th digit is treated as a negative sign With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the input numeric value is stored after conversion to signed binary data 2 words Setting of an initial value is
330. dition it is possible to dis play the list of each object by types if this function is used with Select Object func tion For details refer to the Reference Filter function is applied to individual screen To activate this setting follow the procedure below 85 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 1 Select the object to be displayed from the combo box on the utility bar To display all the objects cancel filter function select All Standard Lamp Thumbahee Switch Numeral Input String Input Numeral Display Reference While a filter function is used you can edit only the objects being displayed f the Select Object dialog box refer to page 107 is displayed by right clicking the object while a filter function is used only the type of object being displayed is shown in the list In this case the type name of the object will not be displayed in the Select Object dialog box and detailed information of objects is shown e f a filter function is used for a Fixed Display Full Tiling View menu will be cancelled automatically since the tiled status may not be displayed correctly if the element used as a border is hidden by a filter function Confirmation mes sage is displayed With a filter function only one type of object can be specified It is not possible to select two or more objects such as a Touch Switch and Bar Graph Reference Whe
331. ditor window The data can be pasted until another data is stored to the clipboard 331 Image Editor Section 8 1 Saving to the bit map file Pasting from the bit map file 332 When more than one image editor window is displayed or when two Support Tools are opened by Import Component from the File menu same PT model setting cut copy and paste operations between these image editor windows are possible For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool You can save the created graphic to the file in bit map format This operation is valid for the graphics in the range specifying frame To save the graphic to the bit map file follow the procedure below 1 2 Specify the area to be saved in a file with a range specifying frame Select Copy To from the Edit menu The dialog box to specify the file name is displayed Set the folder and file name and click the Button Graphics in the range specifying frame is saved in a file 3 Edit View Tools Conne ve Save in CyDua gt 1 e aj Cut Ctriex Copy Ctr Paste Ctrlev Delete Del gt Paste From Clin PEGE Rotate or Flip gt File name ee Properties Save as type Image documents amp bmp e cum You can read out the graphics saved in a bit map file and paste them onto the image editor The graphics can be pasted onto the image editor that is cur
332. e Numerical Operator Addition Subtraction Multiplication Division result will have the quotient only and Modulo Boolean Operator AND OR amp XOR Bitwise Operator amp bitwise AND bitwise OR and bitwise XOR Comparison Operator gt and 7 9 6 Description of Edit Operand Fields This dialog box will be obtained by clicking any of the enable Operand buttons This will be used to specify the operand Operand Type This combo box will specify the type of operand Default is None and OK button will remain disabled unless some other selection is made The following choices are available for the combo box PLC Adaress zm Operand x Operand PLC Address X PLC Bit Address Set Storage Type acp Tm Cancel Help This is almost like the address dialog box There is an extra field Storage Type Storage Type Specify the type of the storage type BCD BIN 309 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 Numeral Table Entry Edit Operand xi Operand Type Numeral Table Enty Numeral T able Entry d E Cancel Numeral Table Entry Specifies numeral table entry number Numeral table entry can be specified in this edit box using corresponding table button a Constant Constant Specify constant integer for the operand 7 9 7 Description of Edit Result Fields This dialog box will be obtained by clicking Result button This will be used to specify the
333. e 319 SECTION 8 Editing Graphic Data The graphic data edit function creates images in the bit map data format library data using fixed elements and marks that display special characters and symbols 8 1 Image Editor ccs Rr ELDER UN CR RARE DR IQUe RE C 322 8 1 1 Operating the Image Table 0 00 eee A 322 8 1 2 Creating Image Data Using Image Editor 325 8 2 Library Editor vet 5 otis Saw lane ES 334 8 2 1 Operating the Library 334 8 2 2 Creating Library Data Using Library Editor 337 8 3 Mark Editor cest oe eve TREE xar Rat be eme 342 8 3 1 Screen Configuration 0 0 eee cee ence nee 342 8 3 2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor 342 321 Image Editor Section 8 1 8 1 Image Editor Reference The procedure for creating images of any required shape in the bit map BMP format is described below The bit map format graphic data that has been created using a Windows based general purpose application software can be pasted onto the image creation screen by using the image editor via the clip board Created image data can be inserted into a character string in an image library lamp display alarm list display alarm history display or character string display With the NT21 and NT31 631 without NT20 30 620 compat
334. e 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool The procedures for changing the screen display method and displaying the in formation on elements are indicated below Reference In addition to the display methods indicated below Support Tool has a filter func tion that displays only the elements of the selected type Refer to 5 1 4 Filter Function Confirming full tiling status When Full Tiling is selected in the View menu with a tick mark entered on the left side of the menu item the element is displayed on the Support Tool screen in the tiled status 81 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Reference There may be differences in element display order and details in display be tween the Support Tool and a PT Therefore results of tiling may be different in the display obtained at a PT and that confirmed by the Support Tool When a filter function is used for a fixed display Full Tiling will be automatically cancelled confirmation message will be displayed since the tiled status may not be displayed correctly if the object used as a border is hidden by a filter function Displaying element information Show Tag The Support Tool can display the following element information on the screen at the same time Information Displayed on the Screen PC PLC address PC PLO bit addresses of lamp settings light function for lamps PC PLC addresses of lamp setting
335. e Button to set the following items e Function History Switch Screen String Table Entry Image Library Code Color Click the Set Button to set the following items Direct input on a bit memory table is also possible PLC Address D Comments 360 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Switch Image PC lO Screen Story Linra Address Comments Code Function Alarm Switch FA20 0002000 Alarm 1 Screen Alarm Switch FA21 0002001 Alarm 2 Screen Alarm Switch FA22 0002002 Alarm 3 Screen Alarm Switch FA22 0002003 Alarm 4 Screen Alarm Switch FA23 0002004 Alarm 5 Screen Alarm Switch FA24 0002005 Alarm 6 Screen Alarm Switch FA24 0002006 Alarm 7 Screen Alarm Switch FA25 0002007 Alarm 8 Screen i With NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C set the Alarm for function and unmark the check box for Switch Screen 9 3 5 Creating the Menu Screen Create the Menu Screen Menu Screen Monitor Screen Set Screen amp larm Screen Display the data creation window for screen No 1 which is displayed at the start up of the Support Tool at the front Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 1 Refer to 5 1 1 Setting the Screen Attributes Attributes Screen No 1 History Title Menu Screen Comment Menu Screen Buzz
336. e P331 When two or more codes are selected edit screens of all the selected codes can be opened oollectively New Registers the new image code to the image table refer to page 325 Only the registered image codes are listed on the image table Press this button when you are going to create new image data Image Editor Section 8 1 Delete Deletes the image data of the selected code When two or more codes are selected they can be deleted collectively Close Closes the image table dialog Help Displays Help about the image table dialog box Specifying a code To specify a code for operations click on the objective line image code To specify the continuous codes collectively click on the first code to be se lected and then the last code to be selected while pressing the Shift key If you click on a code while pressing the Ctrl key the code will be selected or deselected alternately each time it is clicked Mode Si 8 Colo 2 8 Colo 40 8 Colo 40 8 Colo 32 8 Colo 32 Shift 4 Click 8 Colo 32 8 Colo32 Mode Si 8 Colo 24 Ctrl Click 0006 No 8 Colo 32 Preview Function Support Tool provides a preview function that can display the contents of the selected code When two or more codes are selected the preview of the code selected last will be displayed in preview window The preview window can
337. e character string memory table string table and bit memory table Refer to Section 7 Memory Table Setting Opening a table 1 Select Tools menu bar Table Setting numeral memory table 1 Make the numeral memory table settings as shown below Initial Words PC PLC Address Comments D00000 Mtr Num disp 1 D00001 Mtr Num disp 2 D00003 Mtr Trd graph 1 D00004 Mtr Trd graph 2 D00005 Mtr Bar graph 1 D00006 Mtr Bar graph 2 D00010 Set Num input 1 D00012 Set Num input 2 Setting character string memory table 1 Click on String D00014 Set Thumbwheel 359 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 2 Make the character string memory table settings as shown below PC PLC 1 0 Address Comments 0 Initial Words Automatic Manual Step NIAAA Reset D00150 Alarm data 1 D00170 Alarm data 2 D00190 Alarm data 3 D00210 Alarm data 4 D00230 Alarm data 5 D00250 Alarm data 6 D00270 Alarm data 7 D00290 Alarm data 8 Line 1 Error Line 2 Error A spot Screw Error B spot Screw Error Low Pressure Area 1 Alarm Area 2 Alarm PC PLC Network Error XY XY XN Setting bit memory table 1 Click on Bit Memory 2 Make the bit memory table settings as shown below Click th
338. e Lamp Image Lamp PLC Address ON code OFF code ON comment if check else OFF com ment Standard Lamp Standard Lamp PLC Address Label Touch Switch 42 Touch Switch Function PLC Address Label If function type is Notify Bit display Notify Address else display Lamp Address User Interface Section 3 2 Screen Element Selected item Thumbwheel Information to be displayed Thumbwheel PLC Address Table Entry 3 Numeral Input Numeral Input PLC Address Table Entry 3 Reference Type String Input String Input PLC Address Table 3 Reference Type Recipe Recipe Recipe Number Recipe Name Write Notify Bit No of Records No of Parameters Numeral Display Numeral Display PLC Address Table Entry 3 Reference Type String Display String Display PLC Address Table Entry 3 Reference Type Bar Graph Bar Graph PLC Address Table Entry 3 Direction Trend Graph Trend Graph Type Drawing Width Direction Broken line Graph Broken line Graph Direction Alarm History Alarm History Display Image Library or not Alarm List Alarm List Table Entry 3 Display Image Library or not Analogue Meter Analogue Meter PLC Address Table 3 1 M Mark I Image L Library 2 For the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 the in formation to be displayed depends on the La
339. e NT series Support Tool cannot handle marks of 32 x 32 dots and 64 x 64 dots If marks created by the DOS version Support Tool are imported 32 x 32 or 64 x 64 dot size marks must be represented by dividing and grouping them as 16 x 16 dot size mark data 8 3 1 Screen Configuration The screen configuration of the mark editor is shown below Standard toolbar Mark Editor x ES Image display area Edit area Drawing toolbar al N a o m e s n Cancel Help Reference 8 3 2 Creating Marks Using the Mark Editor Displaying the mark editor 1 Tools menu bar gt Mark Editor The mark data list dialog box is displayed In the mark data list dialog box the mark data registered for the codes are displayed 2 Select the code in the mark data list dialog box and click on ex or double click the area corresponding to the code in the list 342 Mark Editor Section 8 3 A code can be selected either from the displayed list or by specification in the Code field If a code is selected in the list the specified part is displayed enlarged J Show Marks Code 20 he EE Connect Window Table Image Editor Library Editor Mark Editor Import I O Comments id Validate 12 PT Configuration L gt gt E AA Cancel Reset Help OF N a e me OK
340. e Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent Click on 5 J returns to lamp property then click on again Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color ON and Color OFF can be set independently for a label so that the lamp can be displayed in different colors in the ON and OFF states 372 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Adjusting the size and position of the lamp 5 6 Specify the Lamp 1 Select Edit Object from Edit menu For methods of specifying an element consisting of multiple elements refer to 6 1 3 Selecting an Element Specify the Lamp 1 and adjust the size and position of the lamp frame Adjust the position of the Lamp 1 character string by dragging it Creating lamp 2 9 Copy Lamp 1 and paste it onto the data creation screen 10 Move the pasted Lamp 1 to the Lamp 2 position 11 Double click the mouse on the pasted Lamp 1 and modify the properties as shown below Note that the properties not shown here must be left un changed Light Functions Address PC PLC Bit Address Comment L0000001 Lamp 2 Label 1 Press Edit to set the label If the O comment is already set for the PLC address of light function clicking Vo Comments button copies the label 12 Create Lamp 3 Lamp 4 and Lamp 5 in the same manner Label Lamp 21 13
341. e UC AR E RE RO E ERAS 159 6 4 Data Inputs thes Ss LESS Saleen dy OSS T Eit 171 625 dose Ea mrs 192 6 6 Numeral Display sconces panre na at aain ERREUR Ra ERR Rp P E ae 200 vii viii TABLE OF CONTENTS 6 7 Character String Display leseeeeeeeeeee Ie 6 8 Touch Switches tue eee eae ee Che eed ERE Re pere 6 0 Graphs cuisses ETSI See tk PHP EUIS veste 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation 6 11 Recipe Screen Element ous tentem et Re CORE PRA AG SORA Rte Obes SECTION 7 Memory Table Setting T L Common Operation FA SHAR GN RAS AOR RE 7 2 Numeral Memory Table eee 7 3 Character String Memory Table String Table T4 Memory Table sisi LER RC ROCCO ea RC UR Be 7 5 Extended I O Input Table 0 0 III 7 6 Extended I O Output Table leseeeeeeeeee II qi JO Comment babe baba ad bes 7 8 Input Notify 8 8 6 7 9 Mathematical Table scs lec eMe MUNERE Mb y en 7 10 Recipe Tableti 5 eius ERU eR PERO eid M tated ede ble a SECTION 8 Editing Graphic Data 8 16 Image Editon RE PRUES PUER wees sates 8 22 JPabrary Edito sri
342. e and corrective action Status before Conversion A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input for the maximum minimum limit maximum minimum limit Status after Conversion Error Message A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input for the Corrective Action With a new model a numeral setting input field for which a numeric value greater than 100000000 or smaller than 10000000 is speci fied as a maximum or minimum limit is registered to the symbol manager With a conventional model maximum and minimum value greater than 8 digits will be reset Correction related the number of digits for numeral input 478 W Numeral Input Maxi mum value is out of limit Default values restored for maxi mum and minimum Create a new numeral setting input field Cor rect the screen data or the program in the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Re fer to 6 4 1 Numeral In put 6 4 3 Thumbwheel Switch In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeric values that can be input Difference New models Conventional models e Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input Status after Conversion Error Message A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be inpu
343. e graph The reference point is at the upper left corner of the broken line graph Size Indicates the size of a broken line graph Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a broken line graph Display Sign Specify whether or not a display area for negative values is displayed Direction Specify the display direction display direction of numeral memory table entries in ascending order of a broken line graph Right 2 Left Up Down 1 235 Graphs Section 6 9 Color Frame Specify the color of a broken line graph frame if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of broken line graph displayed for a positive value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of broken line graph displayed for a negative value Can only be set for PTs with color display Valid only when Display Sign is selected White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Specify this when displaying multiple broken lines The line properties Line are displayed Delete ine Specify this when deleting broken lines Line Property Specify this when modifying broken lines The line properties Line are displayed Line Start Table Entry Specify the start table entry number of the numeral memory table
344. e inside of the closed area of a drawn graph ic The area is tiled according to the specified pattern and in the colors spe cified as foreground color and background color 328 Image Editor Section 8 1 Color selection Displays foreground color Displays background color Color selection palette On the color selection palette move the cursor to the desired color and click the mouse a left click selects the foreground color and a right click selects the background color Pattern selection Selection box N ES Eu m Move the cursor to the desired pattern and left click the mouse the selection box moves to the pattern at the cursor location indicating that the pattern is selected e Point type selection Selection box o 9 L Move the cursor to the desired point type and left click the mouse the selection box moves to the point type at the cursor location indicating that the point type is selected Line width selection Selection box Move the cursor to the desired line width type and left click the mouse the line width type display at the cursor location will be highlighted indicating that the line width type is selected Font designation Font BE emm pur 2 z z fo Tahoma Bold Italic Cancel Terminal WW Times New Roman T Times New Roman MT T Wingdings sl Ei AaBbYyZz E
345. e printed or displayed to print the screen image add Screen Image to the simultaneously printed items With the default status check mark is set You can select whether or not to inverse screen image for printing It is also possible to select whether or not to include screen grid or dotted line frame for string display etc for printing P461 446 Report Types Section 12 1 Reference Itis possible to save each screen image to a bit map file In this case open the screen to be saved and select Screen Copy to Image The saved screen image can be edited using the application software such as Paint Screen No 1 Standard Screen Screen Comment Menu Screen Fixed Display Rectangle Square Start Pos End Pos FrndColor BkGnd Colour Attribute 10 10 204 59 While Transparent Standard Fixed Display TexMark Position Font Scale Smoothing Attribute FrGnd Colour BkGnd Colour Description a 20 15 Standard 2 2 Yes Standard White Transparent Touch Switch Display Start Pos End Pos Function Menu Screen Disp SPos Disp EPos Lamp Bit Frame State Attribute Frame Col Of Col On Col Flash Col Label Font Scale Smoolhing Attribute Label Fg Col Label Bg Label On Col Label 181 141 500 200 Switch Screen No 2 3 Dimension 181 141 500 200 No Light White Transparent While While 230 155 landard White Transparent Monitor Screen 181
346. e screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 4 Attributes Screen No 4 History Title Alarm Screen Comment Alarm Screen Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid w Snap to Grid 4 Creating the screen title Alarm Screen Copying the screen title from screen No 1 Menu Screen 1 Copy the Menu Screen character string and its frame rectangle on screen No 1 and paste them onto screen No 4 392 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the desired position Modifying to Alarm Screen 3 Double click the Menu Screen character string and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 4 Adjust the size of the frame rectangle Creating the alarm list Alam list Alarm List Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the Alarm List character string is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Alarm List Position F
347. e screen data has been edited Especially for the converting errors it is not possible to reproduce these errors even if the error check Validation has been performed So soon after the con verting error occurs it is recommended to perform Print Current Error Log Window The operation for this refer to 12 2 Printing Reports When converting the screen data to the NT21 or the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C using V2 the specification of NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode is possible For details of NT20 30 620 compatible mode refer to Appendix A NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode For details of the modification of screen data and program at the host refer to Correcting the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C screen data after conversion on page 464 3 Change the allocated bits and words If necessary change the allocated bits and words Usually it is not necessary to change the allocated bits and words since their settings in the conversion source data are reflected in the converted data However if the data is converted from the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C to a conventional model in element units or if the data is converted 463 Data Conversion Appendix A between different direct access types modification of the allocated bits and words may become necessary since the range of usable word addresses differ For details refer to Correcting the PC PLC addresses on page 466 4 Correct the screen data If the data is
348. e selected code 4 Select Cut or Copy Library data of the selected code will be stored to the clipboard In case of cut confirmation dialog box will be displayed After clicking on but ton cut code will be deleted from the library table Size Comments Size Comments 120 190 250 X 160 250 X 160 145 X 89 145 X89 50 X 50 naxs Delete CtrisL Cut Ctri X Copy Paste Ctrl V Pasting the library data To paste a library data that is stored in the clipboard by cut or copy operation follow the procedure below When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the library table of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the library table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool f the paste operation is performed the library data previously registered to the code is overwritten and lost Confirmation dialog box will be displayed When a library data is pasted the property size colors compression com ment of the library code is changed to that of the new one 1 Select Library Editor from the Tools menu The library table is displayed 2 Select the code of the library data to be pasted Select only
349. e the Alarm Screen button Modifying to the Alarm Screen button 5 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 364 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Label Description Alarm Screen Screen No 4 1 Press edit to set the label 9 3 6 Creating the Monitor Screen Child Screen 1 The monitor screen consists of overlapping screens with screen Nos 10 and 11 as its child screens When creating overlapping screens create the child screens first Here create screen No 10 as child screen 1 Monitor Screen 1 Select Screen menu bar New Refer to 4 2 3 Creating a New Screen 2 Atthe screen selection dialog box set Standard Screen 3 At the new standard screen dialog box set 10 for the screen No Setting the screen properties 1 Select Screen menu bar Properties 2 Set the screen properties as shown below for screen No 10 Attributes Screen No 10 History vw Title Monitor Screen 1 Comment Monitor Screen 1 Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background Black Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid Snap to Grid Creating the screen title Screen 365 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Copying the screen title from
350. e time to read out MMI file since data checking is performed before opening the file Possible Operation between Two Support Tools While screen data files of the same PT model are opened with the two Support Tools following operations are possible a Copying cutting pasting and drag amp drop of a screen between application managers multiple screens can be also handled Refer to 4 2 4 Copying a Screen W NT31 CParts Collection iO x1 NT31CParts Collection C B A NT31CPatts Collection mmi EX Screen lt 1 3999 Standard 5 43 NT31CParts Collection mmi Ey Screen 4 1 3999 Standard C 1 3399 Window Keyboard _ 000 Host Connect I 1 3999 Window Keyboard CI 9000 Host Connect 5 SWITCH Delete E Fal6 SWITCHE Open Table Es 7 SWITCH Download CJ Table Properties b Copying cutting pasting and drag amp drop of a table data between application managers All the data in a table is handled it is possible to handle a table entry individually or to handle multiple table entries collectively Refer to 4 2 9 Copying the Whole Table R NT31CParts Collection E NT31CParts Collection Ay Screen E 1 3999 Standard 1 3999 Window Keyboard E 9000 Host Connect CX Table B NT31 CParts Collection mmi EI Bit Memory Table 1 62 Screen ERU ERE s E 1 3999 Standard ED IO Commer E 1 3399 Window K
351. e used for direct access PLC vendor other than OMRON Memory Link Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi FX use system installer of DOS version Conversion between different direct accesses PLC vendor With the Support Tool Ver 4 1 data conversion between different direct ac cesses such as OMRON MItsubishi A or Mitsubishi FX OMRON is possible However data conversion between different direct accesses is limited to data of the same PT model e g Between NT31 V1 data for OMRON and Mitsubishi A When both direct accesses and PT model are different convert data to that of the same PT model first see figures in next page and then convert the direct access type 461 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion between conventional PT models Between same direct access NT600S NT20S NT620S NT620C NT625C 4 NT30 4 NT30C Conversion from conventional PT model to new PT model Between same direct access Eom v NT30C NT31 Vi gt NT31 V2 NT31C V1 9 NT31 V2 m L gt NT631 V2 NT631C Vi NT631C V2 NT20S NT11S wy E Conversion between new PT models Between same direct access
352. e validations performed are the number of row column and the length limit of the label according to PT Model Additionally with the NT30 620 series during saving once the translation is completed a warning message will be displayed to open the translated MMI file in NTST and validate the application to ensure proper behavior 9 Translation Support Utility will also take care of key code conversion 1508859 1 CP437 results wherever necessary and also restricted Chi nese Input for NT20S Languages The following is a list of commonly used languages available for selection You can also specify a language not in the list 1 English 2 Japanese 3 Simplified Chinese 4 Traditional Chinese 5 German 6 French Translation Support Utility Database Management File Management Export Import Management Appendix D 7 Italian 8 Spanish Character set A character set is an ordered set of characters in which a numeric index code point value is associated with each character Different languages and locales may be used in different character sets Character sets to choose from are provided based on the language selected However for the Translation Support Utility the following are the character set shown 1 Japanese Shift JIS 2 Simplified Chinese GB 2312 3 Traditional Chinese BIG 5 4 Latin ISO 8859 1 CP437 Filename An output filename is provided as a default The filename can
353. e value can be displayed for each line If there are too many lines with percentage values and the correspondence between the values and lines is not clear use the procedure shown below to check the line that corresponds to the percentage value 1 Select a trend graph 2 Select Edit menu bar Edit Object Or press Insert key P122 The trend graph element enters the edit enabled state and the marks surrounding the trend graph change to red 245 Graphs Section 6 9 3 Select Edit menu bar Select Object Place where graph or 96 display does not exist The components of a trend graph trend graph percentage values are dis played in a list The line numbers that correspond to the individual percent age values are displayed If you click a line in the list the corresponding percentage value display is selected in the screen to make the correspondence between the line and the percentage value clear Instead of the operation in step 3 above right clicking the mouse on the trend graph Edit Object right clicking the mouse on the trend graph near by the 96 display where display and frame does not exist Select Object the per centage values displayed near the click point are displayed in a list When displaying a trend graph the display points are determined by calculat ing the percentage value based on the values for 100 0 and 1009 If the 100 value 096 value and
354. ea Sak eR t e Sa 296 7 7 1 Operation Procedure isses esse db qos Reo Re UR os 297 7 7 2 Description of I O Comment Table 298 7 7 3 Importing I O Comments from a Ladder Program 299 7 7 4 Importing I O Comment from Tab delimited Text 302 7 8 Input Notify Tabler srecu cece ene 305 7 8 1 Operation Procedure icce edio cad eee cee eee eae 305 7 8 2 Description of F Key Input Notify Table 305 7 9 Mathematical Table ss cs Soy oe ed eser odo epo wa eR tos 306 7 9 1 Operation Procedure 0 00 e 306 1 922 Supported Objects 3 ida cx ie ieee eee Reet X es 306 7 9 3 Supported PLC Addresses 306 7 9 4 Description of Mathematical Table Fields 307 7 9 5 Description of Set Mathematical Formula Fields 308 7 9 6 Description of Edit Operand Fields 309 7 9 7 Description of Edit Result 1 310 7 9 8 Description of Move To Fields 310 10 Recipe Tables cbe Oe ae Eee Ea Reha eB A URS 311 7 10 1 Operation Procedure 0 0 ce eee 311 7 10 2 Description of Recipe Table F
355. earch Operation Editing or adding an I O comment e Editing modifying an comment To edit modify the I O comment already set click on the table entry number then click Set or edit directly on a table entry PLC Bit Address I O Comment 10000400 Trend Graph2 10000500 Bar Grapht 0000500 Bar Graph2 0001000 Numeral 0001200 Numeral2 Thumbwheel Swit Thumbwheel Swit 10001400 10010000 298 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 e Adding an I O comment To set add an I O comment after clicking on the table entry number of the blank field at the bottom click pm PLC Bit Address I O Comment Trend Graph2 0000500 Bar Graph1 0000600 Bar Graph2 0001000 Numeral 10001200 Numeral2 0001400 Thumbwheel Swit 10010000 Thumbwheel Swit Setting items in the set dialog box Channel Word Specify the type of area area name in PC PLC for which a comment is to be displayed Address Specify the address number where the I O comment to be edited is allocated If you specify a new address or bit an I O comment can be added If a comment is allocated using an element or a table entry i e Yes is dis played for Reference it is not possible to change the comment It is possible to change the comment if it is not allocated using an element or a table entry Bit Specify the PC PLC bit number where the I O comment to be edited is allo cated I
356. ection Left Direction Up Direction Down Which of 0 to 100 and 7100 to 100 bar graphs is displayed should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general attributes Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 100 display In the default setting a percentage value is displayed Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set with the Display 95 property Check mark set A percentage value is displayed Check mark not set A percentage value is not displayed If the setting is for a percentage value to be displayed the size and display position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the manner shown below For detail of the element edit function refer to page 110 Section 6 9 1 Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a percentage value to change the display position Example Modifying the percentage value display position 3 To change the size of a displayed percentage value double click on the val ue The properties of a percentage value display are displayed Bar Graph lt Display gt Lx General Position l 140 40 Font Type Standar Scale 1 1 Equal Smoothing ie Colour 1 Eoreground vl iooni Position Indicates the display position of the percentage value The reference po
357. ection 1 1 1 1 What Is Support Tool The NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 7 hereafter referred to as the Support Tool is the application software which runs on Windows 95 Windows 98 and Windows NT developed to create the screen data for the programmable terminal PT Since the Support Tool has been developed to use the graphical interface and run under the operation environment of Windows persons not familiar with the Support Tool can create the screen data of the programmable terminal without difficulties The Support Tool can create the screen data for the following models of PT Conventional models NT11S NT11 NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S T620C NT625C New models NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C The screen data created using the Support Tool consists of the objects shown in the following page What Is Support Tool Section 1 1 Arc I Circle Sector Polyline Polygon Rectangle Text Tiling Image Object Library Object Mark Data created Screen Data Screen 1 1 Screen Properties by the Support Tool Display Object Screen2 I Screen Input Object Table Numeral Table String Table Bit Memory Table Input Lamp Standard Lamp Image Lamp Numeral Display String Display Graph Bar Graph Analogue Meter Broken line Graph Trend Graph Alarm List Alarm History Touch Switch t
358. ection 9 3 Adjusting the size and position of numeral input 1 input field and the touch switch 10 Specify only the touch switch area and adjust the size and the position 11 Specify only the numeral input field and adjust the size and the position Creating the numeral input field Numeral Input 2 Input 2 Copying and pasting the numeral input field INumeral Input 1 1 Copy Numeral Input 1 character string numeral display field and touch switch and paste them to the data creation screen 2 Move the character string numeral display field and touch switch pasted at the upper left area of the screen to the desired position for displaying Numeral Input 2 3 Double click the Numeral Input 1 character string and modify the proper ties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 4 Double click the data input field 0 displayed and modify the proper ties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Seiras Taie Ey Creating the thumbwheel switch Thunbuhee Creating the title 1 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Thumbwheel 384 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2
359. ed Import of Excel data into Translation Support Utility will be a controlled check in with key code conversion being performed if necessary If you attempt to change the item data during import validation is performed for length limit limit for number of rows and columns for multi line data etc before the changed text can be accepted for import Launching and Closing Launching the Translation Support Utility To Launch the Translation Support Utility Select Launch Translation Support Utility in the Tools Menu in NTST This option is not available when no application is loaded in NTST When launching the translation Support Utility the current application in NTST will close The user can easily reopen the file by selecting it from recent file list Closing the Translation Support Utility To close the Translation Support Utility use any of the operations shown below Inthe menu select File Exit Click the Button at the upper right corner in the main window Double click the Translation Support Utility icon displayed in the upper left sec tion in the main window Control Menu 510 Translation Support Utility Appendix D Click the Support Tool icon displayed in the upper left section in the main win dow then select _ Sese leF4 in the control menu box Press the F4 key while holding down the Alt key If you are going to exit the Translation Support Utility a confirmation message will
360. ed Image amp Library Display of Image Lib Specify if the image library data is displayed Color Specification of color is valid only when 2 color mode image data is dis played by a color type PT Foreground Specify the display color of image data Background Specify the background color of the image data display area Reference With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C a dialog box is displayed to set if the line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C whether or not the line scroll touch switch and page scroll touch switch are used is determined in the alarm list history properties Settings List Setting 161 Alarm Section 6 3 Start Bit Table Entry Specify the start number of bit memory table entries that are checked by the alarm list element No of Bits Referenced Specify the number of bit memory table entries that are checked by the alarm list element Guidance 162 Using a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch you can scroll messages in units of a line or a page within the alarm list display area With NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C to display a line scroll touch switch and or a page scroll touch switch set a check mark in the line scroll touch switch and or a page scroll touch switch check box in the Property setting dia log box With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll
361. ed as they are not being supported In the case of copy paste of screen elements drag drop of screen elements as well as application conversion Target PT model sup Original screen ele Remarks ports Interlock ments support Interlock Yes No Interlock Flag will as sume FALSE No Interlock Flag will be set to FALSE and ig nored Yes Yes No conversion required Reference This feature is used by Touch Switch Thumbwheel Switch String Input and Nu meral Input 6 2 Fixed Display Fixed display means graphic data that does not have the data communication function with a PC and a memory table Set only general properties Reference Rotation and other processing are not possible for the fixed display For image data rotation and inverse are possible during creation of the image data 6 2 1 Polyline A straight line is drawn Polylines cannot be used with NT11S NT11 por 1 A continuous line is drawn and changed into a required shape Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Polyline Selection using the drawing toolbar gt Reference draw a continuous polyline press the Shift key when the drag operation is fin ished Dragging this end point creates a continuous polyline 136 Section 6 2 Fixed Display Terminology Property setting Guidance General Line Style Specify the type of line Solid line dotted line
362. ed in the clipboard by cut or copy operation follow the procedure below Reference When two Support Tools are started up by Import Component from the File menu the data that is cut or copied on the image table of one Support Tool can be pasted onto the image table of another Support Tool PT model setting of the two screen data files should be the same For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool If the paste operation is performed the image data previously registered to the code is overwritten and lost Confirmation dialog box will be displayed When an image data is pasted the property size colors compression com ment of the image code is changed to that of the new one 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Select the code of the image data to be pasted Select only one code When two or more codes are selected paste opera tion can not be performed 3 Click the edit or right click on the selected code 324 Image Editor Section 8 1 4 Select Paste Paste can not be selected if the image data to be pasted is not stored in the clip board After clicking the Button in confirmation dialog box image data will be pasted to the selected code image Table Code Comp Mode Size Comments Colo4 24 Circle Imp OFF BColo32X32 Circle Imp OFF min
363. eed to disconnect from the PLC The screen number designated is 9030 PT models that support this requirement are as follows NT31 V2 System Ver3 1 NT31C V2 System Ver3 1 NT631C V2 System Ver3 1 NTG31C ST141L only This screen can be accessed using the following functions 1 Touch switch Switch screen 2 Bit memory table Switch screen function 3 Bit memory table Alarm function SECTION 6 Element Operating Procedures Screen data for a PT is created by arranging elements on a screen Elements are classified into two groups elements for display and those used for inputting data at a PT 6 1 Operation 0 0 e E I E 105 6 1 1 Creating an Element 0 0 cece eee 105 6 1 2 Pop up Edit Menu cee eae 105 6 1 3 Selecting an Element 00 ee 106 6 1 4 Modifying an Element 0 00 cc cee 110 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements 111 6 1 6 Aligning Elements 00 0 eee II 114 6 1 7 Grouping Elements 00 eee ce eee 116 6 1 8 Associating Elements with the Touch Switch 117 6 1 9 Centralizing the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch 117 6 1 10 Setting Properties sss resa I 118 6 1 11 Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables
364. een switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Alarm Screen screen No 4 Alarm Screen Alarm list and contents Allocate 0002000 to 0002007 in the PC PLC as alarm bits If any of the allocated bits goes ON the corresponding alarm message is dis played When you touch the alarm message the corrective action and details of the alarm are displayed in the alarm content display area Bits Alarm Message Alarm Content Display 0002000 Line 1 Error Set line 1 0002001 Line 2 Error Set line 2 0002002 A spot Screw Error Check torque screw 0002003 B spot Screw Error Check torque screw 0002004 Low Pressure Check pipe and valve 0002005 Area 1 Alarm Detection near entry Confirm safety before restarting the line 0002006 Area 2 Alarm Detection near entry Confirm safety before restarting the line 0002007 PC PLC Network Check the PC PLC and the net Error work Menu This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Menu Screen screen No 1 Monitor This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Monitor Screen screen No 2 354 Operation Flow Section 9 2 Set This is a screen switching button When you touch this button the screen switches to the Set Screen screen No 3 Required environment The required hardware environment for the
365. eground color Frame color range S cale color 4 100 0 100 100 4 100 A Frame range color range range Broken line graph Trend graph range range 100 100 v v 096 AW 0 100 100 range range Frame color Frame color Settings for text display Set the size and display attributes for displaying fixed display of text and charac ter strings in a character string memory table string table in the manner shown below The following shows only the common settings for text of fixed display As an example the properties for a text display fixed display are shown below General Description OMRON Insert Mark ig 31 5 x 120 Y 30 Font Standard E Scale 1 1 Equal gt Smoothing Attribute Standard Y Colour Foreground Y Background Transparent Cancel Apply Help Font Type Specify the font type for displaying alohanumerics and symbols Standard A character is displayed in standard font 16 x 8 dots Half Height A character is displayed half height font 8 8 dots PT FI Half height Standard 122 Common Operation Section 6 1 Scale Specify the character size Only 1 1 Equal and 2x 1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 1x1 Equal A character is displayed in the original size both in height and width 1 2 High A character is displayed with doubled heig
366. el If any of the editable components is selected the screen element will go to se cond edit level In that level the editable component will be selected Only when the recipe screen element is in edit level one can the internal touch switches be resized Appearance of Resize Handles When the second edit mode is active the red handles surrounding the recipe screen element are switched from solid red handles to red outlined handles while the handles of the internal touch switch change from green to red solid and 109 Common Operation Section 6 1 the selected component of the internal touch switch will be decorated with green handles 6 1 4 Modifying an Element The size shape and or position of a created element can be modified Modifying the size and shape of an element To modify the size or the shape of an element drag one of green marks han dles that enclose the objective element Position the mouse cursor on a green handle and the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below Same direction as arrows in the handles Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to modify the size and the shape of the element IT d T T tt 1 Drag Note lfagreen mark is shown as when an element is selected the size of this ele ment cannot be changed Moving an element by dragging operation To move an element position the mouse cursor on the selected element and confirm that the mouse cursor
367. el Selected PL Top left coordinate of Vendor selected objects Cursor Position NT31C V1 OMRON 1017576 1048320 B Application Memory Remain ing memory Total memory In case user application ex ceeds the total memory re maining memory will be shown as negative value in red color The functions provided by the Support Tool are divided into several groups The menu bar shows the names of these function groups and the functions in each group are displayed in pull down menus Standard Toolbar Functions that are used frequently such as file reading writing copy and paste undo redo and print are assigned to the buttons in the standard tool bar These functions can be called easily without selecting the function item from the menu bar aah ai ef L BENE New Save Print Cut Paste Redo preview Open Print New Copy Undo What s This Screen Draw Bar Functions to draw objects are assigned to buttons in the draw bar User Interface Section 3 2 These functions can be called easily without accessing the commands from the menu bar Image Polyline Rectangle Text object Library object Polygon Selector Arc Circle Sector Tiling Mark Recipe L2 3 28 dod Ae s z m e mm Ge eu MN as tese Js d Standard lamp Touch Numeral Numeral Bar Trend Alarm switch input display graph history Analogue Meter Image
368. eld Numeric keys and other data input devices can be created by combining these items m Inputs numeral 0 in a data input field BE inputs numeral 1 in a data input field Inputs numeral 2 in a data input field Inputs numeral 3 in a data input field El Inputs numeral 4 in a data input field E inputs numeral 5 in a data input field fal Inputs numeral 6 in a data input field Wi inputs numeral 7 in a data input field Inputs numeral 8 in a data input field E Inputs numeral 9 in a data input field EX inputs hexadecimal A in a data input field li Inputs hexadecimal B in a data input field s Inputs hexadecimal C in a data input field Inputs hexadecimal D in a data input field Il Inputs hexadecimal E in a data input field Ii inputs hexadecimal in a data input field El Moves cursor in a data input field one character left E Moves cursor in a data input field one character right Deletes numeric value character string in a data input field Hl Cancels inputs in a data input field H Backspaces a cursor to delete a character in a data input field na ima Deletes the character at the cursor location in a data input field 218 Touch Switches Section 6 8 m Confirms inputs in a data input field cursor remains in this field Confirms inputs in a data input field cursor moves to the next input field Toggles plus and minus si
369. eld 290 Combo box 44 Comment 47 Connecting Cable Specifications 551 552 Control code input 292 Control Menu Box 39 Control Notify Area 50 Copy Increment 274 Copy Increment Setting Operation 274 Correcting colors 465 Correcting the PC PLC addresses On data conversion be tween PT models 466 Correction of alarm list history touch switches 474 Correction of graphic display attributes 473 Correction of image codes 471 Correction of library codes 472 Correction of smoothing processing for marks 473 Correction of touch switch position and size 475 565 Index Correction related the number of digits for numeral display 479 Correction related the number of digits for numeral input 478 Correction related the reference memory tables for numeral input 479 Correction related to a touch switch for which a pop up key board function is set 475 Correction related to analogue meter 480 Correction related to bit memory table 470 Correction related to contents of numeral memory table 470 Correction related to continuous screens 466 Correction related to control touch switch of trend graph 480 Correction related to display range of window keyboard screens 468 Correction related to extended I O input output table 471 Correction related to extended screens 469 Correction related to history screens 469 Correction related to image library codes in character strings 472 Correction related to keyboard
370. eld and a touch switch independently cancel the check mark set for Auto Arrange in the Settings page of the touch switch properties 4 The cursor can also be moved using an arrow symbol key touch switch The cursor moves in the order the numeral input elements were created this or der can be changed after creating the elements 5 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C when hexadecimal val ue is input it is regarded as signed binary data and upper lower limit check is performed Therefore if the top bit is 1 it is regarded as negative value and input will be prohibited when the minimum limit was set as O In this case set those value such as 80000000 2147483648 for minimum limit setting to prevent it from being checked Reference At the numeral setting input field the written numeric value in the numeral memory table is displayed when the J key is pressed Since this is different from the one read from the numeral memory table entry it is necessary to use another numeral input element to read out the data from the same address of the numeral memory table entry Numeral input element Screen Set numeral Numeral memory table No 1 2 Set numeral Numeral setting input field Numeric keys Pop up window keyboard 6 4 2 Character String Input You can write character string data to a character string memory table entry
371. elect Simulate Flash from the View menu or click on the Z but ton In the View menu the check mark is set to ON and OFF each time it is se lected When the check mark is displayed the objects that have Flash or Inverse Flash attribute show their flashing status Each time the Simulate Flash button is clicked it changes as follows Flash status being shown 3 Flash status not shown Lighting and flashing the lamps touch switches Reference For lamps and touch switches it is possible to specify PLC address for lamp set ting Lamps and touch switches light flash according to the status of the host bit When the PLC address for lamp setting goes to 1 ON they light or flash Whether they light or flash is determined by the lamp attribute set to the object With the Support Tool ON status of lamps and touch switches can be checked on the screen The Simulate ON OFF setting is applied to all the screens being displayed n case of image lamp ON state image and dotted line indicating the position of OFF state image is shown when the state is ON and OFF state image and dotted line indicating the position of ON state image is shown when the state is OFF With the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above the contents of a label can be specified for each ON and OFF state The display of the label is changed ac cording to the status of the lamp or the touch switch Display of lamp ON OFF status may differs bet
372. elp menu the help about the PLC ad dress dialog box that shows the input method of PLC address is displayed Checking the Support Tool version If About NT series Support Tool is selected in the Help menu the dialog box that shows the version of the Support Tool is displayed If you have questions on the Support Tool please check the version of your Sup port Tool before contacting 75 SECTION 5 Screen Types This section deals with the types of screens that can be created by the Support Tool 5 1 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations 78 5 1 1 Setting the Screen Attributes 4 9 2 e 78 23 122 Grid Senin ga coss EE Riese Ae het aes Kote CHR 80 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool 81 9 1 4 Filter Function ssri reede RR puer e ae c A ad Seales 85 5 1 5 Switching Screens by Extended I O Input at Each Screen 87 5 1 6 Saving the Screen Image ee cee 88 2222 Standard Screen os sien eee ha etter Rd br e RUN Le Rs ERG 88 5 3 Continuous Overlapping Screens 0 0 ee eee eee 89 5 3 1 Continuous Screens 0 Ana na ee 90 5 3 2 Overlapping Screens ee 91 5 3 3 Editing a Parent Screen Modification 92 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 0 0 0 ee 92 5 4 1 Window Keyboard Screens 0 0
373. ement Objects Numeral Display Bar graph element Objects Graph Bar Graph Analogue meter element Objects Graph Analogue Meter Broken line graph element Objects Graph gt Broken line Graph Trend graph element Objects Graph gt Trend Graph Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 Image object Indirect reference Objects Fixed Display Image Display Library object Indirect reference Objects Fixed Display Library Display Standard lamp Label type Numeral display Objects Lamp Standard Edit in the Label property of standard lamp Touch switch Label type Numeral display Objects Touch Switch Edit in the Label property of touch switch When writing numeral data to a numeral memory table entry Numeral input element Objects Data Input Numeral Thumbwheel switch element Objects Data Input Thumbwheel Switch When copying numeral data between numeral table entries or when setting a constant for a numeral memory table entry Touch switch copy setting Objects Touch Switch Settings Copy Setting in property sheet 7 2 3 Description of Numeral Memory Table Fields Value Initial TypeWords PLC Address I O Comment A Copy Settings 8 Change Address Edit gt Set Reference Search Help The display format varies slightly
374. en OFF Screen No 0 Function None Switch screen OFF Screen No 0 Change function to Alarm if you want to dis play the alarm Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Switch screen OFF Screen No As desired Function Alarm Switch screen ON Screen No As desired Correction is not neces sary Switch screen OFF Function Alarm Correction is not neces Screen No 0 Switch screen ON Screen No 9999 sary Function Alarm Switch screen ON Screen No As desired Switch screen ON Change the function to Screen No As desired Switch screen Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Correction related to extended I O input output table Correction of image codes When an extended I O input output table is converted the data is converted in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of an extended I O input output table between NT30 NT30C and other models Difference NT30 NT30C Extended I O input output table can be used Other models Extended I O input output table cannot be used Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion With an NT30 NT30C an ex tended I O input Status after Conversion With a PT model other than NT30 NT30C the setting of an extended I O input output table is discarded Error Message Corrective Action Correct the screen data and a host progra
375. ent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow 209 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Settings Function Specify the touch switch function Select from the following nine functions Notify bit Switch screen Input key Control Input key Window Keyboard Input key String Copy setting Cursor move Window move Only available on Window Keyboard Screen Print screen The setting contents differ depending on the selected touch switch function For details of setting refer to Guidance Light Function Touch switch also has the light function like a lamp Address PC PLC Bit Address Specify the bit at the PC PLC that drives a touch switch ON OFF Comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that drives a touch switch ON OFF Lamp Attributes ON Type Specify the status of a touch switch that is ON Light Flash Reference To check lamp ON status on the editing screen select Simulate ON OFF from the View menu Additionally to view flashing display of lamp attribute select Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool Label Label Specify whether or not a label is appended to a touch switch Label Type Specify the type of the Label when Label is selected Fol lowing selections will be available for the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models Static Static On Off Numeral Display and String Display For the other PT models this
376. ental amount at Address Increment By 5 Specify whether the notation of the incremental amount set above is decimal or hexadecimal at Value Input Type 274 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 6 7 8 9 Click on to close the dialog box Click on the table entry number of the copy source table Click on right click the table entry number Select Copy to Next Numeral String VO Comments Bit Memory 1 0000 2100003 100004 1100005 1100006 200010 2100012 1100014 sls ap STER 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Specifying the Table Entry Number Description of Go to dialog box Cancel Help Entry Specify the table entry number of the table to be displayed The cursor moves to the specified table entry number Operation procedure 1 Click on sew 2 Specify the table entry number of the table to be displayed 3 Clickon x 7 2 Numeral Memory Table Numeral Memory Table The numeral memory table is an area provided in a PT to store numeric value data A numeral memory table entry is allocated to one or two words in a PC PLC and the numeral memory table entry used for display can be shared with the PC PLC 275 Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 With elements such as numeral display graph and numeral input reading writ ing of a numeric value is executed by specifying the numeral
377. entering Off Description and On Description with multiple lines In all NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models Labels can be entered in multiple lines The following table shows the specification for each PT model Maximum Maximum Number of Remarks number of number of lines per characters characters mitted per line 32 1108 Maximum number of characters per line in clude the n charac ter NT31 C V2 40 11015 Maximum number of characters per line in clude the n charac ter NT631 C V2 256 1 to 30 Maximum number of characters per line in clude the n charac ter The Set Lines button will display On Off Description Settings dialog box in which the On Off description can be entered in multiple lines by pressing Enter Key When Numeral Display or String Display is selected as Label Type For the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 Models only Indirect Reference If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number for indirect reference specify this item Table Entry Specify the address of the numeral or string memory table entry to be referred to If indirect Reference is not selected the contents of this numeral or string memory table entry are displayed and if indirect Reference is selected the con tents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are displayed Edit Displays the Nu
378. entries that are displayed in a broken line graph No of Points Specify the number of vertices in the broken line graph Interval Type Even Specify this when displaying numeral memory table entries at even intervals Uneven Specify this when displaying numeral memory table entries at user selected intervals Interval Settings Set the broken line intervals if Uneven is selected Line Color Specify the broken line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Style Specify the broken line style Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 100 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 100 value 0 Table Entry Specify this item if a 0 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 0 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 0 value 236 Graphs Section 6 9 10096 Table Entry Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral memory table Value Specify this item if a 10096 value is set with a constant set the value to be taken as the 100 value Note that
379. ents of the overlapping screens are called child screens This is an Screen No 10 Screen No 8 parent screen This is an example of an example of an overlapping P Screen No 7 screen child screen overlapping Screen No 25 screen child screen When screen No 8 parent screen is specified the elements set on the screens No 10 No 7 and No 25 are overlapped for display on the parent screen Since the screen of screen No 8 is set for a parent screen for overlapping screens it cannot be displayed independently In the setting for a parent screen screen numbers of a parent and child screens are set Child screens should be created on standard screens in advance Overlapping screens are set in the procedure indicated below 1 Create the child screens on standard screens 2 Specify Parent Screen from New command in Screen 3 In the parent screen setting dialog box set a parent screen number and child Screen numbers Parent Screen No 10 Type andar Cancel In K C Continuous P 22027718 91 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 e Set the screen number of a parent screen for Screen No in Parent If the screen number has already existed it cannot be registered as a parent Screen Select Overlapping Specify child screens Select a screen th
380. er Short Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background 361 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid in Snap to Grid 4 Creating the screen title Menu Screen Menu 5 Setting the characters 1 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Text Refer to 6 2 7 Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the screen title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Menu Screen Position Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent 4 Adjust the position of the Menu Screen on the data creation screen by dragging it Surrounding the title with a frame 5 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Rectangle Refer to 6 2 3 Rectangle 6 On the data creation screen drag the rectangle so that it encloses the Menu Screen character string 7 Use the properties as they are 8 Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Monitor Screen Creating the Monitor Screen button Monitor Screen 362 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the touch switch outline 1 Select Objects menu bar Touc
381. er valid table value retained al memory table also for the word in the also for the word in the host host Initial value of the numeral memory table entry if it is initialized by System Menu operation also for the word in the host Not initialized Content of word in the host invalid Not allocated Invalid Existing numeral memory Initial value of the numer table value retained al memory table entry In case numeral table entry has been initialized in the system menu operation initial value of the nu meral memory table entry Storage Type only for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specify if a numeral in the PC PLC is treated as BCD or binary data when read ing writing the content of a PC PLC word to which a numeral memory table Numeral Memory Table Section 7 2 entry is allocated This setting is valid only for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C With other PT models numeric values are always treated as BCD BCD The content of an allocated word is regarded as BCD binary coded decimal When the content of an allocated word is read it is stored as signed binary data If F is set at the most significant digit position in the allo cated word the content is regarded as a negative value If an error is found in the content of an allocated word A to E at the most significant digit position or A to F in other than at the most significant digit position the read out
382. er 3 1 7 10 1 Operation Procedure The recipe table can be activated by selecting Tools menu bar Recipe Table 7 10 2 Description of Recipe Table Fields Ho of Ho of Bytes Occupied Set Recipe ea Pizza 3 3 12 36 SetRecod 2 Pancake 3 3 12 36 z 1 Edit gt GoTo Entry sett a Summary Total 2 Available Close New Delete Search Help Description of Recipe Table Dialog Controls No Displays the entry number By default the 1st record is selected Nothing hap pens when an entry is double clicked This number will not change when another entry is deleted Name Displays the name for a recipe Mark objects can be allowed A Name can comprise up to 12 characters No of Records Displays the number of records contained in the recipe 311 Recipe Table Section 7 10 No of Parameters Displays the number of parameters contained in the recipe Bytes Record Displays the size in bytes of all records in each entry This size is 4 no of param eters in 1 record The size of a parameter value is 4 bytes regardless of whether it is 1 or 2 words Occupied Bytes Display the size in bytes of all records in each entry This is the size of memory occupied by each recipe entry in the recipe memory Equals No of Record Bytes Record New Shows the recipe setting dialog to create a new recipe entry The created entry becomes the last
383. er they must be checked at their occurrence Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 The results of the error check can be printed or saved in a file For details refer to Section 12 Making Reports The procedure for displaying the error log window is shown below 1 Select View in the menu bar then choose Error Log The error log window opens App5 E Control Area not specified Hy With some types of errors double clicking on the error message will display the screen s where the error has occurred For the meaning of error message and the solution to be taken to correct the er ror refer to Appendix A Data Conversion and Appendix H Error Messages 4 2 12 Sending Downloading the Data to a PT Operation using the mouse The data created using the Support Tool can be sent downloaded to a PT It is possible to send the screen data collectively or only the data of the specified Screens or memory tables Here only the procedure is described For details refer to 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data Before sending the data set the communication conditions communication port and communication speed Baud Rate by selecting Connect menu bar and Comms Setting Sending Downloading the whole data file 1 Right click the mouse on the screen data file icon then select Download If the screen data is free of errors sending of the data starts immediately A message is displayed if the
384. er in Transfer Utility folder To the second installation disk If the personal computer has a CD ROM drive the install program can be executed from the CD ROM of Support Tool directly To install the NT Transfer Utility execute the install program that is in your soft ware package The basic operation of the install program is same as the install program of the Support Tool Refer to 2 2 1 Basic Installation Operation Procedure 1 Start up Windows 2 If your media is FD set the first FD of the system disks in drive A or other 3 5 inch FD drive If you are using CD ROM set the Support Tool CD ROM in the CD ROM drive while holding down the Shift key to prevent the Support Tool setup pro gram from starting up Release the Shift key after CD ROM is recognized and the access to the CD ROM is stopped If the Support Tool setup pro gram is automatically started click on ces to abort it You can execute the setup program by double clicking Setup exe for NT Transfer Utility in the Support Tool system disk by displaying the Windows Explorer In this case steps 3 4 and 5 bellow can be skipped 3 Click on the Start button of Windows and select Run 4 Input a setup in the input field in the specified window Note that drive designation must agree with the name of the drive where you set the system disk If you set the disk in drive B input b setup In case of NT Transfer Utility Appe
385. er will prompt for the source file Export Export all data of this recipe entry A file save dialog with a CSV Formatted Rec ipe Data csv filter will prompt for the target file name Exporting a selection of parameter data is not supported Reset Width Resets the width of each column to the default setting The parameter data cell will always be displayed using the parameter s number format A decimal type parameter will display values in decimal while a hexade cimal type parameter will display values in hexadecimal 315 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Parameter Setting Table Parameter Setting x E es eres Ser e t Cheese Dec 01 L00020 22 Dec x 4 011 Looo21 Dec oO 5 0 1 L00022 Close Search This dialog permits users to specify the setting for all parameters of a recipe table entry When the Words field is changed from 2 to 1 you will be prompted with a mes sage that some data will be lost with this conversion If the value is less than 32 768 or greater than 32 767 the value will be set to 0 Otherwise if the sum of Integer and Decimal digits exceed the maximum limit the number of Decimal digits will be reduced For example given a parameter with settings Dec 4 In teger and 4 Decimal and value 54 3675 when word size is reduced to 1 set ting will become 4 Integer and 1 Decimal and value will be 54 3 When entering values int
386. eral string input can be registered Pop up display frame The pop up display frame specifies the display range and display position of a pop up window keyboard the size and position of the frame can be specified as follows NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Specify by 1 dot unit NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Specify by 20 dot The pop up function displays only the area enclosed by the pop up display frame Since the same memory area is shared by a pop up window keyboard and print screen function it is not possible to open the window during the printing process Moreover it is also not possible to print from PT during the window is opened With PT models other than the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above communication with a PC PLC is not possible for elements that are displayed in a keyboard window Therefore the lamp bit of a touch switch in a window cannot be controlled While a window is open display processing may be slowed a little Touch Switch functions that can be set on Window Keyboard screen NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Notify Bit Switch Screen 93 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 Input Key Control Input Key Window Keyboard Input Key String Copy setting Cursor Move Print Screen With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C keyboard screen can be used as a standard screen If it is used as a keyboard screen called from other
387. eration using an element property 7 3 2 Related Elements When reading from a character string memory table entry string table Character string display element Object String Alarm list Object Alarm List Alarm history Object Alarm History e When writing to a character string memory table entry string table Character string input element Object Data Input gt String When copying character strings between character string memory table entry entries string table Touch switch copy setting Object Touch Switch Copy Set ting 7 3 3 Description of Character String Memory Table String Table Fields 282 Numeral String I O Comments l Bit Memory l Change Address Edit gt Set Insert Mark jeert Image Close Reference Search Help Value Specify the initial value to be set when the power is switched ON the PT is reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN For an initial value a character string containing a maximum of 40 characters can be specified 20 characters for NT11S NT11 32 characters for NT20S To display V input two characters without a blank like V Setting of an initial value is valid when the resume function is not selected and the Initial item is selected for the character string memory table entry string table and in this case the content of the character string memory
388. ers Click above the reference graphic display area and the reference character setting dialog box is displayed Input the characters you want to use as the reference and click ex For the reference characters two characters 8 dot size can be input To change the font and or size of the characters used as the reference click on tw The character setting dialog box is displayed Character Reference len Enter characters PT Cancel Font Help Font 21 Font Font style Size Arial Regular ox Z 12 T Arial Black Italic 14 Cancel ip Arial Narrow Bold 16 Ir Book Antiqua Bold Italic Bookman Did Style Century Gothic 22 FP Century Schoolbook l2 Effects Sample T Strikeout Underline AaBbYyZz Color Presently the Color setting is not EN Black See Westem lt supported It will be invalid even if it was specified 346 Mark Editor Section 8 3 Copying the reference graphics To reuse the existing graphic displayed in the reference graphic display area specify the range to be copied and click on above the reference graphic dis play area After copying the graphic click on above the edit area Paste button Copy button Mark Editor slal sele 8 Specifying the copy range x al Z N a o m e ns Cancel Help Quitting the mark editor To quit the mark editor click on the bu
389. ers of a message to be displayed Max 32 characters NT21 Max 39 characters NT30 NT30C NT31 and NT31C Max 40 characters NT631 and NT631C to which a system program ver sion lower than Ver 2 1 is installed With these models above the number of characters to be displayed will be less than these values according to the display method and if the history informa tion is displayed Max 40 characters NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 System Ver 2 1 and NT631C System Ver 2 1 Alarm Section 6 3 With these models above up to 40 characters can be displayed regardless of the display method etc Display Line Qty Specify the number of messages to be displayed Max 7 lines NT21 Max 12 lines NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C Max 16 lines NT620S Max 24 lines NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C Scale Specify the character size of the message to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x 2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Smoothing Specify if smoothing processing is executed for the message to be displayed Line Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages line by line Only for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Page Scroll Touch Switch Set if a touch switch is set for scrolling messages page by page Only for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Frame Specify the color used for the frame of an alarm list Background ON Specify the background color of the selected message dis play field OFF Specify the b
390. ess setting dialog box Normally a button for displaying the PLC address setting dialog is provided for PLC address input field 127 Common Operation Section 6 1 Direct input of PLC address 128 In the dialog PLC address can be set easily by selecting from the available areas Example Numeral table Example Touch switch PLC Vendor OMRON PLC Vendor OMRON Channel Common I O Area Address Channel I O Area Address Bit o E m Channel Word Select the type of word to be referred to from the list box Address Input the address of word to be referred to Bit Input the bit position in the word to be referred to It is possible to input PC PLC address for example D00001 directly into the address input field You can input addresses easily when you know which area is available When inputting PLC addresses input a word address and a bit number without a blank following a character that indicates area type However in case of numeral table or string table specification of bit number is not needed When you do not specify PLC address input into the input field Input methods varies according to the PLC Vendor setting as listed below Only input method is described here For details on specification method of PLC ad dress for PLC other than OMRON refer to PC Connection Operation Manual V042 E1 PLC Vendor OMRON Possible areas
391. executed by the background function data sampling in the background mode is also halted When the background function is not used if the screen is switched back to the trend graph display screen after halting data sampling and calling other screen the trend graph is redisplayed and logging restarts automatically O Restart Continue touch switch Restarts halted data sampling At the same time updating of the trend graph dis play restarts 248 Graphs Section 6 9 DSP CLR LOG CLR K Reference During data sampling the touch switch is lit Display Clear Clear Display touch switch Clears the trend graph display Even if the display is cleared the logged data are not cleared Log Clear Clear Log touch switch Clears all logged data At the same time the trend graph being displayed is cleared This switch clears only the trend graph being displayed The trend graphs registered on other screens are not cleared This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used Previous Page Rewind touch switch Displays the logged past data older than the time range of the presently dis played graph This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used Next Page Forward touch switch Displays logged data that is newer than the time range of the presently displayed graph This switch is valid only when the data logging function is used If the latest data is displayed while the data i
392. eyboard Libeary Tabl Paste C3 9000 Host Connect Mark T able CN Table IET Numesal T IIT String T able B NT31CParts Collection mmi olx Image T abl FHI Commen ET Library ba Paste ET Mark T able M Numeral T able LI Sting T able c Copying cutting pasting of a number code between the following table entries Drag amp drop is not possible Between image table entries Refer to 8 1 1 Operating the Image Table Between library table entries Refer to 8 2 1 Operating the Library Table Between bit memory table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Between numeral table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Between string table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Between extended I O output table entries Refer to 7 7 4 Edit Operation Between extended I O input table entries Refer to 7 1 4 Edit Operation Library Table Library Table Size Comments d Copying cutting pasting and drag amp drop of objects between editing screens or library editors Drag amp drop can not be performed if the copy destination 59 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 window is hidden under other windows Refer to 6 7 5 Copying Cutting Pasting and Deleting Elements Bring To Front Send To Back e Copying cutting pasting of the specified area between image editors or mark editors Drag amp drop is not possible
393. eyboard at the same time the cursor is moved This feature allows appropriate numeric keys for the input field to be displayed It is possible to create a temporary input field in addition to numeric keys With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above all objects other than thumbwheel switch and recipe objects can be created on window Window Keyboard Displayed when the input field is touched 177 Data Input Section 6 4 e t is possible to create a temporary input field at the same time as numeric keys are arranged in the window keyboard A temporary input field is created using a numeral input element When a numeral input element is arranged in the window keyboard the ele ment is automatically set as a temporary input field Only one numeral input element temporary input field can be created for one window keyboard Setting processing differs as shown below depending on whether or not a tem porary input field is used When a temporary input field is used 2 Storing by pressing 4J key Numeral memory table Temporary input field 1 The data that is input using numeric keys is displayed in the temporary input field 2 Input the J key and the data in the temporary input field is set in the numer al setting input field and stored in the numeral memor
394. f the image library lamp Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C codes assigned to image data are from 0001 to OFFF However if NT20 30 620 compatible mode is used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the image code will be the same as NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Creating Bar Graph 1 and Bar Graph 2 Creating the title 1 2 3 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the char acter string of Bar Graph 1 is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of bar graph Set the properties as shown below Description Bar Graph 1 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing al Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black 375 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 4 Adjust the position of Bar Graph 1 character string on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the bar graph frame 5 Select Objects menu bar Graph Bar Graph Refer to 6 9 7 Bar Graph 6 Drag the mouse cursor at the position where bar graph 1 is to be displayed drag between diagonally opposing corners to create the frame of Bar Graph 1 7 Setthe properties as shown below Position Size Frame Display Sign Direction Color Frame Range
395. f words must be allocated for reading writing a numeric value PLC Address Specify the PC PLC address start address of the area where numeral memory table entries are allocated Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC word A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 280 Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 Ref Indicates whether the table entry with the specified number is already used or not Yes Already used as an element No Not used If the indication is Yes you can check where the table entry in question is used by clicking on Reference For details of eese refer to 7 1 1 Reference Operation 7 3 Character String Memory Table String Table The character string memory table String table is an area provided in a PT to store character string data A character string memory table entry string table is allocated to 1 to 20 words in a PC PLC and a character string memory table entry string table used for dis play can be shared by the PT and the PC PLC It is possible to insert mark data image data or library data into a character string Note that however NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S do not have image data and library data With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C without NT20 30 620 compatible mode it is not permissible to insert image data and li brary data into a character string With elements such as character string display and character string inp
396. f you specify a new address or bit an I O comment can be added If a comment is allocated using an element or a table entry i e Yes is dis played for Reference it is not possible to change the comment It is possible to change the comment if it is not allocated using an element or a table entry Comments Specify a comment for a PC PLC address or bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters 7 7 3 Importing I O Comments from a Ladder Program With NT series Support Tool for Windows it is possible to import I O comments from the ladder program that is created using the following PLC Support Soft ware Inputting I O comments can save time and labor This section describes the import method of I O comment SYSMAC Support Software SYSMAC comments can be imported from a C series ladder program with the exten sion SP1 Reference With SYSMAC Support Soft when saving ladder program I O comments are automatically saved in a file with an extension SP1 299 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 Priority in comment 300 SYSMAC CPT saves ladder program in SSS program SP1 and use this file to import I O comment e comment of CVM1 CV series can not be imported with Support Tool With SYSMAC CPT it is not possible to save ladder program of PLC with Z in a file with an extension SP1 Therefore Support Tool can not import I O com ment of ladder program for Z
397. ficant digits of a negative value is one digit less than the number of significant digits of a positive value as with conventional PT models Example If the settings are BCD and 1 word the value 123 is treated as F123 in a PC PLC word and FFFFFF85 in a numeral memory table entry However the value F123 in a PC PLC word is 0000F123 61731 in decimal in a numeral memory table entry if the Storage Type is hexadecimal Similarly if the settings are BCD and 2 words the value 1234567 is treated as F1234567 in a PC PLC word and FFED2979 in a numer al memory table entry However the value F1234567 in a PC PLC word is F1234567 249346713 in decimal in a numeral memory table entry if the Storage Type is hexadecimal Example In PC PLC Word F123 1 BCD FFFFFF85 in decimal 123 1 word Binary FFFFF123 in decimal 3805 F1234567 2 words BCD FFED2979 in decimal 1234567 2 words Binary F1234567 in decimal 249346713 1 word BCD 000011D7 in decimal 4567 1 word Binary 00004567 in decimal 17767 1 word BCD FFED2979 in decimal 1234567 1 word Binary FFED2979 in decimal 1234567 Write To No of Words Storage Type In Numeral Memory Table Note lfonly one word is allocated although two words are necessary to express a nu meric value only the lower 4 digits of a numeric value are read or written A suffi cient number o
398. font Font type ISO 8859 1 For details of 32 dot font refer to Settings for text display in NO TAG Setting Properties Note that smoothing is not performed for 32 dot font For details of font types refer to Font Type in NO TAG Operation of Screen Data Application File and Appendix K SECTION 1 Introduction to the Support Tool This section is designed for users to utilize the efficient usage of Support Tool Discussed in this section are what you can do using the Support Tool and the specifications and functions of Support Tool 1 1 What Is Support Tool sha este REM RU Re e RR Sis gue gus 2 1 2 Equipment Necessary for Using the Support 1 6 1 3 General Configuration of the Support Tool 0 0 00 eee eee eee eee 6 1 3 1 Outline of Screen Data eee en 6 1 3 2 Correspondence to PC PLC Data 10 1 3 3 Tables ii s Rs ER msi at S ec cte bars 14 1 3 4 TypesofScreens e Rene at eee E Ree emus 17 1 4 Basic Operation Flow I 20 ES Menu Chart ue ER RnR ees Mohan ot Baws 21 1 6 Usable Hardware Combinations 20 0 cece eee teen en 25 1 6 1 Applicable PT sse vet ER ee WR RR 25 1 6 2 Communication Method for Each PT Model 26 What Is Support Tol S
399. for Inverse Print and output it Refer to 12 2 3 Output to a File RTF If you use this method the screen image will be monochrome even when the col or printer is used 458 APPENDICES This section provides reference information on using the Support Tool information on the operational procedure for the sys tem installer which is supplied with the Support Tool Please refer to the information that you need A gt Data Conversion gren eo eR CM ER ER RE RON RR OR M ROC RE egg tot 461 B System Installer Operation 0 0 eee II 485 NF Transfer Utility 1233 neat ans eA ee ete ee ae oh ee ann eae eee T 489 D Translation Support Utility 0 eee eee 497 E Tables of Functions of PT Models 0 0 cee eee eee 513 Limits on Numbers of Elements s sses Sea ck eek eg ege e HER 533 G New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 0 0 0 0 eee 537 New Functions of Support Tool Ver4 6 0 0 cece eee 539 I New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 7 2 0 0 0 ce eee eee 541 J Birror Messages s ice t RERE TH Seed eee Sp eee See ae eed s 543 K Shortcut Keys bere tet oo ieee eh ia ae Aa esee e xc Roe S 549 L Connecting Cable Specifications 0 cee cee eens 551 M Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule 0 0 eee 553 459 Appendix A Data Conversion This section describes the data conversion method between different direct ac cess types and different PT models
400. for numbers of 2 x 2 or larger Smoothing cannot be selected for NT20S and NT600S since smoothing proces sing is always executed for numbers larger than 2 x 2 with these models 1254 1234 Without smoothing With smoothing Attribute This is an attribute to determine how a numeric value is displayed Attributes to be displayed here vary somewhat according to the PT model Standard The numeric value is displayed in the specified color and spe cified background color Inverse The numeric value and background are displayed in colors that are the reverse of the specified colors Flash The numeric value flashes when displayed If this attribute is selected standard display and no display background color only are alternated Inverse Flash The numeric value is displayed by alternating standard display and inverse display 125 Common Operation Section 6 1 Reference To check Flash and Inverse Flash display on the screen specify Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool Numeral Display x General Settings Referer dn an Table Entry fo El r Display Type Decimal C Hexadecimal Format Integer S Decimal p 5 Zero Suppression Display Sign Cancel Apply Help Display Type Specify the notation in which numeric values are displayed Decimal Numeric value is displayed in decimal Hexa
401. for the functions assigned to ob jects and communicate with a PC PLC If a word address of a PC PLC is set in a table data communication processing between the PT and PC PLC is executed automatically in predetermined cycles The following types of tables are provided Numeral table String table Bit memory table Extended l O Input table Extended l O Output table Comment table F key Input Notify table Mathematical table Recipe Table General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Numeral table String table Bit Memory table Extended I O Input table The number of memory table entries varies according to the model of PT con nected NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Numeral 512 table pus 1000 1000 000 String 256 256 table or 1000 or 1000 2000 NT620S NT600S NT620C NT625C NT11S NT11 Bit 256 Memory 256 or table 1000 Extended I O Input table Extended Output table F key In put Notify table Mathe matical table Recipe table 1 This option is available only for V2 and above 2 This option is available only for V2 System Ver 3 1 and above The Numeral table stores numeral data This table is set when using Numeral Display objects Graph objects and Nu meral Data Input For details of table setting refer to 7 2 Numeral Memory Table The String table stores text data This table is set when
402. for up to 8 kinds of data Background function The background function continues data sampling even when a trend graph is not displayed With a trend graph data sampling is executed only when a trend graph is dis played and stops when the screen is switched from the trend graph screen However if the background function is used data sampling can be continued in the background mode while the trend graph is not displayed The data sampled and logged when in background mode can be displayed by tracing back to the past The background function is valid only when it is used with the data logging function when the background function is used the objective data is continu ously recorded Please note that since data sampling is executed continuously if the background function is used the processing speed at a PT may be a little slow How the data recording is changed depending on whether or not the data log ging function and the background function are used is shown below Regard less of the use of these functions the trend graph element always starts draw ing a graph from the initial state when the screen is changed to the trend graph display screen Without logging and background functions Switching pg the screen Returning az e Trend graph screen Other screen Trend graph screen starts drawing a graph newly 247 Graphs Section 6 9 lt With data logging function but without b
403. frequently In the Translation Support Utility the standard toolbar options are Open and Save 500 Translation Support Utility Appendix D These functions can be called easily without selecting the function item from the menu bar File Open A File Open dialog box is a window that is displayed in a fixed size To Open a MMI file select Open in the File Menu of the Application window The File Open Dialog box will be displayed so that the user can select the MMI file that will be opened Click the after selecting the MMI file A Translation Dialog Box will be displayed for the user to enter the language and character set of the file being opened However this translation dialog will not be shown when MMI files are opened subsequently as the languages information will be stored in the data base the first time it is opened Translation Project Setup Ed Source Project Language Source Project Character Set OK Em im Cancel Source Project Language Displays all the available Languages You may input a language that is not in the list Source Project Character Set This will be disabled if the specified Source Project Language type is the same as the pre defined Source Project language type However if you have input your own language the Source Project Character Set combo box will be enabled and the default language will be Latin New Translation Creates a new target language column for translation
404. from 0 to 1 or from 1 to O To avoid this problem set the maximum and minimum limits so that n n 2 m m or provide a touch switch separately to write a value at carry over or shift to the lower digit 3 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C when hexadecimal val ue is input it is regarded as signed binary data and upper lower limit check is performed Therefore if the top bit is 1 it is regarded as negative value and input will be prohibited when the minimum limit was set as O In this case set those value such as 80000000 2147483648 for minimum limit setting to prevent it from being checked 191 Lamps Section 6 5 6 5 Lamps The status of a lamp changes according to the status of a PC PLC bit Two types of lamp element are provided standard lamps that change their dis play status ON flash inverse flash and image library lamps that show different image library data in the lamp ON and OFF states Image library lamps cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 6 5 4 Standard Lamps A lamp OFF ON flash is displayed in accordance with the status of a PC PLC bit Bit status 1 The status of a lamp is changed according to the allocated PC PLC bit Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Lamp Standard Selection using the drawing toolbar Terminology ON color OFF color Property set
405. ft key when releasing the left mouse button after the clicking or dragging The dialog will be displayed each time the element is created even when the Shift key is being pressed to draw the same element continuously In case of Polyline however the dialog will be displayed only for the last element that was created immediately after the Shift key is released 6 1 2 Pop up Edit Menu The Support Tool provides pop up menus where functions used for editing are collected The pop up edit menu is displayed by clicking the right button of the mouse Items displayed in the pop up edit menu are common to most of all elements 1 Select an element 105 Common Operation Section 6 1 2 Right click the mouse Pha I Cut Paste Align gt Delete Bring To Front Send To Back Edit Object Select Object Properties Use As Default 6 1 3 Selecting an Element Reference To edit or move an element select the created element When an element is selected W marks handles are displayed to enclose the selected element at o 14 Selection mark handle it Arrows in the handle indicate the direction to which the size of the element can be changed When the mouse cursor is set on the handle the shape of the cursor is changed to an arrow of the same direction Selecting an element using a mouse Click the element you want to select Selecting an element using a Tab key
406. g 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid in Snap to Grid 4 Creating the lamps 1 to Lamp 5 Creating the frame of lamp 1 1 Select Objects menu bar Lamp Standard Refer to 6 5 Lamps 2 At the Lamp 1 display position in the data creation screen drag the mouse to create the lamp frame In this step a rectangular frame is created 371 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Frame Shape Circle Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Light Address PC PLC Bit Address L0000000 Functions Comment Lamp 1 Lamp Attrib ON Type Light ute Label Lamp 1 refer to the follow ing 2 1 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models multiple lines of label On Off static label numeral string display label can also be set 2 Click the edit Button to set the label If the O comment is already set for the PLC address of light function clicking the ese vo Comments Button copies the label After completing the setting go to the next step with clicking the Button Setting the label for lamp 1 4 Press Edit in the general property of a lamp and set the label prop erties as shown below Comment Lamp 1 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing _ Attribut
407. g data etc are displayed on the screen before output to a printer The screen image can be output to a file in bit map format using the Screen menu bar Copy to Image Refer to 12 4 Outputting the Screen Image 442 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 1 Cross References The use statuses of memory tables such as the numeral memory table and char acter string memory table string table are printed or displayed The cross reference allows you to find the screens where a specific memory table is used Gross Reference Fi lenge SLE SAMPLE DATA 98 12 25 9 08 1 String Merory Table Initial Velue Screen No Autaratic IVenual Step Reset Nureral Merory Table Initial Value 0 0 1 2 3 4 5 10 11 12 10 Comment Table Address 10 Conrents Eoo 200 Set Num input 2 000000 disp 1 2029000 Alam data 8 017000 Alarm date 2 m0500 Mtr Ber graph 1 10000200 Start 443 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 2 Direct Connection Information Direct connection information is printed or displayed This report is available only when the direct connection setting data has been set Direct Connection Information Fi lenge SMALE SAMPLE DATA 09 12 25 8 53 P 1 FT Specification of Ares Control Area 10 Oomrents Notify Ares 10 Orsrents Wid Ctrl Area O Coorents 00100 Control Ares 000110 Notify Area on Nureral Merory Table hb Init Value Init Storsge W
408. g mark data special characters and symbols can be created on the screen To display a mark specify its code f no mark data has been created for the specified code a blank is displayed e To change the mark data to be displayed click on case in the property set ting dialog box and select the desired mark data in the list Fixed Display Section 6 2 The procedure for selecting the desired mark data is shown below 1 Click on irange in the attribute setting dialog box to display the mark data selection dialog box Table Application zl es Cancel Gear Help 2 Specify the mark data to be displayed The specified field is displayed en larged Or input the character code that corresponds to the mark data to be displayed into the Code input field 3 Click on to close the dialog box For the procedure for creating mark data refer to 8 3 Mark Editor 6 2 11 Library Object Data Library data is displayed There are two types of library data One type of library data references the fixed code directly the other type uses indirect reference Indirect reference is a func tion that can change the library data to be displayed by writing the library code to the numeral table entry just like the indirect reference of numeral string display This enables the animation display by switching the display contents using a sim ple program For details of the PT models that can use indirect refere
409. gjust the position of the label graphic by dragging it uan Setting the page down page up and line scroll up touch switches Reference 14 Modify the page down page up and line scroll up touch switches in the same manner as the line scroll down touch switch Refer to the screen in page 393 to check the position of each touch switch Modify the properties of the individual touch switches as shown below Page down Page up Scroll up Position Size Frame Shape Standard Standard Standard Show ON State _ _ _ Color Frame White White White ON White White White OFF Transparent Transparent Transparent 395 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Settings Function Page down Input Key Control Page up Input Key Control Scroll up Input Key Control Control Key Light Function Address PC PLC Address yo Com ments Lamp General Attribute Label Light Light Light lt FFF7 gt lt FFF6 gt lt IFFF8 gt 15 Modify the foreground color of the label graphic to cyan as with the line scroll down touch switch Reference With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the touch switches used to con trol the alarm list can be adjusted only in position Size color label can not be changed If you want to move the position select Edit
410. gles cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 1 A rectangle is drawn The length of a vertical and horizontal sides can be changed Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display gt Rectangle Selection using the drawing toolbar Bl 139 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Terminology Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of a rectangle Size Indicates the size of a rectangle Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance e A rectangle element can be modified in the manner shown below A rectangle can be modified by dragging a green W mark handle in the EE in the EE in the left direction EE direction upper EE direction Modified in the bs Modified in the left direction 1 right direction ye ETE ESSE in the in the in the ESSE left direction direction lower direction Totile a rectangle paste a tiling element into it 4 Rectangle Tiling element For details of tiling elements refer to 6 2 8 Tiling 6 2 4 Circle A circle is drawn 140 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Circles can be used with all models except for NT11S NT11 1 Acircle is drawn The radius of a
411. gn a data input field Inputs a decimal point in a data input field Moves the input cursor to the data input field at the upper left area Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately above the present data input field Moves the cursor to the data input field immediately below the present data input field Move the cursor to the left data input field Move the cursor to the right data input field Moves the cursor to the previous data input field in the order Changes continuous screens to the previous screen Moves the cursor to the next data input field in the order Changes continuous screens to the next screen Reference With Il and Ed keys the cursor moves between the data input fields in the order the data input fields were made However the order of moving the cursor can be changed with Set Order of the Draw menu Reference 2 Combination with alarm list elements and alarm history elements This control code can be selected only with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C these touch switches are a part of alarm list history elements These touch switches can be created automatically when creating an alarm list history Scrolls up alarm list history display page page scroll Scrolls down alarm list history display page page scroll Scrolls up alarm list history display page line scroll Scrolls down alarm list history display page line scro
412. h Switch Refer to 6 8 Touch Switches 2 Create the outline of the Monitor Screen button by dragging the mouse on the data creation screen 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Frame Shape 3 Dimension Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Settings Function Switch Screen Screen No 2 Light Address PC PLC Address Function Comments Lamp Attribute Light Label Description Monitor Screen Refer to the fol lowing 2 1 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models multiple lines of label On Off static label numeral string display label can also be set 2 Click the edit Button to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step by clicking the Button 3 For the NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 or later models it is possible to set an interlock bit that can enable dis able the operations Setting the touch switch label 4 Press Edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Description Monitor Screen Position ES Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing _ Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent 363 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Click on x 0 return to touch switch property t
413. he image library code number Specification of History Report If you specify History Report for Report Type you are requested to specify the file name where the display history record data sent from the PT is stored Open BEI Look in CX Data 1 ek a 380202a log File name lod Files of type History loa log 7 Cancel Specification of Validation Report If you specify Validation Report for Report Type you are requested to speci fy whether an error check is to be executed and then the result of the check is to be printed or the present error log information is to be printed If an error check is executed the existing error log is lost To keep the record on the error for which the message is displayed like after the conversion select Print Current Error Log Window Action Print After Validation Print Current Error Log Window To print the result of error check click on after selecting Print After Validation A message asking if you want to execute an error check is dis played The time necessary for error check execution varies depending on the registered screen data Printing information on errors occurring during data conversion The procedure for printing information on errors occurring during data conver sion is shown below 1 Data of NT series Support Tool Open the source file 453 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Select
414. he CD ROM version Support Tool can be used only with models that can use image library To paste an ISO symbol to the data creation screen of the Support Tool select the symbol and drag it to the desired position on the data creation screen then re lease the mouse Same operation as the other symbols L Sy mbo Manager 000 file Edit rectilresr motion Bg 0022 Limited rectilinear Drag the symbol to the data creation screen and release the mouse Reference It is not possible to change the colors and size of ISO symbols since the ele ments are registered in the grouped status 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol Color palette symbol 258 Color palette symbol is a symbol for which tiling objects are registered with their tiling patterns foreground and background colors respectively combined You can select required tiling objects while checking the tiling status on screen Color palette symbol is separated into tiling patterns and each pattern is set as one symbol as shown below Combinations of foreground and background col ors are registered for each symbol lili Symbol Manager ColourPL File Edit View Help E ColourPalette oo oo Palette 1 Palette 3 Palette 4 NS Palette 5 iit Palette 6 Palette 7 Palette 8 u Palette 9 J Supplement Symbols Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Operation procedure Follow the pro
415. he code to which the new library data is regis tered 337 Library Editor Section 8 2 When the dialog box is opened the smallest unused code is set Search Direction Unregistered code can be searched using the Button In the Search Direction specify Up to the smaller code or Down to the larger code to designate the direc tion to which search operation is executed Comments Specify the comment for the library data to be created Find Next Searches the unused code Specify the search direction in the Search Direction Displaying library editor 1 Tools menu bar gt Library Editor The library table is displayed 2 Select the code in the library table and click the Open Button or double click the mouse on the objective code line When two or more codes are selected edit screens editors of all the se lected codes can be opened collectively The library table dialog automati cally closes at the same time the editor is displayed Changing the property To change the property of the code that is already registered open the editor and then display the property dialog of the library data as follows 1000 Library Object General Code 1000 Size Width Height Comments Double click or Right click Properties Code Displays the code of the selected library data Size Displays the size of the specified library data S
416. he graphic is moved Used to specify the range of a created graphic to copy cut or move By dragging the cursor from one corner to the diagonally opposing corner the range specifying rectangle frame is defined To cancel the range specifying frame select the tools other than Range specifying frame Used to tile dots After placing the cursor on a dot to be tiled left click the mouse To cancel tiling place the cursor on a tiled dot and right click the mouse Used to draw a line By dragging the mouse cursor from the start point to the end point dots arranged on a line are tiled Used to draw a rectangular frame By dragging the mouse cursor the dots on a rectangle that has its diagonally opposing corners at the start and the end point of the drag ging route are tiled By dragging the mouse cursor between two diagonally opposing corners of a rectangle that circumscribes the desired circle or oval frame the dots on the circle or oval are tiled Used to draw a tiled rectangle By dragging the mouse cursor the dots inside a rectangle that has its diagonally opposing corners at the start and end point of the dragging route are tiled o Used to draw a circular or oval frame eJ Used to draw a tiled circle or oval By dragging the mouse cursor between two diagonally opposing cor ners of a rectangle that circumscribes the desired circle or oval frame the dots inside the circle or oval
417. he menu at the Support Tool select the direction of data transmission download upload and the kind of data to be transmitted Depending on the data more detailed selection may be possible After the data has been determined data transmission will start 11 2 Communication Setting at the Support Tool Set the baud rate and communication port at the Support Tool personal comput er Operation procedure 1 Select Connect menu bar Comms Setting The communication dialog box is displayed Port pote Rate C 96 Kbps Standard 384 Kbps High C 115 Kbps verit Cancel Help 2 Set the data for the displayed items The meanings of the items are described below 430 Sending Downloading the Data Section 11 3 COM Port Specify the RS 232C port to be used Specify either COM1 COM2 Baud Rate Set the data communication rate If 38 4 Kbps High is set high speed data communica tion is possible Not available for NT11S NT11 It is recommended to specify 9 6 Kbps Standard to en sure error free communication if a communication error occurs due to an inadequate communication environment Data communication at the 9 6 Kbps Standard setting will take about twice the time required in the 38 4 Kbps High setting If the PT is set to the NT21 even faster communications are possible by selected 115 Kbps Select this
418. he printer to be used Range Specify the pages to be printed All All pages are printed Pages Only the specified pages are printed The pages to be printed are specified as a range AI C Pages 1 tof E The pages to be specified here are actual print pages and it must be taken into consideration that one screen data does not always corre spond to one print page If you want to print the screens partially use the Print Preview function to check the correspondence between pages and screens to specify pages Print to File Specify this item to output the contents to be printed to a file The file format differs depending on the printer used After setting a check mark in the check box click ex the file name setting dialog box is displayed Copies Specify the number of copies to be printed Number of copies Set the number of copies Collate Specify if the same page is printed in a group when printing multiple copies The same page is printed in a group if a check mark is set in the check box 12 2 3 Output to a File RTF Reference Reports can be output to a file in the rich text format The operation for outputting the reports to a file is basically the same as that for printing them The rich text format is a file format used for document data in this file format in formation such as characters and indents is retained The data saved in this for mat is highly interchangeable among Window
419. he select all function Select Select All from the Edit menu view Draw Object Undo Ctri Z t mm Cut Ctrl X gt Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrit Align gt i Select Object Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements To edit an element that consists of multiple elements as shown below use the edit element function e Position of a label in a touch switch e Position of a label in a standard lamp e Position of a Display in a bar graph e Position of a Display in an analogue meter e Position of a Display in a trend graph and touch switches for controlling function e Display position of image library data and position of touch switches in an alarm list alarm history 1 Select the element to be edited Select only one element if multiple elements are selected edit object func tion can not be used 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Edit Object This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the elements and select Edit Object in the menu It is also possible to enter Edit Object mode by simply pressing the Insert button on a keyboard To cancel Edit Object mode press Insert button again The green W marks handles change into red 3 Select an element 108 Common Operation Section 6 1 Example Changing the position of the
420. hen click on again Adjusting the size and position of the touch switch 5 Adjust the size and position of the frame of Monitor Screen button 6 Specify the Monitor Screen button 7 Select Centralize Label from Draw menu The label is centralized Creating the Set Screen button Copying and pasting the Monitor Screen button 1 Specify the Monitor Screen button 2 Select Edit menu bar Copy Refer to 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Past ing and Deleting Elements 3 Select Edit menu bar Paste Refer to 6 1 5 Copying Cutting Past ing and Deleting Elements 4 Drag the Monitor Screen button displayed at the upper left area in the data creation screen to the position where you want to create the Set Screen button Modifying to the Set Screen button 5 Double click the moved button and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Attribute Label Description Set Screen Settings Screen No 3 1 Press Edit to set the label Creating the Alarm Screen button Alarm Screen Copying and pasting the Monitor Screen button 1 Specify the Monitor Screen button 2 Select Edit menu bar Copy 3 Select Edit menu bar Paste 4 4 Drag the Monitor Screen button displayed at the upper left area in the data creation screen to the position where you want to creat
421. hexadecimal Color Foreground the display color of image data Setting is possible only when 2 colors is set for the color mode Background Set the color of background in the image data display area Setting is possible only when 2 colors is set for the color mode Displays the list for selecting the image data when Direct is specified Displays the list for referencing the numeral table entry when Indirect is specified When the image data is firstly specified the data of character code FE20H for the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode or the data that corresponds to image library code 0001H for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C without NT20 30 620 compatible mode is arranged as default The mark shown below will be displayed if image data has not been created for the specified code x To change the image data to be displayed click on _ inthe property and se lect the desired image data or numeral table entry from the list If you are using the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C V1 and above and its system program version is 2 1 and above Indirect reference can be set The procedure for specifying the desired image data is shown below Direct Specify the code of the image data to be displayed directly 151 Fixed Display Section 6 2 152 1 Click on __ at the right side of the Code field after checking the D
422. hild screens are also copied When two Support Tools are started up the same operation is possible between the Support Tools For details of screen copying refer to 4 2 4 Copying a Screen 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens 5 4 1 Window Keyboard Screens A window keyboard screen is used as a window screen for the pop up window keyboard function It means a partially display window that contains a keypad or other elements to overlap on the base screen Note that window keyboard screen cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 92 Window Keyboard Screens Section 5 4 Reference With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT625C and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C be low V1 only one window can be opened at a time and objects that can be regis tered are limited mainly to those used for inputting numeral string as follows with these PTs this window is called a keyboard screen Fixed displays Touch switches Notify bit cursor move and print screen functions are not per mitted Numeral string setting input filed Only one input field can be set Other elements are not displayed when the window keyboard screen is opened as a window although they can be registered for the window keyboard screen With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above up to three windows can be opened at the same time and all objects other than thumbwheels and recipes can be registered However only one input field of num
423. hin the valid range Minimum value re stored Correction related to the touch switch for which the copy function is set Create the window key board screen for a Screen number in the range 1900 to 1979 and correct the window key board screen number Set for the touch switch accordingly Refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens and 6 8 4 Pop up Window Keyboard Function Touch Switch If a touch switch assigned the copy function is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to dif ferences in the range of numeric values that can be input Difference New models Conventional models Status before Conversion As a constant for the copy setting function a numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input As a constant for the copy setting function a numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input Status after Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Error Message Corrective Action With a new model a touch switch for which the copy set ting function is set with a numeric val ue greater than 100000000 or smaller than 10000000 speci fied is registered to the symbol manag er With a conventional model a value greater than 100000000 is cor rected to 99999999 or a value smaller than 10000000 is corrected to F0000000 IW Constant Value is out of limit Maxi mum value re stored
424. ht and the original width 2x1 Wide A character is displayed with the original height and doubled width 2x2 A character is displayed with doubled height and width 3x3 A character is displayed with threefold height and width 4x4 A character is displayed with fourfold height and width 8x8 A character is displayed with eightfold height and width not possible for NT20S fer pt PT PI FI Reference With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above characters of 2 x 2 or larger scale are automatically displayed in 32 dot high defi nition font Marks inserted into a string are always displayed in 16 x 16 dot font 32 dot font and font type ISO 8859 1 are not available on PT when system pro grams of V1 type and above were installed for NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 even though other functions will be same as V1 and above type Therefore in this case characters of 2 x 2 or larger scale are displayed in 16 dot font for PT while they are displayed in 32 dot font for Support Tool Also 1508859 1 font type can not be used for PT CP437 font type is applied Smoothing Smoothing processing allows jags to be smoothed when a character is displayed in an enlarged scale Selection of this item is possible for characters of 2 x 2 or larger and for marks 16 x 16 dots With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C smoothing is not performed for marks Smoothing cannot be selec
425. ible mode it is not possible to insert image data into a character string Image editor has the following features You can draw any graphics in the bit map format freely It is possible to import Image data from the different screen data file Selected image data can be expanded or shrunk The bit map file can be pasted onto the image editor Copy cut paste operation of image data is possible Preview display of selected image data is available on the image table 8 1 1 Operating the Image Table 322 Image table dialog is configured as follows Comp Mode Size Comments Colol80 X 56 Edit gt 8 Colo80 X56 SW HELP 8 ColoB0 X56 SW POINT Goto Code B ColoB0 X56 SW MENU 8 ColoB0 X56 SW MEMO a lt lt Preview 8 Colo80 X56 SW PRINT 8 Colog0 X56 SW CALL B Colo40 X96 Toggle A OFF Edit Deletes cuts copies or pastes the image data of the selected code refer to pages 323 to 325 It is possible to select two or more codes and delete them collectively Goto Code Code number can be specified and the cursor moves to the code The operation method is same as the Goto Entry of a memory table refer to 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Spec ifying the Table Entry Number Preview Switches the preview window ON and OFF refer to page 323 Open Displays the editing screen image editor of the selected cod
426. ible string contents in NTST before down loading applications to a different language PT Therefore the purpose of this utility is to provide a translation support utility that enables you to load the memory map image file MMI for the source language and be able to translate the new string contents of the application and generate independent memory map files MMI for the specified target language The string data can be exported to Microsoft Excel files and from there you can edit change the string data outside the Translation Support Utility You can also im port the string data in Microsoft Excel format to Translation Support Utility Installing the NT Translation Support Utility The basic installation method is the same as that for the NT Transfer Utility Refer to Installing the NT Transfer Utility in Appendix C Setup exe for NT Translation Support Utility is in the Translation Support Util ity disk1 folder in the Support Tool CD ROM By double clicking the Setup exe icon you can start the installation program Follow the instructions on the setup screen to install the NT Translation Support Utility Flow of Operations An NTST application needs to be saved in MMI format before it can be used in Translation Support Utility 1 Load MMI files using File Open 2 Use Translation New to create a new language column More than one target languages may be created 3 Strings in target language text are tra
427. ible to read screen data created by NT series Support Tool for Win dows Ver 4 7 with an earlier version of NT series Support Tool With MMI files the screen data created by the Support Tool Ver 4 can be read using Support Tool Ver 3 as long as the PT model is supported with Ver 3 With MMI format user group and grid information will be lost e g NT30C MMI file created with Ver 4 Can be read with Ver 3 NT31C V2 MMI file created with Ver 4 Cannot be read with Ver 3 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File 54 After creating the screen data save it to a file The procedure for saving the screen data to a file is File main window menu Save or File main window menu Save As Save The existing screen data of the opened file is overwritten by the new screen data Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 Reference If the file was opened using New the operation to be followed is the same as for saving a file by selecting Save As Save As The created or edited screen data is saved by specifying the folder and the file name File name setting dialog If you select Save when creating new screen data or Save As the file name setting window Save As opens Save As Save in E Scen rl e 30FUM LINEB onw amp OOsIO LINE onw BOOsLINE A onw a BOOsLINEC MONTR onw 62
428. ick on E The Redo function will repeat the last most recent action that was performed Ten times of Redo can be performed It is invoked by Menu bar Edit Redo Draw bar Click on ej 6 1 6 Aligning Elements 114 Two or more elements can be aligned collectively There are following six functions for alignment The buttons below are provided on the alignment bar Align Top 37 Short cut key Ctrl Up Arrow Align Bottom ru Short cut key Ctrl Down Arrow Align Left El Short cut key Ctrl Left Arrow e Align Right 9 Short cut key Ctrl Right Arrow Center in a Column Short cut key Ctrl F9 Common Operation Section 6 1 e Centerina Row Short cut key Ctrl Shift F9 These functions can align the elements to the extremely edge in the selected ele ments range or to the vertical horizontal center of all the selected objects Align Top Align Bottom Align Left Align Right MG CNN S wv SG ol m TE Align Align 41 Bottom l S Align Right Sam 9 ue Copa yng wo WE Center ina ls Row Center in a Column However if a touch switch including elements such as thumbwheels alarm lists histories that contain touch switches within themselves is included in the selected elements the touch switch will take precedence for alignment and the other elements will be aligne
429. ields 311 7 10 3 Record Setting Table spre 00 r eee 314 265 Common Operation Section 7 1 7 1 Common Operation The operating procedures common to all memory tables are described below Copy setting button Batch address change button Edit button Set button Specified number display button Reference button Search button Operation starts by specifying the number that is clicking on the objective line memory table entry number The shape of the mouse cursor changes as shown below when it enters the No field 7 1 1 Reference Operation The reference screen displays the screen numbers and the table entry numbers in which the specified table entry is used in the form of a list and the screen or element that corresponds to the specified table entry is displayed Reference Reference operation is valid only when a memory table window is opened with the Tools Table operation If the memory table window is called from the ele ment property dialog box reference operation is not possible Description of reference dialog box Table Entry 0 Screen Table Comments Cancel Help Table Entry Displays the selected table entry number Screen Table Displays the screen number or the table entry number where the specifie
430. ies Support Tool for Windows do not upload the data with DOS tool 55 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 even if it has been download to PT Downloading will be possible however the data may not be used with DOS version Support Tool correctly ST D r OS version Support Tool Ko Upper 7205 NT30 anim PT NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C Windows version Support Tool With mmi file format error check is executed before saving By this error check data that cannot be downloaded to PT will not be stored With the Support Tool on CD ROM the NT Transfer Utility which transmits mmi file to the PT is supplied For details refer to Appendix C NT Transfer Util ity 3 3 4 Closing the Screen Data Application File It is not possible to open two or more screen data files with one Support Tool So when you want to edit different screen data file you need to close the currently opened file or start up the second Support Tool using the Import Component command from the File menu For details of Import Component refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool To close application select Close from File in the main window menu If the screen data application has not been saved a message requesting con firmation of saving it is indicated displayed NT series Support Tool Save changes to Appl
431. ifferent in V2 models Insertion of image li brary in character string Not available in new models This option will be available for NT31 C V2 and NT631 C V2 mod els in NT30 620 compatible mode 6 7 7 3 5 Retaining of alarm his tory list associated touch switch attributes when converted from NT30 620 model to new V2 models Not supported Alarm history list associated touch switches will keep its attributes un changed when converted from NT30 620 to V2 models in NT30 620 compatible mode Appen dix A Correc tion of alarm list histo ry touch switches Centralizing the Label of Lamp and Touch switch in both horizon tal and vertical direc tion Label is centralized only in horizontal direction Label is centralized both horizontal and vertical direction 6 1 9 9 3 12 Mathematical Table Not supported A different memory table is sup plied to input mathematical func tions Interlock Not supported This facility is provided to activate or deactivate the associated object Only when interlock is ON the ob ject will response to the user touches deactivated otherwise New Words Added to OMRON Not supported Words for EM Bank 0 F Time Up Flag Counter Up Flag Task Flag and Work Area are added Device monitor screen Not supported New Device monitor screens 9021 23 are available switch screen functionality of touch switch bit memory tab
432. ify the scale length in 96 format regarding the radius as 100 10 to 110 by 1 No of Division Specify the number of the division that the scale should be di vided in the range from 0 to 100 1 to 20 Scale Color Specify the scale color of an analogue meter Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Color Foreground Specify the color for displaying the present value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the circumscribed rectangle of an analogue meter Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of analogue meter displayed for a positive value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of analogue meter displayed for a negative value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Value Table Entry Specify the table entry number of a numeral memory table entry to be displayed Display Specify whether or not a percent value is displayed on the screen 100 Table Entry Specify this item if a 100 value is set by a numeral memory table entry set the table entry number of the numeral table Value Specify this item
433. in the corresponding boxes in the Change To area 271 Common Operation Section 7 1 5 Set a check mark in the Change Comment check box as desired If a check mark is set in this check box I O comments appended to the ad dresses before the change are also appended to the addresses after the change 6 Click on 89 7 1 4 Edit Operation The procedure for clearing cutting copying pasting and incremental copying of the data set a memory table is described below In the copy to next operation the specified incremental amount is automatically added to the data in the memory table entry at the cursor location and copied to the memory table entry with the next number The procedure for specifying the incremental amount to be used for copy to next is explained in 7 1 5 Copy Increment Setting Operation Reference To start editing click on sw right click the mouse on a table entry number to display the menu then select the desired edit function in this menu It may not be possible to select an edit function if an input field is displayed If the selection of an edit function is not possible left click the mouse on a table entry number field to select the entire line and after that click on go or right click the mouse on a table entry number to display the menu When the two screen data files of the same PT model are opened using Import Component command it is possible to paste the table dat
434. ine FA25 Check the PC PLC and the network Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the library data codes are 1000 to 3FFF However if NT20 30 620 compatible mode is used with the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C library code will be the same as NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Creating the library data of code FA20 1 2 3 Select Tools menu bar Library Editor Specify FA20 in the library table and click on gm Click the library creation area frame dotted lines that is displayed at the upper left area in the library creation screen and drag the point at the lower right corner The mouse cursor position is displayed under the screen change the frame size to 200 Y 200 size 200 x 200 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text Click the mouse at the position where the character string is to be dis played at the intended upper left corner of text Set the properties as shown below Description Set Line 1 Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing al Attribute Inverse Flash Color Foreground White Background Black 397 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 7 Adjust the Set Line 1 character string display position by dragging it 8 After creating the library data of code FA20 click x at the upper right section in the FA20 libr
435. ine Graph Trend Graph PT Numeral table Numeral Input PC PLO bit address for in terlock PT Numeral table String Input PC PLO bit address for in terlock PT String table Alarm History PT Bit Memory table PT Alarm History Alarm List PT Bit Memory table String Display Image Library Display Recipe Object PC PLC Word address PC PLC Word address 1 These are available only with the NT21 and with the NT31 631 V2 and above Operation of changing display objects Lamp display The lamp is turned ON OFF when the specified PC PLC bit goes ON OFF Screen PC PLC Sd Bit o ddress A Lamp lights when bit comes ON 10 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Touch switch Notify Bit The specified PC PLC bit goes ON OFF when the switch area is pressed Screen PC PLC Notification B Bit address e Touch switch Switch Screen The display screen is switched to another when the switch area is pressed Screen A Screen B Touch switch Input Key Window Keyboard A window Keyboard Screen pops up in the screen when the switch area is pressed Screen Screen Touch switch Window Move 44 Window Keyboard The window
436. inery acts of sabotage riots delay in or lack of transportation or the requirements of any government authority Shipping Delivery Unless otherwise expressly agreed i in writing by Seller a Shipments shall be by a carrier selected by Seller b Such carrier shall act as the agent of Buyer and delivery to such carrier shall constitute delivery to Buyer c All sales and shipments of Goods shall be FOB shipping point unless oth erwise stated in writing by Seller at which point title to and all risk of loss of the Goods shall pass from Seller to Buyer provided that Seller shall retain a security interest in the Goods until the full purchase price is paid by Buyer d Delivery and shipping dates are estimates only e Seller will package Goods as it deems proper for protection against normal handling and extra charges apply to special conditions Claims Any claim by Buyer against Seller for shortage or damage to the Goods occurring before delivery to the carrier must be presented in writing to Seller within 30 days of receipt of shipment and include the original transporta tion bill signed by the carrier noting that the carrier received the Goods from Seller in the condition claimed 12 13 14 15 16 Warranties a Exclusive Warranty Seller s exclusive warranty is that the Goods will be free from defects in materials and workmanship for a period of twelve months from the date of sale by Seller
437. ing color visible through blank areas in the selected pattern If Transparent is specified the background becomes transparent and elements arranged be hind text and numerals are visible Border Specify the border color of tiling area Background Foreground Available tiling patterns are shown below L TIAM When tiling a graphic the color of border should be set to the same color as set for graphics that surround the tiling element If a different color is specified or there is a gap in the border the tiling fills out the specified area 120 Common Operation Section 6 1 Reference The Color Palette Symbol for which tiling patterns and color combinations are registered is supplied with Support Tool as symbol data Using color palette sym bol enables you to register required tiling objects on screen while checking their display status Color palette symbol does not have transparent background pat terns Border colors are set to White Change the setting as required when using it For details refer to 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol Setting the color for lamps and touch switches When specifying the color for lamps and touch switches it is possible to specify the color for the frame color when ON and color when OFF Frame Specify the frame color if an elemen
438. ing a keyboard and keypads for each PT model and color pattern combinations of tiling objects are registered and provided with the Support Tool you can save time when creating graphics 6 10 1 Screen Configuration of Symbol Manager 250 The symbol manager screen configuration is shown below Symbol Manager SymFilel SBL Se Eg Menu bar gt File Edit Help Group Symbol icon KeyPad 3D High Supplement Symbols Folder Folder name Symbol name A folder represents one symbol data file and symbols displayed under the folder represent the individual symbol data registered in that file The name of the selected folder or the name of the file that stores the selected symbol is displayed in the title column of the Symbol Manager window Starting with V4 6 there is a Preview pane to show an overview picture and a Listing pane to show the object contents For newly installed symbol data with V4 6 the preview is immediately available Old data can be reused into this version but a preview is not applicable To make Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 a preview of old data copy the data to the screen on V4 6 and then copy it back to the symbol manager to register the preview information E Symbol Manager 1507000 40700 0 el E3 File Edit View Help 0714 Paper jam in sorter 0715 Paper jam in original master
439. int is at the upper left corner of the percentage value Font Type Specify the font of the value to be displayed Standard Half Height Double Width Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Scale Specify the scale of the value to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1 x 2 High 2x 1 Wide 2 2 3 3 4x4 8x8 Only 1 x 1 Equal can be set for NT11S NT11 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for the value to be displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S Attribute The display attribute cannot be set fixed as standard display Color Foreground Specify the color of the percentage value Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the percentage value display area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow When displaying a specific value reference value in a bar graph the percent age value is calculated based on the values for 100 0 and 100 227 Graphs Section 6 9 If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set as indicated below ref erence values are displayed in the bar graph as shown below Bar graph 100 1 0 100 C TableEnty C Table Enty b 4 C Table Enty 5 Value Value 0 Value po _ L J Value
440. ion related to display range of window keyboard screens Input Key Window Keyboard screen number is not within the valid range Minimum value re stored Correct the screen data so that the local window 1 includes all the re quired elements When a window keyboard screen is converted conversion is executed as shown below due to differences in the window keyboard screen display range between a conventional and a new model Difference New models Conventional models Status before Conversion A window keyboard screen can be specified only in the range that fits the touch switch grids desired position Status after Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Error Message A window keyboard screen can be specified at any Corrective Action With a conventional model a range that does not fit the touch switch size is specified as the dis With a new model the range is cor rected so that it agrees with the touch switch posi Some screen ele ments exceed frame size The ele ments will not be downloaded to PT If the position and the range of the window to be displayed is inconve nient for operation cor rect the position and the play range tions Hardware range Refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens Correction related to the system initializing screen Host Connect screen When the system initializing screen is converted
441. irect but ton in the property setting dialog box to display the image data selection dia log box Code Comp Mode Size Comments GO No B 24 X24 circle Imp OFF nofrm Circle Imp red min nofrm 040 X 40 Circle Imp OFF S nofrm 20 40 X 40 Circle Imp red S Circle Imp OFF min frm irche Imp min frm Circle Imp OFF S frm ircle Imp yllw S frm ing the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click c on open the code input dialog box Input the code of the desired image data and click on By pressing cursor keys 1 on keyboard the contents of the code can be checked in the preview window one by one 3 Select the code of the desired image data to be displayed The selected line will be highlighted 4 Click on to close the dialog box Indirect Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced With indirect reference the contents for the specified numeral table entry are treated as an image code and the corresponding image data is displayed This is useful when you want to change the image data to be displayed according to the statuses Set the storage type of numeral table entry to be referenced by indirect reference to Binary and specify the value image code to be stored in hexadeci mal since the image code is in hexadecimal Numeral Table Image Display 1 2 O01D 0016 3 Hexadecimal 001D 4 001E 5 001F
442. ired PT model see below Select Memory Map Image File mmi as a file type Parts Collection for each PT model is displayed Specify the Parts Collection of the PT model same as the currently opened screen data file and click the Button Open Look in E Sample Collection e Ef z 30 NT30C NT620C NT625C NT620S collections E NT31 NT31C collections NT631 NT631C collections S SAMPLE E Files of type NTST Application onw Cancel Second Support Tool starts up and the selected Parts Collection opens 4 In the screen data file of Parts Collection decide the object that you want to import 5 If the object contains image library data the image library data should be co pied between image library table entries beforehand by copy paste operation if NT series Support Tool version number is lower than 4 6 Follow the proce 61 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 dure below Code number to be copied can be checked in the property of an object Ref erenced image library code is also displayed on the status bar for some ob ject when they are selected If image library copying is not performed beforehand display will not be as intended since the image library allocated to the code is not copied even if the object itself is copied Procedure a Open the property of an image lamp or image library data to be imported and check the referenced image library code b
443. is closed the serial numbers are renumbered au tomatically 4 The Support Tool can open up to ten windows at the same time in addition to the application manager window Operation 1 Specify the screen Click on the screen or double click on the screen icon to open multi windows 2 Select New Window from Window in the menu bar An additional window opens for the screen specified in step 1 Windows can be arranged in any of the following three ways Cascade All windows are cascaded in such a way that window titles are visible All windows are displayed at the same size The order of cascading differs depending on the display position of the win dows before the cascading operation is attempted Tile All windows are arranged over the entire main window area at the same size However the sizes may differ slightly depending on the number of windows The order of tiling differs depending on the display position of windows be fore tiling operation is attempted 73 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Switching windows 4 2 14 Help Menu Arrange Icons The application manager and creation screens shown in icon form are ar ranged in the lower left part of the main window The order in which the icons are displayed differs depending on the display position of the icons before the arrange icons operation was attempted Operation 1 Select Window in the menu bar then choose Casca
444. is exclusively used for downloading uploading the screen data is supplied For details refer to Ap pendix C 1 Select Connect menu bar gt Download NT series Support Tool PT Sending Downloading the Data Section 11 3 The menu is displayed allowing you to select the data to be sent The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model Selection of Screen is not possible if screen data is not selected Pressing Ctrl key Shift key D executes Application downloading 2 Select the data to be sent Data transmission timing is determined according to the type of data se lected to be sent Data Type Description Application in file units Data transmission starts immediately Screen If a parent screen is included in the screens selected to be sent a dialog box is displayed requesting you to specify wheth er child screens are sent with the parent Screen Set a check mark for the Include Child Screen item if you want to send the child screens with the parent screen Data transmission starts when x Jis clicked Direct Access Information Data transmission starts immediately System Memory Data transmission starts immediately Table NT20S and NT600S Data transmission starts immediately NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The dialog box where the information to be sent is specified is displayed Only the information for which a check mark is set is sent D
445. is received in units of a screen It is possible to receive the data of several Screens at a time When receiving the data of a parent screen you can specify whether or not the data of the child screens is to be received with the parent Screen data Direct Access Information 434 NT20S and NT600S Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area numeral character string memory table string table etc NT21 Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area models with V1 and above Section 11 4 Receiving Uploading Data Data Type Description System Memory The contents of System set at the PT are re ceived and set for System of PT Configura tion Table NT20S and NT600S The following data is received in a batch e Numeral memory table data e Character string memory table String table data e Mark data NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The following data can be received individually Numeral memory table data Character string memory table String table data Bit memory table data Mark data Image data Library data Recipe table 1 With the NT21 NT31
446. is selected Guidance Following types of trend graph element are provided 0 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Up NU 7 Time Direction Left Direction Down W xL Time 100 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Up TTime LNG e VVV ET lt LZ Time Direction Left Time Direction Down Wi rn lTime e Which of 0 to 100 and 7100 to 100 trend graphs is displayed should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general attributes Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 10096 display The following two types of trend graph display are provided Standard The latest drawing position moves in the direction set for Direc tion b Present Next drawing drawing position position 243 Graphs Section 6 9 Pen Reco The latest drawing position is fixed and the entire graph moves in the direction set for Direction Present display status Ke Present drawing position ex display status Present Be drawing position If you specify a trend graph element only one broken line is displayed To modify the settings for the line select the line to be modified and click on Line Property The line properties are displayed To add a line click on i A line is added and the line properties are
447. iscarded Use a touch switch to switch screens If the program is created to display the par ent screen of the continuous screens cor rect the program so that the first child screen is displayed The screen no XXX was an Extended Screen which is not supported in this model so it is converted to standard Screen Correction not necessary The screen number referenced in Touch Switch is not a Window Keyboard screen Create the window keyboard screen after selecting New then use it as the refer ence screen The total number of Alarm List and Histo ry exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the alarm list history within the limit The total number of Bar Graph exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 400 by YYY Create the bar graphs within the limit The total number of Broken Line Graphs exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the broken line graphs within the limit The total number of lines in Broken Line Graphs exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of XXX by YYY Create the broken line graphs within the limit The total number of XXX exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 256 by ZZZ Create the elements within the limit The total number of Image Display and Library Display exceeds the overlapping screen s limit of 256 by XXX Create the image library data within the limit The total number of Numeral Display ex
448. isplay Reference 3 Table Entry x Length 20 Font Type standard only 1x1 2x1 521 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT11S NT600S NT620S tems NT11 Ver5 Ver4 String Smoothing x x e e Display Attribute e e e e Color Foreground Color Background Table Entry e Display Type e Decimal Hexadeci mal Decimal only Limit Maxi mum Limit Mini mum x Format In teger Deci mal Zero Sup pression Display Sign Font Type Smoothing Attribute Color Foreground Color Background Focus Frame Focus Attrib ute Interlock Table Entry Length Font Type Scale Smoothing 8 Available only in V2 and later models 522 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 NT600S NT620S Ver 5 Ver 4 Attribute Color Fore ground Color Back ground Focus Frame Focus At tribute Interlock Data Table Input Entry Thumb wheel Switch Display Type Decimal Hexade cimal Format Integer Decimal Limit Maximum Limit Minimum Display Sign Attribute Size End Plate Charac ter Color Fore
449. it status Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static is set as the label type Turn the PC PLC bit to which the lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen If ON 4 DEF If OFF Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above 1 2 Tools Library Editor Register the text as the library data Objects Lamp Image Create a lamp that displays the registered text 3 Turn the PC PLC bit allocated to the lamp ON OFF PT Screen ABC DEF 4 Image Quick Reference PC PLC Bit Status Display To display an alarm mes sage according to the PC PLC bit status Operation 1 Tools Table Bit Memory Allocate the PC PLC bit and a character string memory table entry string table storing an alarm message to the bit memory table entry Tools Table String Create the alarm message Objects Alarm Alarm List Create the alarm list and specify the bit memory table entry in the alarm area PT Screen Character string memory table Bit memor Alarm M String table table Alarm Alarm M m 2 hi Alarm j 2
450. item by setting a check mark in the check box if you want to check the communication data at the same time it is transmitted Please note that this setting is al lowed only for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 3 After completing the setting for all items click on 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data To send download the data created or edited by the Support Tool to a PT follow the steps shown below The type of data that can be sent is indicated in the table below Data Type Description Application in file units All data is sent in batch Screen Data is sent in units of a screen It is possible to send the data of several Screens at a time When sending the data of a parent screen you can specify whether or not the data of the child screens should be sent with the parent screen data Direct Access Information NT20S and NT600S Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to the PT status control area PT status notify area numeral character string memory table string table etc NT21 Information on the PC PLC addresses allo cated to PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Information of the PC PLC addresses allo cated to PT status control area PT status notify area and window control area models with V1 and above 431 Sending Downloading the Data Section 11 3 Reference Operation proced
451. ize data is not displayed if there are no elements in the library data specifying frame Comments Specify the comment for the library data to be created 338 Library Editor Section 338 2 Screen Configuration of Library Editor Operating the library editor Reference The screen configuration of the library editor is described below Library data specifying frame Edit area Using the library editor you can create a graphic using fixed elements in the same manner as creating graphics in a standard screen The size of the library data specifying frame is taken as the size of the library data The position and size of the library data specifying frame can be changed as needed Only the graphic in the range of the library data specifying frame is registered as the library data For details on how to use fixed elements refer to 6 2 Fixed Display Library data that is cut or copied on the library editor window can be pasted onto the other library editor window or standard editing screen The data can be pasted until another data is stored to the clipboard Also fixed display elements that were cut or copied from standard editing screens can be pasted onto the li brary editor window When more than one library editor window is displayed or when two Support Tools are opened by Import Component from the File menu same PT model setting cut copy and paste operations between these library edi
452. l a numeral setting input field or a thumbwheel Switch for which a numeral memory table in the range No 247 to No 253 is referred to is reg istered to the sym bol manager With a new model the reference nu meral memory table No is corrected to 0 Thumbwheel switch refers to reserved numeral table entry The referenced table entry is reset to 0 Make corrections so that the contents of a numer al memory table in the range No 247 to No 253 are displayed in a numeral display Refer to 6 6 Numeral Display Correction related to an interlock function of a touch switch numeral string input or thumbwheel In the conversion of the data between a V2 model and a non V2 model conven tional model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to an inter lock function that has been added to V2 models Difference V2 models Operations Inputs can be enabled disabled according to the status of the host bit interlock bit Conventional models non V2 models Interlock bit can not be set Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With V2 models an object allocated an interlock function is registered in the symbol manager With non V2 mod els conventional models an interlock bit setting will be discarded Interlock not sup ported Interlock setting will be dis
453. l be performed at this next restart and installation is completed Click the Button to finish or restart Restart is not required for Windows2000 35 Section 2 2 Installing the Support Tool 2 2 3 Uninstall 36 An uninstaller uninstall software is supplied with the Support Tool If you want to remove the Support Tool from your personal computer run the uninstaller to delete the Support Tool program files and installation information Note that the data created by the Support Tool is not deleted Starting the uninstaller from the Windows start menu Select Uninstall NTST in the same folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is stored Example Assuming the short cut to the Support Tool exists in the Start Pro gram Omron NTST4 7E Select the uninstaller by the following operation Start Program gt Omron gt NTST4 7E Uninstall NTST After the start up of the uninstaller follow the instructions displayed on the screen SECTION 3 Support Tool Starting up and Exiting Procedure and File Operation This section describes how to start up and exit the Support Tool and the operating procedure for PT screen data files 3 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool 0 0 00 2c eee eee 38 3 1 1 Start up Procedure presa seioed eR ehe De E nob edb ees 38 3 1 2 Exit Procedure x edo aes cath m Rr ede e dag deos 39 3 2 User Interface in estem E bie ee ee te ENS Un S et ae 39 3 2
454. l manager P274 it is possible to display the opened data in the symbol manager and to use the required one for screen creation The following symbol data files are supplied with the Support Tool Color Palette Symbol ColorPL SBL Keyboard Keypad Collection Spplmnt SBL ISO Symbol Collections ISO7000 XXXX XXXX SBL CD ROM version only The opened folders symbol data files in the symbol manager remain dis played until they are closed The symbol manager memorizes the folder con figuration when you quit the symbol manager last time and displays the same state when you next start the symbol manager The symbol registration state in the folder is the state when the folder was saved last While registering a symbol from a screen or pasting it to a screen the folder to be used symbol data file should be opened However if the symbol data file has a Read only property the characters Read Only are displayed in the symbol manager In this case it is not possible to perform symbol registration 253 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 Closing a folder file Creating a new folder 254 1 Select File in the menu bar then select Open The dialog to specify the file name is displayed In the dialog the folders that contain the symbol data file to be read are displayed File type is fixed to a Symbol File SBL 2 Specify the desired folder and file name and click on
455. l name is displayed in reverse video 2 Select Edit in the menu bar then select Choose Icon The data selection dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the bit map data that should be used as an icon and click on IDE Help Apu aei Cut CtrieX zb x Copy Ctrl C p Paste GROUP Delete Del 7 Data LL Supplement Symbols l LL Supplement Symbols Change Label Reference For an icon 16 x 16 dot 8 color bit map data can be used Although bit map data larger than 16 x 16 dots can be used only the 16 x 16 dots at the upper left area of such data is used Saving a folder file After registering the symbol data save the registered data to a file by the opera tion shown below Select File in the menu bar then select Save Save As or Save All If there is a folder that has not been saved the file name specifying window is displayed regardless of the save method you chose If this window opens speci fy the file name to save the folder Please note that the file name specifying win dow does not show the objective folder name which means that the objective 256 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 folder for saving cannot be distinguished if you select Save All when there are several unsaved folders It is advisable to save a folder that has not been saved by assigning a file name beforehand ILES Edit Help Overwrites
456. l operations are possible using the Window menu Opening a new window for the data creation screen that is active Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 Arranging windows Switching windows Reference The Support Tool can operate windows in the same manner as other Windows Opening a new window Reference Arranging windows applications Here only the functions that can be selected from the Support Tool menus are explained To open a new window for the data creation screen that is active follow the pro cedure described below 1 Windows with the same screen number display the same contents 2 When the same screen is displayed in two windows elements can be copied between the windows by dragging them while pressing the Ctrl key Usually copying an element to a desired position in the same screen is not possible However if two same windows are opened it is possible to copy an element to a desired position although they are on the same screen Similarly if different screen data files of the same PT model are opened by two Support Tools it is possible to copy screen data between the files 3 When multiple windows that have the same screen number exist the follow ing information is displayed in the window title area for standard screens x Standard Screen y x Screen number y Serial number Serial numbers will be assigned in the order the windows are opened If any window presently opened
457. lamp Thumb String String Broker Alarm ee input display line list Switc graph e Utility Bar Buttons for centralizing label of touch switch or lamp refer to 5 7 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool simulation for flash attribute in fixed display objects refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool lamp ON facility refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Sup port Tool and a combo box for selecting to display certain screen object type refer to 5 7 4 Filter Function are provided xz 30 s jn cn Centralize Simulate Filter Screen Label ON OFF Element Simulate Flash Alignment Bar This toolbar provides the object alignment to the top bottom left right and also center in a row and center in a column Refer to 6 1 6 Aligning Elements Align Center in Top a Column Align Align Center Bottom Right in a Row Reference Whether or not Status Bar Standard Toolbar Draw Bar Utility Bar and Align ment Bar are displayed can be selected respectively by the following opera tion 41 User Interface Section 3 2 Floating palette Screen Element Selected item Fixed Display Object Status Bar Standard Toolbar View menu bar Status Bar View menu bar Toolbars Standard Bar oI lel View menu bar gt gt I Draw Bar Toolbars Draw Bar Utility Bar View menu bar Toolbars Utility Bar Alignment B
458. lap ping the trend graph Move the element outside the trend graph frame Application version mismatched Com munication aborted System program version installed in a PT maybe a lower one For details of the com bination of system program version that can be transmitted and the PT model set ting at the Support Tool refer to 11 1 2 Available Data Communication Methods by PT Models For details of updating the system pro gram refer to Appendix B Cannot have more than XXX child Screens When creating a new screen insert a number of child screens that does not ex ceed the maximum limit Clock Monitoring Address has not been set With an NT21 PT set the Clock Address to define a clock Data Area so the clock data can be read from the PLC Constant Value is out of limit Maximum value restored Correct the screen data or the program in the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits set for the copy setting touch switch will suffice Continuous screen does not allow child screen to have Thumbwheel Numeral String Input elements Delete thumbwheel switches numeral in put elements and or character string input elements Control Notify Window Control area can not overlap each other Make sure that the PT status control area the PT status notify area and the window control area are not overlapping each oth er Cursor Move Touch Switch does not have any association link Se
459. lationships between Elements and Memory Tables 134 Remove Node 138 rich text format 455 Right click the mouse 106 Rotate or Flip 331 S Save 69 Save As 69 Saving the Screen Image 88 Scale 123 124 Scale 230 Scale Length 230 Screen 433 436 Screen Image 446 Screen List 447 Screen No 79 Search for Help on 75 Sector 144 Select Object 107 Selecting an Element 106 Selector 105 Sending Downloading the Data 71 431 Setting footer and header 454 setting for screen switching 87 Setting margins 454 Setting the color for graphics 120 Setting the color for lamps and touch switches 121 Setting the color for text and numerals 120 Setting the display color 119 Setting the line type 119 Setting the Screen Attributes 78 Setting the tiling color 120 Settings for numeral display 124 Settings for text display 122 setup 31 Show Tag 83 Size and display position of window 97 Smoothing 146 Smoothing 123 Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements 108 Standard Lamps 192 Standard Screen 88 String Display 204 String table 15 Style Fun Style Name Page Sep Window Control Area 52 Alarm list history function 287 Application manager screen 39 Backlight OFF 48 Bit Memory Tables 286 Buzzer 49 Canceling backlight OFF 292 character string memory table string table 281 Check box 43 Close 56 Code setting in the image library code fi
460. layed Refer to the User s Manual or Reference Manual for your PT for details on the Programming Console functions The Programming Console Screen can not be edited on the Support Tool 101 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment Section 5 14 PT Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S NT30 None NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9020 Reference The Programming Console Screen is supported only by the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 5 13 Device Monitor Screen Reference These are system defined screens and cannot be created or viewed in NTST Application manager will not list out these screens Screens available are DAC Function Name NT31 631 31C 631C V 2 Function Name 9021 Monitor Registration Monitor 9022 DM Monitor Continuous Monitor 3023 These screen numbers can be referred by the following functions 1 Touch switch Switch screen 2 Bit memory table Switch screen function 3 Bit memory table Alarm function These screens can only be view on PT if the communication method is NT link If communication method is host link it would not be possible to switch to these Screens 5 14 Contrast and Brightness Adjustment 102 This is a system defined screen and cannot be created or viewed on NTST The application manager will not list this screen Contrast and Brightness Adjustment is used for tuning the contrast and brightness of the PT screen without the n
461. layed then click the Button In this case the contents of I O comment table in Support Tool remain unchanged If this message box is displayed check the following points s this a program file for OMRON C series PLC s the extension SP1 SSS program file format In case OMRON SYSMAC CPT is used store export the ladder program in SSS program SP1 format and then use this file to import I O comment Reference For SYSMAC Support Soft SYSMAC CPT priority of word types to be im ported is given below CIO has the highest priority With comments of more than 3000 entries D will be cut first CIO Bit L Bit H Bit TIM CNT A Bit CIO Word L Word H Word A Word D The I O comments table displays comments in numerical alphabetical order 7 7 4 Importing I O Comment from Tab delimited Text File Import Procedure 302 1 Select Import I O Comments from the Tools menu The dialog box to specify I O comments will be displayed 2 Specify CX P IO Comments Tab Delimited txt or All Files as a file type and specify the I O comment file tab delimited text file saved and click the OK Button The I O comment will be imported 3 When the operation is finished the message Import of I O Comments op eration completed will be displayed Next click the Button When an I O comment import was aborted or could not be performed be cause of an error the message Failed
462. le 537 New Functions of Support Tool Ver 4 1 538 Comments Import Not supported Appendix G Comments in TAB delimited text file can be imported to NTST Section 7 7 4 Multiline Label Not supported Labels ON OFF Descriptions can be entered in multiple lines 6 5 1 6 8 NT30 620 Compatible Mode Not supported With this option it can be chosen between the existing 31 631 mod el s 5 2 control Notify structure or the 30 620 model s 4 3 control notify structure 3 3 1 App A Correct ing the Control Notify Area Conver sion Numeral String Display Label Type Not supported Enables dynamic labeling as Label can be taken from Numeral or String table 6 5 1 6 8 Input Key String function Touch Switch of NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Description of label is always used as a char acter string to be input When a touch switch is pressed a label will be input Character strings can be specified individually Addition of Copy From Label button When a touch switch is pressed set character string will be input regardless of the label 6 8 3 Start up of system in staller from the Sup port Tool Not supported Can be started using Windows Start button only System installer can be started di rectly by selecting Connect Launch System Installer It can also be started up from Windows System programs to be attached
463. le Mode 3 3 APPENDIX A 418 To centralize the lamp la bel Specify the lamp to be centralized and select Draw gt Centralize Label Quick Reference Section 10 1 Operation Refer to Touch To create numeric keys 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Switches Create a numeral setting string input field 2 Objects Touch Switch gt Function Input Key Control Create numeric keys using touch switches for which the control code input function is set PT Screen gt Input 7 4 Numeral setting input field _ Touch switch 7 control code input 3 To display numeric keys Objects Data Input Numeral as a pop up window key board by touching a nu meral input field Create a numeral input field where a cursor moving touch switch is automatically set Specify the automatically created touch switch and add the window keyboard screen display function by setting properties PT PT Screen Screen Pop up window 123 89 JR3 516 lt 3 2 A To switch the objective in Objects Data Input Numeral put field among multiple numeral setting input fields arranged in a PT PT screen in response to the Screen Screen touching of a numeric set ting input field 1234 os
464. le saved in mmi format is sent downloaded to a PT Reference When data is sent from the NT Transfer Utility to a PT the existing data in the PT is lost Therefore make sure that the existing data in the PT is backed up by the Support Tool or by the NT Transfer Utility before executing data transmis sion from the NT Transfer Utility to the PT NT Transfer Utility can send only the file in mmi format Operation Procedure 1 Select Download from the File menu The dialog box to specify the screen data file mmi format to be sent is dis played see below This dialog box can be called also by pressing the Ctrl key Shift key D key Al xl Look in My Documents zl lt E3 Pictures Screen data mmi File name Screen data mmi Open Files of type Memory Map Image File mmi Cancel 2 Click on pen and the dialog to confirm the screen data to be trans mitted is displayed 2 Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data sent from the NT Transfer Utility can be received 3 Click on after confirming the screen data to be transmitted in the dialog shown below Downloading of data is started 494 NT Transfer Utility S Receiving Uploading the Data Appendix C If you want to change the screen data to be transmitted click on E at the right side of the file name and select the file you want to download MMI Fie Scteendstamm
465. lease the mouse The element in the source screen remains as it is For a new symbol symbol name New Symbol x x is a serial number is as signed Reference The symbol data can be registered also by the following operation 1 Select the elements to be registered in the source screen and select Copy or Cut from the Edit menu in the Support Tool 2 Select Paste from the Edit menu in the symbol manager 255 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 In this case symbol name Pasted Symbol x x is a serial number is assigned for a new symbol Changing the symbol name To change the symbol name to the one easy to understand follow the opera tion shown below 1 Select the symbol name that should be changed The symbol name is dis played in reverse video 2 Select Edit in the menu bar then select Change Label The label name change dialog box is displayed 3 Set your desired symbol name and click the Button Help if tt Sir File Edit View E Label Datal See Paste 67 9 2 ColourPalette lt Cancel T zm LL Supplement Symbols Changing the symbol icon It is possible to change the icon of the symbol data to a desired one To change the icon follow the procedure shown below The data that can be used for an icon is bit map data 1 Select the symbol for which the icon should be changed The symbo
466. lect the cursor moving touch switch on the screen choose Draw Associate then specify the element with which the selected touch switch is to be associated 543 Error Messages Appendix J Error Message Corrective Action Due to length limitation Input Key String Touch Switch is only displaying part of the label message With NT620S NT620C and NT625C if a character string input is selected as the touch switch function up to 80 characters can be set for an input character string With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C however although up to 80 char acters can be set for a label the limit is 40 characters for an input character string a character string that is input using a touch switch Fixed Display Mark smoothing not supported It is ignored The mark is automatically displayed with out smoothing processing Image Table entry has been converted If the converted image code differs from the code of the image data that is to be displayed correct the code Incompatible PT hardware connected communication aborted The PT model between the screen data and the target PT is mismatching on down loading uploading Check the contents of PT Configuration Input key window keyboard screen num ber is not within the valid range Mini mum value restored Create the window keyboard screen for a screen number in the range 1900 to 1979 and convert the window keyboard screen
467. ler Settings Translation Support Utility Uninstall NT Transfer Utility Eind Uninstall NTST Uninstall Translation Support Utility Run Log Off Omron Shut Down played Reference Up to two Support Tools can be started up at the same time You can copy and paste the screen data or table data between them by open ing the two different screen data files To start up the second Support Tool se lect Import Component from the File menu in the main window of the first Support Tool It is not possible to start up the second Support Tool from the Start menu of Windows For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 38 User Interface Section 3 2 3 1 2 Exit Procedure To exit the Support Tool use any of the operations shown below In the menu select File Exit Click the x Button at the upper right corner in the main window Double click the Support Tool icon displayed at the upper left section in the main window Click the Support Tool icon displayed at the upper left section in the main win dow then select the amp Button in the control menu box Press F4 key while pressing down the Alt key If you are going to exit the Support Tool before saving the data of the opened Screen a confirmation message is displayed After you exit the Support Tool the screen returns to the Windows screen
468. lines charac charac permitted ters ters per line NT21 1108 Maximum number of characters per line include the n char acter NT31 31C 128 40 1to 15 Maximum number of characters per line include the n char acter NT631 631C 256 1 to 30 Maximum number of characters per line include the n char acter Set Lines button will display On Off Description Settings dialog box in which the On Off description can be entered in multiple lines by pressing Enter Key When Numeral Display or String Display is selected as Label Type For NT31 631 V2 Models only Indirect Reference If a numeral in the specified memory table entry is treated as the reference table entry number for indirect reference specify this item Table Entry Specify the address of the numeral or string memory table entry to be referred to If Indirect Reference is not selected the contents of this numeral or string memory table entry are displayed and if Indirect Reference is selected the contents of this numeral memory table entry are treated as the reference table entry number and the contents of the reference memory table entry are dis played Edit Displays the Numeral Display or String Display property page For description on property settings refer to Section 6 6 Numeral Display and 6 7 String Display 212 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance Common description The following shapes can be used for touch switch elements
469. ll PT control Stops buzzer Displays system menu Any required character string can be used as the label of a control code input touch switch For example SET can be used as the label of a control code touch switch Click the amp amp Button in the Generai Tab attributes to display the label setting dialog box Input a label in the displayed dialog box 219 Touch Switches Section 6 8 6 8 6 Copy Setting Touch Switch Function Copy setting Settings Copy From Numeral Table String Table Code Data setting field Copy To Numeral Table String Table Cursor Position Data setting field Guidance Specifies a numeral table entry for the copy source Specifies a character string memory table entry string table for the copy source Specifies copying a constant numeric data Specify the memory table entry number when a numeral table entry or a character string memory table entry string table is specified When code is specified specify a constant here Specifies a numeral table entry for the copy destination Specifies a character string memory table entry string table for the copy destination If this is specified the numeral input field or the character string input field which is the active input objective is se lected for the copy destination Specify the memory table entry number when a numeral table entry or a character string memory table entry
470. lt Operand 1 Operand 2 Operand 3 Operand 4 DK Cancel Help Formula Shows the list of available formula that can either be arithmetic boolean or bit wise operations This will list out combinations of available operands and opera tors i e type of the function Selected Formula Shows the selected mathematical formula for this entry It is updated whenever there is any change in operands or operators Word Size This is a common setting for Result and Operand It is only valid for PLC Address and constant For Numeral Table entry the word size will follow the setting in the Numeral Table This control will be enabled when the selected formula is not None Result This button will be used to specify the result This button will be enabled when the selected formula is not None The following choices are available for result loca tion PLC word address Numeral table entry Operand buttons This buttons will be used to specify operands Operand buttons will be enabled according selection of Formula The following choices are available for oper ands Mathematical Table Section 7 9 Constant value integer only Numeral table entry Direct PLC Address Operators These combo boxes will provide a list of available operators Operator combo boxes will be enabled according selection of Formula Following choices of types of operators will be availabl
471. m so that unusable table entries can be replaced with inputs outputs of a host etc Refer to 7 5 Extended I O Input Table and 7 6 Extended Output Table output table is set When an image code is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the image codes between them Difference New models 0001 to OFFF hexadecimal Conventional models FE20 to FEFF hexadecimal 471 Data Conversion Appendix A Correction of library codes Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action Conventional model Assume the code is X New model The code is X FE1F E Image Table entry has been con verted IW The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYY New model Assume the code is Conventional model The code is Y FE1F if the con verted code is out side the usable range the code is fixed as FE20 W The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYY If the code after conver sion differs from the image code to be used change the code to the correct one Refer to 8 1 Image Editor When a library code is converted between a conventional and a new model con version is executed in the manner shown below d
472. memory table entry number PT Screen Numeral memory input element Bar graph Numeral display 1234 element Read Storage type Numeral data 2345 No of words table Initial value Initialization PC PLC Write 0 POETO Shared comment por NRI Reference Shared Read TA 7 2 1 Operation Procedure Setting Reference A numeral memory table entry is displayed by the operation described below At the property settings for individual elements click on in the table entry number field Select Tools menu bar Table then click the Numeral tab For numeral memory table entries the objective of an operation is specified by clicking on a line The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard or by selection using a drop down list For the operation procedure for Reference Search Change Address Edit gt and Goto Entry refer to 7 1 Common Operation Note that Cannot be used if it is displayed by the operation using an element property For PT models other than NT20S and NT600S numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 255 are used by the clock function and therefore cannot be allo cated to a PC PLC 7 2 2 Related Elements 276 When reading numeral data from a numeral memory table entry Numeral display el
473. meral Display or String Display property page For description on property settings refer to 6 6 Numeral Display and 6 7 Character String Display To check lamp ON status on the editing screen select Simulate ON OFF from the View menu Additionally to view flashing display of lamp attribute select Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool The following kinds of standard lamps are provided EXC ey Rectangle Circle Polygon Sector 195 Lamps Section 6 5 The shape of a lamp can be modified when you select polygon or sector Use the element edit function to modify the lamp shape For details refer to page 110 1 Click on a line of a polygon or a sector while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a green W mark to modify the graphic 3 To add a green mark addition of a vertex position the mouse cursor on the line in a graphic and execute the vertex addition operation right click the mouse Add Node To delete a green mark deletion of a node position the mouse cursor on the green mark to be deleted and execute the vertex deletion operation right click the mouse Remove Node 4 Drag the added green lil mark to modify the shape of the graphic Example Modification of the shape of polygon RS n E H ae E wich i g oso m D e D A standard lamp element ca
474. message and corrective action Conventional models Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model the sampling cycle is set in units other than 0 5 s With a new model the sampling cycle is corrected to 0 5 s unit cycle corrected to the nearest val ue W Sampling cycle less than minimum val ue Minimum value restored W Since there are no prob lems in actual operation correction is not neces sary Sampling cycle not multiple of 5 Value rounded off to near est multiple of 5 Correction related to the 100 value 0 value 100 value of a graph In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the range of numeral that can be input e Difference New models A numeric value of up to 10 digits can be input for a 96 value 481 Data Conversion Appendix A Conventional models Status before Conversion value Status after Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Error Message A numeric value of up to 8 digits can be input for a 96 Corrective Action With a new model a graph for which a value greater than 100000000 or smaller than 10000000 is set for a value is reg istered With a conventional model if a value is outside the allow a
475. mment Pop up Numeric Keys Buzzer Load Local 1 Keyboard System Keypad Color Background 398 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Grid Size Custom Horizontal Spacing 5 Vertical Spacing 5 Display Grid w Snap to Grid 4 Creating the screen numeric keys Creating the 0 key frame 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the outline of the 0 key by dragging the mouse on the data cre ation screen 3 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Frame Shape Standard Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Settings Function Input Key Control Control Key n Light Address PC PLC Address Function Comments Lamp Attrib General Light ute Label 0 refer to the following 1 1 Press edit button to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button 399 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Setting the label of the 0 key 4 Press edit button in the general property of a touch switch and set the label properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged Scale 2x2 Smoothing 4 Click on returns to touch switch property then click on again Adjusting the size and position of the 0 key 5 Specify the 0 key and select Edit
476. model are displayed Specify the system program that is to be installed at the PT from among the displayed programs The extension of a system program file name represents the PT model 487 System Installer Operation Appendix B Extension PT Model 21 NT21 31 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C NT11S NT11 NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C The system program is installed when this button is clicked Installing the System Program The procedure for installing the system program is shown below 488 1 Specify the PT model for which the system program is installed for PT Mod el in the main window Specify the system program to be installed by setting the information at Drive Look in and System File s in the main window Specify the RS 232C port used for the communications with the PT for Com Port Make the PT ready for installation of the system program The operation required at the PT varies depending on the PT model Basi cally execute the processing for deleting the system program then that for setting the PT in the state in which it waits for the reception of the system program For details refer to the manual for your PT Go Click on in the main window The system program is installed While the system program is being installed the progress of the operation is displayed in graph form At the completion of system program installation
477. modification of screen data is needed For how to perform the NT625C 1 correction refer to Correction of image codes page 471 or Correction of library codes page 472 Word configuration of PT control notify area differs between the source and destination PT model Check the program at the host and make corrections For details refer to Appendix A NT20 30 620 compatible mode If a keyboard screen is used the size of the keyboard screen frame needs to be checked adjusted For how to perform the correction refer to Correction related to keyboard screens page 467 NT20S NT21 Word configuration of PT control notify area differs between the source and destination PT model Check the program at the host and make corrections For details refer to Appendix A NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode Some changes will occur on the screens such as in the sizes of touch switches and the positions of objects check all converted screens and correct them as necessary NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C If a keyboard screen is used the size of the keyboard screen frame NT620S NT620C NT631 NT631C with needs to be checked adjusted For how to perform the correction refer NT625C V2 2 to Correction related to keyboard screens page 467 464 Data Conversion Appendix A NT31 NT31C NT31 NT31C Not needed NT631 NT631C with NT631 NT631C with y1 y2 NT31 NT31C NT31 NT31C Not needed NT631 NT631C with NT631 NT631C
478. mps These graphical lamps and touch switches are registered to the Parts Collection Parts Collection for each PT model is provided Using Import Component command desired data can be copied pasted from Parts Collection to the editing screen easily Reference Parts Collection is supplied only for the Support Tool on CD ROM It can be installed by specifying Sample Collection when installing the Support Tool Parts Collection for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S is not supplied Parts Collection is created in MMI format It may take time to read out save MMI file If you install the Parts Collection the Parts Collection List which shows how to use the Parts Collection the list of screen images will be automatically installed as well This list is stored in the Parts Collection List folder inside the Sample collection folder Operation Procedure To use the Parts Collection follow the procedure below Here operations such as copying pasting drag amp drop are not described in de tails Please refer to 8 1 Image Editor 8 2 Library Editor and 6 1 5 Copying Cut ting Pasting and Deleting Elements 1 Open the screen data file to which you want to paste data from Parts Collec tion 2 Select Import Component from the File menu 3 Dialog box to specify the file to be opened is displayed Open the Sample Collection folder in the folder that Support Tool has been installed into Then open the folder of the requ
479. n Character string memory table String table gt Constant ABC ABC Character string display Touch switch copy function Refer to To display a character string in which a special symbol or character is in serted Objects Fixed Display Text Specify the mark or image library code Specification ABC lt IFE20 gt DE Display ABCXDE To insert image data and library data into a string with NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above Tool PT Configuration Set NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode on The range of image library data is as the same as NT30 620 series in NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode Screen display To display a blank screen Specify screen No 0 at the first word in the PT status con trol area Note With NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and 6255 if screen No 0 is set for the touch switch assigned the screen switching function the previous screen is displayed instead of a blank Screen To switch the screen using a touch switch Objects Touch Switch gt Function Switch Screen Create a touch switch for which the screen switching func tion is set Screen Screen No n To switch the displayed screen according to a PC PLC bit status Tools Table Bit Memory Set the bit memory table screen switching function PT PC PLC Screen
480. n created with switch switch screen num screen number be ber 9023 is not sup ing 9023 device ported monitor screen In the case of Bit Memory Table it will be reset based on the following table Default Screen PT Models Number aa Saw NT30 NT30C NT620C 625C NT620S NT20S NT21 NT31 NT31C NT31C V1 NT31C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31 V1 NT31 V1 System Ver 2 1 NT600S NT631 NT631C NT631C V1 NT631C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT631 V1 NT631 V1 System Ver 2 1 NT20 30 620 compatible Mode Reference For the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 NT20 30 620 compatible Mode can be set Using this mode requires less modifi cation of screen data and programs and is easier following conversion of screen data between the NT21 and NT20S and between V2 models and NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C If NT20 30 620 compatible mode is used the functions of the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V2 will differ described below For details of the each function refer to the NT21 31 631 Series Heference Manual 069 1 0 Except for the following points the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V2 functions can be used as they are in NT20 30 620 compatible mode When trying to convert the screen data from NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C or NT625C to NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C with V2 or from the NT20S to the NT21 NT20 30 620 compatible mode will be automaticall
481. n a touch switch is pressed the character string set as the Input Key String is set to the character string input field When a label is set pressing the Copy From Label button copies the label as an Input Key String When the label type is On Off Static the Off label will be used When multiple lines of label have been set only the first line will be used If more than 40 characters are set for a label only the first 40 characters will be set General Settings Light Function Label Interlock Function Input Key String Input Key String 1 Insert Mark The number of characters that can be set for a character string input touch switch and the number of characters that are actually written to a character string input field differ depending on the PT model as shown below Number of Characters Number of Characters PT Model Label Written to Input Field NT30 NT30C Max 40 characters Max 40 characters NT620S NT620C NT625C Max 80 characters Max 40 characters With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C a maximum of 40 characters can be used for string input function regardless of the PT model The procedure for creating a control code input touch switch is shown below 1 Set the control code input function for a touch switch 2 Select the code from the control code list 3 The control code input function allows an arbitrary name for a label of a touch switch Click
482. n display a label lamp name To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute and click on The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Set the prop erty for the label to be displayed General re Insert Mark Position x Y 120 Font Type Standard e Scale 1 1 EquaD Smoothing Attribute Standard x Colour fF NEN Background Transparent For the procedure for setting the properties refer to 6 2 7 Text For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C it is possible to set different colors for lamp ON and lamp OFF by setting Color OFF and Color ON instead of setting label color However background color is fixed to transparent for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Use the copy Vo Comments button in the property dialog to copy the I O comment set to the lamp bit as a label To edit the position of a label use the element edit function For details refer to page 110 1 Click on the label while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 196 Lamps Section 6 5 2 Drag the label to change the display position Label lt gt Tabef 1 2 When displaying a string as a label mark data and image data can be inserted into a string by clicking the Insert Mark Button or the __ Insert Image Button On the NT21 and NT31 631
483. n existing I O comment for either of timer and counter existing comment in Support Tool in I O comment table takes priority and imported I O comment will be stored only for an empty one Example Existing comment in Support Tool in I O comment table Word Bit Comment AA CNTD ENTOG comments in ladder program to be imported Word Bit Comment TIM CNTOOO i Existing comments in Support Tool in comment table after importing PLC Bit Address VO Comment Ref C6 0600 DDD No C0 0002 BBB Yes 00009 ECC fes 0004 CGG No 00000 DDO No 00002 Yes 100003 FFF No 100004 GGG No Existing I O comment Support Tool in comment table Import Procedure SYSMAC Support Software SYSMAC CPT Follow the procedure below to import I O comment from ladder program 1 Select Import I O Comments from the Tools menu Dialog box to specify I O comment is displayed 2 Specify the I O comment file SP1 to be imported and click the Button comment Import is performed While importing progress will be dis played on status bar 301 I O Comment Table Section 7 7 3 When the operation is finished the message Import of I O Comments op eration completed is displayed Then click the Button When an I O comment import was aborted or could not be done because of error the message Failed to import I O comment is disp
484. n method for each PT type 26 Connection to PT 428 Contents 74 Continuous Screen 89 Control Code Input Touch Switches 217 Copy 112 Copy Setting Touch Switch 220 Copy to Image 88 Copying a Screen 66 Copying and pasting elements 111 Creating a New Screen 65 Creating an Element 105 Cross Reference 443 Cursor Moving Touch Switch 221 Cutting and pasting elements 112 D Data Communication Procedure 430 Data logging function 247 Date and Time 438 Decimal 126 Delete 113 Delete 67 Deleting a Screen 67 Deleting an element 113 Direct Access Information 433 Direct Connection Information 444 Disassociate 117 display history 437 display history Screen History function 98 Display Sign 126 Display Type 126 563 Index Displaying and Setting Screen Properties 67 Displaying and Setting the PT configuration 67 Displaying the Print Image Preview 456 Distance 230 Download NT Series Support Tool PT 432 Download NT series Support Tool PT 72 E Edit Object 108 Editing a Table 67 Error Log 71 Extended I O Input table 14 Extended I O input table 15 Extended I O Output table 14 16 Extended Screen 97 F Fixed Display 136 Format 126 Full Screen 85 Full Tiling 81 G Get History Log 437 Global window 95 Graph 224 Group 116 Grouping Elements 116 H Hardware 6 Hexadecimal 126 History 79 History Report 445
485. n of an image library into a character string is possible Conventional models Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model the image li brary is used ina character string Correction of graphic display attributes With a new model the code is dis played like this lt XXxx gt version conforms to the image library code conversion method The code after con E Image Table entry has been con verted E String Table Table Entry XXXX has in valid component code It has been converted from XXXX to YYYY Delete a code in the character string and make corrections so that the character string and image library fixed dis play or image lamp are overlapped for display or grouped allowing the image library to be dis played in the same way as a character string Refer to 6 1 7 Grouping Elements In case of lamp touch Switch label a fixed dis play image goes behind the label and the display will not be as desired In this case use an image lamp instead When a graphic is converted between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed as shown below due to differences in the display attributes Difference New models Conventional models The inverse attribute is not supported for
486. n the data is uploaded to the Support Tool the line itself will be lost This also applies when saving data in mmi format Support Tool cannot import more than 3 000 PLC addresses with comments Therefore if there are more than 3 000 PLC addresses with comments only the addresses will be imported for PLC addresses from entry 3001 onwards F Key Input Notify Table Section 7 8 comment import operation will be finished normally Rejected entries are displayed in the Error Log Check them by selecting Error Log from the View menu and print them 7 8 F Key Input Notify Table This table is only available for NT11S NT11 The F Key Input Notify Table con sists of four entries Each entry is assigned to a function key in the PT device It specifies a PC PLC memory bit to be related to a corresponding function key 7 8 1 Operation Procedure An F Key Input Notify Table is displayed by following the operation described be low e Select Tools menu bar Table F Key Input Notify tab Specify the edit field sa 7 8 2 Description of F Key Input Notify Table PLC Bit Address Comment Edit gt Set Table Entry Number The table entry number field or the lt No gt column is not editable All table entries are listed in ascending order of their entry numbers starting from zero to one less than the maximum number of entries Table Entry No F Key Input 0 F1 F2 F3 F4
487. n the operations indicated below are performed while a filter function is be ing used the filter function will be reset and returned to All Operation Remark File Print When the user performs this opera tion the screen will refresh and then the operation will be performed File Print Preview Edit Paste Edit gt Align Draw Associate With Draw Disassociate DrawSet Order Draw Group DrawUngroup All menu items under Object This includes all creation of screen elements using the menus and tool bar except the object specified on the filter Connect Download When the user performs this opera tion the screen will refresh and then Connect Upload the operation will be performed All the references from the table When the user chooses the refer ence from the table the filter will be reset to ALL 86 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 5 1 5 Switching Screens by Extended I O Input at Each Screen Itis possible to make a setting so that the specified screen is displayed when the input of the extended I O that is connected to the PT is turned ON The following two setting methods are provided to switch the screen by extended I O input Note that this setting is possible only for NT30 and NT30C Common setting for all screens Regardless of the screen presently displayed the specified screen is always displayed when the
488. n the utility bar During the filter function only the dis played element can be edited To align the position of the graphics correctly 1 Select all the graphics to be aligned 2 Edit Align and select the aligning method Quick Reference Operations To change the PC PLC words bits in batch Operation Tools Table Change Address Change the word address and bit numbers in a batch Section 1 Refer to 0 1 To use the created data in other applications 1 Window Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and register the created data 2 Open other applications 3 Window gt Symbol Manager Start the symbol manager and read the registered data File Import Component Start up the second Support Tool Perform copy amp paste operation of graphic between the screen data files Between the files of the same PT model setting only To store large data in a FD File Save or Save As Save data in Memory Map Image File mmi format To use I O comments in ladder program Tools Import I O comments Import I O comments file of ladder program To check the flash display on the screen View Simulate Flash Elements with a flash attribute flashes To check the lamp ON status of lamps touch switches on the screen View Simulate ON OFF Lamp ON status of lamps touch switches is displayed
489. n this order Since screen No 8 is set as an overlapping screen it cannot be displayed inde pendently Note that a child screen can be displayed independently Continuous screens are grouped screen a maximum of eight screens can be displayed in series The base screen where continuous screens are registered is caled the Parent Screen and the registered screens are called Child Screens Screen No 10 MEQUE Screen No 20 1 Screen No 15 1 Screen No 1 i p __ Parent Continuous Continuous Continuous Screen screen 1 Er Screen 2 5 3 When screen 10 is specified screen No 20 which is the first of the contin uous screens is displayed After that screens are displayed in the order of screen No 20 screen No 15 and screen No 1 by the operation of touch switch 1 Since screen No 10 is set for a continuous screen it cannot be displayed inde pendently Continuous screens are switched by pressing touch switches and T to which system keypad is assigned Continuous screens cannot be used for the NT21 NT31 NT31C and NT631 NT631C For these models Switch Screen function of touch switch is recommended to obtain the identical function Window Keyboard Screen is used as a window screen This is a partial screen used to display a keyboard such as a keypad for inputting numeral string or an operational help etc overlapping a displ
490. nce refer to Appendix E Table of Functions of Each PT Model Library data cannot be used for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 1 Library data consisting of fixed display elements is displayed Note By registering a graphic created using multiple fixed display elements as the li brary data the same graphic can be arranged in different positions Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display gt Library Display 155 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Property setting Guidance 156 Selection using the drawing toolbar General Position Indicates the display position of library data The attribute point is at the upper left corner in the library data Size Indicates the size of library data frame size of the library data Reference Type Direct Set the library code directly Code Indicates the code of the library data to be displayed Comment Displays the comment that is set for the library data Indirect Set this item when the value for the specified numeral table entry is treated as library code and referenced indirectly Table No Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced When using the indirect reference set the storage type of allo cated numeral table entry to Binary Also when specifying the library code from a program etc use hexadecimal value since the library table code is in hexadecimal Displays the list for selecting the library data
491. nd End Range boxes 4 Specify the word and the address after the change in the corresponding boxes in the Change To area 5 Set a check mark in the Change Comment check box as desired If a check mark is set in this check box I O comments appended to the ad dresses before the change are also appended to the addresses after the change 6 Click on oe Setting the current object status as the existing value Register the status of the selected object as the existing value of the same kind of object This feature allows the status of the object when it is registered to the screen to be changed eliminating the operation steps to modify the property of the object Note that the PC PLC address and reference memory table entry cannot be registered as the existing value 1 Specify the object to be registered as the existing value select only one ob ject 2 Draw menu bar Use as Default Or select Use as Default from pop up edit menu 133 Common Operation Section 6 1 The current set status of the specified object is registered as the existing val ue of the same kind of object 6 1 11 Relationships between Elements and Memory Tables The relationships between elements and memory tables are shown below When creating an element attend carefully to the memory table address capac ity etc Reading from a memory table O Writing to a memory table Character String Memory Table Bit Memor
492. nd 64 x 64 dots it is necessary to group 16 x 16 dot marks if image data created by the DOS version Support Tool is imported cr 153 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Operation procedure Terminology Property setting Guidance 154 1 The mark data fixed at 16 x 16 dot size is displayed Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Mark Selection using the drawing toolbar al Foreground color MTS General Position Indicates the display position of mark data The attribute point is at the upper left corner in the mark data Code Indicates the character code of the mark data to be displayed Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the Inverse attribute is not supported Scale Specify the character size 1x1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Smoothing Specify whether smoothing processing is executed for mark data Setting is not possible for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color Foreground display color of mark data Background Set the color of background in the mark data display area Change Displays the list for selecting the mark data 1 For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C even under condition that the string has smoothing ON and the mark has inserted it will not work By specifyin
493. nd select Remove Node in the pop up menu An arc is drawn Arcs cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 1 An arc is drawn The radius of an arc can be changed Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display Arc Selection using the drawing toolbar Bl a gt Property setting 138 General Position Center point Indicates the position of the center of an arc Start point Indicates the position of the start point of an arc Fixed Display Section 6 2 End point Indicates the position of the end point of an arc An arc is drawn anti clockwise from the start point to the end point Size Indicates the radius of an arc Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance An arc is defined by the center point the start point and the end point The line type is specified using line style attribute Center point Indicates the position of the center of an arc End point Indicates the position of the end point of an arc The end point can be dragged to the desired position Start point Indicates the position of the start point of an arc When the start point is dragged the start point position and arc radius are changed 6 2 3 Rectangle A rectangle is drawn Rectan
494. ndix C CD ROM click on Biowse _ and specify SETUP EXE in the disk1 folder in the Transfer Utility folder Run MEI Type the name of a program folder or document and gt Windows will open it for you Open fa SETUP Cancel Browse 5 Click on x J The installation started 6 When the setup screen of the NT Transfer Utility is displayed click on The screen for specifying the destination of program installation is dis played 7 Specify the directory for installation In the initial state the directory shown below is set as the destination directo ry Program Files Omron Ntst4 7E Transfer Utility If you want to change the directory click on _ Browse and input the drive and directory If a directory that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the directory is automatically made NT Transfer Utility Setup x Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install NT Transfer Utility in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another fol r Destination Folder C Program FilesXOmronsNTST 4 7EXT ransfer Utility Browse Installshield lt Back E Cancel After specifying the destination click on f The screen for specifying the destination for the start menu is dis played 8 In the start menu of Windows specify
495. ng Input Note Character string input touch switches are always used in combination with character string input elements 6 8 4 Pop up Window Keyboard Function Touch Switch Function Input key Window Keyboard Settings Screen No Specify the window keyboard screen type Local 1 or Local 2 and screen number of the window keyboard screen that is displayed when the touch switch is pressed Window Position Specify the bottom left co ordinate of window to be dis played Action Type Specify how the window keyboard is displayed when the touch switch is pressed Open Close Toggle Replace Local Window Specify the behavior of windows when another window of the same type Local 1 Local 2 is already displayed when open ing a window Guidance The input key window keyboard touch switch is used for displaying the window Keyboard screen overlapping the presently displayed screen base screen This touch switch function can not be used with NT20S and NT600S Settings shown below can be made only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above Local 2 Window Position Replace Local Window Display methods of window keyboard varies depending on PT models NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C below V1 How the window keyboard is displayed is determined by the setting for Action Type Action Type Open Displays the specified window keyboard If another window keyboard is
496. ng a character string display Graph Specifying bar graph I Analogue Meter Specifying an analogue meter I Broken line Graph Specifying a broken line graph Trend Graph Specifying a trend graph Alarm LiSt OOOO Specifying alarm list n MISTO 5 ru Re epe DP Specifying alarm history Screen INOW csetera s Adding a new screen r Delete Deleting a screen Modify Parent Setting continuous overlapping screens Image Saving screen data in image BMP format file Extendedl O Setting an extended I O table setting a table common to all screens GMI x ees Setting grid Properties Setting screen attributes 23 Menu Chart Section 1 5 Tools 4 Connect isset ete Setting memory tables Image Editor Editing image Library Editor Editing library Mark Editor Editing marks Mathematical Table Editing mathematical functions Recipe Table Setting recipe data Import I O comments Importing I O comments from ladder program Change Address Changing PC PLC addresses set for objects and memory tables collectively Validate Checking errors PT Configuration Setting PT type system settings PT Status Control Area PT S
497. ng input field Disable the input PT Screen Numeral memory PC PLC table Input 7 LM Ej Bit 4 a Touch switch control code input or system keypad Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above It is possible to disable the input into a data input object by using Numeral Character string input flag in PT status con trol bits Except NT20S and NT600S To store calculated result in numeral table entry 1 Tools Mathematical Table Click on Set button to specify the formula for calculation and set result to specific Numeral table entry To store calculated result in a specified PLC ad dress 1 Tool Mathematical Table Click on Set button to specify the formula for calculation and set result to specific plc address To store more than one value in a specified PLC address 1 Tools Recipe Table Create Recipe entry 2 Objects Data Input Recipe Create Recipe object referring to the Recipe entry In Settings properties check Show Window Keyboard Screen and set screen number to display keypad Create window screen con taining keypad 417 Quick Reference To modify the size of an image data Operation 1 Specify the area of an image data to be shrunk or ex panded on the image editor 2 Drag one of the green handles W displayed on the range specifying frame t
498. nificant digit e g F0000008 With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Input negative sign in the most significant digit e g 8 Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock Guidance e When a numeral input element is specified a dialog box is displayed to set whether the cursor moving touch switch is automatically created or not 174 Data Input Section 6 4 Note Itis possible to create a touch switch to which a cursor moving key is allocated later Numeral Input x Create Cursor Move Touch Switch Specify whether or not a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created Settings may not be possible for some PT models Each time a numeral input or thumbwheel object is newly created a numeral table entry number where input data is stored is automatically set as 01 2 incrementally table entry number after the last set one will be the next default number A numeral table entry number can be changed by displaying the prop erty setting dialog box It is also possible to change it later A numeral input element itself creates a numeral setting input field It is always used with a control code inputting touch switch control code input function or a system keypad Data is input to a numeral setting input field using the control code input touch switches and the system keypad that are displayed with the numeral setting input field This data input field is created by a numeral input eleme
499. nslated using the translation editor win dow Select the cell in the target language in which the source text is to be trans lated The source text is displayed in the upper pane of the editor translation window You can input the translated text in the lower pane and confirm by clicking the button 4 Repeat the steps for each of the strings to be translated 5 Select Translation Delete operation if you wish to remove any of the tar get languages 6 Use File Generate MMI to save all the languages to their respective MMI files 7 f you wish to perform the translation using an Excel sheet rather than in the utility itself use the Export function in Translation Export to export the strings to XLS format 497 Translation Support Utility Appendix D 8 To read back the translated text in Excel format to the utility use the Import function in Translation Import Application Window The name of each part and the available functions are described below oe Translation Support Utility mul mmi File Translation Edit View Help cm ae Scr V TS W Y Label Scr V Lmp t Y Label Ser Y Txt Close Main abrir ouvrir open Translation Table Set Temperature Translation Editor window Copy Next Previous E b Status Bar Touch Switch 3 1 lly Main Translation Table The M
500. nsparent Transparent White S Dimension 181 221 500 280 White 250 315 Standard 2x2 Yes Alarm Screen Screen numbers and comments are printed or displayed Screen List Filenare SALE E SAMPLE DATA Comments Buzzer Hist KePsd EkGd Colour History Title l Kevbosrd 2 Menu Screen Set Screen 1 Soreen Rb L 1 o 3 o 4 o 10 o Moni tor Soreerr1 o Monitor Soreer 2 o Pop up Nureric Keys o us o Srort Yes No Bleck Yes No Black ves No Bl Yes No Bl Yes No Bl No Bil sk No s Bi Menu Screen Set Screen Al arm Soreen Monitor Soreen 1 Nonitor Soreen 2 447 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 8 Table Report The setting contents of memory tables are printed or displayed Table Report Nuteral Merory Table Fi lenge SMALE SAMPLE DATA 98 12 25 9 29 1 Init Value Word FAC Address IO Camrents 1 000000 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No No No No No No No o o o o o o o o o PH IO I O I MAN IO String Mrrory Table Automat io Manuel Step Reset Line 1 Error Line 2 Error 12 1 9 Validation Report Nun disp 1 Nundisp 2 Trd eraph 1 Trd eraph 2 Bar graph 1 Bar graph 2 Num input 1 Nun input 2 Thurboheel data 1
501. nt 00000 00 After creating touch switches control code input or a system keypad on the same screen includes a keyboard window pressing the key allocated the control code 1 enters 1 in the numeral setting input field If key 2 is then pressed the input field shows 12 Press the key to store the data input into the input field in the numeral memory table The input field and the control code input touch switch are automatically correlated Carry over is processed automatically Control code inputting Numeral setting touch switch input field Touch 1 1 Touch 2 12 Touch 12 5 This is stored in the memory table The procedure for creating a control code input touch switch is shown below 1 Set the control code input function for a touch switch 2 Select the code from the control code list 175 Data Input Section 6 4 176 The control code input function allows an arbitrary name for a label of a touch switch Click the edit Button in the General Tab to display the label input dialog box Input a label Confirmation Touch Switch x General Settings Light Function Function Input Key Control z Control Key Confirm input and focus remains at this field love input focus to the left input field Nove input focus to the right input field
502. nt it is considered invalid and an improper line dialog is displayed Likewise hexadecimal values containing A F are not allowed 317 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Improper Line Dialog Improper Line x Improper Line fig is only for testing 12 4 62H178 231 Recipe data toek porama poram2 porama Original this is only for testing 12 9620 624178 this is only i 0 o I Y 4 b The import operation will overwrite all the current parameter values However if any line in the file is incorrect an improper line dialog will prompt for instructions An improper line is any line of text in the source import file whose data does not comply with the CSV format or whose data is not valid Any incorrect value in a CSV line is shown in red in the Original row as shown in the diagram below The Import row will display the adjusted values You can change the values high lighted in red to the desired ones In the Name field if the string consist of more than the allowed number of charac ters the data will be truncated from the right In the Lock field O means unchecked and 1 means checked Anything other than that is considered invalid This value will be reset to uncheck In the Parameter fields any non numeric data is considered invalid The values will be reset to 0 Example For example if the imported data is this is only for testing and onl
503. number set for the touch switch according ly Library Table Entry has been converted If the converted library code differs from the code of the library data that is to be displayed correct the code Memory access mismatched commu nication aborted Target PLC vendor type or PT type is mis matching between the Support Tool and PT hardware Confirm the Support Tool and PT side PLC vendor and PT type is mismatching Memory utilization has exceeded the XXX bytes limit by YYY bytes Delete several elements Memory utilization has exceeded the XXX bytes limit by YYY bytes Delete several elements and screens More than one Numeral Input Thumb wheel are referring to Numeral Table entry 0 Set different numeral memory table entry numbers at the numeral input and thumb wheel switch properties 544 Notify Area not specified Control Area not specified Set the PC PLC address for the PT sta tus control area PT status notify area after selecting Tools PT Configuration Number of Object name has exceeded the XXX limit by YYY Delete several elements Numeral Input Total number of integer and decimal exceeds limit It is dis carded Create the numeral input field again Cor rect the screen data and the program in the host so that numeric values such as maximum minimum check values and an input value of up to 8 digits will suffice Error Messages Ap
504. o a PT background color for tiling ob ject will be transparent figure b below It will not be transparent It will be transparent red a Support Tool screen b PT screen 149 Fixed Display Section 6 2 f Full Tiling is performed performance of Support Tool may be slower In this case clear the check mark for Full Tiling from the View menu Full Tiling is automatically cancelled when a filter function is performed for a Fixed Display The Color Palette Symbol for which tiling patterns and color combinations are registered is supplied with Support Tool as symbol data Using color palette symbol enables you to register required tiling objects on screen while checking their display status Color palette symbol does not have transparent back ground patterns Border colors are set to White Change the setting as re quired when using it For details refer to 6 10 5 Operating Procedure of Color Palette Symbol 6 2 9 Image Object Data Operation procedure Terminology Note Image data is displayed There are two types of image data One type of image data references the fixed code directly the other type uses indirect reference Indirect reference is a func tion that can change the image data to be displayed by writing the image code to the numeral table just like the indirect reference of numeral string display This enables the animation display by switching the display contents u
505. o modify the size of an image data Section 10 1 Refer to To display a label in multi ple lines Objects Lamp or Touch switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Static or On Off Static is set as the label type NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above To change the contents and the position of a label according to the ON OFF status of the lamp bit 1 Objects Lamp or Touch Switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which On Off Static is set as the label type 2 Turn the PC PLC bit to which the lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen PLC ABC 4 IL ON Bit DEF x If OFF Lamp or touch switch with On Off static label Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above To change the contents of a label according to the values in PLC memory or Touch switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which Numeral Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Objects Lamp or Touch switch Create a lamp or a touch switch for which String Display is set as the label type Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above To insert image data and library data into a string with NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Tool PT Configuration Enable NT20 30 620 Compatible Mode The range of image library data is as the same as NT30 620 series in NT20 30 620 Compatib
506. o select the data to be received The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model Pressing Ctrl key Shift key U executes Application uploading Select the data to be received The data receiving timing is determined according to the type of data se lected to be received Data Type Description Application in file units Data receiving starts immediately Screen If a parent screen is included in the screens selected to be received a dialog box is displayed requesting you to specify whether child screens are to be received with the parent screen To specify multiple screens in batch speci fy the screen numbers in the manner 1 3 5 7 delimiting them with commas and hyphens Set a check mark for the Include Child Screen item if you want to receive the child screens with the parent screen Data receiving starts when is clicked Direct Access Information Data receiving starts immediately System Memory Data receiving starts immediately Table NT20S and NT600S Data receiving starts immediately NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The dialog box is displayed where the information to be received is specified Only the information for which a check mark is set is received Data receiving starts when is clicked Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that the data can be transmitted to the Support Tool If the PT is not in the Transmit mode
507. o the Integer and Decimal fields the following validation will occur When Dec Hex is decimal and Integer or Decimal is set so that their sum is greater than the maximum digits allowed once the cell loses the fo cus the following occurs a If the entered value is less than or equal to the maximum digits allowed it is accepted Any other value is reduced so that their sum is not greater than the maximum digits allowed b Otherwise the entered value is set to the maximum digits allowed and the oth er value is set to O The maximum digits allowed is 5 1 word or 10 2 words Description of Parameter Setting Table Controls No Displays the parameter entry number Parameter Displays the parameter name A string of up to 8 characters can be used and edited Dec Hex Displays the numeral display format either decimal or hexadecimal When this is changed Integer and Decimal will be reset to default 316 Recipe Table Section 7 10 Sign Display sign option Check if you want a sign to be displayed Integer Decimal Displays the precision of the integer decimal digit of the numeral data Limitation on the sum of integer and decimal digits will follow the numeral display restriction Words Defines the memory size for the parameter The address column will be reset when this size is changed PLC Address Displays the starting PLC address used by the parameter Goto Entry This will allow the selection of an entry
508. ocused screen Make sure the screen you want to validate is open and select Validate from the Tools menu Validating the whole screen data application file 1 Right after performing the screen validation mentioned above choose Vali date from the Tools menu again Confirmation dialog box arrives 2 Click the Button Then the validation will start During the validation it is not possible to perform other operation After the validation has been completed the result message arrives Please execute the validation after the creation of screen data application Validation might need a sufficient time period in case the screen data applica tion itself has large size and validation for the whole data has been executed So when Validating for the whole data has been performed the confirmation dialog box appears asking whether you want to perform the validation or not Click the Button to start the validation Displaying the error log and its location 70 Reference If the error check function detects an error a brief error message is displayed and you are requested to confirm the error log The messages contents of the error log are cleared when an element or a screen is operated Therefore if an error is detected display the error log win dow immediately to determine the details of the error Since errors occurring during data conversion in particular may not reoccur if you try to check them lat
509. ogrammable Products Seller shall not be responsible for the user s pro gramming of a programmable Good or any consequence thereof Performance Data Performance data given in this catalog is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and does not constitute a warranty It may represent the result of Seller s test conditions and the user must corre late it to actual application requirements Actual performance is subject to the Seller s Warranty and Limitations of Liability Change in Specifications Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other reasons It is our prac tice to change part numbers when published ratings or features are changed or when significant construction changes are made However some specifica tions of the Good may be changed without any notice When in doubt special part numbers may be assigned to fix or establish key specifications for your application Please consult with your Seller s representative at any time to con firm actual specifications of purchased Good Errors and Omissions The information in this catalog has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate however no responsibility is assumed for clerical typographical or proofreading errors or omissions NT series Support Tool for Windows Ver 4 7 Operation Manual Revised January 2004 Safety Precaution Read the safety precaution carefully and make sure you unders
510. ollowing indicates the equipment necessary for using the Support Tool Hardware Recommended CPU Pentium 100 MHz or faster CPU Personal Computer Use an IBM personal computer or 10096 compatible e Recommended Memory 32 Mbytes minimum Free Area in Hard Disk At least 3 5 Mbytes Operating System Microsoft Windows 95 98 and Windows NT Windows NT is only available with NT series Support Tool Ver 3 3 onward Device necessary for transmitting screen data RS 232C cable The cable used for the Support Tool can be used For cable specifications refer to Appendix J Connecting Cable Specifications Installing the NT Transfer Utility Install the NT Transfer Utility in the personal computer that is to be connected to a PT on site NT Transfer utility operates alone You do not need to pre install the Support Tool in the personal computer 489 NT Transfer Utility Before installing Installation 490 Reference Reference Reference Appendix C To install the NT Transfer Utility in the personal computer without a CD ROM drive make the floppy disks for installation beforehand following the procedure below Equipment to prepare 2 floppy disks 3 5 inch 1 44 Mbytes 2HD formatted Creating installation FD Copy the contents in the following folder of the Support Tool CD ROM to FDs The contents of disk1 folder in Transfer Utility folder To the first installation disk The contents of disk2 fold
511. ommon Operation Section 6 1 jme 5 L3 me 1 0 meme o 9 m meme o 9 w tink Register o 5 O Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor Mitsubishi Fx Possible areas and characters that indicate area types are as follows ewm Y oo Ww c 9 s m 9 9 em 9 L T me o o 9 O Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a word address as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 2 digit number PLC Vendor AB Possible file types and characters are as follows available only for NT31 631 models Character File Type File Slot Element Sub Ele Bit Termi Number Word ment nal Num Number Number B B o c ew al pr o x N T Character File Type Slot Number Word Bit Terminal Address Number Hog qox 2 g Oa o e P O Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a file number as a 3 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed ele ment number or word address as 3 digit number sub element number as 1 digit and bit number as a 2 digit number 130 Common Operation Section 6 1 PLC Vendor GE Po
512. ompatible mode 3 words Other models 3 words 51 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 52 Comments Set a comment concerning the area set as the PT Status Notify Area As a comment a character string of up to 16 characters can be set Window Control Area PC PLC Address Set the type of words at the PC PLC and the first address word number of the area used as the Window Control Area Window Control Area differs depending on the PT model and it occupies the following number of words NT21 and NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 or V2 9 words Other models can not be used Comments Set a comment concerning the area set as the Window Control Area As a comment a character string of up to 16 characters can be set Set memory addresses so that the PT Control Area PT Notify Area and Window Control Area do not overlap PC PLC Address dialog box Clicking on the Set button in the PT Control Area PT Notify Area or Win dow Control Area displays the PC PLC Address dialog box In the PC PLC Address dialog box the PC PLC address of the PT Status Control Area the PT Status Notify Area and the Window Control Area can be set by specifying the area type and address individually The setting made in the PC PLC Address dialog box will be reflected on the setting made in the PC PLC Control Area PT Notify Area or Window Control Area Use the PC PLC Address dialog box only
513. on procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input Recipe Selection using the drawing toolbar ist Terminology Parameters Tare _ ELCHE mes usc aad Touch Switch Page amp Line Scroll Touch Switch Records Description of Recipe Screen Element Components Name Specifies the recipe name 259 Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 260 Number Color Displays parameter names Object A Object C Displays record names 100 4 Displays record numeral data Write Transfer data to PLC Read Transfer data from PLC 2 Scroll 1 page Scroll 1 page down Scroll 1 page left b Scroll 1 page right Scroll 1 line up Scroll 1 line down m Scroll 1 line left Scroll 1 line right No Display recipe number Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Property setting General General Settings Touch Switches Interlock Position m Size 1 1 Width 319 Height 239 Show Parameters itte diris Ce ue et Frame Colour sz Show Serial Number m Message Record Name Colour 4 No Of Parameters 2 m Foreground m Background Display Line Qty 10 9 195 ke z Parameter Name Colour Param Column Width 0 E Ee sf Record Name Width i 2 E Background Scale 1x1 Equal 2 Parameter Data Colour
514. ont Font style Size 1 Displays sample characters Click the Set Font Button and the font selection dialog box is displayed After selecting the font the style and the size click the Button 329 Image Editor Section 8 1 Reference Zooming the edit area Modifying Graphics 330 Modifying the size of an image data Specify the range to be modified using the 1 Button and drag one of green marks handles that enclose the range specifying frame Position the mouse cursor on a green handle and the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below The arrow indicates the same direction as the arrow mark in the handle to WH Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to modify the size of an image data R5 Drag To shrink the size of an image data shrink it by one dragging operation without releasing the button of the mouse If you try to expand the image data that was shrunk once the shape or the color may be modified It is possible to display the edit area at an enlarged size to facilitate drawing fine areas and creating small images To change the display size of the edit area select View in the menu bar then choose Zoom specify the zoom percentage EZ Tools Connect Wh Toolbars gt 3 zm B3 Status Bar Created graphics can be mirrored flipped up and down or right left or turned 90 left or right The mirroring and
515. ont Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing Pal Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black 4 Adjust the position of the Alarm List character string on the data creation screen by dragging it 393 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Creating the alarm list 5 Select Objects menu bar Alarm List Refer to 6 3 7 Alarm List 6 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the alarm list is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner 7 Make the following settings in the dialog box for selecting whether or not the line scroll touch switches and page scroll touch switches are used Create Line Scroll Touch Switch al Create Page Scroll Touch Switch 4 Reference For NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C this dialog box is not displayed For these models create the alarm list and then set whether or not the line page scroll touch switches are created in the property settings 8 Set the properties as shown below Position Size Message Length Display Line Qty 8 Scale 1x2 High Smoothing White Back ON White ground OFF Black Image amp Library Display ImageLib in Color Foreground White Background Black List Settings Start Bit Table Entry 0 No of Bits Referenced 8 9 Adjust the display position of the
516. onventional models New models significant digit is treated as a sign or a numeral With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C however the stored numeric value is converted for dis play according to the decimal hexadecimal designation For Decimal the number of digits entered in decimal fraction part is specified Since integers are stored in the numeral memory table entry a decimal point is appended according to this setting when a numeral is displayed Numeral memory table If setting for Decimal is 2 1234 _4 12 34 If Display Sign is selected a blank is displayed for a positive value and is displayed for a negative value If a negative value is displayed with Display Sign deselected it is displayed as an absolute value For Format number of numeral digits integer part decimal fraction part set a sufficient value according to the contents of the numeral memory table entry The allowable display range for numeric values is shown below Display Method Conventional Models New Models Hexadecimal 00000000 to FFFFFFFFH 00000000 to 7FFFFFFFH Decimal signed 9999999 to 9999999 2147483648 to 2147483647 Decimal unsigned 0 to 99999999 0 to 2147483647 NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Since a negative value is also displayed as a positive val
517. opened If the attribute is checked window pops up when the screen is displayed Win dow does not pop up if the attribute is not selected If the attribute is not set when the standard screen is created it can be selected later to display Specify the screen number of window screen to be displayed as a pop up win dow Window is displayed at the position specified when window keyboard screen was created For details of window keyboard screen refer to 5 4 Window Keyboard Screens System Keypad other than NT11S NT11 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specify whether or not the keypad that is automatically created by the system is used for setting numerals or strings If the attribute is selected the system keypad is used and it is not used if the at tribute is not selected Color Background NT30 NT30C NT31C NT620C NT625C NT631C 5 1 2 Grid Setting 80 Set the background color Specify the grid used for drawing The grid is used as the guide when drawing an element When the grid is se lected dots are set in the specified spacing The grid can be set so that the specified points of an element being drawn are positioned at grid points To display the attributes follow any of the operations indicated below e Attributes of screen property gt a Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Screen menu bar gt sa Horizontal Spacing Vertical
518. opens n Window screen number Window Window PLC T The co ordinates of the window Size and display position of window the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 and above With the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above size of window can be specified freely by 20 dot unit Minimum window size 20 x 20 It is possible to display a window at a different position from where it was created or to move a window However the distance between the position where window was created and where it is displayed have to be always multiple of 20 dot Window Window Display Display a Co ordinates at the bottom Co ordinates at the bottom left corner 20 179 left corner 180 219 Reference Specify the bottom left co ordinate of window when specifying the window posi tion at Window Control Area Checking the display status of a window Whether window is opened or closed will be written to the PT Status of the PT Notify Area Window screen number and window position bottom left co ordinate of current ly displayed screen will be written to Window Control Area Checking these areas from the host enables to know the display status of win dow For details refer to the operation manual of PT 5 5 Extended Screen An extended screen is used by the expansion function of a PT Although an extended
519. option is disabled and set to Static default Refer to Guidance sec tion for details of individual label type description To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute in La bel page and select an option of the available options from the Label Type com bo box Label Type Static m Static On Off Static Numeral Display Display 210 Touch Switches Section 6 8 For non NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models this combo box will have only one choice Static and this will remain disabled Static For this option the On label and the Off label will be same On Off Static For this option On Off labels may be different Numeral Display Displays the numeral value by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible String Display Displays the character string by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible To display the settings for a label click the amp amp Button The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Use the Copy Vo Comments button in the property dialog to copy the I O comment set to the PLC address as a label In case of Notify Bit function comment of notify bit In case of other function comment of lamp bit The property setting dialog for both Static and On Off Static labels is shown be low For Static the label can be set by changing description of Off Label group bo
520. or PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Range Specify the color of trend graph displayed for a negative value Can only be set for PTs with color display Valid only when Display Sign is selected White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Specify this when displaying multiple graphs lines The line properties Line are displayed Delete Line Specify this when deleting a graph line Line Property Specify this when modifying a graph line The line properties Line are displayed Logging Property only for NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specify whether or not the data logging function is used Specify whether or not the background function is used Touch switches for logging 241 Graphs Section 6 9 Next Page Specify whether or not a touch switch used to Forward move the display range in the direction of newer records is used Previous Page Specify whether or not a touch switch used to Rewind move the display range in the direction of older records is used Log Clear Specify whether or not a touch switch used to Clear log clear all logged data is used Touch switches for display function Restart Specify whether or not a touch switch used to restart Continue the halted data sampling is used Stop Specify whether or not a touch switch used to halt data sampling is used Display Clear Specify whether or not a touch
521. or not a label is appended to a standard lamp Specify the type of the Label when Label is selected Following selections will be available for the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 mod els Static Static On Off Numeral Display and String Display For the other PT models this option is disabled and is set to Static default Displays the dialog box used to edit a label This button is en abled only when Label is selected Copy O Comments Copies the I O comment set to the lamp bit as a label To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label attribute in la bel page and select an option of the available options from the Label Type com bo box Label Type Static m Static On Off Static Numeral Display ungDisplav For the non NT21 and NT31 631 V2 models this combo box will have only one choice Static and this will remain disabled Static For this option the On label and the Off label will be same On Off Static For this option On Off labels may be different 193 Lamps Section 6 5 Numeral Display Displays the numeral value by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible String Display Displays the character string by referencing the specified table entry Indirect reference is also possible To display the settings for a label click the Eat Button The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Use the copy VO Comments button
522. or which a check mark is set for the alarm history property are subject to alarm history recording 170 Data Input Section 6 4 6 4 Data Input For inputting numerals and character strings in a PT the following three data in put elements are provided Numeral input A numeric value is input into a numeral setting input field using touch switches to which numerals are allocated and the input from an extended I O connected to a PT Character string input A character string is input to a character string input field using touch switches to which characters are allocated and a bar code reader connected to a PT Thumbwheel switch Touch switches that increase or decrease a numeral are provided at each digit of an input field a numeric value can be input by simply pressing the and touch switches String input is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 6 4 1 Numeral Input You can write numeric data to a numeral memory table entry using touch switches and extended inputs Touch switches must be allocated numerals or the copy function beforehand For extended inputs numerals must be allocated beforehand Input using touch switches control code input function PT Numeral memory table Input field 4 key No 1 50 No 2 i No 3 No 4 Writing No 5 Numeric keys System keypad 1 Create numeric keys using the touch switch control code input function or create a system keypad using the screen prope
523. ord ALC Address 0 Gomrents Yes 1 Mer Num disp 1 Yes Mer Nun disp 2 Ys Mer Trd graph 1 Mer Trd graph 2 Mer Bar graph 1 Mer Bar graph 2 Set Num input 1 Set Num input 2 Set Thurbiheel FO FO fO fO FO fO fO fO fO PP 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 String Mrrory Table 10 Autamtio 1 Minual 444 Report Types Section 12 1 12 1 3 History Report By specifying the display history record file or the alarm history record file sent from a PT the history record data can be printed or displayed The history record that can be read by the Support Tool depends on the PT model as shown below refer to 11 5 Receiving Uploading the History Record NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C Screen display history record NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Screen display history record Alarm history record Screen History Report H 98 05 01 12 51 P 445 Screen History of Occurrence Screen No Month Day Hour Minute Comments 4 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 2 15 19 58 HISTORY TITLE 15
524. ord screen is displayed on the NT11S NT11 PT it forces the user to enter the correct password before bringing up the designated screen The figure above shows a new password screen created It has a text element with password as labeled Next to the text element is the password element that indicates the current password for this password screen In the password prop erty page you can set the password and the designated screen number to be displayed next 100 Programming Console Screen Section 5 12 5 10 Menu Screen A Menu Screen is treated as one of the 250 Standard screens in NT11S NT 11 It Serves as a control screen that maps a numeric key inputs onto a designated screen A maximum of 4 designated screens for each of the numeric keys 1 to 4 can be specified in the menu screen property page 5 11 Print Format Screen The Print Format Screen has the screen number 255 in NT11S NT11 It creates a format for PT printing function mainly for the daily printing You can only use Nu meral and String display to create the format mo ec hd 200 Print Format Scr 5 12 Programming Console Screen The Programming Console Screen is used to access the Programming Console functions built into the PT Displaying the Programming Console Screen during PT operation enables using the Programming Console functions without dis playing the System Menu PT operation however will stop while the Program ming Console Screen is disp
525. ot attempt to duplicate it in any way without the written permission of Seller Notwithstand ing any charges to Buyer for engineering or tooling all engineering and tooling shall remain the exclusive property of Seller All information and materials supplied by Seller to Buyer relating to the Goods are confidential and propri etary and Buyer shall limit distribution thereof to its trusted employees and strictly prevent disclosure to any third party Miscellaneous a Waiver No failure or delay by Seller in exercising any right and no course of dealing between Buyer and Seller shall operate as a waiver of rights by Seller b Assignment Buyer may not assign its rights hereunder without Seller s written consent c Amendment These Terms constitute the entire agreement between Buyer and Seller relating to the Goods and no pro vision may be changed or waived unless in writing signed by the parties d Severability If any provision hereof is rendered ineffective or invalid such provision shall not invalidate any other provision e Setoff Buyer shall have no right to set off any amounts against the amount owing in respect of this invoice f As used herein including means including without limitation Certain Precautions on Specifications and Use Suitability of Use Seller shall not be responsible for conformity with any stan dards codes or regulations which apply to the combination of the Good in the Buyer s appli
526. othing is always ON Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Specify the text color Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Transparent is available for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Specify the color of the background in the text display area Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Select the mark data to be pasted into a character string Select the image data to be pasted into a character string Only for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 com patible mode set m number of characters that can be input displayed is NT11S NT11 20 characters 146 Fixed Display Section 6 2 NT20S NT21 32 characters NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C 40 characters Image data 6 2 8 Tiling NT600S NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C 80 characters To display input two characters without a blank like V It is possible to insert mark data image data into a character string For NT20S NT600S mark data can be used only in strings Note that insertion of image data is possible only for the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 NT20 30 620 compatible mode NT31 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode NT631 C V2 NT20 30 620 compatible mode Although the NT21 NT31 NT31C
527. ouch Switch label to Label lt n gt in lt n gt multiple lt n gt lines With a V2 or earlier model standard lamp touch switch label set to Label Default IW Label Type Static not supported La bel will set to de fault From a 31 631 V2 model application copy Touch Switch Standard Lamp with Label Type set to Numeral Display or String Display and paste in an applica tion for a model ear lier than V2 Label properties are set to default W Label Type Nu meral Display not supported Label will set to default Or W Label Type String Display not supported Label will set to default Correction related to switch screen screen numbers In the conversion of the data between a V2 or later model and a V1 or earlier mod el conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the new device monitor screens available in V2 or later models Difference V2 or later models New device monitor screens available 482 Data Conversion Appendix A Other models Device monitor screens are not supported Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a V2 or later With a model earlier E None model a touch than V2 touch Invalid screen num Switch of switch Switch will be dis ber in Touch Switch Screen type is carded because Switch Scree
528. ouch switch 2 Press the touch switch for which the J key code is allocated by the control code input function to write the data that was copied set into the input field to the specified character string memory table entry string table Reference To copy in the character string memory table entry string table and display a character string by a single key operation without using the J key code use a touch switch copy function and a character string display element Character string memory table Screen String table Display field No 1 Part type A Part type A No 2 7 No 3 Part type A Ert Part type A No 4 Copy No 5 Data Input Section 6 4 Input using a bar code reader PT Character string Screen memory table String table j No 1 Input field ABC A ABC wo2 x pz No 3 No 4 No 5 JA Bar code reader 1 By reading out a bar code using a bar code reader the bar code data can be input to the character string setting input field If automatic confirm is set for bar code reading operation by the memory switch of a PT the read out char acter string is automatically written to a character string memory table entry string table 2 If the setting for bar code reading operation is manual confirm the data set in the input field is
529. ouch switch Make the setting as required Delete the numeral string display objects created on the lamp touch switch 1 It is also possible to use the screen data after conversion without perform ing the above modification Conversion from V2 models to conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after i i i ion Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Actio With a V2 model a According to the See below Create a fixed display lamp touch switch status before con object or a numeral allocated a newly version the label string display object on added function is will be converted to a lamp touch switch registered in the a default status La use Group function if symbol manager bel or OFF label needed so that it see below matches the status be fore conversion Label error messages following conversion from V2 models to conversion model Static Label Type Static not supported Label will be set to Off Description Label Type Static not supported Label will be set to default On Off Static Off label one line Label Type On Off Static not supported Label will be set to Off Description Off label two Label Type On Off Static not supported Label will be set to Default more lines Numeral Display Label Type Numeral Display not supported Label will be set to Default String Display Label Type
530. ouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the char acter string display field is to be displayed at the intended upper left cor ner of string display field 7 Setthe properties as shown below Position Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing al Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Black Reference Indirect Reference Table Entry Length 8 Adjust the position of the character string display field by dragging it Creating the character string display field frame 9 Select Objects menu bar Fixed Display Rectangle 10 On the data creation screen drag the rectangle so that it encloses the character string display field 11 Use the properties as they are 12 Adjust the size and the position of the frame rectangle Creating the Auto button Man button Step button and Reset button Creating the Auto button frame 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the Auto button frame by dragging the mouse at the button dis play position 3 Set the properties as shown below 388 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Position Size Frame Shape Shadow Show ON State Color Frame White ON White OFF Transparent Function Copy Setting Copy From Numeral Table String Table Code
531. pendix J Error Message Corrective Action Object Name value is out of limit Default values restored for 10096 096 and 10096 Correct the screen data or the program at the host so that a value of up to 8 digits will be sufficient for the 100 value 0 value and 100 value in the bar graph Object Name has exceeded the maxi mum number of characters Set the character string within the limit Object name refers to invalid numeral table entry The referenced table entry is reset to entry O Correct the table entry number to a num ber within the valid range If the table entry number is specified in a program correct the program also Object Name Invalid PLC address It is reset to default Reset the word number to a number of up to 4 digits If this PC PLC address is re ferred to from the program it is necessary to correct the program accordingly Object Name inverse attribute not supported Foreground and Background colors interchanged Since foreground color and background color are automatically interchanged no special correction is required display at tribute is set to default standard Overlapping screen has more than 1 child screen containing Thumbwheel Nu meral String Input elements Overlapping screens do not allow the set ting of multiple input functions Correct the child screens Please make sure this parent screen have at least 2 child
532. peration flow shown in 9 2 Operation Flow Reference The explanation in this section assumes that the default value of each object s property is not changed since installation 9 3 1 Starting up the Support Tool At the start up screen of Windows double click the Support Tool icon to start the Support Tool Refer to 3 1 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool 9 3 2 File New Select File in the main menu then select New to create a new file Refer to 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File 9 3 3 Setting the PT Configuration At the PT configuration setting dialog box set the items as shown below Refer to 3 3 1 Creating New Screen Data Application File 358 Creating the Sample Data PT Model Section 9 3 NT620C 625C PLC Vendor OMRON Font Type CP437 Comments SAMPLE DATA Initial Screen 1 Backlight OFF Check mark set 60 min Resume function Check mark not set Number of Numeral Table 512 Table Entries String Table 256 Bit Memory Table 256 Printer for PT Printer ESC P Mode Color History Setting Alarm Use Ring Buffer Check mark set Buzzer Enable On Error Check mark set Key Input set Check mark not After setting the PT configuration items as indicated above click on 9 3 4 Setting Memory Tables Set the memory tables numeral memory tabl
533. ple Modification of the shape of polygon A touch switch element can display a label touch switch name 213 Touch Switches Section 6 8 To display a label set a check mark in the check box of the Label property and click on amp amp The dialog box for setting a label is displayed Set the prop erty for the label to be displayed General Description ELEM Insert Mark Position x 7 Y 40 Font Type Standard Scale 1 1 Equa I Smoothing Attribute Standard Colour OFF Background For the procedure for setting the properties refer to 6 2 7 Text When using the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C it is possible to set different colors for the lamp ON and lamp OFF states With these models however it is not permis sible to insert image data VO Comments button in the property dialog can copy the I O comment set to the PLC address as a label In case of Notify Bit function comment of notify bit In case of other function comment of lamp bit To edit the position of a label use the element edit function For details refer to page 110 1 Click on the label while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag the label to change the display position 3 1 be E od 282 1 2 6 8 1 Input Notify Touch Switch Function Notify bit Settings Address PC PLC Bit Address Specify the PC PLC bit that is d
534. plied with the Support Tool on CD ROM The screen data should be saved in mmi format Section 10 1 Refer to Appendix C To display calculated numeric value 426 Tool H Mathematical Table Define formulas that are used for calculations on PT Only for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above SECTION 11 Data Communications with a PT This section describes the procedure for sending the created and edited screen data to a PT to register them in the PT and also the procedure for reading the data registered in the PT 11 1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure 11 2 11 3 11 4 11 5 11 6 11 1 1 Connection to PT 11 1 2 Available Data Communication Methods by PT Models 11 1 3 Data Communication Procedure Communication Setting at the Support Tool 0 02 eee Sending Downloading the Data Receiving Uploading Data Receiving Uploading the History Record Setting and Reading the Date and Time 428 428 428 430 430 431 434 437 438 427 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure Section 11 1 11 1 Preparation for Data Communications with a PT and Data Communication Procedure 11 1 1 Connection to PT To send receive data between a PT and the NT series Support Tool personal computer conne
535. points are determined by cal culating the percentage value based on the values for 100 0 and 10096 If the 100 value 096 value and 1009 value are set as indicated below ref erence values are displayed in the broken line graph as shown below 100 C Table Entry Value 3000 0 Table Entry a Value 0 100 C Table Entry Value 2000 Value referred to 3000 100 Value referred to 1500 50 Value referred to 0 0 Value referred to 1000 5096 Value referred to 2000 10096 239 Graphs Section 6 9 6 9 4 Trend Graph Operation procedure Terminology If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address 100 Table Ente P Numeral memory C Value fico table 0 ox 1 JENA Table Enty s 2 3000 PIE REESE 3 0 4 5 2000 100 vert C Table Entry fa E Value 100 Changes in the contents of a numeral memory table entry with time are displayed in the form of a trend graph Trend graph Numeral memory table 9 1 The value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into percentage
536. poration in the United States and or other countries PLC names of MELSEC FX A series and FX 2PIF of MELSEC F series are registered trademarks of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation Hewlett Packard HP PCL and Laser Jet are registered trademarks of Hewlett Packard Company TABLE OF CONTENTS SECTION 1 Introduction to the Support Tool 1 1 What Is Support Tool s heres Dre eR UR E rH UM exS 2 1 2 Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool 6 1 3 General Configuration of the Support Tool 0 0 2 eee ee ee eee 6 1 4 Basic Operation Flow skies pb a edu Be eh Shere wae es 20 ES e Menus Chartres Oe chests eus ee 21 1 6 Usable Hardware Combinations 0 00 eee 25 SECTION 2 Setting Up the Support Tool 29 2 1 Before Installing the Software lseeeeeeeeeeee 30 2 2 Installing the Support Tool s IIIA 31 SECTION 3 Support Tool Starting up and Exiting Procedure and File 37 3 1 Starting up and Exiting the Support Tool 0 0 eee eee 38 322 Bser Interface pte a C RS RNC e SE CERES RR ORE SRS LR 39 3 3 Operation of Screen Data Application 44 SECTION 4 Application 63 4 1 What Is the Application Manager
537. possible Reference The type and content of individual transmission differs between the NT20S NT600S and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C For details refer to 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data and 11 4 Receiving Uploading Data In case of NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C screen data file that can be trans mitted is as follows depending on the version of PT hardware and the system pro gram version installed in a PT Use the method below to check the system program version of a PT For details of the operation of a PT refer to the manual of PT 1 Display the system menu on a PT 2 At the upper right position of the system menu screen its version is dis played like Ver 2 10 If you are using NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C it is also possible to check the PLC vendor by selecting Expansion Mode gt Version Display Type of PT NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C Hardware below V1 V1 and above PT model System System System System System System System System selected at program program program program program program program program Support Tool NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C without V1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V1 System Ver 2 1 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C V2 System Ver 3 1 Downloading Uploading is possible Both Batch Transmission and Individ ual Transmission are possible x
538. pper limit of the input data 1 Minimum Specify the lower limit of the input data Display Sign Specify if a sign is displayed for a negative value 1 An input method for a negative value in decimal differs between the following types of PT With NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C Input F to indicate a negative value in the most significant digit e g F0000008 e With NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Input negative sign in the most significant digit e g 8 Interlock Refer to 6 1 12 Interlock Guidance Each time a numeral input or thumbwheel object is newly created a numeral table entry number where input data is stored is automatically set as 01 2 incrementally table entry number after the last set one will be the next default number A numeral table entry number can be changed by displaying the prop erty setting dialog box It is also possible to change it later 189 Data Input Section 6 4 Note 190 The size of a thumbwheel switch can be selected from the following three sizes Small Medium With end plates Without end plate With a thumbwheel switch the data input method can be selected as decimal or hexadecimal Decimal selection Numbers in the range of 0 to 9 can be set at each digit Hexadecimal selection Numbers in the range of 0 to 9 and A to F can be set at each digit For Decimal property specify the position
539. pping Screens When a window keyboard screen is converted conversion is executed as shown below due to differences in number of window keyboard screens that can be dis played at the same time Difference New models NT21 NT31 631 V1 and above Up to three window keyboard screens can be opened at the same time 1 Global Window and 2 Local Win dows With a screen attribute up to two local windows can be specified as pop up windows to be displayed when the screen is opened With a touch switch cursor move and input key win dow keyboard function specification of local win dow 1 or 2 is possible Conventional models New models NT31 631 Only one window keyboard screen can be opened Local window 1 keyboard only 467 Data Conversion Appendix A Status before Conversion With a screen attribute only one window can be spe cified as a pop up window to be displayed when the Screen is opened With a touch switch cursor move and input key win dow keyboard function specification of only local window 1 keyboard is possible Status after Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Error Message Corrective Action With a new model with V1 and above local window 2 is specified for the attribute of touch Switch And the touch switch is reg istered to the sym bol manager Minimum value is restored for window keyboard screen number Correct
540. put function or the character string input function is set Character string input field Character string memory table PC PLC String table Ca ABC ABC Touch switch control code input Touch switch character string input Quick Reference Writing Data to the PC PLC To write a character string To copy between charac ter string memory table entries string table with one touch switch Operation 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set and copy the content of a character string memory table entry string table to another character string memory table entry string table Objects String Display Display the content of the character string memory table entry string table PT Character string display Character string memory table String table ABC In ME ABC Screen Touch switch copy function Section 1 Refer to 0 1 Writing Data to the PC PLC To disable the input ac cording to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit Objects Data Input Numeral String Recipe or Thumbwheel Switch Create a data input object and set Interlock on Turn OFF the PC PLC bit to which the interlock is allocated to disable from inputting Numeral setti
541. r Back ground Color Range Color Range Value Table Entry 1 Can be used only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above 531 Tables of Functions of PT Models Appendix E NT620C NT625C NT631C Ver 4 i NT11S NT600S NT620S ems NT11 Ver 5 Ver 4 Display Label 100 Table Entry 100 Value 096 Table Entry 096 Value 100 Table Entry 100 Value x Display 96 Font Type Display 96 Scale Display 96 Smooth ing Display 96 Fore ground Display 96 Back ground Object 1 Can be used only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 and above 2 Can be used only with NT31 631C System Ver 3 1 and above 532 Appendix F Limits on Numbers of Elements Limits with Conventional Models For NT20S NT30 NT30C NT600S NT620S NT620C and NT625C the limits on the use of elements are indicated below for each PT model Item Limit Numeral Display 50 entries screen String Display NT20S Other models 50 entries screen 32 entries screen Bar Graph 50 entries screen Broken line graph NT20S NT600S Not supported Other models 1 frame screen 256 lines frame Trend Graph NT20S NT600S Not supported Other models 1 frame
542. r are described below NT Series System Installer 0 xl Download System Help Drive Look in ec IBM_PRE CXc i Program Files Go PT Model a Omon NT31C v EINTST Com Port System Program COM1 Y System File s Nt AGPOC 31c 727KB MITSUBISHI Direct Access 2001 04 09 3 1 NT aqf c 31c 812KB OMRON Direct Access E 2001 04 05 3 1 803KB Schneider Modbus Protocol 2001 02 19 3 1 805KB GE Fanuc SNPX 1 1 2001 02 15 3 1 807KB DF1 Full Duplex Protocol 2001 02 15 3 1 x b Drive Specify the drive where the system program is stored Click on and select the drive name from the displayed items The drive in the network can be selected only when it is allocated to My Com puter PT Model Specify the PT model for which the system program is installed Click on and select the drive name from the displayed items Select NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C to use NT31 NT631C NT631 or NT631C Com Port Specify the port used for communications with the PT Click on and select the drive name from the displayed items Selection is possible from COM1 and COM2 Look in Specify the folder where the system program is stored The folder can be opened or closed by double clicking on the folder line Among the folders that are open the folder at the bottom line is selected System File s The system programs in the specified folder and those for the specified PT
543. r moving touch switch is created using the dialog box that is displayed when creating a character string input element The properties for the cursor moving touch switch can be set in the same manner as for a standard touch switch How the properties for a touch switch are set is shown below For details of Settings refer to 6 8 Touch Switches General Settings l Light Function l Position Size X 81 141 Width 99 Height 39 Label Settings Frame Shape Standard Show ON State r Colour Frame v OFF Transparent v General Settings Light Function Function Use Window Keyboard Screen Screen No ou 4 Window Position Bottom Left xp rp Replace Local Window VV Auto Arrange This Touch Switoh is not attached to any data input object e If a check mark is set for Use Window Keyboard Screen in the cursor moving touch switch setting properties it is possible to display the specified window keyboard at the same time as the cursor is moved 185 Data Input Section 6 4 This feature allows appropriate numeric keys for the input field to be displayed It is possible to create a temporary input field in addition to numeric keys With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above all objects other than thumbwheel switch and recipe objects can be created on a window Window Keyboar
544. r of record rows to display on the Screen Param Column Width Sets the width of each parameter column All columns have the same width The actual width in pixels will be in terms of touch switch grid size Record Name Width Sets the width of the record name column All columns have the same width The actual width in pixels will be in terms of touch switch grid size Scale Defines the font size for alphanumeric characters Smoothing Defines whether alphanumeric characters have smoothing effect Frame Colour Defines the frame color of the screen element Record Name Colour Foreground Defines the foreground color of the serial numbers recipe name and record names part of the screen element Background Defines the background color of the serial numbers recipe name and record names part of the screen element Parameter Comment Colour Foreground Defines the foreground color of the recipe name and parameter name part of the screen element Background Defines the background color of the recipe name and parameter name part of the screen element Parameter Data Colour Foreground Defines the foreground color of the parameter data part of the screen element Background Defines the background color of the parameter data part of the screen element Recipe Screen Element Section 6 11 Setting General Settings Touch Switches Interlock Recipe Recipe Entry Edit
545. r printing reports screen data memory table use status etc using a printer 12 2 1 Printer Setting To print a report using a printer it is necessary to set the type of printer and print mode To set the printer information display the Print Setup property by selecting File menu bar Print Setup Edit View Draw Objects Screen Print Setup New Printer eu Sd Name HP LaserJet 5L T Properties Status Default printer Save Cths tatus efault printer Ready Type HP LaserJet 5L JAPAN Where Bravo ford hp Import au Comment Import Component Save As p Paper Orientation Size 210 297 0 Portrait einn Ctri P Source C Landscape ER Conc Printer Set the information of the printer you are going to use Name Specify the printer by selecting the printer name from the list of registered printer names Status Displays the status of the selected printer and the number of files in the queue Type Displays the name of the driver that is set for the selected printer Where Displays the name of the port that is set for the selected printer Comment Displays the comment that is set for the selected printer Paper Set the paper size and the paper tray 449 Printing Reports Section 12 2 Size Set the size of paper to be used Source Set the paper tray to be used
546. racter string input field Press the J key and the set data is stored in the character string memory table string table Reference When there are no string to show string input will be invisible Therefore with Support Tool dotted line frame is displayed in character fore ground color enclosing string input This frame will not be displayed on PT This frame can not be set to off However the dotted line frame can be set to ON and OFF when printing screen image refer to page 425 Note 1 The data set in the input field is not stored in the character string memory table string table until the J key button where the Return key code is set or the ENT key is input if manual confirm is set for the bar code read opera tion set using the PT memory switches If manual confirm is set always input the key or the ENT key at the end of data input To correct the data set in the input field use the CLR key the BS key and the DEL key When a character string input field is moved the touch switch is also moved automatically To modify or move a character string input field and a touch switch independently cancel the check mark set for Auto Arrange in the Settings page of a touch switch property The cursor can also be moved using an arrow symbol key touch switch The cursor moves in the order the character string input elements were created this order can be changed after creating the elements 6
547. rea PC PLC Address D00110 Comments Notify Area Downloading to the PT 1 Place the PT in the transfer mode by the system menu operation 2 Atthe Support Tool select Connect menu bar Download NT series Support Tool gt PT gt Application 402 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Downloading of the screen data starts During screen data download the screen as shown below is displayed Download Application Communication in progress please wait EA 10 For details of the screen data download refer to 4 2 12 Sending Downloading the Data to a PT and 11 3 Sending Downloading the Data 403 SECTION 10 Quick Reference This section enables you to access the information you require easily using what you want to do as the key 10 1 Quick Reference or i Boe ha eA ee oe ca hg ed 406 405 Quick Reference 10 1 Quick Reference Displaying graphics 406 To display a polyline or a broken line Operation Objects Fixed Display Polyline Section 10 1 Refer to To display a rectangle Objects Fixed Display Rectangle To display a triangle poly gon trapezoid or dia mond Objects Fixed Display Polygon To display a circle Objects Fixed Display Circle To display an arc Objects Fixed Display Arc To display a sector Objects Fixed Displ
548. red eres Display Sign in Numeral Display on Integer Decimal Suppression Table the Screen Notticked Check mark not set 12 012 Notticked Check mark not set 12 012 Ticked Check mark not set 12 12 Ticked Check mark not set 12 12 Ticked Check mark set 12 12 Ticked Check mark set 12 12 Notticked Check mark not set 1 000 1 Notticked Check mark not set 12 001 2 Not ticked Check mark set 1 00 1 Not ticked Check mark set 12 01 2 Ticked Check mark set 1 0 1 Ticked Check mark set 1 2 PO PO P O CO 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 1 1 1 1 1 With conventional PT models negative numeric value data is prefixed by F For example 12 is set as F0000012 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C numeric values are stored as signed binary data Specify the PC PLC address used for reading and writing by an element such as memory table entry lamp or touch switch For a numeral or character string memory table entry string table specify the lower address or the least significant address of the word to be referred to For a lamp a touch switch or a bit memory table entry specify the allocated bit number When specifying a bit specify the address of the word and the bit position in the word that is referred to Note that timer TIM and counter CNT cannot be set for bits or character string words Using PLC addr
549. reen Element 224 224 228 235 240 250 250 252 253 257 258 259 259 Common Operation Section 6 1 6 1 Common Operation Operations common to all element creation steps are shown below 6 1 1 Creating an Element Reference To create an element specify the element to be created and click the mouse at the position where the element is to be placed 1 3 Specify an element Menu bar Objects Select the objects to be created Drawing toolbar Click on the icon of the object to be created Click the mouse after placing the mouse cursor at the position where you want to create the specified element The elements shown below can be dragged to change the size of the ele ments instead of clicking the mouse when the element is positioned Circle Arc Sector Polyline Polygon Rectangle Touch switch Standard lamp Bar graph Analogue meter Broken line graph Trend graph After placing the element by clicking or dragging the dialog box for setting the property of the element is automatically displayed The procedure to open the property setting dialog box is omitted In the displayed dialog box set the property of the element Change the size and the shape as required The selection of an element the object to be created is canceled on completion of the drawing of a graphic To draw graphics with the same element continuously you can maintain the ele ment s selected status by pressing the Shi
550. reen to prompt you to input User Information Name and Company is displayed 32 Installing the Support Tool Section 2 2 7 Input your name and company In the initial state the name and company that are registered for the computer are displayed s Support Tool Setup Customer Information Please enter your information Please enter vour name and the name of the company for whom vou work User Name fr SUGITA Company Name OMRON lt Back Cancel After inputting click the Button The screen for specifying the destination of program installation is displayed 8 Select the directory for installation In the initial state the directory shown below is set as the destination directo ry C Program Files Omron NTST4 7E To change the directory click the Browse Button and input the drive and directory If a directory that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the directory is automatically made NT series Support Tool Setup Choose Destination Location Select folder where Setup will install files Setup will install NTST4 7E in the following folder To install to this folder click Next To install to a different folder click Browse and select another folder C Program Fi les 0mron NTST4 7E Browse InstallShield Folder lt Back After specifying the destination click the 77 The program selection s
551. referred to 3000 100 NE Value referred to 1500 5096 Value referred to 0 0 Value referred to 1000 50 EM Value referred to 2000 100 If the 100 value 0 value and 100 value are set using numeral memory table entries as indicated below the percentage value of the reference value is calculated according to the value stored at the specified address Bar graph 100 0 P C Table Enty C Table Enty 8 C Table Entry 2 8 Value e C Value fio E Numeral memory table 0 1 2 3000 3 0 2000 5 6 9 2 Analogue Meter A present value in a numeral memory table entry is displayed in the form of quar ter semi circle circle graph Analogue meter can be used only with the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above Numeral Memory Table value in a numeral memory table entry is converted into a percentage value in the range from 0 to 10096 or from 10096 to 100 and displayed in the form of quarter semicircle circle graph Also scale display is available 228 Graphs Section 6 9 Operation Procedure Terminology Selection using the menu bar Objects Graph Analogue Meter Selection using the drawing toolbar S Foreground Color Property setting General Posi
552. ren Select the parent screen then right click the mouse and select Modify Insert at least 2 child screens for the parent screen Sampling cycle less than the minimum value Minimum value is restored Since there are no problems in actual op eration correction is not necessary Sampling cycle not multiple of 5 Value rounded off to nearest multiple of 5 Since there are no problems in actual op eration correction is not necessary Screen is empty downloading may not be possible Create the data in the empty screen or de lete the empty screen Some objects exceed library size in code FA20 The objects will not be down loaded to PT hardware Reduce the size of elements exceeding the library size using the library editor or set a larger library size String Table Table Entry XXX has invalid component code It has been converted from XXXX to YYYY Delete the code from the character string and make corrections so that an equiva lent display can be obtained by displaying and grouping the character string and the fixed display image library data The associated touch switches of the alarm has been discarded and compo nent touch switches have been created Correct the position of the control touch switches as needed If a control touch switch is not necessary cancel the check for the control touch switch in the alarm list history properties With alarm touch switches for NT31 NT31C NT
553. rently activated To paste the graphic from the bit map file follow the procedure below 1 Select Paste From from the Edit menu The dialog box to specify the file to be read is displayed 2 Specify the folder and file name and click the Open Button Read out graphic is pasted onto the image editor enclosed with a range specifying frame 3 Select Clip from the Edit menu Image data size is changed to the read out image size Instead of the procedure 3 it is also possible to drag the read out image to the required position Edit View Tools Conn Open Unde cz Look in 23 Sample Collection z ek zm lt NT30 NT30C NT620C NT625C NT620S collections 0004 Cut Ctriex a ir ae es 1 NT31C collections 0005 H NT631 NT631C collections 9 0006 Paste Ctrl 0007 Delete Del d 0008 90009 irl Properties Files of type Image documents bmp Cancel Image Editor Section 8 1 Changing the image data size The image data size can be changed in either of the following two ways Changing the size by property setting Changing the size to the range specifying frame size Changing the size by property setting Change the setting for Size in the image editor property settings to change the size of the image data The image data size is changed according to the new setting the reference point of the size change is at the upper left corner of the present size
554. ribute Standard Colour Foreground Background m Cancel Apply Help Font Type Specify the font type Standard A numeric value is displayed in the standard font 16 x 8 dots Half Height numeric value is displayed in the half height font 8 x 8 dots Double Width A numeric value is displayed in the double width font 16 x 16 dots 19 10 Half height Standard Scale Specify the character size Only 1 1 Equal and 2x 1 Wide can be set for NT11S NT11 1x1 Equal A numeric value is displayed at the original size both in height and width 124 Common Operation Section 6 1 Reference 1x2 High numeric value is displayed with doubled height and original width 2x1 Wide A number is displayed at the original height and doubled width 2 2 A numeric value is displayed with doubled height and width 3x3 A numeric value is displayed with threefold height and width 4x4 A numeric value is displayed with fourfold height and width 8x8 A numeric value is displayed with eightfold height and width not possible for NT20S o 10 ia 1H Li x1 1x2 2x1 2x2 3x3 4x4 With the NT21 and with the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above numbers of 2 x 2 or larger scale are automatically displayed in 32 dot font Smoothing Smoothing processing allows jags to be smoothed when a number is displayed in an enlarged scale Selection of this item is possible
555. ring input This frame will not be displayed on PT This frame can not be set to off However the dotted line frame can be set to ON and OFF when printing screen image refer to page 425 Touch Switches Section 6 8 6 8 Touch Switches When a touch switch is pressed any of the nine functions shown below is executed In addition to the general functions such as the input notification notify bit and the screen switching standalone function a variety of functions can be realized including control codes used in combination with a data input element Touch switches cannot be used for NT11S NT11 CAUTION Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergen cy switch applications Notify bit touch switch PT 1 When a touch switch is pressed the specified bit in the PC PLC goes ON OFF Sho ae Set switches reset switches alternate switches and momen Switch gt PC PLC tary switches can be used Specified bit goes ON OFF Screen switching touch switch Seana 1 When a touch switch is pressed the screen is switched to the Screen with the specified screen number Screen 2 Switch Switching to screen 2 Character string input function touch switch Character sting data input field 1 When a touch swi
556. ring table WARNING HIGH TEMP w No 1 Alarm WARNING HIGH TEMP No 2 Image library data Press message 159 Alarm Section 6 3 1 When the bit memory table entry number in the specified range goes ON the alarm list element reads out the alarm message from the character string memory table entry string table and displays the message at the alarm list area in the screen 2 If an operator touches the displayed alarm message the specified image li brary data will arrive Note The alarm message and the image library data to be displayed are specified ac cording to the setting at the bit memory table entry Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Alarm List Selection using the drawing toolbar Related elements and settings Bit memory table entry Tools Table Bit Memory Refer to 7 4 Bit Memory Table Terminology Image library data Background Length Page scroll touch switch Background Line scroll touch switch Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the alarm list The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the alarm list Size Indicates the size of the alarm list Message Length Specify the number of characters of the message to be displayed Max 32 characters NT21 Max 39 characters NT30 NT30C NT3
557. riven ON OFF ac cording to the operation of a touch switch comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that is driven ON OFF according to the operation of a touch switch 214 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Action Type Set Reset Alternative Momentary Set Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number mt Displays the I O comment table Guidance The input notify touch switch drives the specified PC PLC bit ON OFF in re sponse to the pressing of the touch switch The status of the PC PLC bit when the touch switch is pressed is processed as shown below according to the setting for Action Type Set Drives the PC PLC bit ON when the touch switch is pressed The PC PLC bit stays ON even after the touch switch is released Reset Drives the PC PLC bit OFF when the touch switch is pressed The PC PLC bit stays OFF even after the touch switch is released Alternative Drives the PC PLC bit from OFF to ON or from ON to OFF when the touch switch is pressed The PC PLC bit is turned ON when the touch switch is pressed while it is OFF and if the touch switch is pressed when the PC PLC bit is ON the PC PLC bit goes OFF Momentary Drives the PC PLC bit ON when the touch switch is pressed the PC PLC bit remains ON only while the touch switch is being pressed The PC PLC bit goes OFF when the touch switch is released 6 8 2 Switch Screen Touch Switch Function Switch screen Setting
558. rmation message is displayed to overwrite it Operation using the menu 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key T Select Copy from Edit in the menu bar Then select Paste from Edit in the menu bar Input a screen number then click the Button The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated number and in the new screen number field the smallest number of the available screen numbers is displayed If you input an existing screen number confirmation message is displayed to overwrite it 66 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 4 2 5 Deleting a Screen The procedure for deleting a created screen is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Click right button of the mouse on the selected screen icon then choose Delete The message requesting your confirmation is displayed Operation using the menu 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Select Delete from Edit in the menu bar A message requesting your confirmation is displayed 4 2 6 Displaying and Setting the PT configuration The procedure for displaying the PT
559. rogram files and installation in formation Note that the data saved by the NT Transfer Utility is not deleted Starting the uninstaller from the Windows start menu Select Uninstall Transfer Utility in the same folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is stored Example Assuming the short cut to the Support Tool exists in the Start Pro gram Omron NTST4 7E Uninstall Transfer Utility folder Select the uninstaller by the following operation Start Program Omron gt NTST4 7E Uninstall Transfer Utility After the start up of the uninstaller follow the instructions displayed on the screen 492 NT Transfer Utility Appendix C How to use the NT Transfer Utility Reference For connection method of the NT Transfer Utility and PT refer to 11 1 1 Connect ing to PT Start up and exiting the NT Transfer Utility Starting up the NT Transfer Utility To start up the NT Transfer Utility select Program Omron Ntst4 1 NT Transfer Utility starting from the Windows Start button Items to select vary depending on the Program Folder setting specified on installation The NT Transfer Utility starts up and displays the main window shown below RENT Transfer Utility miel gt lt File Configure Help Exiting the NT Transfer Utility You can exit the NT Transfer Utility in any of the methods below Select File Exit e Click on at the upper right area of
560. rom the selection table It will display 0 if the current selected cell is on the Source Language column In addition if the length exceeds the limit the counter will display a negative value in the red color Navigate to previous item in selected column Wrap around will be performed in case it reaches the top of the row Navigate to next item in selected column Wrap around will be performed in case it reaches the end of the row Copy source text into the editor Accept changes Enabled only when contents are changed Status Bar The status bar which you can find at the bottom of the translation window is di vided into four panes Importing 35 Touch Switch 1 48 German The progress is the display op Type Category of the Current line Language of eration status for time consuming object to which and total num the current and intensive operations like sav the selected label text ber of lines active ing target language MMI files item belongs Text Table translation Importing to Excel etc window only Menu Bar The menu bar shows the names of each function The pull down menu com mands provided by the Translation Support Utility and the functions of each menu item are shown below 499 Translation Support Utility File or ALT F File or ALT T Edit or ALT E View or ALT V Help or ALT H Standard Toolbar Appendix D m Open or Ctrl O Open
561. ron app_Enelish mmi Database File O Proeram Files Omron app_Enelish MDB Translation Support Utility Appendix D If you change the source language to the target language the source translation dialog box will become the target translation dialog The path and name of the Output File Name may be modified Translation Settings X Language Character Set Cancel Latin SO 8859 1 CGP437 Help Qutput File C Proeram Files O mron app_German mmi Browse Database File Files amp Omron app English MDB Delete Translation Deletes the selected Language column Select Delete in the Translation Menu of the Application window This option will only be enabled if there is at least one target language translation data present The Delete Translation Dialog box will be displayed You can delete any language except the source language Delete Translation x Language OK 7581 Help Export Use Export to export string data to an MS Excel worksheet xls You can then translate the strings on MS Excel and subsequently import the data to the Translation Support Utility to save it to the MMI files of the translated language Select Export in the Translation Menu of the Application window 503 Translation Support Utility Appendix D The Export Translation Dialog box will be displayed Translations French Cancel Help Russian
562. rsion is executed in the manner shown below due to presence absence of analogue meter Difference New models with V1 and above Analogue meter can be used Conventional models new models below V1 Analogue meter cannot be used Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a new model V1 and above an analogue meter is registered to the symbol manager With a conventional model and a new model below V1 an analogue meter is not dis played Correction related to control touch switch of trend graph 480 Cannot paste ana logue meter It is discarded Create a bar graph or other display element instead of an analogue meter to display con tents that was displayed by an analogue meter In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the trend graph control touch switches Difference New models Conventional models Marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 hexadecimal are used as trend graph control touch switches No trend graph control touch switches codes FFEF to FFF5 may be used as desired Data Conversion Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Appendix A Correc
563. rting Com ponents from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool 1 Select Image Editor from the Tools menu The image table is displayed 2 Select the code of the image data to be cut or copied Select only one code When two or more codes are selected cut copy op eration can not be performed 3 Click the edit Button or right click on the selected code 4 Select Cut or Copy Image data of the selected code will be stored to the clipboard In case of cut confirmation dialog box will be displayed After clicking the a Button cut code will be deleted from the image table Comments mp Code Comp Mode Size _ Comments _ Circle Imp OFF min nofm 00018 8 Coloj2a X24 Circle Imp OFF min Circle Imp red min nofrm 0002 No B Colo24 X 24 S 0004 No B Colo40 X 40 s Imp red S 0004 No Colo40 X40 Circle Imp red S gt 0005 No 8 2 X 32 Circle Imp OFF min frm 005 No 8 32 32 Circle Imp OFF min tm 0006 No 8 Colo 32 X32 Circle Imp yilw min frm 0006 No 8 ColoB2X32 Circle Imp yllv min fim 0007 No 6 Coloj48 X 48 0007 No 8 Colo 48 X 48 0008 No BColo48X48 Circle Imp yllw S frm 0008 No BColo48X48 Circle Imp Sfim 001 Colo40 X 48 pw up red TT gt Circle Imp red nofrm Pasting the image data To paste an image data that is stor
564. rty With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C system keypad is not available Screen 2 Set a numeric value in the numeral setting input field using the numeric keys on the screen 3 Press the touch switch to which the J key code is allocated to write the data set at the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry 171 Data Input Section 6 4 Input using touch switches copy function control code input function PT Numeral Screen memory table Input field 10 key No 1 50 No 2 Set No 3 zem POSTER 50 No 4 e opying the 34 set data 50 1 Copy the preset data numeral memory table entry or constant to the input field using the copy function allocated to a touch switch 2 Press the touch switch to which the J key code is allocated by the control code input function to write the data that was copied set to the input field to the specified numeral memory table entry Reference To copy in the numeral table and display a numeral by a single key operation without using the J key code use a touch switch copy function and a numeral display element Numeral Screen memory table Display field No 1 50 50 No2 No 3 4 gt 50 No 4 Part type A No 5
565. ry code field by selecting image data from the list follow the procedure described below 1 Specify the image library code field where the code is set 2 Click on Change image 3 Specify the image data from the list 4 Click on om The code of the specified image data is displayed in the image library code field Insert Image OK button button Setting the library data To set a library code in the image library code field by selecting library data from the list follow the procedure described below 290 Extended I O Input Table Section 7 5 1 Specify the image library code field where the code is set 2 Click ON Change Library 3 Specify the library data from the list 4 Click on e The code of the specified library data is displayed in the image library code field Insert Library OK button button 7 5 Extended I O Input Table The extended I O input table is used to set functions at the input terminals of an extended I O unit or allocate PC PLC bits to be referred to Extended I O units can be used only with NT30 and NT30C The following functions can be set at extended I O unit input terminals Screen switching PT Extended 1 0 input table Screen 1 Screen switching Screen No 2 Screen 2 External
566. s Screen No Specify the screen number of the screen to which the display is to change when the touch switch is pressed Guidance The switch screen touch switch changes the displayed screen at a PT to the spe cified screen 6 8 3 Character String Input Touch Switch Function Input key String Settings Input Key String Indicates the character string that is input into the charac ter string input field when the touch switch is pressed This control is enabled for the PT models NT21 and NT31 631 only Insert Mark Select the mark data to be pasted into a string Copy from Label Copies the contents of Touch Switch s label to the Input Key String label This will be enabled only if the label type of a Touch Switch is Static or On Off Static Related elements and setting Character string input element Objects Data Input String Refer to 6 4 2 Character String Input 215 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Guidance The character string input touch switch is used for inputting a character string to a character string input field The character string to be input is set for a label in the General attributes It may be a single character or multiple character strings e Numeric keys can be created on the screen by combining character string input touch switches and control code input touch switches For details of character string input elements refer to 6 4 2 Character Stri
567. s the restrictions shown above are not applicable and element data can be converted between any com bination of PT models You cannot convert both the PT Model and PLC Vendor at the same time an error message will be displayed First change either of them and then perform conversion a second time Data Conversion Procedure The data conversion procedure is shown below 1 Open the existing screen data file Open the existing screen data file that is the source for data conversion If the data has been created using the DOS version Support Tool select File menu bar Import in the Support Tool screen to open the file For details of the operation refer to 3 3 2 Reading the Existing Screen Data Application File or 3 3 5 Importing Reading the DOS Version Screen Data Application File 2 Convert the data At the Support Tool select Tools menu bar PT Configuration then se lect the PT Type tab Select the conversion destination PT model or PLC Vendor refer to Dialog Box Settings in the PT configuration on page 45 Click on and the data conversion confirmation message is dis played Click on again to execute data conversion NT11S NT11 cannot convert to other model from PT Configuration If you want please use symbol manager to convert to other model Reference After converting the screen data there might be some messages in the error log This error messages will disappear when th
568. s 01 2 incrementally table entry number after the last set one will be the next default number A 182 Data Input Section 6 4 string table entry number can be changed by displaying the property setting dialog box It is also possible to change it later A character string input element itself creates a character string setting input field It is always used with a control code inputting touch switch control code input function or a system keypad Data is input to a character string setting input field using the control code input touch switches and the system keypad which are displayed with the character string setting input field This data input field is created by a character string input element 34 um E dece The input field and the control code input touch A B l switch are automatically correlated Insertion of a f character string is automatically processed Control code Character string After creating touch switches character inputting touch setting input field string input and control code input or a switch system keypad on the same screen in cludes a pop up window pressing the key A allocated label A enters A the charac Touch AB ter string setting input field If the touch key Il B is then pr he input fiel Touch AB This is stored Pres
569. s 95 98 applications Operation procedure to output to a file is shown below 1 Select File menu bar Print The Report dialog box is displayed page 451 S Set Rich Text Format for Destination To specify the print position of the paper click on Set Margins The Set Margins dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click The Reports dialog box is displayed again 4 To set the header footer click on the Header Footer The Header and Footer dialog box is displayed After setting the items in this dialog box click The Reports dialog box is displayed again 455 Displaying the Print Image Preview Section 12 3 b After completing the setting click on in the Reports dialog box IEEE Edit View Draw Objects Screen New Ctri N Reports Open Close Save Cts Report Type gsm X Save As Destination Rich Text Format z Cancel ipat 4 i Import Cor Di _ Header Footer Print Setup M Header z Print Preview SetMargis I Footer 1 Sample e Exit If you click on in the Reports dialog box the dialog box used to specify the report output file is displayed Specify the file name and click on se then the report is output to a file Save As L2 x Save in C Data s e B Save as type RTF files rtf zl Cancel For details on operations at the Reports dialog
570. s Record Setting Table dialog box permits you to specify the settings for all records of a recipe entry in the recipe table Description of Record Setting Table Controls 314 Start Address Displays the starting PLC address No Displays the record number Recipe Table Section 7 10 Note Record Specifies the name for the record entry A string of up to 12 characters can be used and edited Parameter Title Displays the parameter name i e Param1 and Param2 Default value is Pa ramX where X is a number Up to 8 characters can be used and edited with the column width depending on the parameter values Parameter Displays the numerical data values for each record You can edit data values The Initial value is O Lock Sets the Record as read only Edit Param Displays the parameter setting table Edit Permits clear copy and paste operations on a selected range of record entries An edit popup menu with these 4 options will appear like the menu in the current numeral table entry Clear Copy Paste is only enabled when the clipboard contains record data Goto Entry Allows the selection of an entry by specifying the entry number through a Go to dialog The behavior is same as the numeral table Go to dialog Insert Mark Inserts a mark object in a record or a parameter name Import Import parameter data from a CSV formatted file A file open dialog with a CSV Formatted Recipe Data csv filt
571. s behind the element selected first is displayed Detailed information of the objects are displayed in the list However part of the information may not be displayed for some objects such as lamps touch switches with long label 3 Select the desired element from the list 4 Click on cse View Draw Object Undo Chez Reda Gt piros e ASI Cut Ctx Copy Ctr i 2 Align Delete Del Select All Ctrl Fixed Display Circle Inverse Fixed Display Rectangle Standard Reference The element selected in the Select Object dialog box is also selected on the screen so that you can confirm which element is being selected before you click the button e In the Select Object dialog box object information same as the one displayed on the status bar is shown For details refer to page 42 Batch selection of multiple elements It is possible to select multiple elements collectively Using the Shift key Click an element while holding down the Shift key and it is added to the pre viously selected elements If you click a selected element while holding down the Shift key the element is deselected Her a Shift Specifying a range 107 Common Operation Section 6 1 Drag the mouse cursor so that all elements will be enclosed by the range speci fying frame Range specifying frame Selecting all elements in a screen To select all the elements arranged in a screen use t
572. s being logged updating of the trend graph display automatically restarts Concerning the previous page touch switch and the next page touch switch the one pressed later is lit When the data of trend graph made with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C were converted to the use for NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C if touch switches for controlling trend graph is added after that the Label of the touch switch may not be appeared or some other marks may be appeared This is because the method of using marks of FFEF to FFF5 hexadecimal code differs between NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C and NT31 NT631 NT631C With NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C they are used for touch switches for controlling trend graph Resetting the each mark of FFEF to FFF5 code with mark editor enables the cor rect display For details refer to Correcting the Screen Data Conversion Correc tion related to control touch switch of trend graph in Appendix A 249 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation Section 6 10 6 10 Registering Created Elements Symbol Manager Operation The created graphic data can be collectively registered as an element by using the Symbol Manager The graphic data registered collectively in a group is called symbol or symbol data By registering data that is often used by the Support Tool it is possible to use the same data among multiple screen data Application Since the graphic data for creat
573. s for touch switches or PC PLC address es of notification notify bits are displayed For a touch switch with the notification bit function both PC PLC address of the notification notify bit and lamp setting are displayed upper notify bit lower lamp bit and for touch switches with other functions the PC PLC addresses of lamp settings light function are displayed Description The first character represents the type of element as shown below In case of touch switch the first character for lamp bit is also represented by a T L Lamp T Touch switch The second character represents the area type of PC PLC addresses Example PLC Vendor OMRON Blank CIO area HR area SR area LR area DM Data Memory area EM Current Bank For characters that indicates area type of Mitsu bishi refer to page 129 82 Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Information Displayed on the Screen Description The table entry number of the Numeral or Charac ter String Memory Table String Table that is ref erenced for a numeral display character string display bar graph numeral setting input charac ter string input or thumbwheel switch is dis played The first character represents the type of table as shown below N Numeral memory table S Character String Memory Table String Table Image and library code The code of image and library data of a fixed dis
574. s key can also be used for this operation With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C however a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are independent elements and their position size and label can be changed as required However the touch switch function and the lamp setting should not be changed otherwise the switch and the lamp will fail to function correctly To display the image library data set a check mark in the check box of Display Image Lib in the Property setting dialog box The procedure for editing the image library data display area is shown below 1 Specify only the image library data display area dotted line frame while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key automatically enters to Edit Object mode Green W marks handles are displayed surrounding the image library data display area 2 Specify the display size of the image library data display area and move it as desired Alarm Section 6 3 f the size of the image library data is smaller than the display area the image library data is displayed taking the lower left corner of the display area as the reference Image library data display area Image library data Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C if image library data is larg er than the image library data display area the area exceeding the display area will not be displayed on PT while the whole data is displayed on the
575. s on PT body SG Shield Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable Name Model Remarks Connector XM2D 0901 9 pin Made by OMRON XM2A 0901 9 pin Made by OMRON Connector hood XM2S 0911 9 pin mm pitch screw Made by OMRON 25 0913 9 inch pitch screw Made by OMRON AWG28 x 5P Multi core shielded cable Made by IFVV SB Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB Multi core shielded cable Made by 5P x 28AWG Hitachi Ltd At personal computer use the connector hood which conforms to the standard of the screw at connector part 552 Appendix M Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule ISO 8859 1 Example Hex code is represented by 30 decimal code by 48 and character by 0 30 o 0 48 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 AO BO CO DO EO FO QFIHEHBBE MHHHH 32 48 64 80 112 128 144 160 176 192 208 224 240 tree cream te late JHHHHBHESHHBHHH JHE MEH SMe dH HH Heb EE 7 Space Space HHHHH H HHEHHH Hid JHA Mache gt n CR PUPPI EIEIIIIIIIIIIE 5 ec 553 Appendix M Keycode Tables and Conversion Rule MS DOS CP437 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 AO BO CO DO EO FO 20 e sd a t D e e lt T N io N o t a o a LL 554
576. s screen The base screen where multiple screens are registered is called a parent screen and multi ple screens registered to the parent screen are called child screens Screen No 10 ma oe Screen No 20 11 Screen No 15 4 Screen No 1 Parent Continuous Continuous gt Continuous Screen screen 1 BETTE RI Screen 2 Sm ul Screen 3 When screen No 10 is specified the first continuous screen screen No 20 is displayed Pressing touch switch 4 changes the screen to screen No 15 Pressing the touch switch again changes the screen to screen No 1 Since the screen of screen No 10 is set as the parent screen of continuous screens it cannot be displayed independently Screens set as continuous screens are switched by the pressing of the touch switches 4 and T for which system key functions are allocated In the parent screen setting dialog show page number can be set or reset to indi cate currently activated child screen number out of total pages on the upper right corner of the parent screen Child screens should be created on standard screens in advance Continuous screens are set in the procedure described below 1 Create child screens using standard screens 2 Specify Parent Screen from New command in the Screen menu 3 In the parent screen setting dialog box set a parent screen number child screen numbers and whether or not a page number is displayed
577. s the J Key to store the data input to Ca the input field in the character string memory table memory table string table string table The procedure for creating a character string input touch switch is shown be low NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C 1 Set the character string input function for the touch switch function 2 Set a check mark for the Label property in the Label tab 3 Click the amp amp Button and input the character string as a label A label may be either a character or a character string consisting of multiple characters When a touch switch is pressed the character string set as the label is set to the character string input field When a lamp bit with an I O comment is set pressing the Copy I O Com ments button copies the I O comment as a label Property setting for input key string touch switch Example General Settings Light Function NT31C S x 181 Y 61 Width 99 Height 79 NEUE Dialog box for F babel Lael alll inputting a label Edit Description r Position x 210 9 Iv Frame NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 1 Set the character string input function for the touch switch function 183 Data Input Section 6 4 2 Specify a string to be input for the Input Key String in the Settings tab The string can be either a character or a character string consisting of multi ple characters Whe
578. s the source MMI file m Close Close current Application m Generate MMI or Ctrl S Save current Application in MMI format Exit Exit Utility Recent File List Displays recently opened file list m New or Cirl N Creates a new target translation column m Import Import from Excel m Export Export to Excel m Settings or Ctrl T Opens the translation setting dialog m Delete Deletes the selected translation column This option will only be enabled if there is at least one target language Update Database or Ctrl U Refresh database if time stamp of the source MMI file is different from the source application thereby indicating that the source application has changed Find Replace or Ctrl F Search for and or replace specified text m Edit Translation Item or Ins Move focus to the lower pane of Translation Window for user input m Next Item Navigate to previous item under selected column It will wrap around when it reaches the last row Previous Item Navigate to previous item above se lected column It will wrap around when it reaches the top row m Toolbar Displays or hides toolbar Status Bar Displays or hides status bar Contents Opens the Online Help About Displays the version number The Standard Tool Bar displays the functions that are used most
579. screen No 1 Menu Screen 1 Copy the Menu Screen character string and its frame rectangle on screen No 1 and paste them to screen No 10 2 Adjust the display position of the pasted character string and frame to the desired position Modifying to Monitor Screen 3 Double click the Menu Screen character string and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged If selection of the Menu Screen character string is not easy select Edit menu bar Select Object then click on the fixed display text 4 Adjust the size of the frame rectangle Creating the data display field Numeral Display 1 lhmeral Display i Display Setting the title 1 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the nu meral display field title is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner of text 3 Set the properties as shown below Description Numeral Display 1 Position E Font Type Standard Scale 1x2 High Smoothing _ Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent 4 Adjust the position of Numeral Display 1 on the data creation screen by dragging it Creating the numeral display field 5 Select Objects menu bar Numeral Display Refer to 6 6 Numeral Display 366 Creating the
580. senrerenrssane bnti dene EENE ee 276 7 2 2 Related Elements bep D a gle a ES 276 7 2 3 Description of Numeral Memory Table Fields 277 7 3 Character String Memory Table String Table 281 7 3 1 Operation Procedure 0 0 281 7 322 Related Elements Sho ehh pe whee pea es 282 7 3 3 Description of Character String Memory Table String Table Fields 282 7 3 4 Inserting Mark Data into a Character String 284 7 3 5 Inserting Image Data into a Character String 285 7 3 6 Inserting Library Data into a Character String 286 7 4 Bit Memory Table sie uses de RE Rhe be Mae Re needle 286 7 4 1 Operation Procedure iseset i pt edee 287 7 422 Related Elements ce ee cis ae cee SR be RR eR eal 287 7 4 3 Description of Bit Memory Table Fields 288 7 5 Extended I O Input Table 0 0 0 cece eee 291 7 5 1 Operation Procedure eee ena 292 7 5 2 Description of Extended I O Input Table Fields 293 7 6 Extended I O Output Table 0 eee eee 295 7 6 1 Operation Procedure 0 0 0 ee 296 7 6 2 Description of Extended I O Output Table Fields 296 7 7 J O Comment Table oee yeni
581. ses are changed within the number of specified points from the start ad dress number of points from Start Range to End Range Change Comment Specify whether or not the same I O comment appended to an address before the change is appended to the address after the change To append the same I O comment click on the check box to display a check mark in it Batch address change processing starts when you click on this button How addresses are changed In the operation for changing addresses in bit units processing is executed as suming that bit 15 of a word is immediately followed by bit 0 of the next word Addresses are changed as shown below according to the set search range and the address after the change Common Operation Section 6 1 Example Bit memory table entry Address and Bit set Address and Bit set for End Range for Start Range ClOarea Word 1 ClOarea HR area Word 11 HR area Word 10 Change To Address start address after the change Before change After change 0000010 e i H0001000 0000012 TED H0001002 0000100 H0001006 0000110 H0001100 0000115 H0001105 Operation procedure 1 Tools menu bar Change Address 2 Select the type of word before the change in the Channel box 3 Specify the range of the change by setting addresses at the Start Range a
582. shown below Note that other properties must be left unchanged 367 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Modifying the numeral display field 4 Double click the numeral display field 0 displayed and modify the properties as shown below Note that other properties must be left un changed Reference Indirect Reference Table Entry Integer Decimal 5 Drag the numeral display field 0 to the desired display position 0j Modifying the frame 6 Specify the copied frame rectangle and adjust the size and the position Creating the trend graph Setting the graph 1 Select Objects menu bar Graph Trend Graph Refer to 6 9 4 Trend Graph 2 Atthe trend graph display position drag the mouse to set the trend graph display area as desired 3 Set the general properties as shown below 368 Section 9 3 Creating the Sample Data Position Size Display Type Standard Drawing Width 3 Frame d Display Sign d Direction Sampling Cycle Color 1 For NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C sampling cycle of trend graph must be multiple of 5 minimum 5 Setting the graph line 4 Double click the Settings tab and click on Line Broperty Set the line 1 properties as shown below b Click on to close the line 1 properties 6 Click on Table Entry 2 Displ
583. sing a simple program For details of the PT models that can use indirect reference refer to Appendix D Table of Functions of Each PT Model Image data cannot be used for NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S 1 Image data created in the bit map BMP format is displayed Bit map data created by general application software running on Windows can be displayed Selection using the menu bar Objects Fixed Display gt Image Display Selection using the drawing toolbar Background color Foreground color 150 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Property setting Guidance General Position Indicates the display position of image data The reference point is at the upper left corner in the image ele ment Size Indicates the size of image data Reference Type Direct Set the image code directly Code Indicates the code number of the image data to be displayed Mode Indicates the color mode of the image data 2 colors 8 colors Comment Displays the comment that is set for the image data Indirect Set this item when the value for the specified numeral table entry is treated as image code and referenced indirectly Table No Specify the numeral table entry to be referenced When using the indirect reference set the storage type of allo cated numeral table entry to Binary Also when specifying the image code from a program etc use hexadecimal value since the image table code is in
584. sing the drawing toolbar Terminology Foreground color Background color Property setting General Position Indicates the position of the tiling element Pattern Specify the tiling pattern Color Foreground Specify the foreground color of the tiling area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the tiling area Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Border Specify the color of the border of tiling area Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Guidance mark handle is displayed when a tiling element is selected Property setting and tiling element can be edited by selecting the mark han dle 148 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Reference Tiling is possible for the elements shown below Rectangle circle polygon sector In addition to the elements indicated above tiling is possible for an area en closed by a solid line of the same color border color If an element such as a lamp that changes status is specified for the border however tiling may not be executed correctly due to changes in color and display To check the tiling status select View menu bar then select Full Tiling The result of tiling will be displayed in this s
585. soft Excel format Import Text Shows the converted text i e with correct converted key code if necessary length limit etc However if you modify the text and then press Import or Import All validation is performed Start Use the Start button to activate the import operation for a language Stop Use the Stop Button to terminate the import operation for that language Next Use the Next Button to move down by one item Previous Use the Previous Button to move up by one item Import All Use the Import All Button to import all items for the selected column Import Use the Import Button to import the selected item The sequence of events for the import operation is given below The term Translation Data Item may be used interchangeably with a Record in the notes below and both mean the same thing First of all the Language Selection list box is enabled so the user can choose from the list of languages available for Import By default all items are selected Press the Start button to initiate the whole import operation Once Start is clicked the Language list box is disabled and the Import operation starts The multi line edit boxes are populated with relevant data The status box displays the start of the import operation by displaying Importing lt Language gt At this stage you have the following options Import translation data for all the languages in the Language list box i e accept all translation
586. some kinds of graphic All graphics have inverse attributes Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model the inverse attribute is specified for a graphic for which the inverse at tribute is not sup ported by a new model With a new model the foreground color and background col or are automatically interchanged Object Name inverse attribute not supported Fore ground and back ground colors inter changed Since the foreground col or and background color are automatically inter changed no special correction is required display attribute is set to default standard Correction of smoothing processing for marks If a mark is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of mark smoothing processing between them Difference New models Smoothing processing is not possible for marks Conventional models Smoothing processing is possible for marks Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Status before Conversion Corrective Action Error Message With a conventional Correction not neces sary With a new model smoothing proces sing is invalid for a mark Fixed Display Mark model smoothing proce
587. sor to the position where the library data is to be inserted 2 Click the Insert Library Button The Library Table dialog box is displayed 3 Specify the library data in the list of library data 4 Click the Button The code of the specified library data is inserted to the Value field The library data itself is not displayed here Numeral Sting O Comments Bit Memory Nomeal Stree vo Comments B OK button Screen Screen abedefghi jk abcdetgifghi 3k 7 Library data Reference By clicking the we Button a library code with no data can be added to the list You can first insert this library code to a string and then register the library data afterward Use the library editor to create library data 7 4 Bit Memory Table A bit memory table is an area that operates like flags to execute preset functions when the specified bits go ON A bit memory table entry provides a screen switching function that switches the screen when the specified PC PLC bit goes ON and an alarm function that dis plays the alarm message or logs the event of alarm occurrence if the specified PC PLC bit goes ON By allocating a bit memory table entry to a PC PLC bit data can be shared be tween a PC PLC and a PT 286 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 Screen switching function Alarm function Bit memory table Screen switching S
588. specification for 10096 is valid only when Display Sign is selected Guidance The following types of broken line graph element are provided 096 to 10096 display Direction Right Direction Up N Higher digit word Higher digit word Direction Left Direction Down Ea Higher digit word lt Higher digit word 10096 to 100 display Direction Right Direction Up Higher digit word Et MA Na Direction Left Direction Down Ah rn o Higher digit word lt Higher digit word e Which of 0 to 100 and 7100 to 100 broken line graphs is displayed should be selected with the setting for Display Sign in the general properties Check mark set 100 to 100 display Check mark not set 0 to 100 display If you specify a broken line graph element only one broken line is displayed To modify the settings for the broken line select the broken line to be modified and click on tine Property The line properties are displayed 237 Graphs Section 6 9 To add a broken line click on A broken line is added and the line properties are displayed for the added broken line A maximum of 256 broken lines can be created To delete a broken line select the broken line to be deleted with the Settings and click on Delete tine_ The specified broken line is deleted The following four types of line are provided for displaying broken line graphs Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot d
589. splay Polygon Selection using the drawing toolbar Node Attribute point 142 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Property setting General Attribute Specify the display attribute Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the line color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Position Indicates the position of Attribute Point reference point Guidance A polygon is created on the basis of a triangle After a triangle is drawn vertices are added in the edit operation to create a polygon Vertices can be set at up to 255 positions To add a vertex follow the steps shown below 1 Draw a polygon Td 2 After locating the cursor at a position where a vertex is to be added right click the mouse and select Add Node in the pop up menu Cut Copy Paste Delete Bring To Front Send To Back u Select Object Properties Use As Default 3 Drag the vertex to the desired position a a Row To remove a vertex locate the cursor on the vertex to be removed and select Remove Node in the pop up menu Cursor aS N s el m i Remove Node executed BH 143 Fixed Display Section 6 2 Totile a rectangle paste a tiling element into it Polygon gt a 5 El Tiling element E For details of tiling elements refer to 6 2 8
590. sses When converting the data between different direct accesses it may be neces sary to change PLC addresses since corresponding PLC is changed In this manual conversion between OMRON and MEMLINK is described Difference OMRON Various words are available such as CIO area and data memory area Available word addresses differ depending on the PLC that is used MEMLINK Only memory link area PT memory can be used Available word addresses 0000 9999 465 Data Conversion Appendix A Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion With OMRON data The PLC address is PLC address XXX Reset the area to an area other than reset of YYY is invalid It memory link area PT the CIO area is set is reset to default memory If this PC PLC address is re ferred to from the pro gram it is necessary to correct the program ac cordingly Refer to 6 1 10 Setting Proper ties Error Message Corrective Action Correcting the PC PLC addresses On data conversion between PT models When converting the data of the entire screen data file screen data for use with new models cannot be converted to screen data for use with conventional mod els However if the data of a new model is registered for the screen of a conven tional model using the symbol manager the following points must be taken into consideration due to differences in the usable P
591. ssible memory types and characters are as follows available only for NT31 631 models RC mue p x ewm fo 1 essaie rii 5 a fra Outpt 5 T Skate stash smemsmus Sc vems p _ 8 eras tober bata o O Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a Data Offset as a 4 digit number leading zeros can be suppressed PLC Vendor Siemens Possible memory types and characters are as follows available only for NT31 631 V1 models character Tyne Bt _ qme x 08 b 0 qe o6 Low qme 6 P fe of WW FO a pma p p aw oua 9 D me jo X O Specification possible x Specification not possible Input a address number as a 4 digit 5 digit in case of DB number leading zeros can be suppressed and a bit number as a 1 digit number Batch address change operation Reference The set PC PLC addresses can be changed into the required addresses in a batch Since the change source can be specified as a range processing such as changing the address range DM 1000 to DM 01499 to the address range DM 1800 to DM 2299 is possible at one time Shifting in bit units is also possible Batch address change operation is possible using either the dialog box displayed by Tools Ta
592. ssing Edit button Creating the Image Lamp Image Lamp Image Lamp Creating the title 1 Select Objects menu bar gt Fixed Display Text 2 Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the label Image Lamp is to be displayed 3 Set the properties as shown below 374 Description Image Lamp Position Font Type Standard Scale 2x2 Smoothing al Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 4 Adjust the position of Image Lamp character string on the data creation screen by dragging it Setting the image library lamp S 6 Select Objects menu bar Lamp Image Click the mouse with the mouse cursor set at the position where the image library lamp is to be displayed at the intended upper left corner Set a check mark in the check box of the Code for OFF in General and cl ick on Change Image In the image table specify FE20 and click on Set a check mark in the check box of the Code for ON in General and cl ick on Change Image 10 In the image table specify FE21 and click on ex 11 Set the lamp function properties as shown below PC PLC Bit Address Comment L0000005 Image Lamp Light Address Functions 12 Adjust the display position o
593. ssing is speci fied for a mark smoothing not sup ported It is ignored 473 Data Conversion Appendix A Correction related to the system keypad If a system keypad is converted between a conventional and a new model con version is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the handling of the system keypad between them Difference New models The system keypad cannot be set Conventional models Numeric keys can be created automatically by setting a system keypad Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model a system keypad is automati cally created with a numeral setting in put screen With a new model the system keypad is invalid and thus not displayed Either copy the regis tered keyboard from the symbol manager refer to 6 10 Registering Created Elements Sym bol Manager Opera tion or create numeric keys that are equivalent to a system keypad us ing the touch switch control code input func tion refer to 6 8 5 Con trol Code Input Touch Switches Correction of alarm list history touch switches If a touch switch for alarm list history is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to differ ences in the handling of this kind of touch switch between them
594. string memory table entry string table is allocated to the host the Initial setting for the character string memory table entry string table and whether or not the resume function is used Initial setting Allocation to Initial Host setting Used Not Used Allocated Initialized Existing character string Initial value of the char valid memory table string acter string memory table table content retained entry string table also for the word in the also for the word in the host host Content of the character string memory table entry string table if it is initialized by System Menu opera tion also for the word in the host Not initialized Content of a word in the host invalid Not allocated Invalid Existing character string Initial value of the char memory table string acter string memory table table content retained entry string table Content of the character string memory table entry string table if it is initialized by System Menu opera tion Words Specify the number of words in the PC PLC to be allocated to the character string memory table entry string table The number of allocated words varies depending on the PT model as shown be low PT Model No of Allocated Words NT11S NT11 1 to 10 words 1 to 20 characters NT20S 1 to 16 words 1 to 32 characters NT30 NT30S NT21 NT31 NT31C NT600S 1 to 20 words 1 to 40 characters N
595. string table is specified If Cursor Position is selected this field is invalid Displays the list of numeral character string memory table entries string table copy setting touch switch is used in the cases shown below Copying the data in a memory table entry to another memory table entry Character string memory table String table part1 SET SET 2 e parti FEN part2 SET 3 gt part3 By setting the data in several memory table entries beforehand the necessary data can be copied to the work area as needed Note Data copying from a memory table entry to a memory table entry is possible only between memory table entries of the same type from numeral memory table entry to numeral memory table entry and from character string memory table entry string table to character string memory table entry string table 220 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Note Copying a constant to a numeral memory table entry setting Numeral memory table 1234 SETS a RAM UT 1234 SET 2 2345 sET 3 3456 By setting a constant in the data setting field of a copy function touch switch be forehand the necessary data can be copied to a numeral memory table entry as desired Copying a constant to a string table entry is not possible Copying data or
596. system assemblies or any other materials or substances or environments Any advice recommendations or information given orally or in writing are not to be construed as an amendment or addition to the above warranty Damage Limits Etc SELLER SHALL NOT BE LIABLE FOR SPECIAL INDI RECT OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES LOSS OF PROFITS OR PRODUC TION OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE GOODS WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED IN CONTRACT WARRANTY NEGLIGENCE OR STRICT LIABILITY Further in no event shall liability of Seller exceed the individual price of the Good on which liability is asserted Indemnities Buyer shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller its affiliates and its employees from and against all liabilities losses claims costs and expenses including attorney s fees and expenses related to any claim inves tigation litigation or proceeding whether or not Seller is a party which arises or is alleged to arise from Buyer s acts or omissions under these Terms or in any way with respect to the Goods Without limiting the foregoing Buyer at its own expense shall indemnify and hold harmless Seller and defend or settle any action brought against Seller to the extent that it is based on a claim that any Good made to Buyer specifications infringed intellectual property rights of another party Property Confidentiality The intellectual property embodied in the Goods is the exclusive property of Seller and its affiliates and Buyer shall n
597. t Corrective Action With a new model a numeral setting input field or a thumbwheel switch for which a numeric value exceeding 8 digits is input is reg istered to the sym bol manager With a conventional model a numeral setting input field or a thumbwheel switch of greater than 8 digits is dis carded E Numeral Input Total number of in teger and decimal exceeds limit It is discarded Create a new numeral setting input field thumbwheel switch Correct the screen data or the program in the host so that a constant of up to 8 digits suffices Refer to 6 4 1 Numeral Input 6 4 3 Thumb wheel Switch Data Conversion Appendix A Correction related the reference memory table entires for numeral input In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences in the numeral memory table entries that can be referred to Difference New models For numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 253 reference is not possible for numeral input thumbwheel switch Conventional models For numeral memory table entries No 247 to No 253 reference is possible for numeral input thumb wheel switch Display only Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Status after Conversion Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional mode
598. t Object Select Object Properties Properties Use As Default Use As Default Reference If multiple data creation screens are displayed an element can be moved over to another data creation screen by dragging it If Ctrl key is being pressed while dragging an element will be copied instead of being moved f two Support Tools are started up copy cut paste and drag amp drop operations can be performed between Support Tools For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Cutting and pasting elements The procedure for cutting an arranged element to the clip board then pasting it at another position in the screen is shown below The attributes set to the cut source element are also copied The pasted element is displayed at the upper left section of the screen The element cut to the clip board can be used for pasting as many times as de sired until another element is copied or cut Pasting a cut element to another screen is also possible 1 Select an element Selection of multiple elements collectively is possible 2 Select Edit menu bar then select Cut This operation is also possible using the pop up edit menu display the pop up edit menu by right clicking the mouse on the element and select Cut in the menu 3 Select Edit menu bar then select Paste 112 Common Operation Section 6 1 This operation is
599. t is displayed with a frame ON Specify the color that represents the lamp touch switch ON status OFF Specify the color that represents the lamp touch switch OFF status If a lamp or a touch switch is set to flash the ON color and OFF color are dis played alternately Lamp touch Lamp touch Lamp touch switch ON switch OFF switch flashing lt ON color 1 Frame ON color eTa OFF color Na OFF color Frame Setting graph colors When setting the color for bar graphs analogue meters broken line graphs and trend graphs specification is possible for the frame of the graph range range line foreground and scale Frame Specify the color of the graph frame Range Specify the background color of the graph to be applied when the numeric value is positive For a bar graph the bar is displayed in the specified color in the pos itive range Range Specify the background color of the graph to be applied when the numeric value is negative For a bar graph the bar is displayed in the specified color in the negative range Line Color Foreground color Specify the line color of broken line graphs and trend graphs and foreground color for present value of analogue meters 121 Common Operation Section 6 1 Scale Color X Specify the scale color of analogue meters Bar graph Analogue meter 100 0 100 0 For
600. t it can be read by other software 1 Select Connect menu bar Get History Log The menu is displayed allowing you to select the history record to be re ceived The items that can be selected vary according to the PT model 2 Select the history record to be received The dialog box for setting the file name for saving the history record is dis played 3 Set the folder and file name where the history record is to be saved and click Receiving of the history record data starts 4 Place the PT in the Transmit mode so that it can send the data to the Support Tool If the PT is not in the Transmit mode a timeout error occurs in about 10 se conds at the Support Tool In this case set the PT in the Transmit mode and click on 3 in the error message dialog box 5 While the data is sent from the PT the progress of data transmission is indi cated by a bar graph To abort the operation click on Cancel 437 Setting and Reading the Date and Time Section 11 6 11 6 Setting and Reading the Date and Time It is possible to set the date and time to PT from the Support Tool or to read the date and time from the PT to display them at the Support Tool Operation procedure 438 The functions that can be used are indicated below PT Model Setting Date Time Reading Date Time NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S x x NT21 x1 NT30 NT30C 6205 NT620C NT625C 9 NT31 NT31C NT63
601. t library data from the different screen data file Fixed display elements can be copied cut pasted from the editing screen Copy cut paste operation of library data is possible Preview display of selected library data is available on the library table 8 2 1 Operating the Library Table Library table dialog is configured as follows Comments Edit gt Goto Code Preview L New Delete Close Help Edit Deletes cuts copies or pastes the library data of the selected code refer to pages 335 to 336 It is possible to select two or more codes and delete them collectively Goto Code Code number can be specified and the cursor moves to the code The operation method is same as the Goto Entry of memory table refer to 7 1 6 Table Display Operation by Spec ifying the Table Entry Number Preview Switches the preview window ON and OFF refer to page 335 Open Displays the editing screen library editor of the selected code P343 When two or more codes are selected edit screens of all the selected codes can be opened oollectively New Registers the new library code to the library table refer to page 337 Only the registered library codes are listed on the library table Press this button when you are going to create new library data Delete Deletes the library data of the selected code When two or more codes are selected they can be
602. ta The procedure for specifying the incremental amount is explained in 7 1 5 Copy Increment Setting Operation 1 Click on the table entry number of the copy source table 2 Click on gw right click the table entry number 3 Select Copy To Next 7 1 5 Copy Increment Setting Operation To set the incremental amount used for the copy to next operation follow the steps described below Copy Increment Setting dialog box Value Increment By Specify the incremental amount for the initial value data in a numeral memory table entry The amount set here is valid only for the numeral memory table Value Input Type Specify whether the incremental amount is specified in decimal or hexadecimal The specified item is identified by the indication of a radio button The setting is valid only for the numeral memory table Address Increment By Specify the incremental amount for table addresses Address Format Specify whether the incremental amount is specified in decimal or hexadecimal The specified item is identified by the indication of a radio button Operation procedure 1 Click on Copy Settings 2 Specify the incremental amount to be added to the initial value in the numer al memory table at Value Increment By 3 Specify whether the notation of the incremental amount set above is decimal or hexadecimal at Value Input Type 4 Specify the table address increm
603. tand it before using the programmable terminal so that you can use it safely and correctly N CAUTION Do not use input functions such as PT touch switches for applications where danger to human life or serious property damage is possible or for emergency switch applications N CAUTION Carefully check the operation of all screen data and host programs before using them If incorrect the system may operate unpredictably Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably N CAUTION When the numeral values entered are confirmed upper lower limits are checked Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably When transferring the data in units of screens if there are changes in memory tables and or direct access transfer such data along with the screen data Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably OMRON Product References All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual The word Unit is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product The abbreviation Ch which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products often means word and is abbreviated Wd in documentation in this sense The abbreviation PC means Programmable Controller and is not used as an abbreviation for anything else Numeral settings Each Support Tool screen displays options for functions to be set The example to the left shows su
604. tate a check mark is set for Full Tiling in the display menu When Full Tiling is selected again then return to the previous lll mark han dle Selection of Full Tiling Selection of Full Tiling u To execute tiling specify the same color for the border of area and the border of a tiling element Tiling is executed in the enclosed area for which the same color as the color set for the border is set If an enclosed area with the same color does not exist the tiling extends outside the enclosed area e f the tiling area is not an enclosed area the tiling spills out the specified area The patterns are displayed in the actual status of tiling according to the setting for the foreground and background color The available tiling patterns are shown below oooo 2 Transparent background can be set for tiling objects However it will not be dis played as transparent on the Support Tool When the screen is downloaded to a PT it will be displayed as transparent 1 Double click the screen to display the screen property 2 Set Red for screen background color 3 Register a tiling object on the screen and set Transparent for the back ground and for Pattern 4 Check ON the View Full Tiling command 5 Tiling will be executed and the screen background color red will be invisible figure a below 6 When this screen data is downloaded t
605. tatus Notify Area settings changing PT type data conversion r Comms Setting eee eee eens Setting methods for communicating with the PT I Download Application Sending downloading all screen data to the PT Support Tool to PT Supp E Sree eu ILL Ine Ew Sending downloading screen data to the PT in units of screens Direct Access Information Sending downloading direct connection setting data to the PT I System Memory Sending downloading system memory data to the PT Table vnc ie mee Sending downloading memory table data to the PT Upload Application Reading uploading all screen data from the PT PT to Support Tool PR SCION esse pened cease Reading uploading screen data to the PT in units from the screen Direct Access Information Reading uploading direct connection setting data from the PT I System Memory Reading uploading system memory data to the PT Reading uploading memory table data to the PT Get History Log 4 Screen History Reading uploading screen history data from the PT Alarm History Reading uploading alarm history data from the PT pate and TIME y ee ee eR meo eee ho ud Reading setting uploading downloading clock data in the PT Window
606. tch Notify Bit Datato OFF by operation at the the PT PLC Create the touch switch for which the notify input function is set PT Screen PC PLC H 9 Bit address Writing To write a numeric value 1 Objects Data Input Numeral Data to To input a numeric value Create the numeral setting input field the PC using numeric keys or a PLC system keyboard 2 Objects Touch Switch Input Key Control Create a touch switch or Screen Properties System Keypad Ticked Display the system keypad Note With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C reg ister the system keypad from the symbol manager since the system keypad cannot be used for these models Numeral setting input field PT Screen Numeral memory table 123 Input aE 2 Touch switch control code input or system keypad To write a numeric value 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting E ss 2 using Create a touch switch for which the copy function is set a IBUCIVS WIES and copy a constant to a numeral memory table entry us ing this touch switch Objects Numeral Display Display the contents in the copy destination numeral memory table entry PT Numeral memory table Constant gt 123 1
607. tch Thumbwheel Color Frame Specify the color of thumbwheel switch frame Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Foreground Specify the foreground color of the thumbwheel switch Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the thumbwheel switch Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Character Color Foreground Specify the foreground color of the numeric value displayed in the thumbwheel switch 188 Data Input Section 6 4 Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Background Specify the background color of the numeric value displayed in the thumbwheel switch Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Settings Table Entry Specify the table entry number of the numeral memory table entry where input data is stored Display Type Decimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in decimal Hexadecimal Specify this item to display the input numeric value in hexade cimal Format Integer Specify the number of digits of the integer part of the input data Decimal Specify the number of digits of the decimal fraction part of the input data Limit Maximum Specify the u
608. tch is pressed the label of the touch switch by character string input element is stored in the character string input field ABO Note This type of touch switch is always used in combination with a character string input element Pop up window keyboard function touch switch Standard screen base screen 1 When a touch switch OPEN is pressed the specified win Window Keyboard screen dow keyboard screen is displayed on the screen presently displayed 2 When a touch switch CLOSE is pressed the window key board screen presently displayed closes OPEN CLOSE 207 Touch Switches Section 6 8 Control code input touch switch Input key Control 1 When a touch switch is pressed the input processing of the control code is executed as shown below Input field 0 to 9 numeral keys 1234 Data setting at the numeral setting input field CLR key Clearing the numeral setting input field Standard screen 4 key Confirmation Arrow symbol key Switching among continuous overlapping screens Moving the cursor in the numeral setting input field Numeric keys can be created using the touch switches assigned these control codes Note These touch switches are always used with a numeral char acter string input element The element to be use
609. te preview images Or those symbols can be reused without preview as they are Copying Image Library Mark with contents Main Differences of V4 7 When copying Image Library Mark objects NTST EV4 6 will copy them with contents and registered them in each table If the same code is already used in the table the NTST will display a dialog to show the next unused number as a substitute The functionality does not recursively apply to references in the Image Library Mark object For example when copying a library object that refers to library entry and the content of the entry contains text with a mark reference then the corresponding mark content will be ignored It also does not apply to when Screens are copied in Application Manager for pasting into a second instance of NTST NT11 V1 New System Program Support Supported Windows OS Starting with NTST EV4 7 the NTST supports creating screen data for the NT11 V1 NT11S data can be converted to NT11 V1 data Refer to NT11 User s Manual for details Starting with NTST EVA 7 the NTST supports Windows Me 2000 Professional Edition and Xp Pro Home Edition Automatically Adjusted Screen Size when Editing Starts In response to the high resolution of personal computers recently the screen size is now automatically enlarged when editing screens General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 1 2 Equipment Necessary for Using the Support Tool The following indic
610. ted for NT20S and NT600S since smoothing proces sing is always executed for characters larger than 2 x 2 with these models PT PT Without smoothing With smoothing Attribute This is an attribute to determine how text is displayed Attributes to be displayed here vary somewhat according to the PT model 123 Common Operation Section 6 1 Standard Text is displayed in the specified color and specified back ground color Inverse Text and background are displayed in colors that are the re verse of the specified colors Flash Text flashes when displayed If this attribute is selected stan dard display and no display background color only are alter nately displayed Inverse Flash Text is displayed by alternating standard display and inverse display Reference To check Flash and Inverse Flash display on the screen specify Simulate Flash from the View menu For details refer to 5 1 3 Changing the Display Method on the Support Tool Settings for numeral display Set the size and display attributes for displaying numeric values of numeral table data and percentage values in a graph in the manner shown below The following shows only the common settings for numeral display As an example the properties of a numeral display are described below Numeral Input x General Settings Position 3 R 80 780 Font Type Standarc Scale 1x1 Equa I Smoothing Att
611. terlocks Mathematical table NT30 620 compatible mode Multiple line labels ON OFF state labels Numeral display string display labels Device monitor screens Contrast amp brightness adjustment screens Addition of NT Translation Support Utility The Translation Support Utility is software that helps in translating a language to another supported language For details refer to Appendix D NT Translation Support Utility comments importing from TAB delimited text file For details refer to 7 7 4 Importing Comments from Tab delimited Text Files Centering the Labels of Lamp and Touch Switches Only horizontal direction could be centered in previous versions In this version the labels of lamp touch switches can be centered in both vertical and horizontal directions For details refer to 6 1 9 Centering the Label of Lamp and Touch Switch The Data input string in a string input function touch switch Only for NT31 631 The label was used for the input data string in previous versions In this version a different string from the label can be specified as the data input string For details refer to 6 8 3 Character String Input Touch Switch Launch the system installer It is possible to launch the system installer from Connect Launch System In staller in the menu bar Addition of NT30 620 series system programs The system programs for NT30 620 are included What Is Support Tool Section 1 1
612. than general real property and income taxes including any interest or penalties thereon imposed directly or indirectly on Seller or required to be collected directly or indirectly by Seller for the manufacture production sale delivery importation consumption or use of the Goods sold hereunder including customs duties and sales excise use turnover and license taxes shall be charged to and remitted by Buyer to Seller Financial If the financial position of Buyer at any time becomes unsatisfactory to Seller Seller reserves the right to stop shipments or require satisfactory security or payment in advance If Buyer fails to make payment or otherwise comply with these Terms or any related agreement Seller may without liability and in addition to other remedies cancel any unshipped portion of Goods sold hereunder and stop any Goods in transit until Buyer pays all amounts includ ing amounts payable hereunder whether or not then due which are owing to it by Buyer Buyer shall in any event remain liable for all unpaid accounts Cancellation Etc Orders are not subject to rescheduling or cancellation unless Buyer indemnifies Seller fully against all costs or expenses arising in connection therewith Force Majeure Seller shall not be liable for any delay or failure in delivery resulting from causes beyond its control including earthquakes fires floods strikes or other labor disputes shortage of labor or materials accidents to mach
613. the sx Button in the faea Tab to display the label input dialog box Input a label Touch Switch x General Settings Light Function Eunetion Input Key Control E Confirmation Control Key Confirm input and focus remains at this field hag Move input focus to the left input field imd Move input focus to the right input field CA Confirm input and focus remains at this field innut farus ta the nravious order innit field Cancel amp The number of characters that can be input depends on the setting for the Length property Even if multiple input fields are arranged in a screen input is possible only for one character string input field Therefore it is necessary to create a touch switch cursor moving touch switch or arrow symbol touch switches that is used to select the desired character string input field If the Focus Frame 184 Data Input Section 6 4 property is selected a cursor moving touch switch is automatically created overlapping a character string input field The cursor moves when the input field is pressed Data input field icu Cursor moving No 1 touch switch ABC If the touch switch on input field No 2 is pressed the No 2 input field becomes the objective field for data input The input character string is stored in input field No 2 A curso
614. the folder where the short cut to the Support Tool is created In the initial state the following folder is selected Start Program Omron Nist4 7E If you want to change the folder select the desired folder from the Existing 491 NT Transfer Utility Appendix C Folders or directly input the folder name If a folder that does not exist in the hard disk is specified the specified folder is automatically made NT series Support Tool Setup x Select Program Folder Please select a program folder y Setup will add program icons to the Program Folder listed below TM may type a new folder name or select one from the existing folders list Program Folders Existing Folders OMRON a Online Services Silicon Motion Control Programs StartUp lt Back Cancel After specifying the folder click on Installation of the specified programs is implemented files are copied During program installation the progress of the processing is indicated as a percentage 9 After the completion of installation the folder specified in step 8 is dis played along with the installation completion message Click on ex J then click on in the setup completion screen Installation operation is completed Uninstall An uninstaller uninstall software is supplied with the NT Transfer Utility If you want to remove the NT Transfer Utility from your personal computer run the uninstaller to delete the NT Transfer Utility p
615. thumbwheel and recipe in the NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above Setting of interlock bit that is used for controlling whether the corresponding object is enabled disabled Logging Data Logging property only for trend graph Setting of the data logging function that records data The following explains only the basic settings For details of the properties of each element refer to 6 2 Fixed Display and later sections Displaying the Property Setting Dialog Box Setting the line type Setting the display color The property setting dialog box is displayed in any of the following operations Using the mouse 1 1 Double click an element Using the mouse 2 1 Right click the mouse on an element then select Properties Using the menu 1 Specify the element for which you want to display properties specify only one element 2 Select Draw menu bar then select Properties Using the keyboard 1 Specify the element for which you want to display properties specify only one element 2 Press the Enter key while holding down the Alt key You can select the type of line for polylines broken line graphs and trend graphs Solid Dash Dot dash Dot dot dash The line type is set in a property of individual elements Set the display color of elements Color setting is possible with NT30C NT31C NT620C NT625C and NT631C The colors that can be used are shown below White black blue red magenta
616. tial Screen 1 History Setting I Backlight OFF z Alarm Use Ring Buffer E Resume Function Number of Table Entries Buzzer Numeral Table 512 Enable ays zj String Table 256 Key Input Bit Memory Table 256 e Printer for PT d Printer Esc P v Mode colour Initial Screen Screen number which appears when the wrong data is set for PT Control Area when PT is driven is selected from the drop down list box or keyboard input Nor mally this setting is invalid since PT References PT Control Area for the initial screen number when starting up The screen numbers of existing screen data are listed in the list box or only screen number 1 is displayed if the screen data is newly created Backlight OFF Specify whether or not the backlight OFF function is used This option can be selected from System of PT Configuration in the Support Tool The Backlight OFF function automatically turns OFF the screen if the Support Tool is not operated for a certain time period to save the backlight of PT If the check box is clicked to utilize the option the time interval will be displayed in the drop down list box to set it For details of the PT models that can use this function refer to Appendix E Sys tem Setting PT Configuration Resume Function The resume function holds the data in the table when the PT is OFF or reset For details of the PT models that can use this f
617. tializ ing screens Password screens Menu screens Print format screens System Screen display Screens OFF Extended screens Occurrence his tory screens Frequency his tory screens Programming Console screens Device monitor screens Return to the previous screen 1 Available only from the system menu A screen number is not assigned 2 Only with NT31 631 V2 and above Standard screens Standard screens are the fundamental screens of the PT Specify a Standard Screen to create a screen 17 General Configuration of the Support Tool Section 1 3 Overlapping screens Continuous screens Window Keyboard Screen 18 Overlapping screens are grouped screens a maximum of eight screens can be overlapped to display information on one screen The screen used as the base for the overlapping screens is called the Parent Screen and the multiple standard screens that configure the overlapping screen are called Child Screens This is an Screen No 10 Screen No 8 Parent Screen Crild Soreen This is an example ofan example of an Overlapping p Screen No 7 Screen Child Screen Overlapping Screen No 25 Screen Child Screen When screen No 8 parent screen is specified objects set on the individual child screens screens No 10 No 7 No 25 are displayed i
618. ting General Position Size Frame Shape 192 Indicates the display position of a standard lamp The reference point is at the upper left corner of the standard lamp Indicates the size of a standard lamp Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a standard lamp Displays shapes of a standard lamp Selectable shapes vary according to the PT model Rectangle Circle Polygon Sector Lamps Section 6 5 Color Frame Specify the color of a lamp frame if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow ON Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a standard lamp when the PC PLC bit is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transparent white black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Light Functions Address PC PLC Bit Address Specify the bit at the PC PLC that drives a standard lamp ON OFF Comment Specify the comment of the PC PLC bit that drives a standard lamp ON OFF Lamp Attribute ON Type Specify the status of a standard lamp that is ON Edit Label Label Label Type Edit Light Flash Displays the dialog box used to specify the bit number Displays an I O comment table entry Specify whether
619. ting and setting the data using the application manager is shown below Two types of operations mouse operation and menu operation are possible For the menu driven operation short cut keys keys used to call menu functions may be used instead of displaying the menu 4 2 1 Opening a Data Creation Screen The procedure for opening a creation screen of existing data is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 1 Double click the screen icon Operation using the mouse 2 1 Click the right mouse button at the screen icon 2 Select Open 4 2 2 Closing a Creation Screen The procedure for closing a creation screen is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 Click the x Button at the upper right corner in the data creation screen 4 2 3 Creating a New Screen The procedure for opening a new screen is shown below Operation using the mouse 1 Click the screen data box icon or right click the mouse on the screen data box classified by group 2 Select New choose the screen type then click the Button 3 Input a screen number and a comment then click the Button Operation using the menu 1 Select New from Screen in the menu bar 2 Select the screen type then click the Button 65 Operating the Application Manager Section 4 2 3 Input a screen number and a comment then click the Button 4 2 4 Copying a Screen The procedure for copying an existing screen to another screen number is shown belo
620. tion Displaying image editor 1 Tools menu bar Image Editor The image table is displayed 2 Select the code in the image table and click the Open Button or double click the mouse on the objective code line When two or more codes are selected edit screens editors of all the se lected codes can be opened collectively Image table dialog automatically closes at the same time the editor is displayed Image Editor Section 8 1 Changing the property To change the property of the code that is already registered open the editor and then display the property dialog of the image data as follows 0001 Image Object General Code 0001 Size Width a Height 52 Mode 8 Colours v IV Compression Double click with tool Double click Comments or Right click Properties or Right click Properties Code Displays the code of the selected image data Size Displays the size of the specified image data To change the size set the desired size Mode Displays the specified color mode To change the color mode set the desired color mode Compression Specify the data format for storing the created image data Check mark set Image data is compressed for storage Check mark not set Image data is stored without being compressed Although the data size of the created image data will be reduced if the data is compressed the spee
621. tion Indicates the display position of an analogue meter The reference point is at the upper left corner of the analogue me ter It changes depending on the other settings Size Center Point Indicates the center point of an arc or a circle of the analogue me ter It is not affected by other settings Radius Indicates the meter radius of an analogue meter It is not affected by other settings Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a meter of an analogue meter When the frame display is ON select the frame color Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow Display Sign Specify whether or not a display area for negative value is dis played Direction Specify the positive direction of an analogue meter Clockwise Anti Clockwise Meter Shape Shape Specify the shape of an analogue meter Quarter Semi Circle Circle Direction Specify the display direction of an analogue meter Right Left lt Up T Down 1 Type Specify the display type of an analogue meter Needle Fill Width Rate Specify the meter width of an analogue meter in format re garding the radius as 100 10 to 100 by 1 229 Graphs Section 6 9 Scale Display Scale Specify whether or not a scale is displayed for an analogue me ter Distance Specify the scale position in format regarding the radius as 100 0 to 150 by 1 Scale Length Spec
622. tion Ctrl Shift Click The mark in the list indicates that you should press the key after the mark while you press the Ctrl key etc 549 Appendix L Connecting Cable Specifications Tool Interface Connector Specifications The following specifications apply to the connection between the PT and the sup port tool personal computer Signal Name Meaning FG Frame ground SD Send data RD Receive data RS Request to send CS Clear to send SG Signal ground Assembly of Connecting Cables Wiring should be carried out in one of the following ways depending on the type of RS 232C connector 25 pin Connector SD RD Personal computer RS CS SG RS Connector for peripheral FG O O O lcs devices on PT body Use the following recommended products when making the connecting cable Model Remarks Connector XM2D 2501 25 pin Made by OMRON 2 0901 9 Made by OMRON Connector hood 25 2511 25 Made by OMRON 25 0911 9 Made by OMRON Cable AWG28 x 5P IFVV SB Multi core shielded cable Made by Fujikura Ltd CO MA VV SB 5P x 28AWG Multi core shielded cable Made by Hitachi Ltd 551 Connecting Cable Specifications Appendix L 9 pin Connector RD SD Personal computer RS Connector for peripheral cs device
623. tive Action With a conventional model the marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 are used as desired With a new model marks registered with a conventional model are used as trend graph control touch switches 1 Copy marks regis tered under codes FFEF to FFF5 to other codes with the mark editor Reset the marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 with the mark editor By resetting the marks are re turned to the trend graph control marks For the elements that use the conven tional marks of codes FFEF to FFF5 correct the codes to those as signed after copying the marks Refer to 8 3 Mark Editor With a conventional model the marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 are not used With a new model nothing is registered for codes FFEF to FFF5 and trend graph control touch Switches are not displayed Reset the marks with codes FFEF to FFF5 with the mark editor The marks of these codes are recognized as the trend graph control marks Refer to 8 3 Mark Editor Correction related to sampling cycles of trend graphs In the conversion of the data between a conventional and a new model conver sion is executed in the manner shown below due to differences of trend graph sampling cycles Difference New models The sampling cycle can be set in the range from 0 5 to 6553 5 s in units of 0 5 s The sampling cycle can be set in the range from 0 1 to 6553 5 s in units of 0 1 s Conversion result error
624. tive element The specified screen automatically opens to display the specified element 7 1 2 Search Operation You can locate specific data set in a table by using the search operation and also replace the found data with the desired data Search and replacement is possible for the following types of memory table Note that search and replacement is always executed toward the end of a table This means that search and replacement is possible within the range from the present cursor position in the table to the last entry number in the table Table Type Objective of Search Replacement Numeral memory table PC PLC address initial value Character string memory table PC PLC address contents of initial val String table ue Bit memory table PC PLC address image library code 267 Common Operation Section 7 1 Table Type Objective of Search Replacement comment table comment Extended I O input table Extended I O output table Description of search dialog box 268 PC PLC address Initial value or contents of initial value Search By inital vare 2 Search By Find What Close Find What Close Address Set Replace All ii Replace All Replace With TER Replace PLC Address 456 pe Help Image library code
625. to display the parent Screen of continuous Screens correct the pro gram so that the first child screen is dis played Refer to 6 8 2 Switch Screen Touch Switch The screen no XXXX was a Con tinuous Parent Screen that is not supported in this model It is dis carded With conventional models continuous Screens are used The parent screen of the continuous Screens is deleted Correction related to overlapping screens When overlapping screens are converted an error may occur due to differences in the handling of overlapping screens between conventional models and new models Difference New models A window keyboard screen cannot be specified as a child screen Conventional models A window keyboard screen can be specified as a child screen Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model a window keyboard screen is specified as a child screen With a new model a window keyboard Screen is removed from child screens The screen no XXX of type YYY is not Supported as a child so the parent child association is discarded Correction related to number of window keyboard screens to be opened Copy the contents of the window keyboard Screen to a standard screen and specify that standard screen as a child screen Refer to 5 3 2 Overla
626. tor windows are possible For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Library data Display of library data BE a a a EB n Oo E mN a l Hu a o A circle extending outside the specifying frame is not displayed as library data Changing the size and display position of the library data specifying frame To change the size of the library data specifying frame or move it follow the steps described below 339 Library Editor Section 8 2 Setting grids Quitting the library editor 340 1 Click the mouse on the dotted lines of the library data specifying frame Green W handles are displayed enclosing the library data specifying frame The size can be changed by dragging a handle Position the mouse cursor on a green handle the shape of the mouse cursor changes as shown below Drag the mouse cursor in the indicated direction to change the size of the library data specifying frame Right left handle Up down handle Apex handle bh UE b a The library data specifying frame can be moved by dragging the frame at positions other than handles When handles are displayed position the mouse cursor on the dotted line at a position where there is no handle the shape of mouse cursor changes as shown below Drag the mouse The frame moves as it is dr
627. touch switch are a part of an alarm list element Therefore they cannot be modified as a touch switch They can be moved only when the alarm list is modified For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the line and page scroll touch switch can be moved by clicking the desired touch switch while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key Edit Object from the Edit menu or pop up menu and Ins key can also be used for this operation With NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C however a line scroll touch switch and a page scroll touch switch are independent elements and their position size and label can be changed as required However the touch switch function and the lamp setting should not be changed otherwise the switch and the lamp will fail to function correctly on PT e To display the image library data set a check mark in the check box of Display Image Lib in the Property setting dialog box The procedure for editing the image library data display area is shown below 1 Specify only the image library data display area dotted line frame while holding down the Shift key and Ctrl key automatically enters to Edit Object mode Green W marks handles are displayed surrounding the image library data display area There are other methods to enter Edit Object mode For details refer to Specifying an element consisting of multiple elements on page 108 2 Specify the display size of the image library data display area
628. touch switch with On Off static label Only for the NT21 NT31 631 V2 and above Tools Library Editor Create the text to be displayed as the library data Objects Lamp Image Display the created data Turn the PC PLC bit to which the image library lamp is allocated ON OFF PT Screen If ON DEF 4 If OFF Image display Objects String display Display the contents of a character string memory table entry string table Change the contents of the word allocated to the char acter string memory table entry string table with the PC PLC ladder program PT PC PLC Screen Character string memory table String table Ladder program e ABC DEF I DEF DEF i Character string display 408 Quick Reference Displaying character strings texts To switch the displayed character string according to the touch switch input Section 10 1 Operation 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Copy Setting Copy text to a character string memory table entry string table using a touch switch for which the copy function is set 2 Objects String Display Display the contents of the copy destination character string memory table entry string table PT Scree
629. tsubishi A eoo 0000 to 9984 decimal 0000 to 9984 decimal 0000 to 2700 hexadecimal 306 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 270F hexadecimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal Mitsubishi Fx 0000 to 9984 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 0000 to 9999 decimal 7 9 4 Description of Mathematical Table Fields Mathematical Table x Description The mathematical function specified in each table entry will be displayed here in the form of a simple equation Left hand side of the equation will indicate the location where result calculated from the function will be stored Right hand side will display the actual function Set Invokes Set Mathematical Dialog Box Specify mathematical function using this dialog box Edit Refer to 7 1 Common Operation 307 Mathematical Table Section 7 9 Goto Entry Refer to 7 1 Common Operation Move Invokes Move To dialog box Move a table entry using this dialog box Close Closes the dialog box Help Shows help information related to mathematical table 7 9 5 Description of Set Mathematical Formula Fields 308 This dialog box is to be used to define a new edit an existing mathematical formu la Fomula x x lx I x x m Edit Formula Selected Formula 000 0000000 000001 000002 000003 000004 Word Size E Resu
630. tton of the mark editor If you click on Cancel the created mark data is discarded before you quit the mark editor Mark zu a OF N a o m e OK button Cancel Help IE 347 Mark Editor Section 8 3 Deleting mark data To delete the mark data specify the mark data to be deleted in the mark data list dialog box and click on Best S how 1 Code FF20 S how Code FF20 LI 4 4 YAYtic 2 Cancel LET P 4 2 XAYVYttiec 4 Cancel Reset Help Reset Reset button 348 This section is intended to familiarize you with the operation of the Support Tool through actual operation SECTION 9 Example Screens The operational procedures for creating example screens are explained step by step Please follow the steps shown in this section and create example screens in order to understand the functions and the features of the Support Tool Please do not forget to save the screen data frequently Refer to 3 3 3 Saving the Screen Data Application File The sample screen data to be created in this section is supplied by the CD ROM version Support Tool Use this data to check the setting status etc This data is provided just as a sample screen data It is not created for the purpose of actual operation on PT after downloading it to PT 9 Example Screen Configuration 9 1 1 9
631. ue and the contents of the referenced memory table are displayed Indirect designation is possible only in the following cases Do not apply for other cases e When C200H I F unit is used When the NT21 NT30 NT30C NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 or NT631C is used When an NT20S or NT600S that uses direct connection ver 5 is used With conventional models up to 50 indirect designation settings can be made per screen including both numeral display and character string display f the value set for Length the number of digits to be displayed is smaller than the number of characters in the specified character string memory table entry string table the specified number of characters is displayed from the first character of the character string The remaining characters are not dis played To display mark data or image data specify the address of the mark data or image data as shown below Note that image data cannot be inserted into a character string when using the NT11S NT11 NT20S NT21 20 30 620 mode off NT31 NT31C NT600S NT631 NT631C NT31 C V2 20 30 620 mode off and NT631 C V2 20 30 620 mode off Setting Display ABC IFFFE ABC of Mark data at code FFFE When there are no string to show string input will be invisible Therefore with Support Tool dotted line frame is displayed in character fore ground color enclosing st
632. ue to differences in the library codes between them Difference New models 1000 to 3FFF hexadecimal FA20 to FAFF FB20 to FBFF FC20 to FCFF FD20 to FDFF hexadecimal Conversion result error message and corrective action Conventional models Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action Conventional model Assume the code is X New model The code is X EA20 E Library Table Entry has been con verted IW The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY New model Assume the code is Y Conventional model The code is Y EA20 if the con verted code is out side the usable range the code is fixed as FA20 Correction related to image library in character strings 472 IW The code for screen element Object Name has been converted from XXXX to YYYY If the code after conver sion differs from the li brary code to be used change the code to the correct one Refer to 8 2 Library Editor When an image library in a character string is converted between a conventional and a new model conversion is executed in the manner shown below due to dif ferences in handling of the image library between them Difference New models Insertion of an image library into a character string is impossible except for NT21 NT31 631 V2 and later models in NT20 30 620 compatible mode Insertio
633. ue when Display Sign is deselected 2147483648 is displayed as 2147483648 even though the maximum value that can be stored in the numeral memory table is 2147483647 203 Character String Display Section 6 7 6 7 Character String Display The contents of a character string memory table entry are displayed Character string displays can be used with all models PT 1 The character string stored in the specified character string Character string memory memory table entry string table is displayed Screen table String table Display field No 1 TOOL No 2 No 3 TOOL No 4 Read No 5 Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects the String Display Selection using the drawing toolbar E Terminology Background ABCD Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the character string display field The reference point is at the upper left corner of the display field Font Type Specify the font of characters to be displayed Standard Half Height Only Standard can be set for NT11S NT11 Scale Specify the scale of characters to be displayed 1x1 Equal 1x2 High 2x1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Not possible for NT20S Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for char acters to be displayed Setting is not possible for NT11S NT11 NT20S an
634. unction refer to Appendix E Sys tem Setting PT Configuration History Setting This item specifies the method for processing when the Log memory of the alarm history function and History screen function becomes full Alarm Use Ring Buffer Same meaning with FIFO First In First Out Alarm FIFO system is applied for this function if the log memory area is full When new alarm occurs the oldest record data will be deleted so that the new data can be stored there Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 If the Alarm function is not chosen newly coming data is not acceptable to re cord when the memory space is full Screen Use Ring Buffer Same meaning with FIFO First In First Out When the new screen history occurred the oldest record data will be deleted so that new data can be stored there This is so called FIFO If this check box is not ON newly coming data is not acceptable to record when the memory space is full Either the Alarm and the Screen data is available for the following PT models NT30 NT30C NT21 NT31 NT31C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT631 NT631C For NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C both Alarm and Screen set tings are available Number of Table Entries Specify the number of numeral memory table entries character string memory table entries String Table and bit memory table entries Setting of the Number of Table Entries is valid for the following PT models
635. unction dialog box History Screen No Switch Screen Screen No String Table Entry Image Library Code Use of image library data Image library code Color Property settings for alarm list element Start Bit Table Entry No of Bits Referenced The setting for the Switch Screen bit memory table setting differs between the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C and the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C as shown below NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Specifies whether or not the screen is switched at the same time the PC PLC bit allocated to bit memory table entry goes ON 163 Alarm Section 6 3 164 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Specifies whether or not the screen is switched when the message dis played at the alarm list is pressed The following table shows the appropriate setting of the bit memory table for the required alarm processing for your reference NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C Usage of Alarm Setting for Bit Memory Table Function Setting Switch Screen Screen No To display alarm only Alarm Switch Screen OFF 0 To display alarm and switch to a specified screen in response to the pressing of alarm message Alarm Switch Screen As desired To switch to a speci fied screen at the same time the bit goes ON Alarm Switch Screen As desired To switch to the pre vious screen at the same time the bit goes ON
636. ure 432 Data Type Description System Memory The setting contents of System of PT Config uration are sent and set at the PT Table NT20S and NT600S The following data is sent in a batch Numeral memory table data Character string memory table String table data Mark data NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C The following data can be sent individually Numeral memory table Character string memory table String table Bit memory table Mark data Image data Library data Recipe table 1 With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C individual transmission of system memory is restricted as follows The following data stored in a PT cannot be overwritten Number of numeral table entries Number of string table entries e Number of bit memory table entries Screen history setting Alarm history setting Numeral storage type The following data can be overwritten nitial screen number Screen data comment 2 You cannot transmit the mathematical table separately The mathematical table will be transmitted only when application transmission is performed When data is sent from the Support Tool to a PT the existing data in the PT is lost Therefore make sure that the existing data in the PT is backed up by the Support Tool before executing data transmission from the Support Tool to the PT With the Support Tool on CD ROM NT Transfer Utility that
637. ut read ing writing of character string data is executed by specifying the character string memory table entry string table number PT Character string pa memory table aracter string String table OMRON display element Read Initial value Character string PT Initialization input element Write No of words s Shared PC PLC gt 0 address Shared PC PL comment c c Pes Reference 7 3 1 Operation Procedure Setting A character string memory table entry string table is displayed by the operation described below At the property settings for individual elements click on in the table entry number field e Select Tools menu bar Table then click String tab For character string memory table entries string table the objective of opera tion is specified by clicking on a line The necessary setting can be made by input using a keyboard or by selection using a drop down list 281 Character String Memory Table String Table Section 7 3 Insert Mark Inserts mark data Insert Image Inserts image data Insert Library R Inserts library data For the operation procedure for Reference Search Address Edit gt Gopy Settings ee refer to 7 1 Common Operation Note that _ Referense cannot be used if it is displayed by the op
638. valid when the resume function is not selected and the Initial item is selected for the numeral memory table entry and in this case the content of the numeral memory table entry is returned to the initial value If the PT has the memory table initialization function this function can also be used to re turn the content of a numeral memory table entry to the initial value Initial Specify whether or not the content of the numeral memory table entry is written to the allocated word in the host when the PT is switched on or reset or the mode is changed from the System Menu to RUN The term initialize means the processing to initialize the content of a word in the host with the content in a numeral memory table entry The setting for Initial is not valid if the numeral memory table entry is not allocated to a word in the host To make the Initial item valid click on the check box to display a cross mark x in the box If the box is clicked on while it is in the valid state the Initial item is made invalid The content of numeral memory table entries at the start of PT operation is as shown below according to whether or not a numeral memory table entry is allo cated to the host the Initial setting for the numeral memory table entry and whether or not the resume function is used Resume Function Allocation to Initial Host setting Used Not Used Allocated Initialized Existing numeral memory Initial value of the num
639. ve action Status before Conversion Extended screens are not supported Status after Conversion Error Message Extended screens can be used as standard screens Corrective Action With a conventional model the screen number of an ex tended screen is used for a standard screen With a new model the screen is treated as a stan dard screen The screen no XXX was an Extended Screen that is not supported by this model so it is con verted to a standard Screen Correction related to history screens When a history screen is converted an error message may be displayed due to differences in the handling of the screen numbers of the frequency history screen and the occurrence history screen between conventional and new models Difference Screen No 9001 and No 9002 History screens occurrence order frequency order cannot be edited Screen No 1997 and No 1998 New models Conventional models Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion History screens occurrence order frequency order can be edited Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action With a conventional model a history Screen occurrence order frequency or der is edited With a new model the history screen is deleted displaying the edited history Screen is possible by specifying it from a PT Correction related to the number
640. ve associated alarm object Select the alarm touch switch on the screen choose Draw Associate then specify the element with which the se lected touch switch is to be associated You have already started NT series Sup port Tool To import screen data by starting up two Support Tools select Import Component from the File menu 547 Appendix K Shortcut Keys The following shortcut keys can be used with the Support Tool Pressing these shortcut keys can perform the functions easily without selecting the items from the menu Function Shortcut key New Ctrl N Ctrl O Save Ctrl S Print Ctrl P Undo Ctrl Z Redo Ctrl Y Cut Ctrl X Copy Ctrl C Paste Ctrl V Align Top Ctrl Up Arrow Align Bottom Ctrl Down Arrow Align Left Ctrl Left Arrow Align Right Ctrl Right Arrow Center in a Column Ctrl F9 Center in a Row Ctrl Shift F9 Delete Del Select All Ctrl A Refresh F9 Group Ctrl G Ungroup Ctrl U Bring to Front Ctrl F Send to Back Ctrl B Centralize Label Ctrl L New Ctrl W Delete Ctrl E Table Ctrl T Validate F12 Download Application Ctrl Shift D Upload Application Ctrl Shift U Properties Alt Enter Objects Selection Higher Display Order Tab Lower Display Order Shift Tab Edit Object Mode ON OFF Insert Edit Object Mode ON Object Selec
641. w Reference The operations shown below can be performed between different screen data files of the same PT model by starting up two Support Tools For details refer to 3 3 6 Importing Components from Different Screen Data File Starting Up the Second Support Tool Operation using the mouse 1 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key 2 Click right button of the mouse on the selected screen icon then select Copy 3 Click right button of the mouse on one of the screen icon then select Paste 4 Input a screen number then click the Button The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated number and in the new screen number field the smallest number of the available screen numbers is displayed If you input an existing screen number a confirmation message is displayed to overwrite it Operation using the mouse 2 1 Specify the screen icon Multiple screen icons can be selected by dragging the mouse cursor while pressing the Shift key or Ctrl key T Drag the selected screen icon in the screen icon display area Input a screen number then click the Button The screen number of the copy source screen is displayed as a duplicated number and in the new screen number field the smallest number of the available screen numbers is displayed If you input an existing screen number a confi
642. w Control Area to a host 2 Screen New Create a window keyboard screen 3 Write window screen No to be displayed and X Y co ordinate in a word to which window control area is allo cated Window Screen Screen PC PLC Bit Status Display To turn a lamp ON OFF according to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit Objects Lamp Standard Set the PC PLC Bit address PT Screen 411 Quick Reference PC PLC Bit Status Display 412 To turn a lamp ON OFF according to the ON OFF status of a PC PLC bit that is controlled by the operation of touch switches Operation 1 Objects Touch Switch Function Notify Bit Reflect the touch switch status in the PC PLC bit sta tus Objects Lamp Standard Reflect the PC PLC bit status at the lamp Section 10 1 Refer to To switch the graphic to be displayed according to the PC PLO bit status Tools Image Editor Tools Library Editor Create the image data or the library data Objects Lamp Image Create an image library lamp Set the light function PC PLC address PT Screen If ON xe If OFF i ij Graphic image data To switch the text to be displayed according to the PC PLC b
643. ween the Support Tool and PT for the following cases ON color when lamps touch switches are overlapped ON color of lamp touch switch label when using NT30C NT620C NT625C ON status of lamp touch switch when overlapping with other object other than fixed display To activate this setting follow the procedure below 1 Select Simulate ON OFF from View menu or click on the H button In the View menu the check mark is set to ON and OFF each time it is se lected When the check mark is displayed the lamps and touch switches show their ON statuses Each time the Simulate ON OFF button is clicked it changes as follows Lamp ON status being shown f Lamp ON status not shown Redrawing the editing Screen Refresh 84 In case the screen has disrupted during the edition of the screen Refresh func tion will help you redrawing the screen Redrawing can be performed as follows 1 Select Refresh from the View menu The screen will be updated Types of Screens Common Dialog Box Settings and Operations Section 5 1 Displaying Full Screen Full Screen This is available in case if you want to view the screen in wide range But is im possible to edit while displaying in full screen Full Screen can be performed as follows 1 Select Full Screen from View menu The current editing screen will be dis played in wide range To recover from this condition click at any place on the
644. when Direct is specified Displays the list for referencing the numeral table entry when Indirect is specified When the library data is specified the data of character code FA20H for the NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above with NT20 30 620 compatible mode or the data that corresponds to image library code 1000H for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with out NT20 30 620 compatible mode is arranged The mark shown below will be displayed if library data has not been created for the specified code E To change the library data to be displayed click on __ in the property and se lect the desired library data or numeral table entry from the list If you are using the NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C V1 and above and its system program version is 2 1 and above Indirect reference can be set The procedure for specifying the desired library data is shown below Direct Specify the code of the library data to be displayed directly Fixed Display Section 6 2 1 Click on at __ the right side of the code after checking the Direct button in the property setting dialog box to display the library data selection dialog Comments LAMP4 S OFF 61 X B1 LAMP1 L OFF 1 X B1 LAMP2 L OFF LAMP3 L OFF ing the scroll bar at the right side of the screen or click c on open the code input dialog box omoi Input the code of the desired library data and click on Sal
645. window by touch switch operation To create input key window keyboard touch switch on a screen or a window en ables to open close specified window By this method window is displayed at the position set for touch switch property This type of window will be local window Screen Screen Local Window Also by creating window move touch switch on window it is possible to move window by touch panel operation at PT Window Window in a moving status Screen Sereen Screen P LM Em For details of touch switch settings refer to 6 8 Touch Switches It is not possible to control global window by touch panel operation Opening Closing and moving a window by the operation of Window Control Area Window Control Area is added for the NT21 and the NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C V1 and above as a direct access area 96 Extended Screen Section 5 5 While running PT by writing window screen number or x y co ordinate of window position bottom left at Window Control Area from the host opening closing moving a window are possible Window Control Area can control global window and local window For details refer to the operation manual of PT Window Sereen The selected PLC L window
646. witches Section 6 8 Print screen function touch switch 1 When a touch switch is pressed a hard copy of the screen is output to a printer Printing screen hard copy Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Touch Switch Selection using the drawing toolbar 89 Terminology Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of a touch switch frame the area that senses pressing of the switch The reference point is at the upper left corner of the touch switch frame Size Indicates the size of a touch switch frame Frame Specify whether or not a frame is displayed for a touch switch Shape Specify the shape of a touch switch Standard Shadow 3 Dimension Rectangle Circle Polygon Sec tor Show ON State Specify the status when touch switch is pressed When this check box is ticked touch switch will be lighten Not valid for 3 Dimension Color Frame Specify the color of a touch switch if Frame is selected Can only be set for PTs with color display White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow ON Specify the display color of a touch switch which is ON Can only be set for PTs with color display Setting is valid only when Show ON state is selected White black blue red magenta green cyan yellow OFF Specify the display color of a touch switch that is OFF Can only be set for PTs with color display Transpar
647. written to the specified character string memory table entry string table when the touch switch allocated the J key code is pressed For details of memory switch setting refer to the operation manual for PT Operation procedure Selection using the menu bar Objects Data Input String Selection using the drawing toolbar 8 Related elements and settings Touch switch character string input Objects Touch Switch gt character string input function Touch switch control code input Objects Touch Switch gt Control code input function Touch switch copy setting Objects Touch Switch gt Copy setting Terminology Background Cursor focus moving touch switch Suppor t man Focus cursor frame Property setting General Position Indicates the display position of the numeral setting input field The attribute point is at the upper left corner of the input field Font type Specify the font of the character string to be input Standard Half Height 181 Data Input Section 6 4 Size Specify the size of character string to be displayed 1 1 Equal 1 x2 High 2x 1 Wide 2x2 3x3 4x4 8x8 Smoothing Specify whether or not smoothing processing is executed for char acter strings Attribute Specify the display attribute attributes displayed depend on the PT model Standard Inverse Flash Inverse Flash Color Foreground Specify the character string color
648. ws according to the width rate Width Rate 1096 Width Rate 5096 Width Rate 100 Scale position and its shape are displayed as follows depending on the set tings of Distance Scale Length Distance 0 Distance 100 Distance 150 ength Scale is always displayed at the front of meter Therefore when type is set to a Needle the needle may be invisible if meter and scale are overlapped When the Display Sign is set to ON specified No of division is applied also for a negative range Therefore actual numbers of division differs as follows de pending on the presence absence of display sign even if the specified number of divisions is same Example n case No of division is 5 Display Sign ON Display Sign OFF n the default setting a percentage value is displayed Whether or not a percentage value is displayed can be set in the Display La bel property Check mark set A percentage value is displayed Check mark not set A percentage value is not displayed f the setting for a percentage value is displayed the size and display position of the value can be modified using the element edit function in the manner shown below For detail of the element edit function refer to page 110 1 Click on a percentage value while pressing the Shift key and Ctrl key 2 Drag a percentage value to change the display position 232 Graphs E g if ue M oci pa an Y Section 6 9
649. x of Standard Lamp Label dialog box On Label group box will be disabled For On Off Static the Off Label and the On Label can be set by changing descrip tion of corresponding text boxes Touch Switch Label F General m Off Label A Description E Insert Mark m On Label Description isl Insert New Line E Set Lines Line Spacing 2 E Font Type Standard Smoothing Scale 1x1 Equal M Attribute Standard m Colour OFF 7 Background Transparent Cancel Enpi Help Off Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is OFF 211 Touch Switches Section 6 8 On Description Specify the text of the label that will be displayed when lamp bit is ON Line Spacing Determines the space between two lines in both the Off De scription and the On Description Insert New Line Inserts a new line character in the description to bring the fol lowing characters to the next line On the Label Description edit box the new line character will be shown as lt h gt SetLines Displays the On Off Description Settings dialog box This dialog is for entering Off Description and On Description with multiple lines In all NT31 631 V2 models Labels can be entered in multiple lines The following table shows the specification for each PT model Maximum Maximum Number Remarks number of number of of
650. xample For NT30 NT30C No Date Time Cnt Message No NT30 NT30C Screen No NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates a screen number Date NT30 NT30C Time NT30 NT30C YY MM DD HH MM NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the date and time the screen was displayed Cnt NT30 NT30C Frequency NT620S NT620C NT625C Indicates the number of times the screen has been displayed Message Indicates the Title of the screen attribute 98 Host Connect Screen System Initializing Screen Section 5 8 5 7 Frequency History Screen A frequency history screen displays the screen numbers recorded by the display history Screen History function in the order of frequency of screen display This function records the date time of display and the number of times the screen has been displayed for screens for which the History attribute is ticked in the screen property The frequency history screen provided with NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C has a blank area at the right side in the screen so that scroll and screen switching touch switches can be created Other area of the screen must not be changed The screen number of the frequency history screen is shown below PT Model Screen No NT11S NT11 NT20S NT600S None NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C NT625C 1998 NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C 9002 Cannot edit Only display is possible The screen to be displayed differs according to the
651. y 100 Table Entry Display Creating the Menu button Set button and Alarm button Swi te e Creating the Menu button frame 1 Select Objects menu bar Touch Switch 2 Create the Menu button frame by dragging the mouse at the button dis play position 3 Set the properties as shown below 377 Creating the Sample Data Section 9 3 Position Size Frame Shape 3 Dimension Show ON State _ Color White White Transparent Settings Function Switch Screen Screen No 1 Light Address PC PLC Address Function Comments Lamp Attribute Attribute Light Label Menu refer the following 1 Press Edit to set the label After completing the setting go to the next step without clicking on button Setting the label of Menu button 4 Press edit in the general property of a touch switch and set the la bel properties as shown below Description Menu Position ur Font Type Standard Scale 1x1 Equal Smoothing Attribute Standard Color Foreground White Background Transparent Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C Color ON and Color OFF can be set independently for a label so that the lamp can be displayed in different colors in the ON and OFF states Click on 50 returns to touch switch property then click on
652. y property goes ON the date time and the number of going ON events are re corded and displayed by the alarm history All bit memory table entries for which a check mark is set for the history property are objects of alarm history recording Therefore it is not possible to check different bit memory table entries with different alarm histories The status of the bit memory table entries for which a check mark is set is always checked while a PT is running regardless of whether or not an alarm history element is displayed Note that an alarm history element displays only the record of past events It displays only the contents of the record at the point when it was displayed and the displayed record remains the same even if the status of the bit memory table entry changes after that Alarm list and alarm history elements cannot be used with NT11S NT11 NT20S and NT600S If a bit memory table entry in the check objective range goes ON the alarm list element displays the contents alarm message of the character string memory table entry string table that is allocated to the bit memory table entry It is also possible to display the corresponding image library data It is possible to switch the screen by operating the alarm list element by setting the screen number to which the screen should be switched for the bit memory table entry Screen gg Bit memory table Character string memory able St
653. y 11 characters are allowed then the grid cell will show this is only in red for testing will be truncated 12 is not valid for the Lock field and is thus highlighted in red So are and 62 78 for parameter values which are both reset to 0 Description of Improper Line Dialog Controls 318 Improper Line You cannot edit this Improper Line edit box Displays the improper line in the CSV file Detail Original Shows the original CSV line It cannot be edited and these invalid val ues will be displayed in red Import Shows the default values and you can modify the default values Name Shows the first value in the CSV file This is the record name If the value has more than 12 characters only the first 12 characters from the left will be shown Recipe Table Section 7 10 Accepts a character string of up to 8 characters Lock Shows the second value in the CSV file This is the master record flag Only the first character from the right of the value is shown Can only accept 0 or 1 0 unchecked 1 checked Parameter data Show the other values in the CSV file These are the parameter data values If the imported value has more than the number of characters allowed the value will be set to 0 Ignore Ignore this improper line and proceed to import the rest of the lines in the file Ignore All Ignore all improper lines and proceed to import the rest of the lines in the fil
654. y ON in the de fault status If you do not want to use NT20 30 620 compatible mode disable the NT20 30 620 compatible mode PT Configuration PT Type NT20 30 620 compatible mode can be set only when NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 or NT631C V2 is selected as a PT Model In NT20 30 620 compatible mode the following points will be the same as for the NT30 620 series Image library can be inserted into a lamp touch switch label or a character string e Image library code Word configuration of PT control notify area 483 Reference Appendix B System Installer Operation The Support Tool is provided with a system installer which installs the system program at a PT Version up of the PT system program or installation of new communication pro grams in a PT are possible by installing the system program Version up of NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V1 system program Ver 2 1 or below is possible by installing the system program that is supplied with the Support Tool Ver 4 1 For details of the conversion method refer to Appendix A Data Conversion In this case however the following function can not be used 32 dot high definition font Refer to Settings for text display in 6 1 10 Setting Properties e Font type ISO8859 1 Refer to Font Type in 3 3 and Appendix Memory unit system transmission Refer to operation manual of NT31 NT31C NT631 NT631C with V2 To reuse the existing NT31 NT31
655. y Table String Table Numeral Memory Table Numeral display Bar graph Analogue Meter Broken line graph Trend graph Numeral setting Touch switch for inputting control code Numeral setting Touch switch for copy setting Numeral setting i Touch switch for numeral input e e Thumbwheel switch Alarm list Alarm history Character string display Character string setting Touch switch for character string input Character string setting Touch switch for inputting control code Character string setting Touch switch for copy setting Standard lamp 4 Image lamp Touch switch for notifying input 4 1 Numeral setting and character string setting are used in combination with a touch switch 2 A standard lamp and an image lamp reads the specified PC PLC bit direct ly without using a memory table 3 A touch switch for notifying input directly drives the specified PC PLC bit ON OFF without using a memory table 4 When a Numeral Display or a String Display is specified as the label type the specified memory table will be read Only for NT21 and NT31 631 V2 and above 6 1 12 Interlock By setting the Interlock flag the interlock facility will be activated for touch switch thumbwheel numeral input string input and recipe When interlock is set the cor
656. y table When the data of a conventional model is converted to the data for a new model the converted data requires your attention to the fact that the processing that oc curs if incorrect data existence of A to F other than F at the most significant bit position is written to an allocated word in the host differs between a conventional and a new model Difference New models The written data is invalid and the existing content is retained Conventional models The incorrect data is stored Conversion result error message and corrective action Status after Conversion Status before Conversion Corrective Action Error Message Note that the display dif fers between a conven tional and a new model if incorrect data is writ ten Refer to 7 2 Nu meral Memory Table Correction related to bit memory table If a bit memory table is converted from the conventional model to the new model conversion will be executed in the manner shown below due to the difference of the bit memory table function 470 Data Conversion Appendix A Difference New models Conventional models Alarm function and switch screen function cannot be set simultaneously Alarm function and switch screen function can be set simultaneously Conversion result error message and corrective action Status before Conversion Status after Conversion Error Message Corrective Action Switch scre
657. y table at the same time When a temporary input field is not used oring by pressing Numeral memory table 1 The data input using numeric keys is directly set in the numeral setting input field 2 Press the J key and the set data is stored in the numeral memory table Reference With the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C the settings such as the Display Sign cannot be set at setting property of temporary input field These set tings are determined by the numeral input field on a base screen When a nu meral input field is used as a temporary input field for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C specify the required No of digits sign digit integer digit decimal point decimal digit N CAUTION When the numeral values entered are confirmed upper lower limits are checked Otherwise the system may operate unpredictably 178 Data Input Section 6 4 Note 1 The data set in the input field is not stored in the numeral memory table until the J key button where the Return key code is set or the ENT key is pressed At the end of data input always press the key or the ENT key 2 To correct the data set in the input field use the CLR key the BS key and the DEL key 3 When a numeral setting input field is moved the touch switch is also moved automatically To modify or move a numeral setting input fi
658. yed to display function dialog 4 Set screen number to be switched for Screen No Settings to make at the Set dialog PLC Address Specify the bit in a PC PLC whose status is reflected by the bit memory table entry Comment Specify a comment for a PC PLC bit A comment can comprise up to 16 characters Settings to make at the Function dialog Function Select Alarm Switch Screen for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C and select Switch Screen for the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C 288 Bit Memory Table Section 7 4 Switch Screen only for NT30 NT30C NT620S NT620C and NT625C To make the screen switching function valid click on the check box to display a check mark in it If you click on the check box when it already has a check mark in it the check mark is cleared and the screen switching function is made invalid For the NT21 NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C whether or not the screen switching function is used is determined by the setting for Function Screen No Specify the screen No of the screen to which the screen switches when the bit memory table entry goes ON Items set to use the alarm function To use the alarm function follow the procedure below 1 Input PLC address directly on a PLC address field on a bit memory table entry or click on Sac and input PLC address on a PLC address dia log Refer to Word setting for an element on page 127 Input comment
659. ype from either of the following MEMLINK Mitsubishi A and Mitsubishi Fx can be set only with NT31 NT31C NT631and NT631C with V1 and above AB and GE can be set only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C below V1 Siemens can be set only with NT31 NT31C NT631 and NT631C with V1 Re fer to page 26 OMRON Mitsubishi A Mitsubishi Fx e MEMLINK AB GE e Siemens Font Type If you are using NT31 V1 NT31C V1 NT631 V1 NT631C V1 and above hard ware or had NT31 NT31C NT631and NT631C and been updated the system program to the V2 System Ver 3 1 system program which is attached to this Support Tool it is possible to select the Font Type ISO8859 1 or CP437 If you are using the European Keyboards please refer to Appendix K for more details Comment Set the comment that is appended to the screen data file An arbitrary character of up to 28 characters can be set Reference The PT model of the screen data that is opened can be changed If it is changed the data is converted automatically Note that changing of PT models is allowed only for the restricted combinations shown in Appendix A Data Con version 47 Operation of Screen Data Application File Section 3 3 48 System page The System page is displayed when users click on the System tab Fundamental operating functions can be set in this System page PT Configuration PT Type System Control Notify Area Ini

NT-series Support Tool for Windows Ver.4.7 OPERATION MANUAL

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents